JP2022035580A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine configured to assign novel game properties and appropriately mount rails according to game specifications.SOLUTION: A game machine includes determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game, pattern display means capable of executing a pattern variable display, and setup means capable of setting up any of a plurality of game states including a non-time-shortening game state and a time-shortening game state. The setup means can set up the time-shortening game state based on establishment of a first condition of executing a variable display a prescribed number of times or a second condition different from the first condition, defines the number of guide parts capable of guiding mounting positions of rails in a first range from a rail start end to a left end on a game board, more than that in a second range from the left end to an upper end, and defines the number thereof in the second range more than that in a third range from the upper end to the terminal end.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 109

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, a winning / failing lottery for determining whether or not a special game can be executed and a special symbol showing the result of the winning / failing lottery are used as a trigger for the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning opening provided in the gaming area. Along with the decision, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and the stop display of the jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery is to execute the special game (winning of the jackpot) is performed. It is known that a special game in which a prize ball can be obtained is executed. In such a gaming machine, it is generally set so that the advantage of the gaming profit given to the player differs depending on the type of the determined jackpot symbol. For example, as a gaming state, a non-time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively difficult for a gaming ball to enter a predetermined starting winning opening and a time-saving gaming state in which a gaming ball is relatively easy to enter a predetermined starting winning opening are provided. There is known a gaming machine in which a gaming state after the end of a special game is set to a time-saving gaming state when a specific jackpot symbol is determined (see Patent Documents 1 and 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-107139 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-25354

However, in a gaming machine as described above, the gaming state set after the execution of the special game is associated with the type of the jackpot symbol, and the decision to execute the special game (winning of the jackpot) and the special game The non-time-saving gaming state cannot be changed to the time-saving gaming state without the intervention of execution. Therefore, since there are many restrictions on changing to different game states, it is difficult to design game specifications with a high degree of freedom, and there arises a problem that it is not possible to provide a novel game property that can enhance the interest of the player. Was there.
Further, the above-mentioned gaming machine is equipped with a rail capable of guiding the gaming ball to the gaming area where the gaming ball flows down to the gaming board. Here, for example, when there are many opportunities to shift to the time-saving gaming state, the gaming machine inevitably operates for a long time, and the rail is liable to malfunction or deteriorate. , The opportunity to repair or replace the rail will increase. Then, during these operations, for example, for positioning when the rail is attached to the game board, in order to enable the attachment of an appropriate rail that does not affect the guidance of the game ball without depending on the proficiency of the operator. It is conceivable to provide the guide portion (insertion pin, insertion hole, etc.) of the above over the range of the mounting position of the rail and the game board.
However, since the range in which the rail is susceptible to the impact from the launched game ball and the load is likely to be applied differs depending on the game specifications, the above-mentioned guide portion is evenly distributed over the mounting positions of the rail and the game board. It is not desirable to arrange it in, but it is desirable to arrange it for each game specification.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in accordance with the above-mentioned circumstances, and it is possible to impart a novel game property that can enhance the interest of the player, and a game in which a rail can be appropriately attached according to the game specifications. The purpose is to provide a machine.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is configured as follows.
(1) The present invention has a game board having a game area on which the game ball flows down, a rail attached to the game board and capable of guiding the game ball to the game area, and a rail provided on the rail and said to be the rail. A guide unit that can guide the mounting position to the game board, a determination means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the symbol associated with the result of the determination are executed. Possible symbol display means, a non-time-saving gaming state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter the approach area provided in the game area, and a time-saving game state in which the game ball is relatively easy to enter the approach area. A setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of gaming states including the game state is provided, and the setting means has a first condition that the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times, or a second condition different from the first condition. Based on the establishment, the gaming machine is capable of setting the time-saving gaming state, and the number of the guide portions is from the start end of the rail to the left end portion located at the leftmost end of the rail from the start end to the end. In the first range, it is larger than the second range from the left end portion to the upper end portion located at the uppermost end of the rail from the start end to the end, and in the second range, it is larger than the second range. It is characterized in that it is larger than the third range from the upper end portion to the end portion.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the time-saving gaming state is set when the first condition that the variation display of the symbol is executed a predetermined number of times is satisfied. Therefore, unlike a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to set a time-saving gaming state without having to decide to execute a special game (winning a big hit) or execute a special game, so that the game specifications have a high degree of freedom. It becomes possible to design the game, and it is possible to give a novel playability that can enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the number of guide portions provided on the rail capable of guiding the game ball to the game area and capable of guiding the mounting position of the rail to the game board is the number of guide portions in the first range from the start end to the left end portion of the rail. It is larger than the second range to the upper end of the left end, and is larger than the third range from the upper end to the end in the second range. That is, the number of guide portions in the first range from the start end to the left end portion of the rail is larger than the number of guide portions in the second range from the left end portion to the upper end portion of the rail, and is in the second range. The number of guides is larger than the number of guides in the third range from the upper end to the end of the rail. As a result, the rail can be reliably attached to the game board on the starting end side of the rail where the impact received from the launched game ball is large, and the game ball is launched by the rail being displaced from the mounting position, vibrating, or the like. It is possible to prevent the situation where the ball cannot be guided to the position according to the strength and the ball cannot be generated according to the design value, and at the end side of the rail where the impact received from the launched game ball is small. Since the number of guides is relatively small, it can be easily attached to the game board.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of imparting a novel playability that can enhance the interest of a player and to appropriately attach a rail according to a game specification.

It is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is an external perspective view with the front door of a pachinko machine opened. It is a front schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of the inside of the attacker device of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit / miss random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit / miss random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit / miss random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit / miss random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit / miss random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit / miss random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the special symbol random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the special electric accessory operation table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the game state setting table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd start winning opening opening control table of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the main processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the timer interrupt processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the sensor detection processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the processing at the time of gate detection in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process at the time of detection of the 1st start winning opening in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process at the time of the 2nd start winning opening detection in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the pre-determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the processing at the time of a specific area detection in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special figure-related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special symbol change start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the hit / fail determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the fluctuation pattern determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the post-stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the small hit game control process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special game end processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the control process related to a general drawing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the normal symbol change start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the processing after the normal symbol stop in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the movable piece control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the variation production decision table of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution ratio of the advance notice effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the progress of the fluctuation effect and the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the progress of the fluctuation effect and the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the main processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the timer interrupt processing in the auxiliary control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the fluctuation pattern command reception processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the hit / fail random number determination table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification (2). It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification (36). It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern table of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification (36). It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each gaming state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 3. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each gaming state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 3. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 4. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each gaming state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 4. It is a front schematic diagram of the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 5. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 5. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each gaming state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 5. It is a front schematic diagram of the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is an enlarged view of the 2nd start winning opening and the movable piece of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the post-stop processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the time saving activation number count execution process of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special game end processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the RAM clearing processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the spec specification command transmission time point processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the display of the time reduction number and the time reduction activation number in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the display of the time reduction number and the time reduction activation number in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the display of the time reduction number and the time reduction activation number in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the display of the time reduction number and the time reduction activation number in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is explanatory drawing of the hit / fail random number determination table of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 7. It is a schematic diagram of the hit / miss random number determination table of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 7. It is a front schematic diagram of the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is an enlarged view of the specific 2nd start winning opening and the movable piece of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 6. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 8. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 8. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each gaming state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect which is executed when the big hit is won in the normal gaming state in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the variation effect which is executed when the big hit is won in the normal gaming state in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special symbol change start processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the post-stop processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the time saving activation number count execution process of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the time saving activation number count start processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special game end processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the RAM clearing processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 8. It is a front schematic diagram of the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 9. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 9. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on other application example 9. It is a state transition diagram which showed the transition to each gaming state of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 9. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is explanatory drawing of various setting contents of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special symbol change start processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the post-stop processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the time saving activation number count execution process of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the small hit game control processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special game end processing of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of switching of the background image in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10, and display of the remaining time reduction number of times. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of switching of the background image in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10, and display of the remaining time reduction number of times. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the look-ahead effect in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of the look-ahead effect in the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the pre-determination command reception process in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the state change designation command reception process in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the command reception process after the stop display time has elapsed in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the remaining time shortening activation number command reception processing in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the remaining time reduction number of times command reception processing in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the symbol confirmation command reception process in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the look-ahead effect control process in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on another application example 10. It is a perspective view of the operation handle of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame cover of the operation handle of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10 is removed. It is explanatory drawing of the result of the sensory test about the operation handle of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10. It is an enlarged schematic view which shows the operation handle in the initial position in the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10. It is an enlarged schematic diagram which shows the operation handle in the maximum rotation position in the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10. It is an enlarged right side sectional view of the decoration part of the pachinko machine and the vicinity of the upper guide passage which concerns on the modification of another application example 10. It is a perspective view of the rail base, the outer rail and the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10. It is a schematic diagram of the outer rail of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10. It is an enlarged sectional view of the rail base and the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine which concerns on the modification of another application example 10.

(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The gaming machine according to this embodiment is a pachinko machine P that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium. Although not particularly shown, in a game field where a pachinko machine P is installed, a plurality of pachinko machines P are arranged side by side in an installation area of the game machine called an island, and a game for renting a game ball. A ball lending device is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. Further, each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding game ball lending device R.
The game ball lending device R can insert a storage medium (card) for storing value information necessary for inserting bills and lending game balls. Then, by inserting a bill (or inserting a card) into the game ball lending device R and then performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P, the game ball can be rented from the game ball lending device R. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 1 or 2, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is a rectangular frame body fixed to an island and has a hollow portion (not particularly shown) and a machine frame 1. A main body frame 2 having a hollow portion (not particularly shown), which is a quadrangular frame body that can be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and this main body frame. The front door 3 is provided with a front door 3 which is openably and closably attached to 2 by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown) and has an opening (not particularly shown) formed on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 1, a speaker as an audio output device 10 is provided in the lower left portion of the machine frame 1. Further, a game board 11 for forming the game area 12 is housed in the hollow portion of the main body frame 2. Further, the front door 3 has a transparent plate 4 that covers the opening, an upper plate 6 and a saucer 7 that are located below the transparent plate 4 and can receive the game ball, and a game ball that is attached to the right side of the saucer 7. An operation handle 5 for performing a firing operation and a speaker as an audio output device 10 attached to each of the left and right upper sides of the transparent plate 4 are provided.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the machine frame 1 and the front door 3 is further closed, the transparent plate 4 is positioned in front of the game board 11 with a gap in between. As a result, the game board 11 located at the rear can be visually recognized via the transparent plate 4.

Further, a game ball rented by the game ball lending device R and a prize ball paid out from the pachinko machine P are guided to the upper plate 6. The upper plate 6 is capable of receiving a predetermined amount of game balls, but when the upper plate 6 is filled with the game balls, the game balls that are subsequently rented or paid out are guided to the saucer 7. It has become like. Further, although not particularly shown, the bottom surface of the saucer 7 is provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game ball and an opening / closing plate capable of opening and closing the discharge hole. In the normal state, the discharge hole is closed by the opening / closing plate, but by moving the opening / closing lever 8 (see FIG. 1) integrally attached to the opening / closing plate in the lateral direction, the opening / closing plate also moves in the same direction and discharges. The hole is opened. As a result, the game ball can be dropped from the discharge hole and discharged to the outside of the saucer 7.

Further, the operation handle 5 is formed so that the player can rotate the operation in a predetermined direction. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle 5, the game ball received by the upper plate 6 is sent to the launching device (not shown in particular), and the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 5 is increased. The launching device launches the game ball toward the game area 12. The game ball launched in this way is guided by the pair of rails 13a and 13b fixed to the game board 11 and ascends to reach the game area 12.

Here, the game area 12 is fixed to the game board 11 in the space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent plate 4 with the main body frame 2 and the front door 3 closed with respect to the machine frame 1. It is a portion partitioned by a pair of rails 13a and 13b into a substantially circular shape, and is a region where a game ball can flow down.
As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming area 12 includes a first gaming area 12a, which is a region on the left side when viewed from a player facing the pachinko machine P, and a region on the right side when viewed from a player facing the pachinko machine P. It is composed of the second gaming area 12b. In these two game areas 12, the possibility of entering the game ball differs depending on the firing intensity of the launching device. Specifically, when the firing intensity of the launching device is less than a predetermined strength (strength that the gaming ball launched by the launching device does not reach the highest point of the gaming area 12), the gaming ball is in the first gaming area. Enter 12a. On the other hand, when the firing intensity of the launching device is equal to or higher than a predetermined strength (the strength at which the gaming ball launched by the launching device can reach the highest point of the gaming area 12), the gaming ball is in the second gaming area 12b. Enter into.

Further, in the game area 12, as shown in FIG. 3, a windmill and a large number of nails for making the flow direction of the game ball irregular, a general winning opening 14 into which the game ball can enter, and a start The first start winning opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16 as areas, the gate 20 through which the game ball can pass, the attacker device 17 that operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game ball are guided to the outside of the game area 12. An out port 19 and an effect display device 21 as an effect device that produces an effect as the game progresses are provided. In FIG. 3, only some nails are shown, and other nails are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3, the general winning openings 14 are provided at positions slightly to the left of the lower center of the game area 12, and when the game balls enter the general winning openings 14, a predetermined number (5 in this embodiment). The prize balls will be paid out.
The number and positions of the general winning openings 14 are not particularly limited.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first start winning opening 15 is provided at a position slightly lower than the center of the game area 12, and the second starting winning opening 16 is provided in the game area 12 as shown in FIG. It is located slightly above the center of the right part of. Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, only the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning opening 15, and the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can be entered. You cannot enter the ball. Further, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second start winning opening 16, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second starting winning opening 16 is provided with a movable piece 16b (ordinary electric accessory) that can be opened and closed. When the movable piece 16b is closed, the second starting winning opening 16 is in the closed state, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is opened, the second starting winning opening 16 is opened, and the movable piece 16b functions as a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 16. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the second starting winning opening 16.
Further, the configuration of the movable piece 16b is not particularly limited, and for example, a pair of blade members that rotate in the left-right direction around an axis orthogonal to the game board 11 to open and close the second starting winning opening 16. , The second start winning opening 16 may be configured by a lid member that rotates in the front-rear direction about a horizontal axis with the game board 11 to open and close the second starting winning opening 16, or may be slid in the vertical direction to open and close the second starting winning opening 16. It may be composed of a shutter member that opens and closes 16.
The installation positions of the first starting winning opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16 are not particularly limited. For example, the first starting winning opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16 are in any of the game areas 12 ( A game ball flowing down the first game area 12a and the second game area 12b) may also be arranged at a position where it is easy to enter.

Then, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and whether or not a jackpot, which will be described later, is won (hereinafter, also referred to as a jackpot). , Whether or not a small hit, which will be described later, is won (hereinafter, also referred to as a small hit), and whether or not a time-saving gaming state, which will be described later, is granted (hereinafter, also referred to as a winning or not). It is performed, and one special symbol is determined from a plurality of predetermined special symbols according to the result of the winning / failing lottery. There are multiple types of special symbols that can be determined, and depending on the type of the determined special symbol, the execution of a special game that is advantageous to the player, the execution of a small hit game, and the granting of a time-saving game state (described later). The game profits such as the setting of the first time-saving game state) are given.
The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 is not particularly limited as long as it is one or more, and any number may be used. good. Further, the number of prize balls is the same between the starting winning opening (second starting winning opening 16) provided with the movable piece 16b and the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 15) not provided with the movable piece 16b. It may be different or different. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 is four, and the number of prize balls is based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16. The number of prize balls paid out is one.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gate 20 is provided above the second starting winning opening 16. When the game ball passes through this gate 20, a lottery of ordinary symbols, which will be described later, is performed. Then, when the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the movable piece 16b provided in the above-mentioned second start winning opening 16 is opened for a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the attacker device 17 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 12 (below the second starting winning opening 16). The attacker device 17 includes a large winning opening 18 into which a game ball can enter, and an opening / closing door 18b for opening and closing the large winning opening 18. In the normal state, since the opening / closing door 18b is closed and the large winning opening 18 is closed, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 18, but the above-mentioned special game or small hit game Is executed, the opening / closing door 18b is opened and the large winning opening 18 is opened, so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening 18. Specifically, the round game in which the large winning opening 18 is opened is executed a plurality of times during the above-mentioned special game, and the opening of the large winning opening 18 is 1 during the above-mentioned small hit game. It is supposed to be done once. When one game ball enters the large prize opening 18, a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls is paid out.
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the large winning opening 18, and a game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball. It has become like. Further, although not particularly shown, almost all the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can reach the large winning opening 18 except for those entering the second starting winning opening 16. And windmills are arranged. Therefore, as long as the game ball is continuously launched as long as the big prize opening 18 is open, the game ball will enter the big prize opening 18.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a turning road 51 is provided inside the attacker device 17 so that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 can roll to the left. There is. The turning road 51 is branched into an upper passage 52 and a lower passage 53 at a predetermined position in the rolling direction, and a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 can enter the end of the upper passage 52. A region 58 is provided, and a specific region 57 into which a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 can enter is provided at the end of the lower passage 53 (see FIGS. 4A and 4B).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a distribution member that distributes the game ball to either the upper passage 52 or the lower passage 53 at the position where the upper passage 52 and the lower passage 53 branch off. 59 is provided. The distribution member 59 is rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the game board 11, and is connected to a first position that opens a path to the upper passage 52 and blocks the path to the lower passage 53, and to the upper passage 52. It is possible to displace between the second position that blocks the path of the vehicle and opens the path to the lower passage 53. Then, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 proceeds to the upper passage 52 and enters the general area 58 when the distribution member 59 is located at the first position, and the distribution member 59 is located at the second position. If so, proceed to the lower passage 53 and enter the specific area 57.

Further, although not particularly shown, the attacker device 17 has a specific area discharge port for discharging the game ball that has entered the specific area 57 to the outside of the large winning opening 18 (the back side of the game board 11), and a general area. A general area discharge port for discharging the game ball that has entered 58 to the outside of the large winning opening 18 (the back side of the game board 11) is provided.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) and distribution of the opening / closing door 18b in the round game executed during the above-mentioned special game are classified for each type of the special symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. The mode (operation pattern) of the operation of the member 59 is set.
Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of gaming balls (one in the present embodiment) enter the specific area 57 during a specific round game, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the player. It is set to a gaming state that combines a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, which are advantageous gaming states for the player. On the other hand, when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during a specific round game (that is, when all the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 18 enter the general area 58). The gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a gaming state (normal gaming state) that combines a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 18b, the operation pattern of the distribution member 59, and the setting of the gaming state will be described in detail later.
As described above, in the round game during the special game, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, the game state after the end of the special game may be set to the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state. Instead, the gaming state after the end of the special game may be set to the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state according to the type of the special symbol determined when the jackpot is won. For example, in the case of winning a big hit, when a specific special symbol is determined, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the game state (high probability time-saving game state) in which the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state are combined. However, when a special symbol other than a specific special symbol is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a gaming state (normal gaming state) that combines a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. May be done. As described above, when the game state after the end of the special game is determined according to the type of the special symbol, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned specific area 57.

As shown in FIG. 3, the out opening 19 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12, and is provided in any of the general winning opening 14, the first starting winning opening 15, the second starting winning opening 16, and the large winning opening 18. Also accepts game balls that did not enter. Then, the game ball received in the out port 19 is guided to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

As shown in FIG. 3, the effect display device 21 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 12. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 21. Further, the effect display device 21 is provided with a display unit 21a for displaying an image such as a moving image or a still image, and the background image is displayed on the display unit 21a and the effect symbol 50 ( The dummy symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and a variable effect is performed in which the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified to the player depending on the stop display mode of each effect symbol 50.
The effect display device 21 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and for example, a drum-type display device or the like that performs various displays using a plurality of drums having a pattern on the outer periphery may be used.

The pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment has, as an effect device, as an effect display device 21, a speaker as the above-mentioned audio output device 10, and an effect lighting device 23 that produces an effect by emitting light in various colors and lighting patterns. It is equipped with a lamp (see FIG. 1).
The effect device is not limited to these, and may be provided with, for example, an effect device that can move at various timings and modes.

Further, at the front position of the upper plate 6, an effect operation device 9 is provided, which can be operated by the player to advance or switch the effect to be executed during a game, a standby, or the like. The effect operation device 9 in the present embodiment is composed of an operation dial 9a which is a circular ring-shaped frame and can be rotated, and an operation button 9b which is fitted in the operation dial 9a and can be pressed. .. Then, when a predetermined effect is being executed by the effect display device 21, if a rotation operation of the operation dial 9a or a pressing operation of the operation button 9b is performed, various effects such as a variable effect progress or the display is switched to a different display. It is designed to do.
The effect operation device 9 is not limited to the operation dial 9a, the operation button 9b, or the like, and may be provided with a cross key or the like capable of inputting in the up, down, left, and right directions. Further, the effect operation device 9 such as the operation dial 9a and the operation button 9b may be provided, and the above-mentioned cross key may be separately provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display device 30 is a device for displaying various situations regarding the game on the lower right side of the game board 11 and on the outside of the game area 12. , A second special symbol display device 31, a first special symbol hold display device 38, a second special symbol hold display device 39, a normal symbol display device 32, and a normal symbol hold display device 33 are provided.

Further, as described above, although the game ball lending device R is electrically connected to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, operations for the game ball lending device R such as lending a game ball and ejecting a card can be performed. It is accepted by the pachinko machine P. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine P includes a value information display device 35 that displays value information (balance information) stored in the card, a ball lending button 36 that can be pressed, and a pressing operation. There is a card return button 37 that can be used.

(Structure of control means of pachinko machine P)
Next, the control means for controlling the game and the effect of the pachinko machine P will be described.
The above-mentioned control means is composed of various control boards. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 that controls the basic operation of the game of the pachinko machine P, the launch of the game ball, and the prize ball. It includes a launch payout control board 200 that controls payout, a sub-control board 300 that controls various effects, and a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the launch / payout control board 200 and the sub-control board 300 are connected to the main control board 100, and the game ball lending control board 400 is connected to the launch / payout control board 200. There is. Further, an external information terminal board 500 for outputting various information on the progress of the game to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a hall computer in a game hall) is connected to the main control board 100 and the launch payout control board 200. Has been done.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, the launch payout control board 200 controls both the launch of the game ball and the payout of the prize ball, but the board that controls the launch of the game ball (launch control). A board) and a board for controlling the payout of prize balls (payout control board) may be provided separately.

Further, although not particularly shown, a power supply board is connected to each board included in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment. A backup power supply is provided on this power supply board, and when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the pachinko machine P becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, it is determined that the power is cut off, and a power cut signal is output to the main control board 100. ..

The main control board 100 controls the game performed in the pachinko machine P, and specifically, starts when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16. Special figure game to be played (win / fail lottery, determination of special symbol, change display of special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as change of special symbol)), pachinko game started when the game ball passes through the gate 20 ( It controls lottery of ordinary symbols, variable display of ordinary symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as variation of ordinary symbols), special games that are advantageous to the player, small hit games, and the like.
As shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes, a control program for advancing the game, a main ROM 102 that stores data and tables required for the game, and at the time of arithmetic processing. It is provided with a main RAM 103, which is used as a temporary storage area or the like.
Then, the main CPU 101 reads the control program stored in the main ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on the signals from each detection sensor and timer described later, and also controls and performs arithmetic processing of various devices connected to the main CPU 101. Send commands to other boards based on the processing results.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 has a general winning opening detection sensor 14a for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 14, and a game ball entering the first starting winning opening 15. The first start winning opening detection sensor 15a that detects that the ball has hit, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a that detects that the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening 16, and the game ball to the large winning opening 18. A large winning opening detection sensor 18a that detects that the ball has entered, a gate detection sensor 20a that detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 20, and a fraud detection sensor that detects magnetism, radio waves, etc. directed at the game board 11. The specific area detection sensor 57a for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area 57 is connected to the 35. Then, the detection signals output from each of these detection sensors are input to the main control board 100.
The sensor connected to the main control board 100 is not limited to these, and for example, a general area detection sensor or the like for detecting that the game ball has entered the general area 58 may be provided.

Further, on the main control board 100, as devices to be controlled, the start winning opening solenoid 16c for opening and closing the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 and the opening / closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18 are opened and closed. The large winning opening solenoid 18c, the distribution member solenoid 59c that displaces the distribution member 59, the first special symbol display device 30, the second special symbol display device 31, the ordinary symbol display device 32, and the first special symbol hold display. The device 38, the second special figure hold display device 39, and the normal symbol hold display device 33 are connected.
Then, by driving each solenoid by the main control board 100, the opening / closing control of the second starting winning opening 16 and the large winning opening 18 and the displacement control of the distribution member 59 are performed, and the display control of each display device is performed. It is supposed to be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a plurality of stages from the set value 1 to the set value 6 are set as the setting related to the payout, and due to the difference in the set value, the big hit in the winning / losing lottery described later is won. The probabilities of are different. For example, the setting value 6 is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the setting value 1, and if the probability of winning the jackpot is high, the possibility of winning the prize ball is high. By changing the set value, the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the pachinko machine P changes. Further, the winning / failing random number determination table 110 used in the winning / failing lottery described later is provided corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6, and when the set value is changed, the winning / failing random number determination provided for each set value is provided. The entire table 110 will be changed.
Although not particularly shown, the main control board 100 is provided with a RAM clear switch and a setting switch used for changing the above-mentioned set values. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the power is turned on with the front door 3 open and both the RAM clear switch and the setting switch turned on, the setting value can be changed to the setting change state. .. Then, in this setting change state, the set value can be changed by operating the RAM clear switch.

Although not particularly shown, the emission payout control board 200 includes a CPU, ROM, and RAM like the main control board 100, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. ..

As shown in FIG. 5, the launch payout control board 200 has a touch sensor 5a for detecting that the player touches the operation handle 5 and an operation of the operation handle 5 as a device for controlling the launch of the game ball. An operation volume 5b that detects an angle (rotation angle), a launch stop switch 5c that stops the launch of the game ball, and a ball feed that sends the game ball received in the precision plate 6 to a launch device (not shown). The solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 that launches the game ball are connected. Further, the control signals output from the touch sensor 5a, the operation volume 5b, and the firing stop switch 5c are input to the firing payout control board 200.

Then, when the control signals from the touch sensor 5a and the operation volume 5b are input to the launch payout control board 200, the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are energized to launch the game ball. Further, while the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are energized, the game balls are continuously launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds (that is, the launch pace of 100 balls per minute). .. On the other hand, when the control signal from the launch stop switch 5c is input to the launch payout control board 200, control is performed to stop the firing of the game ball by stopping the energization of the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61.
As the device for launching the game ball, a rotary solenoid may be used instead of the launch motor 61.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the launch payout control board 200 receives a prize for a game ball stored in a game ball storage unit (not particularly shown) as a device for controlling the payout of the game ball. A payout motor 62 to be paid out as a ball and a payout counting switch 63 to detect and count the paid out game balls are connected. Then, when the launch payout control board 200 receives the payout number command transmitted from the main control board 100, the launch payout control board 200 pays out a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on the payout number command. The payout motor 62 is controlled in such a manner. At this time, the number of paid out game balls is counted by the payout counting switch 63, and it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) have been paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the launch / payout control board 200 includes a front door open detection sensor 3a for detecting the open state of the front door 3 and a saucer full tank detection sensor 7a for detecting the full tank state of the saucer 7. , Are connected.

When the front door opening detection sensor 3a detects that the front door 3 is open, the opening detection signal is output to the firing and payout control board 200, and the opening detection signal is output while the front door 3 is open. It is output continuously. Then, when the release detection signal is input, the launch / payout control board 200 transmits a door opening command to the main control board 100. On the other hand, when the front door open detection sensor 3a does not detect that the front door 3 is open, the front door open detection sensor 3a is turned off and the output of the door open detection signal is stopped. Then, when the input of the door opening detection signal is stopped, the launch payout control board 200 determines that the front door 3 is closed, and stops transmitting the door opening command to the main control board 100.

The saucer full tank detection sensor 7a is provided at a predetermined position of the saucer 7. When a predetermined amount or more of the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are stored in the saucer 7 and the tank is full, the stored game balls reach the above-mentioned predetermined position.
The saucer full tank detection sensor 7a is turned on when it detects that the game ball has reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, and outputs a saucer detection signal to the launch / payout control board 200, and the stored game ball is described above. While the predetermined position is reached, the saucer detection signal is continuously output. Then, when the saucer detection signal is input, the launch / payout control board 200 transmits a saucer full tank command to the main control board 100. On the other hand, when the saucer full tank detection sensor 7a does not detect that the game ball has reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, it is turned off and the output of the saucer detection signal is stopped. Then, when the input of the saucer detection signal is stopped, the launch / payout control board 200 determines that the full tank state of the saucer 7 has been released, and stops transmitting the saucer full tank command to the main control board 100.

Further, as described above, the launch / payout control board 200 is connected to the game ball lending control board 400 that relays the operation to the game ball lending device R. As shown in FIG. 5, the launch / payout control board 200 includes a value information display device 35, a ball lending switch 36a for detecting a pressing operation of the ball lending button 36, and a card return via the game ball lending control board 400. A card return switch 37a that detects a button 37 pressing operation is connected to the card return switch 37a.

When the ball lending button 36 is pressed, a detection signal output from the ball lending switch 36a is input to the launch payout control board 200, and the launch payout control board 200 refers to the game ball lending device R with respect to the game ball. Sends a lending request signal requesting lending. Then, when the game ball lending device R receives the lending request signal, the game ball lending device R performs a process of subtracting a predetermined value information from the stored value information and corresponds to the subtracted value information. Control is performed to pay out the number of game balls to be played.
Further, when the card return button 37 is pressed, the detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the launch / payout control board 200, and the launch / payout control board 200 is directed to the game ball lending device R. Send a return request signal requesting the return of the card. Then, when the game ball lending device R receives the return request signal, the game ball lending device R controls to eject the card.

The sub-control board 300 controls an effect executed during a game, a standby, or the like.
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 300 includes a sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes, a control program for executing the effect, a sub ROM 302 that stores data and tables necessary for executing the effect, and an operation. It includes a sub RAM 303 used as a temporary storage area during processing, and is connected so as to enable communication from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300 in one direction.
Then, the sub CPU 301 reads the control program stored in the sub ROM 302 based on the command transmitted from the main control board 100 and the signal from the timer, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the image display. On a board (not shown), a voice control board for controlling voice output (not shown), and an illumination control board for controlling lighting (not shown). , Send a command to execute the production.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the voice control board and the illumination control board are separately provided, but one board (voice lighting control board) in which the functions of these boards are integrated is provided. ) May be provided, and both the audio output and the lighting of the lighting may be controlled by the substrate.

Further, the effect display device 21 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via the image control board, and the voice output device 10 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via the voice control board. Further, the sub-control board 300 has an effect lighting device 23, a rotation operation detection sensor 9c for detecting the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, and a pressing operation for detecting the pressing operation of the operation button 9b via the illumination control board. The detection sensor 9d and the detection sensor 9d are connected.

Although not shown in particular, the image control board includes an image CPU, an image ROM, an image RAM, and the like. The image ROM of the image control board stores image data such as the effect symbol 50 and the background displayed on the effect display device 21. Then, based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU controls the image display by the effect display device 21 by storing the image data read from the image ROM in the image RAM.

Although not particularly shown, the voice control board includes a sound chip (CPU), a sound ROM, a sound RAM, and the like. The sound ROM stores sound data such as sound and BGM output from the sound output device 10. Then, based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the sound data read from the sound ROM is stored in the sound RAM to control the sound output from the sound output device 10.

The illumination control board controls the lighting of the lighting by the effect lighting device 23 based on the command from the sub control board 300. Further, the illumination control board has a rotation operation detection signal output from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c based on the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, or a push output from the pressing operation detection sensor 9d based on the pressing operation of the operation button 9b. When the operation detection signal is input, a predetermined command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(Outline of the game of pachinko machine P)
Next, the game in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be described based on various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of the present embodiment, the special figure game and the normal figure game proceed in parallel. Further, as the gaming state when advancing both of these games, either a low-probability gaming state (so-called non-probability changing state) or a high-probability gaming state (so-called probabilistic changing state), and a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state Any of the gaming states of the states and any of the gaming states in which are combined are set. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, two time-saving gaming states, a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state, are provided, and one of the time-saving gaming states is set. There is.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state), a low-probability gaming state, and a first time-saving gaming state are combined. A gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a first low-probability time-saving gaming state), a gaming state combining a low-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a second low-probability time-saving gaming state), or a high-probability gaming state and One of the gaming states (hereinafter referred to as high-probability time-saving gaming states) in which the second time-saving gaming states are combined is set.

Here, the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are gaming states in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be different depending on the winning / failing lottery described later, and in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery. The probability of playing is set to a higher value than the low probability gaming state. That is, it is easier to win a big hit in the high-probability gaming state than in the low-probability gaming state by the winning / losing lottery.

Further, the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are game states in which the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 is set to be different, and in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state is set. The movable piece 16b is set to be more easily maintained in the open state (that is, the second start winning opening 16 is more likely to be in the open state) than in the state. That is, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16 in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, two time-saving gaming states, a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state, are provided, but in the second time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state is provided. The movable piece 16b is set so as to be more easily maintained in the open state than in the one-hour short game state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game ball is most likely to enter the second start winning opening 16 during the second short game state, and then the second start winning opening 16 is during the first short game state. It is easy for the pachinko ball to enter the ball, and it is most difficult for the pachinko ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16 during the non-time-saving gaming state.
In the initial state immediately after factory shipment or after reset, the normal game state is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 enters the first starting winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, a winning or losing lottery is performed. Is performed, and a special symbol associated with the game profit based on the result of the winning / losing lottery is determined. In the winning / losing lottery in this embodiment, the winning / failing of the big hit is first determined, and when the judgment result that the big hit is not won (hereinafter, also referred to as the non-winning of the big hit) is derived, then the small hit is won. If the judgment of winning or failing is made and the judgment result that the small hit is not won (hereinafter, also referred to as the non-winning of the small hit) is derived, then whether or not the time saving grant is given (whether the time saving game state is given) Whether or not, in other words, whether or not to set the time-saving game state) is determined, and when the judgment result (hereinafter, also referred to as non-winning of the time-saving game state) that the time-saving game state is not given is derived. It will be a loss.
Then, when the judgment result of winning the big hit is derived by this winning / losing lottery (that is, when the big hit is won), the big winning opening 18 is opened and it is possible to put the game ball into the big winning opening 18. The special game is executed, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to either a normal game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state, or a high-probability time-saving game state. That is, after the end of the special game, the game shifts to either a normal game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state, or a high-probability time-saving game state.

Further, when the determination result of winning the small hit is derived by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery (that is, when the small hit is won), the large winning opening 18 is opened and the game ball can be entered into the large winning opening 18. A small hit game is executed. Then, in this small hit game, when the game ball enters the large winning opening 18, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as described above. The game state after the end of the small hit game remains the same as the game state before the start of the small hit game. That is, when the small hit game is executed, the game state does not change.

Further, when the determination result (hereinafter, also referred to as winning of the time saving game state) that the time saving game state is given is derived by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the first time saving game state is set without changing the low probability game state. It has become. That is, when the time saving is granted by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first low probability time saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery results in a non-winning of the time saving grant, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the winning / failing of the time saving is determined only in the winning / failing lottery during the normal gaming state, and the winning / failing of the time saving is not determined in the winning / failing lottery during the other gaming states. .. Therefore, during other game states, the judgment result of winning the time saving is not derived, so that the game state does not change without going through the big hit winning and the execution of the special game. It is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball flowing down the first gaming area 12a can enter the first starting winning opening 15. Further, the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the large winning opening 18.
Then, during the normal gaming state and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the player launches the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a so that the gaming ball enters the first starting winning opening 15. During the second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state, and special game, the game ball enters the large winning opening 18 or the game ball passes through the gate 20. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so as to enter the second start winning opening 16.
Specifically, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the special game, a display instructing that the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b is displayed on the effect display device 21. However, during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, the effect display device 21 displays an instruction to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a.

The winning / failing lottery is to determine various random numbers acquired when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 and the random numbers stored in the main ROM 102. It is done based on various tables of.
Here, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is a random number related to the winning / failing lottery or the determination of the special symbol, which is used to determine the result of the winning / failing lottery (big hit, small hit, granting of time-saving gaming state or loss). It has a special symbol random number used to determine the type of special symbol and a variation pattern random number used to determine the variation pattern command described later.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the hardware random number built in the main control board 100 is used as the above-mentioned pass / fail random number. This random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence is cycled, and the start value is changed every time the system is reset.
Further, the variation pattern command is for determining a variation effect pattern (variation time, mode) capable of notifying the result of the winning / failing lottery. The random numbers used to determine the variation pattern command are not limited to those described above, and for example, other random numbers may be used in addition to this random number.

Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, random number values are acquired for each of the above random numbers, and each random number value is stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103. It has become like.
This reserved storage area stores each random number value (hereinafter referred to as the first special figure random number) of the random numbers related to the winning / fail lottery and the determination of the special symbol acquired by the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15. Each random number value of the random number related to the winning / failing lottery and the determination of the special symbol acquired by the first reserved storage area for the purpose and the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 (hereinafter referred to as the second special figure). It is composed of a second reserved storage area for storing (referred to as a random number). Each of these reserved storage areas is composed of a total of four storage units from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and the first special figure random number is a total of four sets and the second special figure random number is a total of four. The group can be memorized.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15, the first special figure random number is stored in order from the first storage unit of the first reserved storage area. It has become. For example, if a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is not stored in any of the storage units of the first reserved storage area, it is acquired as an opportunity. The first special figure random number is stored in the first storage unit of the first reserved storage area. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in the state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage unit of the first reserved storage area, it is acquired as an opportunity. The first special figure random number is stored in the second storage unit of the first reserved storage area. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage unit and the second storage unit of the first reserved storage area, this is stored. The first special figure random number acquired as an opportunity is stored in the third storage unit of the first reserved storage area. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit of the first reserved storage area, this is stored. It is stored in the fourth storage unit of the first reserved storage area of the first special figure random number acquired as an opportunity. Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first reserved storage area, this entry is made. The first special figure random number related to the sphere is not stored.

Similarly, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, the second special figure random number is stored in order from the first storage unit of the second reserved storage area. Since the specific storage process is the same as the storage of the first special figure random number described above, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of sets of the first special figure random numbers stored in the first hold storage area (hereinafter referred to as the first hold number) is the first hold number counter (particularly shown in the figure). The number of sets of the second special figure random numbers stored in the second reserved storage area (hereinafter referred to as the second reserved number) is stored in the second reserved number counter (not particularly shown). It is designed to be remembered.
In the present specification, as described above, storing the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number in the hold storage area is also referred to as "hold" or "hold storage", and is also referred to as first hold. The number or the second hold number is also simply referred to as the "hold number".

Then, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is executed when the winning / failing random number determination table 110 for determining the result of the winning / failing lottery, the special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of the special symbol, and the jackpot are won. After the special electric accessory operation table 112 for controlling the special game and the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and the determination result to give the time-saving game state are derived (the first described later). The game state setting table 113 for setting the game state after the time-saving game state is determined) or after the end of the special game, and the variation for determining the variation pattern command. It has a pattern table 114.
The table related to the winning / failing lottery or the like is not limited to these, and if it is necessary to make a determination or determination based on a random number, a table may be provided as appropriate.

The win / fail random number determination table 110 is for determining the result of the win / fail lottery (winning of big hit, winning of small hit, winning of time saving or loss), and is roughly classified into winning / not referred to in the low probability gaming state. It includes a random number determination table 110 (hereinafter referred to as table A) and a winning / failing random number determination table 110 (hereinafter referred to as table B) referred to in a high-probability gaming state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 11, each of the table A and the table B is provided with six types according to the set value being set.

Specifically, in the table A, the table A1 referred to when the set value is "1", the table A2 referred to when the set value is "2", and the set value is "3". The table A3 referred to in the case, the table A4 referred to when the set value is "4", the table A5 referred to when the set value is "5", and the set value is "6". A table A6 referred to in the case is provided.
Table B includes B1 referenced when the set value is "1", table B2 referenced when the set value is "2", and a table referenced when the set value is "3". B3, table B4 referenced when the set value is "4", table B5 referenced when the set value is "5", and table referenced when the set value is "6". B6 is provided.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, one winning / failing random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 65535. Then, according to the set value set in the pachinko machine P and the game state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery, any of the above-mentioned winning / failing random number determination tables 110 is selected and selected as the acquired winning / failing random number. The result of the winning / failing lottery is determined based on the winning / failing random number determination table 110.

As shown in FIG. 6A, according to Table A1, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1373, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined that if the winning / fail random number is 3310 to 3964, it is determined that the time saving is won, and if it is any other winning / failing random number (0 to 999, 1374 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. .. Therefore, the probability of winning the big hit in this table A1 is about 1/175, the probability of winning the small hit is about 1/50, and the probability of winning the time saving grant is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 7A, according to Table A2, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1384, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined that if the winning / fail random number is 3310 to 3964, it is determined that the time saving is won, and if it is any other winning / failing random number (0 to 999, 1385 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. .. Therefore, the probability of winning the big hit in this table A2 is about 1/170, the probability of winning the small hit is about 1/50, and the probability of winning the time saving grant is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 8A, according to Table A3, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1396, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined that if the hit / fail random number is 3310 to 3964, it is determined that the time saving is won, and if it is any other win / fail random number (0 to 999, 1397 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. .. Therefore, the probability of winning the big hit in this table A3 is about 1/165, the probability of winning the small hit is about 1/50, and the probability of winning the time saving grant is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 9A, according to Table A4, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1408, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined that if the hit / fail random number is 3310 to 3964, it is determined that the time saving is won, and if it is any other win / fail random number (0 to 999, 1409 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. .. Therefore, the probability of winning the big hit in this table A4 is about 1/160, the probability of winning the small hit is about 1/50, and the probability of winning the time saving grant is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 10A, according to Table A5, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1421, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined that if the hit / fail random number is 3310 to 3964, it is determined that the time saving is won, and if it is any other win / fail random number (0 to 999, 1422-1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be lost. .. Therefore, the probability of winning the big hit in this table A5 is about 1/155, the probability of winning the small hit is about 1/50, and the probability of winning the time saving grant is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 11A, according to Table A6, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1434, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined that if the hit / fail random number is 3310 to 3964, it is determined that the time saving is won, and if it is any other win / fail random number (0 to 999, 1435 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. .. Therefore, the probability of winning the big hit in this table A6 is about 1/150, the probability of winning the small hit is about 1/50, and the probability of winning the time saving grant is about 1/100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, according to Table B1, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1484, it is determined that the big hit is won, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, the small hit is determined. It is determined to be a winner, and if it is a random number other than this (0 to 999, 1485 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit in this table B1 is about 1/135, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 7B, according to Table B2, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1503, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined, and if it is a random number other than this (0 to 999, 1504 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit in this table B2 is about 1/130, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 8B, according to Table B3, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1523, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined, and if it is a random number other than this (0 to 999, 1524-1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit in this table B3 is about 1/125, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 9B, according to Table B4, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1545, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined, and if it is a random number other than this (0 to 999, 1546 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit in this table B4 is about 1/120, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 10B, according to Table B5, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1568, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined, and if it is a random number other than this (0 to 999, 1569 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit in this table B5 is about 1/115, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 11B, according to Table B6, when the winning / failing random number is 1000 to 1594, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the winning / failing random number is 2000 to 3309, it is determined to be a small hit. It is determined, and if it is a random number other than this (0 to 999, 1595 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit in this table B6 is about 1/110, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/50.

As described above, the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the high-probability gaming state and the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the low-probability gaming state (for example, table A1 and table B1) having the same associated set values. Etc.), the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the high-probability gaming state is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than that of the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the low-probability gaming state. ing.
Further, the numerical range of the winning / failing random number determined to be a big hit in the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the low-probability gaming state is associated with the same set value as the winning / failing random number determination table 110, which is a high-probability game. It is included in the numerical range of the winning / failing random number determined to be the winning of the jackpot in the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the state (specifically, the lower limit value in the numerical range determined to be the winning of the jackpot is the same, and The upper limit is different). That is, the winning / failing random number determined to be a big hit in the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the low-probability gaming state is the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the high-probability gaming state to which the same set value is associated. However, it will be judged as a big hit.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the lower limit value in the numerical range of the winning / failing random number determined to be a big hit is the same, and the upper limit value is set to be different. The upper limit value may be the same and the lower limit value may be different.

Further, in any table, the numerical range of the winning / failing random number determined to be a small hit is outside the numerical range of the winning / failing random number determined to be a big hit, and the upper limit value and the lower limit value of the numerical range are the same. As a result, the odds of winning a small hit are set to be the same. That is, regardless of the set value and the gaming state (high probability gaming state, low probability gaming state), it is determined that the small hit is won with the same probability.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, it is possible to win a small hit in the winning / failing lottery based on either the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may set it so that you can win a small hit only in the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number, or you can set it so that you can win the small hit only in the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number. May be good.

Further, the winning / failing random number determination table 110 (table A1, table A2, table A3, table A4, table A5, table A6) referred to in the low-probability gaming state is a numerical value of the winning / failing random number determined to be a winning time reduction. The range is set so that the upper limit value and the lower limit value of the numerical range are the same outside the numerical range of the winning / failing random number determined to be the winning of the jackpot, so that the probability of winning the time saving is the same. It is set to be. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, regardless of the set value set, it is determined that the winning time reduction is given with the same probability.
As described above, since the winning / failing lottery in the gaming state other than the normal gaming state does not determine the winning / failing of the time saving grant, the winning / failing random number determination table 110 (table B1, table B2, etc.) referred to in the high probability gaming state. The table B3, the table B4, the table B5, and the table B6) are not provided with a numerical area for determining the winning of the time saving grant. Therefore, in the high-probability gaming state, it is not determined that the time saving grant is won.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the numerical range determined to be a big hit winning, the numerical range determined to be a small hit winning, and the numerical range determined to be a time saving grant are all continuous. Although it was composed of a range of numerical values, it is not limited to this, and it may be composed of a range of discontinuous numerical values including a numerical value that causes a loss in between.

The special symbol random number determination table 111 is for determining the type of the special symbol, and as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, when the winning / failing lottery is performed by the first special symbol random number. It includes a first start winning opening determination table 111a to be referred to, and a second starting winning opening determination table 111b to be referred to when a winning / failing lottery is performed by a second special figure random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, one special symbol random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 199. Then, when the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery is performed, a special symbol random number determination table of either the first starting winning opening determination table 111a or the second starting winning opening determination table 111b is performed according to the starting winning opening in which the game ball has entered. 111 is selected, and the type of the special symbol is determined based on the acquired special symbol random number and the selected special symbol random number determination table 111.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as jackpot symbols) determined when a jackpot is won. In addition, two types of small hit symbols (Y1, Y2) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as small hit symbols) that are determined when a small hit is won, and a time-saving grant is won. Seven types of time-saving symbols (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as time-saving symbols) that are determined in the case of a loss. Two types of lost symbols (Z1, Z2) are provided as special symbols determined in (hereinafter, also referred to as lost symbols).

As shown in FIG. 12A, according to the first start winning opening determination table 111a, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 1 in the case where the jackpot is won. The jackpot symbol X2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 2 to 139, and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined when the special symbol random number is 140 to 199. That is, in the first start winning opening determination table 111a, when the jackpot is won, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 is determined is 1%, the probability that the jackpot symbol X2 is determined is 69%, and the jackpot symbol X3. The probability that is determined is 30%.
Further, in the case of winning a small hit, the small hit symbol Y1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 99, and the small hit symbol Y2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 100 to 199. Will be done. That is, in the first start winning opening determination table 111a, the probability that the small hit symbol Y1 is determined and the probability that the small hit symbol Y2 is determined are both 50% when the small hit is won. ing.
Further, in the case of winning the time saving grant, the time saving symbol J1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 99, and the time saving symbol J2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 100 to 149. When the special symbol random number is 150 to 183, the time saving symbol J3 is determined, when the special symbol random number is 184 to 193, the time saving symbol J4 is determined, and when the special symbol random number is 194 to 197. The time-saving symbol J5 is determined, and the time-saving symbol J6 is determined when the special symbol random number is 198 to 199. That is, in the first start winning opening determination table 111a, the probability that the time saving symbol J1 is determined is 50%, the probability that the time saving symbol J2 is determined is 25%, and the time saving symbol is 25% when the time saving grant is won. The probability that J3 is determined is 17%, the probability that the time-saving symbol J4 is determined is 5%, the probability that the time-saving symbol J5 is determined is 2%, and the probability that the time-saving symbol J6 is determined is 1%.
Further, in the case of loss, the lost symbol Z1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 19, and the lost symbol Z2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 20 to 199. That is, in the first start winning opening determination table 111a, in the case of loss, the probability that the lost symbol Z1 is determined is 10%, and the probability that the lost symbol Z2 is determined is 90%.

As shown in FIG. 12B, according to the second start winning opening determination table 111b, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 139 in the case where the jackpot is won. When the special symbol random number is 140 to 199, the jackpot symbol X4 is determined. That is, in the second start winning opening determination table 111b, when the jackpot is won, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 is determined is 70%, and the probability that the jackpot symbol X4 is determined is 30%. ..
Further, in the case of winning the time saving grant, the time saving symbol J7 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 199 (that is, regardless of the value of the special symbol random number). That is, in the second start winning opening determination table 111b, the probability that the time saving symbol J7 is determined is 100% when the time saving grant is won.
As shown in FIG. 12B, the type of the small hit symbol determined when the small hit is won, the probability of determining the type, and the type of the lost symbol determined in the case of loss and the type of the lost symbol. The determination probability of the type is set to the same contents as the first start winning opening determination table 111a.

The special electric accessory operating table 112 is for controlling a special game executed when a big hit is won and a small hit game executed when a small hit is won, and is for controlling a special game and a small hit game. It is referred to for operating the large winning opening solenoid 18c and the distribution member solenoid 59c during the execution of the small hit game. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13A to 13D, the first special electric accessory operating table 112 is referred to when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. The operating table 112a, the second operating table 112b referred to when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, and the third operating table referred to when the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined by winning the jackpot. 112c and a fourth operation table 112d, which is referred to when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined by winning the small hit, are provided.

Specifically, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the special game is executed with reference to the first operation table 112a shown in FIG. 13 (a). According to the first operation table 112a, the process ends when either the condition that the large winning opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or the 10 game balls are entered into the large winning opening 18 is satisfied. The round game is executed 10 times in total from 1 round to 10 rounds. Further, during each round game, the opening / closing door 18b is displaced from the closed position to the open position, is positioned at the open position for 29.0 seconds, and then is displaced from the open position to the closed position (opening / closing pattern). As a result, the large winning opening 18 is opened only once, and the time during which the large winning opening 18 is closed (that is, the interval time) is set to 2.0 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position during each round of 1 round, 2 rounds, 4 rounds to 10 rounds. It is designed to operate in the mode (operation pattern) of being (positioned). On the other hand, during the three rounds of the round game, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner of staying at the second position.

Further, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the special game is executed with reference to the second operation table 112b shown in FIG. 13 (b). According to the second operating table 112b, the round game ending under the same conditions as the above-mentioned first operating table 112a is executed a total of 10 times from 1 round to 10 rounds. The opening / closing pattern and interval time of the opening / closing door 18b are also set to the same contents as those of the first operation table 112a.
Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during each round of the 1st round, 2nd round, 4th round to 10th round. Similarly, the distribution member 59 operates in a mode of staying at the first position, and further, the distribution member 59 operates in a mode of stopping at the first position even during the round game of three rounds. It has become.

Further, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, the special game is executed with reference to the third operation table 112c shown in FIG. 13 (c). According to the third operation table 112c, the round game ending under the same conditions as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b described above is executed a total of four times from the first round to the fourth round. The opening / closing pattern and interval time of the opening / closing door 18b are set to the same contents as those of the first operating table 112a and the second operating table 112b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, the jackpot symbol X1 and the jackpot symbol X2 are determined during each round of the 1st round, 2nd round, and 4th round. As in the case of the above, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner of stopping at the first position, and further, during the round game of three rounds, the distribution member X2 is distributed in the same manner as when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined. The member 59 operates in such a manner that it stays at the first position.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the big winning opening 18 is continuously used for 29.0 seconds in the three round round game (specific round game). Since the distribution member 59 is opened and stays at the second position, as long as the game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, the game balls enter the large winning opening 18 and surely a predetermined number of balls are entered. The game ball can be made to enter the specific area 57.
On the other hand, when the jackpot symbols X2, X3 or X4 are determined, in the round game of 3 rounds, the jackpot 18 is continuously opened for 29.0 seconds, but the distribution member 59 is in the first position. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the large winning opening 18, all the game balls enter the general area 58, and it is impossible to make the game ball enter the specific area 57.

Further, when the small hit is won and the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the small hit game is executed with reference to the fourth operation table 112d shown in FIG. 13 (d). According to the fourth operating table 112d, the large winning opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and when 10 game balls enter while the large winning opening 18 is open, the large winning opening 18 is closed. do.
Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (d), during the small hit game, the distribution member 59 operates in a mode of staying at the first position.
As described above, in the small hit game, since the large winning opening 18 opens only for 0.05 seconds, it is almost impossible to insert the game ball into the large winning opening 18. Further, since the distribution member 50 stays at the first position during the small hit game, even if the game ball enters the large winning opening 18, the game ball enters the general area 58 and the game ball is placed in the specific area. It is impossible to enter 57.

The game state setting table 113 shows the game state after the end of the special game when the special game is executed, and the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, which are won in the winning / losing lottery during the normal game state. This is for setting the gaming state after J5, J6 or J7 is determined.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a special game is executed, the type of the jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game, and the specified area 57 during the special game are specified. Depending on whether or not a number of game balls (one in this embodiment) have entered, the game state after the end of the special game is set. In addition, when the time saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined in the winning / losing lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state specified for each time saving symbol is set. It is supposed to be done. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area 57 is set according to the determined type of jackpot symbol, and is substantially determined. The jackpot symbol determines whether or not to shift to the high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the special game based on the decision.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after winning a big hit in the low-probability short-time gaming state and shifting to the high-probability gaming state, the pachinko machine P continuously enters the high-probability gaming state without shifting to the low-probability gaming state. The jackpot symbol with which the settings are associated has been determined, and the number of times the jackpot symbol has been determined in succession (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive high-probability settings) has reached a predetermined upper limit (10000 in this embodiment). Occasionally, a low-probability gaming state is forcibly set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol. That is, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is continuously determined up to the upper limit number of times without shifting to the low-probability gaming state through the execution of the special game, the high-probability gaming state is after the end of the special game based on the determination. The low-probability gaming state is forcibly set even when the condition to be set is satisfied.
Similarly, after winning a big hit in the non-time-saving game state and shifting to the time-saving game state (in this embodiment, the second time-saving game state), the time-saving game state is continuously set without shifting to the non-time-saving game state. When the jackpot symbol associated with is determined and the number of times the jackpot symbol is determined consecutively (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive time reduction settings) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10000 in this embodiment). After the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol, the non-time saving game state is forcibly set. That is, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is continuously determined up to the upper limit number of times without shifting to the non-time-saving game state through the execution of the special game, the time-saving game state is changed after the end of the special game based on the determination. Even when the set conditions are met, the non-time saving game state is forcibly set.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of consecutive high-accuracy settings and the number of continuous time-saving settings may reach 10,000 in view of the set probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of determining each jackpot symbol. However, substantially, the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will continue until the condition for setting the low-probability gaming state and the condition for setting the non-time-saving gaming state are satisfied.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14A to 14J, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined as the game state setting table 113, and a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the specific area 57 during the special game. The first game state setting table 113a referred to when entering, and the second game referred to when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game. The state setting table 113b, the third game state setting table 113c referred to when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, and the hit / fail during the normal game state. When the 4th game state setting table 113d, which is referred to when the time saving symbol J1 is determined by winning the time saving in the lottery, and when the time saving symbol J2 is determined in the winning or losing lottery during the normal gaming state The fifth game state setting table 113e to be referred to, the sixth game state setting table 113f to be referred to when the time saving symbol J3 is determined in the winning / failing lottery during the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state. The 7th game state setting table 113g, which is referred to when the time saving symbol J4 is determined in the winning / failing lottery, and the time saving symbol J5 are determined in the winning / failing lottery during the normal gaming state. The eighth game state setting table 113h referred to in the case, the ninth game state setting table 113i referred to when the time saving symbol J6 is determined by winning the time saving in the winning / losing lottery during the normal game state, and the normal game. A tenth game state setting table 113j, which is referred to when the time saving symbol J7 is determined by winning the time saving grant in the winning / losing lottery during the state, is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the continuous high probability setting number is predetermined. When the upper limit has not been reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability gaming state, and the number of continuations of the high-probability gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the high-probability number of times) is set to 10,000. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time reductions has not reached the predetermined upper limit, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second time reduction game state, and the number of time reductions is set to 10,000 times. To.
That is, in the above case, when the number of continuous high probability settings and the number of continuous time reduction settings have not reached the upper limit, the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 10,000 times after the end of the special game without winning the jackpot. Until then, the high-probability game state and the second time-saving game state (that is, the high-probability time-saving game state) continue. As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 1/110 to 1/135, so that the jackpot is substantially re-winned. Until then, the high-probability time-saving gaming state will continue.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the number of consecutive high-probability settings has reached a predetermined upper limit, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the low-probability gaming state, and the continuous time is shortened. When the set number of times has reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time saving game state.

As described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the second position during the three rounds in the special game, so as long as the game ball is launched into the second game area 12b. Always, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57. That is, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is surely set as long as the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area 12b.
Further, although not particularly shown, when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game even though the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game is changed. , Low probability time-saving gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state (that is, normal gaming state).

As shown in FIG. 14B, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game is low. It is set to the probability time saving game state. Along with this, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has not reached a predetermined upper limit and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the reduced working hours state (that is, the first reduced working hours state). The gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second reduced working hours game state, and the number of reduced working hours is set to 10,000 times.
That is, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving gaming state, the result of the winning / failing lottery is obtained without winning the jackpot. The low-probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state (that is, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until it is derived 10,000 times. As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/150 to 1/175, so that the jackpot is substantially re-winned. Until then, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit number and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the non-time saving gaming state, the special game The game state after the end is set to the non-time saving game state. Similarly, even when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time reduction game state. That is, in any case, the gaming state after the end of the special gaming is set to the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (that is, the normal gaming state).

As described above, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position during the three rounds in the special game, so that a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57. There is no such thing. That is, whenever the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, either the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state is set.

As shown in FIG. 14 (c), when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game has a low probability of shortening the time. It is set to the game state. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time reductions has not reached the predetermined upper limit, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second time reduction game state, and the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. To.
That is, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the low probability gaming state and the second time reduction gaming state are obtained until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 100 times without winning the jackpot. (That is, the second low-probability time-saving game state) continues.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time reduction game state. That is, at this time, the gaming state after the end of the special gaming is set to the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (that is, the normal gaming state).

As described above, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position during the three rounds in the special game, so that a predetermined number of game balls may enter the specific area 57. do not have. That is, whenever the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, either the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state is set.

As shown in FIG. 14D, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined in the winning / failing lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is unchanged from the low probability gaming state. The first time reduction game state is set, and the number of time reductions is set to 10. That is, in this case, the low-probability gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state (that is, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 10 times without winning the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14 (e), when the time saving symbol J2 is determined in the winning / failing lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is unchanged from the low probability gaming state. The first time reduction game state is set, and the number of time reductions is set to 20 times. That is, in this case, the low-probability gaming state and the first time-shortening gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 20 times without winning the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14 (f), when the time saving symbol J3 is determined in the winning / losing lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is unchanged from the low probability gaming state. The first time reduction game state is set, and the number of time reductions is set to 30 times. That is, in this case, the low-probability gaming state and the first time-shortening gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 30 times without winning the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14 (g), when the time saving symbol J4 is determined in the winning / losing lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is unchanged from the low probability gaming state. The first time reduction game state is set, and the number of time reductions is set to 50 times. That is, in this case, the low-probability gaming state and the first time-shortening gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 50 times without winning the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14 (h), when the time saving symbol J5 is determined in the winning / losing lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is unchanged from the low probability gaming state. The first time reduction game state is set, and the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. That is, in this case, the low-probability gaming state and the first time-shortening gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 100 times without winning the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14 (i), when the time saving symbol J6 is determined in the winning / failing lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is unchanged from the low probability gaming state. The first time reduction game state is set, and the number of time reductions is set to 1000 times. That is, in this case, the low-probability gaming state and the first time-shortening gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 1000 times without winning the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14 (j), when the time saving symbol J7 is determined in the winning / losing lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is unchanged from the low probability gaming state. The first time reduction game state is set, and the number of time reductions is set to one. That is, in this case, the low-probability gaming state and the first time-shortening gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived once without winning the jackpot.

When the time saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 are determined as described above, the fluctuation of the special symbol (time saving symbol) is stopped and then the fluctuation of the next special symbol is started. Occasionally), the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.

The variation pattern table 114 is for determining the variation pattern command as described above.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the special symbol is determined as described above, the variation pattern command is determined based on the result of the determination. As described above, the variation pattern command is for determining the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the variation pattern command determines the mode and variation time of the variation effect (variation time of the variation display of the special symbol). In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the variation effect is divided into a first half portion and a second half portion, and the mode and variation time of the first half portion of the variation effect, and the mode and variation time of the second half portion of the variation effect are any. Is also determined by the fluctuation pattern command.
Specifically, the determined variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board 300 is based on the received variation pattern command, and is a specific mode of variation effect (for example). , The image to be displayed on the display unit 21a, etc.) is determined.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern commands are provided, and each fluctuation pattern command is associated with the fluctuation pattern table 114. Then, the type and determination ratio of the variation pattern command to be determined are set for each variation pattern table 114.

The pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment uses the variable pattern table 114 as a game ball to the first start winning opening 15 during a normal gaming state or a first low-probability time-saving gaming state (that is, while hitting left). Table A referred to when the ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state (that is, right-handed). It has a table B and a table C that are referred to when the ball enters (see FIG. 15).

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after winning a big hit in the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state and shifting to at least one of the second time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, A jackpot that has been won consecutively without shifting to the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (from the so-called first hit to at least one of the second time-saving gaming state or the high-probability shortening gaming state) continues. Table B is referred to when the continuous jackpot count condition that the number of consecutive jackpots (hereinafter referred to as continuous jackpots) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times, etc.) is not satisfied, and the continuous jackpot count condition is referred to. Table C is referred to when is satisfied.

Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, one variation pattern random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 249, and the acquired variation pattern random number and the acquired variation pattern random number are used. The special symbol determined as described above, the current number of holdings (first holding number or second holding number), the current gaming state, and the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number). ) Is determined based on the variation pattern table 114 according to the success or failure of the establishment.

Although not particularly shown, the variation pattern table 114 includes a case where a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 during a normal game state or a first low-probability time-saving game state, or a second. It also has a table that is referred to when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during a low-probability time-saving game state or a high-probability time-saving game state. However, as long as the display of the instruction for launching the game ball on the effect display device 21 is followed, the game ball enters only the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state. During the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game ball enters only the second start winning opening 16. Therefore, the ball enters the second start winning opening 16 during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the first start during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The entry of the game ball into the winning opening 15 is irregular, and in the following, such an irregular entry is not considered, and the first is during the normal gaming state or during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. 1 It is assumed that the game ball enters the starting winning opening 15, and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

Then, when the variation pattern command is determined with reference to the table A (when the variation pattern command is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15), the first hold number at that time point. Is referenced. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command is determined with reference to the table B or the table C (when the variation pattern command is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16), the relevant case is concerned. The second hold number at the time is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 15A, according to Table A, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (that is, the result of the winning / failing lottery is lost) and the current first hold number is 0 or 1. In, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, a fluctuation pattern called "13-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 13 seconds) is associated. The fluctuation pattern command "00H" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was 210 to 229, the fluctuation pattern was "20 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half was 13 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second half was 7 seconds. The fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 230 to 239, the fluctuation pattern (variation time of the first half is 20) of "45 seconds fluctuation". The variation pattern command "02H" associated with the variation pattern (seconds, variation pattern in which the variation time in the latter half is set to 25 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 240 to 249, it is called "60 seconds variation". The fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half portion is set to 20 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half portion is set to 40 seconds) is determined.

Further, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current first hold number is 2 or more, the fluctuation pattern (variation in the first half) of "3 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209. The variation pattern command "04H" associated with the variation pattern (variation pattern in which the time is set to 0 seconds and the variation time in the latter half is set to 3 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 210 to 229, "20 seconds". The variation pattern command "01H" to which the variation pattern of "variation" is associated is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 230 to 239, the variation pattern command "02H" to which the variation pattern of "45 seconds variation" is associated is determined. Is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the variation pattern command “03H” associated with the variation pattern of “60 seconds variation” is determined.

Further, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of the first half part is 0 seconds) is "18 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, regardless of the current first hold number. , The fluctuation pattern command "BAH" associated with the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 18 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249. The variation pattern command "B3H" to which the pattern is associated is determined.
Further, when the time saving symbol J2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of the first half part is 0 seconds) is "30 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, regardless of the current first hold number. , The fluctuation pattern command "BBH" associated with the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 30 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249. The variation pattern command "B4H" to which the pattern is associated is determined.
Further, when the time saving symbol J3 is determined, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of the first half part is 0 seconds) is "36 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, regardless of the current first hold number. , The fluctuation pattern command "BCH" associated with the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 36 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249. The variation pattern command "B5H" to which the pattern is associated is determined.

Further, when the time saving symbol J4 is determined, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of the first half part is 0 seconds) is "46 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, regardless of the current first hold number. , The fluctuation pattern command "BDH" associated with the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 46 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249. The variation pattern command "B6H" to which the pattern is associated is determined.
Further, when the time saving symbol J5 is determined, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of the first half part is 0 seconds) is "66 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, regardless of the current first hold number. , The fluctuation pattern command "BEH" associated with the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 66 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249. The variation pattern command "B7H" to which the pattern is associated is determined.
Further, when the time saving symbol J6 is determined, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time of the first half part is 0 seconds) is "68 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, regardless of the current first hold number. , The fluctuation pattern command "BFH" associated with the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 68 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 10 to 249. The variation pattern command "B8H" to which the pattern is associated is determined.
Further, when the time saving symbol J7 is determined, regardless of the current first hold number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249 (regardless of the value of the fluctuation pattern random number), "60 seconds fluctuation" is performed. The variation pattern command "B9H" to which the variation pattern is associated is determined.

Further, when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (that is, the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the small hit), the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124 regardless of the current first hold number. Occasionally, the variation pattern command "22H" associated with the variation pattern of "45 seconds variation" was determined, and when the variation pattern random number was 125 to 249, the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" was associated. The variation pattern command "23H" is determined.

Further, when the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3 are determined (that is, the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the jackpot), the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124 regardless of the current first hold number. Occasionally, the variation pattern command "A2H" associated with the variation pattern of "45 seconds variation" was determined, and when the variation pattern random number was 125 to 249, the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" was associated. The variation pattern command "A3H" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15B, according to Table B, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 was determined and the current second hold number was 0 or 1, the variation pattern random number was 0 to 209. Occasionally, the variation pattern command "00H" associated with the variation pattern of "13-second variation" was determined, and when the variation pattern random number was 210 to 239, the variation pattern of "45-second variation" was associated. The variation pattern command "02H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.

Further, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second hold number is 2 or more, the fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" is associated when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209. The variation pattern command "04H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the variation pattern command "02H" associated with the variation pattern of "45 seconds variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 240. When the value is 249, the fluctuation pattern command “03H” associated with the fluctuation pattern of “60 seconds fluctuation” is determined.

Further, when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern random number when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, regardless of the current second hold number. The pattern command "22H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the variation pattern command "23H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.

Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, the fluctuation pattern is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, regardless of the current second hold number. The command "A2H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the variation pattern command "A3H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15 (c), according to Table C, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 was determined and the current second hold number was 0 or 1, the fluctuation pattern random number was 0 to 209. Occasionally, a fluctuation pattern command "05H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "26 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 26 seconds) is determined. Fluctuation pattern When the random number is 210 to 239, a fluctuation pattern of "90 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 60 seconds) is associated. When the fluctuation pattern command "06H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 90 seconds). The variation pattern command "07H" associated with the variation pattern) is determined.

Further, when the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second hold number is 2 or more, the fluctuation pattern (variation in the first half) of "6 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209. The variation pattern command "08H" associated with the variation pattern (variation pattern in which the time is set to 0 seconds and the variation time in the latter half is set to 6 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 210 to 239, "90 seconds". The variation pattern command "06H" to which the variation pattern of "variation" is associated is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the variation pattern command "07H" to which the variation pattern of "120 seconds variation" is associated is determined. Is decided.

Further, when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "90 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern random number when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, regardless of the current second hold number. The pattern command "26H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the variation pattern command "27H" associated with the variation pattern of "120 seconds variation" is determined.

Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, the fluctuation pattern is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "90 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, regardless of the current second hold number. The command "A6H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the variation pattern command "A7H" associated with the variation pattern of "120 seconds variation" is determined.

As described above, the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by the table C is set to be longer than the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by the table B. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned continuous jackpot count condition is satisfied more than before the above-mentioned continuous jackpot count condition is satisfied (before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times). After that (after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number), the determination rate of the long fluctuation time is higher.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after the above-mentioned continuous jackpot count condition is satisfied, the time from winning the jackpot to winning the next jackpot than before the above-mentioned continuous jackpot count condition is satisfied. The number of special games performed per unit time (the number of big hit wins per unit time) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the gambling becomes extremely high, such as a large number of special games being executed in a short period of time and the number of prize balls acquired by the player rapidly increasing. be able to.

The variation pattern command determined as described above is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and based on the variation pattern command, a specific aspect of the first half of the variation effect and a specific aspect of the second half of the variation effect are determined. To. Then, the variation effect is executed according to the specific mode determined in this way, and the total of the variation time of the first half portion and the variation time of the second half portion set in the variation pattern command is the variation effect (of the special symbol). It is the time from the start to the end of the variable display).
For example, if the determined fluctuation pattern command is "02H" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 20 seconds, the fluctuation time of the second half is 25 seconds), the fluctuation time of the first half and the fluctuation time of the second half are The total value of 45 seconds (= 20 seconds + 25 seconds) is the fluctuation time of the entire variation effect (the entire variation display of the special symbol).
The fluctuation pattern commands of "00H", "04H", "05H", "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH", and "BFH" have the fluctuation time of the first half. "0 seconds" is set. When these variation pattern commands are determined, the entire variation effect is executed in the manner determined according to the variation pattern command during the variation time of the corresponding latter half portion.

Further, based on the above-mentioned fluctuation time, the effect display device 21 performs the variation effect, and the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31) displays the variation of the special symbol. Will be done.
Specifically, when the starting winning opening where the game ball enters is the first starting winning opening 15, the first special symbol display device 30 blinks and displays during the above-mentioned fluctuation time, and the game ball enters the ball. When the starting winning opening is the second starting winning opening 16, the second special symbol display device 31 is blinking and displayed during the above-mentioned fluctuation time. Then, after the lapse of the fluctuation time, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed. As will be described later, the stop display of this special symbol is performed until a predetermined stop display time elapses.

Regarding the mode of the variation effect, instead of determining either the aspect of the first half of the variation effect or the aspect of the second half of the variation effect based on the variation pattern command, other commands other than the variation pattern command are used. At the same time, the mode of the first half of the variation effect may be determined based on one of the commands, and the aspect of the second half of the variation effect may be determined based on the other command.
Further, the variable effect may be divided into more parts instead of being divided into the first half part and the second half part, and the mode of each part may be determined based on the corresponding command.

Next, the processing related to the Fuzu game will be described.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 passes through the gate 20, the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 is activated. A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed to determine whether or not to open the movable piece 16b. Then, when the winning is achieved by the lottery of the normal symbol, the movable piece 16b is opened for a predetermined time, and the second starting winning opening 16 is opened, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. It will be easy.
The lottery of this ordinary symbol is based on a winning determination random number acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 20 and a winning determination random number determination table 116 stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random number. It will be done.

Then, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the above-mentioned hit determination random number is acquired, and the random number value is stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 103 up to four. Specifically, this normal map reservation storage area is composed of a total of four storage units from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and is stored from the first storage unit in the order of passage through the gate 20. It has become. Further, when the hit determination random number is already stored in some storage units, the hit determination random number is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number among the empty storage units. Then, when four hit determination random numbers are already stored in the normal figure reservation storage area, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20, the hit determination random numbers related to this passage are not stored in the normal figure reservation storage area. ..
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the hardware random number built in the main control board 100 is used as the hit determination random number. This hit-determined random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes around, and the start value is changed every time the system is reset.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of winning determination random numbers stored in the normal figure hold storage area (hereinafter referred to as the normal figure hold number) is a normal figure hold number counter (not particularly shown). It is supposed to be remembered in.

The winning determination random number determination table 116 is for determining whether or not a winning is achieved by drawing a normal symbol, and as shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the non-time-saving gaming state (that is, that is). The first determination table 116a referred to during the normal game state), the special game, and the small hit game, and the second determination referred to during the first time-saving game state (that is, during the first low-probability time-saving game state). A table 116b and a third determination table 116c referred to during the second time-saving gaming state (that is, during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or during the high-probability time-saving gaming state) are provided.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, one winning random number is acquired within the numerical range of 0 to 65535. Then, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the non-time-saving gaming state, or if the time of drawing the ordinary symbol is during the special game or the small hit game, the first determination table 116a is selected. Then, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected first determination table 116a. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the first time-saving gaming state, the second determination table 116b is selected, and based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected second determination table 116b. A lottery for ordinary symbols is held. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the second short-time gaming state, the third determination table 116c is selected, and based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected third determination table 116c. A lottery for ordinary symbols is held.

As shown in FIG. 16A, according to the first determination table 116a, when the hit determination random number is 1, it is determined to be a hit, and when it is any other hit determination random number (0, 2 to 65535). It is judged to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in the first determination table 116a is 1/65536.
Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, according to the second determination table 116b, when the hit determination random number is 1 to 5, it is determined to be a hit, and other hit determination random numbers (0, 6 to 65535). If it is, it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in the second determination table 116b is 5/65536.
Further, as shown in FIG. 16C, according to the third determination table 116c, when the hit determination random number is 1 to 65500, it is determined to be a hit, and other hit determination random numbers (0, 65501 to 65535). If it is, it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in the third determination table 116c is about 99/100.
If a winning symbol is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the winning symbol is determined, and if it is lost, the lost symbol is determined.

Further, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment has the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table 117 and the second start winning opening open as a table for determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol and controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b. It is equipped with a control table 118.

The ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table 117 is for determining the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. As described above, when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed by the game ball passing through the gate 20, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, when the gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state, or during a special game or a small hit game, a normal symbol having a variation time of 3 seconds is set. When the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined and the gaming state is the first time-shortening gaming state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol in which the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set is determined, and when the gaming state is the second time-shortening gaming state. , The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol with the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is determined. Then, when the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 (see FIG. 3) blinks and displays during the fluctuation time set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol. Then, when the winning symbol is determined by the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol display device 32 lights up, and when the lost symbol is determined due to the loss, the ordinary symbol display device 32 is turned on. Turns off.
In this specification, the blinking display of the normal symbol display device 32 is "variation of the normal symbol", the lighting or extinguishing of the normal symbol display device 32 is the "stop display of the normal symbol", and the "stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol". , "Stop changing the normal symbol", etc.

Further, the second start winning opening opening control table 118 is referred to for controlling the operation of the movable piece 16b provided in the second starting winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 is turned on, the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 opens and closes in the manner specified in the second starting winning opening opening control table 118. ing. Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state, or during a special game or a small hit game, as shown in FIG. 18, the starting winning opening solenoid 16c is set to 0.05 seconds (= 0.05). Since the power is turned on (seconds x 1 time), the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 is opened for 0.05 seconds. Further, when the gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 18, the start winning opening solenoid 16c is energized for 0.2 seconds (= 0.2 seconds × 1 time), so that the second start is performed. The movable piece 16b of the winning opening 16 is opened for 0.2 seconds. Further, when the gaming state is the second short-time gaming state, as shown in FIG. 18, the start winning opening solenoid 16c is energized for 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds × 2 times), so that the second start is performed. The movable piece 16b of the winning opening 16 is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds.

As described above, the conditions for opening and closing the second start winning opening 16 are defined for each of the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state. Since the 2 starting winning opening 16 is easily maintained in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the 2nd starting winning opening 16 than in the non-time-saving gaming state.
Further, in the first time-saving gaming state of the time-saving gaming state, the second start winning opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the non-time-saving gaming state, but compared to the second time-saving gaming state of the time-saving gaming state. It is difficult to keep the second starting winning opening 16 in the open state. That is, during the first time-saving game state, it is easier to enter the second start winning opening 16 than during the non-time-saving game state, and during the second time-saving game state, the second start winning opening is easier than during the first time-saving game state. It is easy to enter the ball 16. Therefore, during the second time-shortening game state, the decrease of the game ball with the progress of the game is suppressed more than during the non-time-saving game state and the first time-shortening game state, and during the first time-shortening game state, than during the non-time-saving game state. However, you will be able to get the chance to win or lose the lottery.

When the gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state, as described above, as a process for facilitating the maintenance of the second starting winning opening 16 in the open state, the second determination table 116b and the third determination table 116c are performed. Lottery of ordinary symbols by (hit determination random number judgment table 116 set to have a higher probability of winning than the non-short game state), variable time for the first short game state and variable time for the second short game state (non-short game state) Determination of (variation time shorter than the time-saving game state), and opening by the opening pattern for the first time-saving game state and the opening pattern for the second time-saving game state (opening pattern with a longer total opening time than the non-time-saving gaming state). Although all of the control has been performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the above-mentioned processes may be performed.

(Outline of processing in pachinko machine P)
Next, an outline of the processing executed on the main control board 100 with the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game, normal figure game, and special game will be described with reference to a flowchart.
First, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be described.
When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

In step 100, as an initialization process, the main CPU 101 reads a boot program from the main ROM 102 in response to a power-on, initializes a flag stored in the main RAM 103, and transmits various types to the sub-control board 300. The command is stored in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number referred to when updating the special symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the special symbol random number is for determining the initial value of the special symbol random number. That is, the special symbol random number is updated with the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at the time of starting the update as the initial value. Then, when one round of this random number range is performed, the update of the special symbol random number is continued with the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that time as the initial value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 102.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern. Then, when the processing of step 102 is completed, the processing of step 101 and step 102 is repeatedly executed until the predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 100 generates a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment), which is shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20. The timer interrupt process is executed.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 executes a timer update process for updating various timer counters. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 201.
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer, and the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 is executed, and the subtraction is stopped when it reaches 0. It has become.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding "1", and when the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" and the random number counter makes one round. Updates the random number from the value of the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that time. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 202.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an input to the gate detection sensor 20a, the first start winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the specific area detection sensor 57a, and based on this, Performs the sensor detection processing that performs the predetermined processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 executes a special figure-related control process for controlling the special figure game, the special game, and the small hit game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes a normal map-related control process for controlling the normal map game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes error-related processing for controlling the occurrence and cancellation of various errors. Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives a door opening command based on the opening of the front door 3 or a saucer full tank command based on the full tank state of the saucer 7, the main CPU 101 specifies a corresponding error. A command (for example, a door open command, a saucer full tank command, etc.) is generated and stored (set) in the production transmission data storage area. Further, when the main control board 100 no longer receives the above command, the main CPU 101 generates a corresponding error release designation command (for example, a door closing command, a full tank release command, etc.) and stores transmission data for effect. Store in the area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 206.

In step 206, when the detection signals from the general winning opening detection sensor 14a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the large winning opening detection sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101, the said The main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counter provided corresponding to each detection signal, and transmits a payout number designation command corresponding to each detection signal to the firing payout control board 200. When the prize ball is paid out by the launch payout control board 200, a payout command is transmitted to the main control board 100 for each payout, and when the main CPU 101 receives the payout command, the prize ball counter is subtracted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 has external information data for outputting the gaming state of the pachinko machine P to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and start winning opening solenoid data for opening and closing the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16. , Large winning opening solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 18, various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, ordinary symbol display device 32, first special symbol hold display). Creation of display data and the like of the device 38, the second special figure hold display device 39, and the ordinary symbol hold display device 33) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 performs output control processing such as port output for outputting a signal of each data created in step 207 above, and command transmission for transmitting a command stored in the transmission data storage area for effect. To execute. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 is completed.

Next, the sensor detection processing in step 202 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes a gate detection time process for drawing a lottery of ordinary symbols based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 20. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes a process at the time of detecting a first start winning opening for performing a winning / failing lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting winning opening 15. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a process at the time of detecting a second start winning opening for performing a winning / failing lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening 16. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a specific area detection time process for performing a predetermined process based on the game ball entering the specific area 57. Then, the sensor detection processing is terminated.

Next, the gate detection processing in step 300 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has not been input, the gate detection processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter (that is, the current normal figure hold number) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the gate detection processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than 4, the process proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the normal figure hold number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 acquires a winning determination random number, stores it in the normal figure hold storage area, and ends the gate detection processing.

Next, the process at the time of detecting the first start winning opening in step 301 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start winning opening detection sensor 15a is input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the first start winning opening detection sensor 15a is not input, the processing at the time of detecting the first starting winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the first start winning opening detection sensor 15a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the first hold number counter (that is, the first hold number at the present time) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the first start winning opening detection processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first hold number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit / fail random number and stores it in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 201 and stores it in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area in which the winning / failing random number is stored in the above-mentioned step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the variation pattern random number updated in the above-mentioned step 102, and stores it in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area in which the winning / failing random number is stored in the above-mentioned step 503. From the above, the acquired hit / fail random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers are all stored in the same storage unit of the first reserved storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the first special figure random number and the first time-saving symbol random number are stored and stores them in the transmission data storage area for effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state or the first time saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that neither the non-time-saving gaming state nor the first time-saving gaming state (that is, the second time-saving gaming state) is determined, the processing at the time of detecting the first start winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the non-short game state or the first short game state, the process proceeds to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 regarding the stored first special figure random number, before the start of fluctuation based on the first special figure random number (at the time when the first special figure random number is acquired (stored as hold)). The pre-judgment process for making various judgments regarding the winning / failing lottery is executed. Then, the processing at the time of detecting the first start winning opening is completed.

Next, the process at the time of detecting the second starting winning opening in step 302 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start winning opening detection sensor 16a is input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second start winning opening detection sensor 16a is not input, the processing at the time of detecting the second starting winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the second start winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601 the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the second hold number counter (that is, the second hold number at the present time) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the second start winning opening detection processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second hold number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit / fail random number and stores it in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 201 and stores it in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area in which the winning / failing random number is stored in the above-mentioned step 603. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the variation pattern random number updated in the above-mentioned step 102, and stores it in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area in which the winning / failing random number is stored in the above-mentioned step 603. From the above, the acquired hit / fail random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers are all stored in the same storage unit of the second reserved storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the second special figure random number has been stored and stores it in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that the game is not in the second time-saving game state (that is, it is in the non-time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state), the processing at the time of detecting the second start winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the second short game state, the process proceeds to the next step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 regarding the stored second special figure random number, before the start of the fluctuation based on the second special figure random number (at the time when the second special figure random number is acquired (stored as hold)). The pre-judgment process for making various judgments regarding the winning / failing lottery is executed. Then, the processing at the time of detecting the second start winning opening is completed.

Next, the pre-determination process of step 508 and step 608 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the pre-determination process of step 508 described above, the following process is executed based on the hit / miss random number, the special symbol random number, the variable pattern random number, and the first reserved number stored in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area. In the pre-determination process of step 608 described above, the following process is executed based on the hit / miss random number, the special symbol random number, the variable pattern random number, and the second reserved number stored in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area. Will be done.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 uses the type of starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 15, second starting winning opening 16), the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number), and the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) in which the game ball has entered. , Check the gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability time-saving gaming state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 651.

In step 651, the main CPU 101 corresponds to any of the set values set in the hit / miss random number determination table 110 and the gaming state confirmed in step 650 described above (tables A1 to A6, tables B1 to B6). Either) is acquired, and a pass / fail determination process for determining the result of the win / fail lottery is executed based on the acquired table and the stored win / fail random numbers. After that, the data related to the result of the determination (winning of big hit, winning of small hit, winning of time saving or loss) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Even in this pre-determination process, the determination of whether or not the time reduction is granted is performed only when the gaming state confirmed in step 650 (that is, the gaming state set at that time) is the normal gaming state. It is not performed when the game state is other than the normal game state. Therefore, in the case of a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the result of either a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is derived. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 652.
In step 652, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning opening in which the game ball enters is the first starting winning opening 15 (first special figure random number), the first starting winning opening determination table 111a is acquired and the table is used. , Type of big hit symbol (big hit symbol X1, X2, X3), type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1, Y2), type of time saving symbol (time saving symbol J1, J2) based on the stored special symbol random number. , J3, J4, J5, J6), or the type of lost symbol (missing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Further, when the starting winning opening in which the game ball enters is the second starting winning opening 16 (second special figure random number), the second starting winning opening determination table 111b is acquired and stored as the table. Based on the special symbol random number, the type of big hit symbol (big hit symbol X1, X4), the type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time saving symbol (time saving symbol J7), or the lost symbol The type (lost symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Then, the data related to the result of the determination (type of special symbol) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 653.

In step 653, the main CPU 101 determines the game state confirmed in step 650, the type of the starting winning opening into which the game ball has entered, and the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number). Acquires the variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the possibility of establishment of. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 654.
In step 654, the main CPU 101 uses a variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol determined in step 652, the number of holds, the variation pattern table 114 acquired in step 653, and the stored variation pattern random number. The variable pattern command judgment process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 655.

In step 655, the main CPU 101 is a pre-determination command including the type of the special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 652 and the variation pattern command determined in the above-mentioned step 654 as a result of the winning / failing lottery determined in the above-mentioned step 612. Is stored in the transmission data storage area for production. Then, the pre-determination process is terminated.
As a result of the winning / failing lottery determined at the start of the change of the special symbol for the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number stored as a hold by the above processing, the type of the special symbol and the variation pattern command are the pre-judgment commands. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in advance (that is, before the start of fluctuation) at the time of acquisition of the random number.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the above-mentioned pre-determination process, the pachinko machine P is acquired and stored in the hold storage area (first hold storage area) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15. To determine the second special figure random number acquired based on the first special figure random number or the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 and stored in the hold storage area (second hold storage area). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the pre-determination process, instead of directly determining the random number stored in the reserved storage area, the random number stored in another storage area (for example, a register or the like) may be determined.

Next, the process at the time of detecting a specific area in step 303 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special game is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the special game is not in progress, the processing at the time of detecting a specific area is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special game is in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has not been input a predetermined number of times, the processing at the time of detecting the specific area is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to the next step 672.
In step 672, the main CPU 101 turns on the entry flag indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the specific area 57. Then, the processing at the time of detecting a specific area is terminated.

Next, the special figure-related control process in step 203 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.
In step 700, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) constituting the special figure-related control process is to be executed. Specifically, the execution phase data includes data "00" indicating the execution of the special symbol change start process described later, data "01" indicating the execution of the special symbol change stop process described later, and post-stop processing described later. Data "02" indicating the execution of, data "03" indicating the execution of the special game control process described later, data "04" indicating the execution of the small hit game control process described later, and special game end processing described later. It has data "05" indicating execution.
Then, based on the value of the execution phase data loaded in step 700, the main CPU 101 has a special symbol change start process (step 701), a special symbol change stop process (step 702), a post-stop process (step 703), and a special. Either the game control process (step 704), the small hit game control process (step 705), or the special game end process (step 706) is executed. Then, the special figure-related control process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing of step 701 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “00” indicating the execution of the special symbol variation start process. Then, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "00", the process proceeds to the next step 801. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is not "00", the special symbol change start processing is terminated.
In step 801 the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special figure random number is stored in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area, that is, whether or not the second reserved number counter is "1" or more. .. Then, if it is determined that the second special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special figure random number is stored in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area, that is, whether or not the first reserved number counter is "1" or more. .. Then, if it is determined that the first special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first hold number counter by "1" and executes the shift process of the first hold storage area. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage unit of the first reserved storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the second storage unit of the first reserved storage area is stored. -Each random number stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit having a smaller number. As a result, each random number stored in the first hold storage area is a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO), and is used for the pass / fail determination process described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.

Further, in step 804 which proceeds when it is determined in step 801 above that the second special figure random number is stored, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second hold number counter by "1" and stores the second hold. Execute area shift processing. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage unit of the second reserved storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the second storage unit of the second reserved storage area is stored. -Each random number stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit having a smaller number. As a result, each random number stored in the second hold storage area is a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO), and is used for the pass / fail determination process described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 increments the count value of the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of executions of the winning / failing lottery (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 stores the fluctuation count command including the count value of the fluctuation count counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the fluctuation count command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can grasp the count value of the current fluctuation count counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes a pass / fail determination process for deriving the result of the win / fail lottery. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 807.
In step 807, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning opening in which the game ball enters is the first starting winning opening 15 (first special figure random number), the first starting winning opening determination table 111a is acquired and the table is used. , The result of the winning / failing lottery determined in step 806 (big hit winning, small hit winning, time saving grant winning, loss) and the special symbol stored in the predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804. Based on the random number, the type of big hit symbol (big hit symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time saving symbol (time saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5) , J6), or the type of lost symbol (missing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Further, when the starting winning opening in which the game ball enters is the second starting winning opening 16 (second special figure random number), the second starting winning opening determination table 111b is acquired, and the table and the above-mentioned table are obtained. The result of the winning / failing lottery determined in step 806 (big hit winning, small winning winning, winning of time saving, loss) and the special symbol random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Based on this, the type of jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X1, X4), the type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J7), or the type of lost symbol (missing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Then, the data corresponding to the determined special symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. Further, in this special symbol determination process, the current gaming state, that is, the gaming state at the time when the special symbol is determined is stored in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 808.
In the fluctuation start processing of the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when both the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are stored, the second special figure has priority over the first special figure random number. Random numbers are processed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and random numbers may be processed in the order in which they are stored in the reserved storage area.

In step 808, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating the type of the special symbol determined in step 807 above in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the information related to the determined special symbol type is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the fluctuation. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 809.
In step 809, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random numbers stored in the processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts blinking display, and the special symbol is displayed based on the second special symbol random number. When the variable display is performed, the second special symbol display device 31 starts blinking display. Here, the blinking display means that "-" blinks at predetermined intervals in each display device.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the first special figure random number is stored in the first hold storage area, the first special figure hold display device 38 displays in a manner capable of recognizing the first hold number. When the second special figure random number is stored in the second hold storage area, the second special figure hold display device 39 is displayed in such a manner that the second hold number can be recognized. Then, when the variable display of the above-mentioned special symbol is performed based on the random number of the first special figure, the first special figure is reserved so as to indicate that the number of the first reserved is reduced by one at the same time as the start of the variable display. When the display device 38 is display-controlled and the variation display of the above-mentioned special symbol is performed based on the second special symbol random number, it is indicated that the number of second hold is reduced by one at the same time as the start of the variation display. , The display of the second special figure hold display device 39 is controlled.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 811.

In step 811, the main CPU 101 sets "01" in the execution phase data so that the special symbol variation stop process is executed in the special symbol-related control process, and ends the special symbol variation start process.
Further, in step 812, which proceeds when it is determined in step 802 described above that the first special figure random number is not stored in the first reserved storage area, the main CPU 101 displays the effect based on the fact that the variable display is not performed. The device 21 executes a customer waiting determination process for displaying the customer waiting. Specifically, the main CPU 101 measures the time during which the special symbol variation display is not performed, and when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without the special symbol variation display being performed. Assuming that the customer waiting state is reached, the customer waiting command for displaying the customer waiting screen on the effect display device 21 is stored in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the special symbol change start process is terminated.

Next, the pass / fail determination process of step 806 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 850, the main CPU 101 selects and selects one of the set values set in the hit / miss random number determination table 110 and the current gaming state (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state). Based on the table and the winning / failing random number stored in the predetermined processing area of step 803 or step 804, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won (that is, the jackpot is determined). Execute the judgment process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires information on a numerical range for winning a jackpot from the above table, and determines whether or not the above-mentioned winning / failing random number belongs within the acquired numerical range. Then, when the above-mentioned winning / failing random number belongs within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the jackpot is won, and when the above-mentioned winning / failing random number does not belong within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the jackpot is not won. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 851.
In step 851, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot winning / failing determination process executed in step 850 is whether or not the jackpot was won (that is, whether or not the jackpot was won). Then, if it is determined that the jackpot is not won (the jackpot is not won), the process proceeds to step 853. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the process proceeds to the next step 852.

In step 852, the main 101 stores in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 that a big hit has been won. Then, the pass / fail determination process is terminated.
Further, in step 853, which proceeds when it is determined in step 851 that the jackpot is not won, the main CPU 101 is stored in the table selected in step 850 and a predetermined processing area in step 803 or 804. Based on the winning / failing random number (that is, the same winning / failing random number as the winning / failing random number that was the target of the determination in step 850 above), it is determined whether or not the small hit is won (that is, the winning / failing determination of the small hit). ) Executes the small hit hit / fail judgment process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires the information of the numerical range in which the small hit is won from the above table, and determines whether or not the above-mentioned winning / failing random number belongs to the acquired numerical range. Then, when the above-mentioned winning / failing random number belongs within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the small hit is won, and when the above-mentioned winning / failing random number does not belong within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the small hit is not won. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 854.

In step 854, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the small hit winning / failing determination process executed in step 853 described above is whether or not the small hit was won (that is, whether or not the small hit was won). Then, if it is determined that the small hit is not won (the small hit is not won), the process proceeds to step 856. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit is won, the process proceeds to the next step 855.
In step 855, the main 101 stores in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 that a small hit has been won. Then, the pass / fail determination process is terminated.

Further, in step 856, which proceeds when it is determined in step 854 that the small hit is not won, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state currently set is the normal gaming state. Then, if it is determined that the game is not in the normal gaming state (that is, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, or the high-probability time-saving gaming state), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to the next step 857.
In step 857, the main CPU 101 is a hit / miss random number stored in the table selected in the above-mentioned step 850 and the predetermined processing area of the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804 (that is, the target of determination in the above-mentioned steps 850 and 853). Based on the winning / failing random number that is the same as the winning / failing random number), it is determined whether or not the time saving grant is won (that is, the winning / failing of the time saving grant is determined). Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires information in a numerical range for winning the time saving from the above table, and determines whether or not the above-mentioned hit / fail random number belongs to the acquired numerical range. Then, when the above-mentioned hit / fail random number belongs within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the time saving is won, and when the above-mentioned winning / failing random number does not belong within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the time saving is not won. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 858.

In step 858, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the time saving grant winning / failing determination process executed in step 857 is whether or not the time saving grant is won (that is, whether or not the time saving grant is won). Then, if it is determined that the time saving grant is not won (small hit non-winning), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction is granted, the process proceeds to the next step 859.
In step 859, the main 101 stores in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 that the time saving is won. Then, the pass / fail determination process is terminated.

Further, in step 860, which proceeds when it is determined in step 856 described above that the game is not in the normal gaming state, or when it is determined in step 858 above that the time saving grant has not been won, the main CPU 101 has a predetermined storage of the main RAM 103. Remember that the area is lost. Then, the pass / fail determination process is terminated.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the jackpot hit / fail determination process, the small hit hit / fail determination process, and the time saving grant hit / fail determination process are all set values and the hit / miss random number determination table 110 corresponding to the game state. Is executed by a common processing program (same module) for selecting, acquiring information in the numerical range to be determined, and determining whether or not a random number belongs to the numerical range. It has become like.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process of step 809 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 uses the type of starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 15, second starting winning opening 16), the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number), and the game. Check the states (normal game state, first low-probability time-saving game state, second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 determines the game state confirmed in step 900, the type of the starting winning opening into which the game ball has entered, and the above-mentioned continuous jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number). Acquires the variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the possibility of establishment of. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 includes the fluctuation pattern table 114 acquired in step 901, the type of the special symbol determined in step 807, the number of reservations confirmed in step 900, and step 803. Alternatively, a variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern random number stored in the processing area in 804, and the determined variation pattern command is stored in a predetermined processing area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 903.
In step 903, the main CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command determined in step 902 above in the transmission data storage area for effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 904.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time associated with the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern table 114. Then, the determined fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time timer counter. Then, the fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing of step 702 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data "01" indicating the execution of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "01", the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "01", the process proceeds to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time timer counter in step 904 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the special symbol determined in step 807 on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, and the special symbol. Executes the stop display of. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been determined in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1004.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display time for displaying the stop display of the special symbol in the stop display time timer counter. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the determined special symbol is a time-saving symbol (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7), a stop display time of 3 seconds is set, and in other cases, 0. The stop display time of 5 seconds is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1005.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets "02" in the execution phase data so that the post-stop processing is executed in the special figure-related control processing. Then, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing of step 703 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “02” indicating the execution of the post-stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "02", the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "02", the process proceeds to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter in step 1004 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores a stop display end command indicating that the stop display time has elapsed in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the fact that the stop display time has elapsed is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, the main CPU 101 stores the current gaming state in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes the time saving number update process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a first time-saving game flag indicating that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, or a second time-saving gaming state indicating that the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. Determine if any of the game flags are on. Then, when it is determined that the first time saving game flag or the second time saving game flag is turned on, the time saving number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. In this time-saving number storage area, the remaining number of fluctuations until the time-saving gaming state ends is stored. Then, the remaining number of fluctuations stored is decremented by "1". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" due to the update of the remaining number of fluctuations, the process of turning off the first time-shortening game flag or the second time-saving game flag that has been turned on is also executed. Further, when it is determined that neither the first time saving game flag nor the second time saving game flag is turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1104.

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs a high-accuracy number of update processing. Here, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game flag indicating that the current game state is the high-probability game state is turned on. Then, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is turned on, the high probability number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. In this high-probability number storage area, the remaining number of fluctuations until the high-probability gaming state ends is stored. Then, this memorized remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" due to the update of the remaining number of fluctuations, the process of turning off the high probability game flag is also executed. Further, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1105.

In step 1105, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is not a big hit symbol (that is, it is a small hit symbol, a time saving symbol, or a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.
In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot winning command for transmitting the game state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of jackpot symbol displayed stopped (big hit symbols X1, X2, X3, X4) to the sub-control board 300. do. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1107.

In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current gaming state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1108.
In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and issues an opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. Remember in. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1109.

In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "10" as the number of rounds if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X1 or X2, and if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X3 or X4, it is a round. Set "4" as the number. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1110.
In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets "03" in the execution phase data so that the special game control process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 1111 to proceed when it is determined that the special symbol stopped and displayed in step 1105 is not a big hit symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a small hit symbol. do. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is not a small hit symbol (that is, it is a time-saving symbol or a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 1114. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a small hit symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1112.
In step 1112, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the small hit game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores the opening command indicating that the opening process is started for the effect transmission data. Store in the area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1113.

In step 1113, the main CPU 101 sets "04" in the execution phase data so that the small hit game control process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 1114 to proceed when it is determined that the special symbol stopped and displayed in step 1111 is not a small hit symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a time-saving symbol. do. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a time-saving symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 1116. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a time-saving symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1115.
In step 1115, the main CPU 101 executes the first low-probability time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the first low-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, the first time saving game flag is turned on, and if the time saving symbol displayed as stopped is J1, the time saving number is set to "10", and the time saving symbol displayed as stopped is J2. If, "20" is set for the number of time reductions, "30" is set for the number of time reductions if the time reduction symbol that is stopped and displayed is J3, and if the time reduction symbol that is stopped and displayed is J4. Is set to "50" for the number of time reductions, "100" is set for the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol displayed for stop is J5, and "100" is set for the number of time reductions displayed. "1000" is set for the number of time reductions, and "1" is set for the number of time reductions when the stop-displayed time reduction symbol is J7. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1116.

In step 1116, the main CPU 101 confirms the set game state, and stores the game state command indicating the game state in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1117.
In step 1117, the main CPU 101 sets "00" in the execution phase data so that the special symbol variation start process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the special game control process of step 704 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data "03" indicating the execution of the special game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "03", the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "03", the process proceeds to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1108 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending process, which is a standby process performed after all round games are completed, is in progress in this special game control process. Then, if it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process proceeds to step 1210. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1203.
In step 1203, the main CPU 101 opens / closes the special winning opening 18 and operates the distribution member 59 based on the special electric accessory operating table 112 according to the type of the jackpot symbol displayed as stopped. To execute. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1204.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the time when the round game is started based on the big winning opening opening / closing control of the above-mentioned step 1203. Then, if it is determined that the round game has not started, the process proceeds to step 1206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game has started, the process proceeds to the next step 1205.
In step 1205, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command indicating the start of the round game in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1206.
The round game start command is provided for each number of round games, so that the number of round games started can be transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

In step 1206, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the round game is completed based on the large winning opening opening / closing control in step 1203 described above. Then, when it is determined that the round game is not completed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game is completed, the process proceeds to the next step 1207.
In step 1207, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1208.

In step 1208, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of rounds decremented in step 1207 described above is "0". Then, when it is determined that the number of rounds is not "0", the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of rounds is "0", the process proceeds to the next step 1209.
In step 1209, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and sets the ending command indicating that the ending process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. Remember. Then, the special game control process is terminated.

Further, in step 1210, which proceeds when it is determined that the ending process is in progress in step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1209 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1211.
In step 1211, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end command indicating that the special game has ended in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1212.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets "05" in the execution phase data so that the special game end process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the special game control process is terminated.

Next, the small hit game control process in step 705 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.
In step 1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “04” indicating the execution of the small hit game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "04", the small hit game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "04", the process proceeds to the next step 1251.
In step 1251, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1112 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1252.

In step 1252, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending process, which is the standby process performed after the opening and closing of the large winning opening 18 is completed in the small hit game control process, is in progress. Then, if it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process proceeds to step 1256. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1253.
In step 1253, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit game execution process for opening and closing the large winning opening 18 based on the fourth operating table 112d in the special electric accessory operating table 112. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1254.

In step 1254, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening / closing of the large winning opening 18 has been completed. Then, when it is determined that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 18 has not been completed, the small hit game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 18 is completed, the process proceeds to the next step 1255.
In step 1255, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the small hit game, in the ending time timer counter, and issues an ending command indicating that the ending process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. Remember in. Then, the small hit game control process is terminated.

Further, in step 1256, which proceeds when it is determined that the ending process is in progress in step 1252, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1255 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the small hit game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1257.
In step 1257, the main CPU 101 stores a small hit game end command indicating that the small hit game has ended in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1258.

In step 1258, the main CPU 101 confirms the set game state, and stores the game state command indicating the game state in the production transmission data storage area. Further, the main CPU 101 sets "00" in the execution phase data so that the special symbol variation process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the small hit game control process is terminated.

Next, the special game end process of step 705 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the execution phase data is the data “05” indicating the execution of the special game end process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "05", the special game end process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "05", the process proceeds to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the entry flag is on. Then, if it is determined that the entry flag is not on (that is, it is off), the process proceeds to step 1309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entry flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter for counting the continuous probability variation setting count, and the value of the continuous time reduction setting counter for counting the continuous time reduction setting number. 1 decrement. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1303.
In step 1303, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the continuous probability variation setting counter has reached 0, that is, whether or not the continuous probability variation setting count has reached a predetermined upper limit. Then, if it is determined that the value of the continuous probability change setting number counter has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step 1305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous probability change setting number counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1304.

In step 1304, the main CPU 101 executes a low-probability gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. Specifically, the high probability game flag is turned off. Further, the main CPU 101 sets "10000", which is a predetermined upper limit number, in the continuous probability variation setting number counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1306.
Further, in step 1305, which proceeds when it is determined in step 1303 that the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has not reached 0, a high-probability gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is executed. .. Specifically, the high-accuracy game flag is turned on and "10000" is set for the high-accuracy number of times. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1306.

In step 1306, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the continuous time reduction setting number counter has reached 0, that is, whether or not the continuous time reduction setting number has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, if it is determined that the value of the continuous time reduction setting number counter has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step 1308. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous time reduction setting number counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1307.
In step 1307, the main CPU 101 executes a non-time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the non-time-saving game state. Specifically, the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off. Further, the main CPU 101 sets "10000", which is a predetermined upper limit number, in the continuous time reduction setting number counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.

Further, in step 1308, which proceeds when it is determined in step 1306 that the value of the continuous time reduction setting number counter has not reached 0, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the second time reduction game state. Execute the status setting process. Specifically, the second time saving game flag is turned on, and "10000" is set for the number of time saving games. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.
Further, in step 1309 which proceeds when it is determined in step 1301 that the approach flag is not on, the main CPU 101 executes the same low-probability time-saving game state setting process as in step 1304, and the continuous probability change setting number counter. Is set to "10000", which is a predetermined upper limit number of times. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1310.

In step 1310, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving / non-time-saving game state setting process for setting the gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot is X2 or X3, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the reduced working hours game state (first reduced working hours gaming state), the second reduced working hours gaming state is set. In order to set it, the second time reduction game flag is turned on and "10000" is set for the number of time reductions. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the non-time saving game state, the first time saving game flag and the second time saving game flag are turned off in order to set the non-time saving game state. If the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot is X4, the second time reduction game flag is turned on and "100" is set for the number of time reductions in order to set the second time reduction game state. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.
In step 1311, the main CPU 101 has a high-probability time-saving gaming state (high-probability gaming state and second time-saving gaming state) or a second low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and second time-saving gaming state) in which the set gaming state is set. ) Is one of them. Then, if it is determined that neither is the case, the process proceeds to step 1313. On the other hand, if it is determined to be any of the above, the process proceeds to the next step 1312.

In step 1312, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the continuous jackpot count counter for counting the number of consecutive jackpots by one. When the value of the continuous jackpot count counter reaches a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the above-mentioned continuous jackpot count condition is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step 1314.
Further, in step 1313, which proceeds when it is determined that the gaming state set in step 1311 is neither a high-probability time-saving gaming state nor a second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 is the value of the continuous jackpot count counter. Is reset (zero clear). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1314.

In step 1314, the main CPU 101 turns off the entry flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1315.
In step 1315, the main CPU 101 sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area according to the game state set as described above. This game state specification command includes information on turning on or off the high-accuracy game flag, information on turning on or off the first time-saving game flag, and information on turning on or off the second time-saving game flag, which are set as described above. , High accuracy count, time saving count information is included. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1316.

In step 1316, the main CPU 101 sets "00" in the execution phase data so that the variation start process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the special game end process is terminated.

Next, the normal diagram-related control process in step 204 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the normal diagram execution phase data. This normal map execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) constituting the normal map related control process is to be executed. Specifically, the normal symbol execution phase data includes data “10” indicating the execution of the normal symbol change start process described later, data “11” indicating the execution of the normal symbol change stop process described later, and ordinary data described later. It has data "12" indicating the execution of the symbol post-stop processing and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control processing described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 is based on the value of the normal symbol execution phase data loaded in the above-mentioned step 1400, the normal symbol change start process (step 1401), the normal symbol change stop process (step 1402), and the normal symbol stop post-process (step 1402). Either 1403) or the movable piece control process (step 1404) is executed. Then, the control process related to the normal map is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing in step 1401 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol execution phase data is "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation start process. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "10", the normal symbol change start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal map execution phase data is "10", the process proceeds to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determined random number is stored in the normal figure hold storage area, that is, whether or not the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol hold number counter is not "1" or more (that is, "0"), the normal symbol change start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved numbers counter is "1" or more, the process proceeds to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the normal figure hold number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process of the reserved storage area of the normal figure. Specifically, the hit determination random number stored in the first storage unit is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the hit determination random number stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored. The determined random number is shifted to a storage unit having a smaller number. As a result, the winning determination random number stored in the normal figure hold storage area is a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO), and is used for the winning determination process described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 uses the hit determination random number determination table 116 (first) corresponding to the current state (non-time saving game state, first time saving game state, second time saving game state, special game, small hit game). The determination table 116a, the second determination table 116b, or the third determination table 116c) is selected, and the normal symbol is based on the selected table and the winning determination random number stored in the processing area in step 1503 described above. The winning determination process for deriving the result of the lottery is executed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the first determination table 116a when the non-time-saving game state, the special game, or the small hit game is in progress, and when the first time-saving game state is in progress, the main CPU 101 refers to the first determination table 116a. The second determination table 116b is referred to, and when the second time-saving game state is in progress, the third determination table 116c is referred to to determine the winning determination random number stored in the processing area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the winning determination process in step 1504 described above is a hit. Then, if it is determined to be a hit, the process proceeds to the next step 1506. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit (that is, loss), the process proceeds to step 1507.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 stores the winning symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to step 1508.
Further, in step 1507, which proceeds when it is determined in step 1505 that the result of the winning determination process is not a hit (that is, loss), the main CPU 101 stores the loss symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 confirms whether the current state of the pachinko machine P is a non-time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a special game, or a small hit game. , The fluctuation time of the normal symbol according to the current state of the pachinko machine P is set in the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 117. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is in the non-time saving game state, the special game, or the small hit game, the main CPU 101 sets "3 seconds" in the normal figure fluctuation time counter, and is in the first time saving game state. In some cases, "2 seconds" is set in the normal map fluctuation time counter, and "0.6 seconds" is set in the normal map fluctuation time counter in the second time-shortening game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1509.
In step 1509, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of a normal symbol. As a result, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol display device 32 starts blinking display. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the winning determination random number is stored in the normal figure hold storage area, the normal symbol hold display device 33 is displayed in such a manner that the number of normal figure hold can be recognized. It has become. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is performed, the display control of the normal symbol hold display device 33 is performed so as to indicate that the number of reserved symbols is reduced by one at the same time as the start of the variation display. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1510.

In step 1510, the main CPU 101 stores the current state of the pachinko machine P as the state of the pachinko machine P at the start of fluctuation in the gaming machine state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1511.
In step 1511, the main CPU 101 sets "11" in the normal map execution phase data so that the normal symbol fluctuation stop process is executed in the normal map related control process. Then, the normal symbol change start process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop process in step 1402 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol execution phase data is the data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "11", the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal map execution phase data is "11", the process proceeds to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter in step 1508 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data for displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 32, and executes the stop display of the normal symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the variable stop display time for stopping and displaying the normal symbol in the normal figure stop display time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets "12" in the normal map execution phase data so that the normal symbol post-stop processing is executed in the normal symbol-related control process. Then, the normal symbol fluctuation stop process is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing of the normal symbol in step 1403 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol execution phase data is the data “12” indicating the execution of the normal symbol post-stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "12", the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal map execution phase data is "12", the process proceeds to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable stop display time set in the normal figure stop display time timer counter has elapsed in step 1603 described above. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop display time has not elapsed, the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol displayed as stopped is a hit symbol. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is not a hit symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 1704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol displayed as stopped is a winning symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets "13" in the normal map execution phase data so that the movable piece control process is executed in the normal map related control process. Then, the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 1704, which proceeds when it is determined that the normal symbol stopped and displayed in step 1702 is not a hit symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the main CPU 101 starts the normal symbol change in the normal symbol-related control process. "10" is set in the general diagram execution phase data so that the process is executed. Then, the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the movable piece control process in step 1404 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal figure execution phase data is the data “13” indicating the execution of the movable piece control process. Then, when it is determined that the normal figure execution phase data is not "13", the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal map execution phase data is "13", the process proceeds to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the movable piece 16b is in operation control, that is, whether or not the start winning opening solenoid 16c is energized. Then, if it is determined that the movable piece 16b is in operation control, the process proceeds to step 1804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the movable piece 16b is not under operation control, the process proceeds to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, in the main CPU 101, the state of the pachinko machine P at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in the non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state, the special game, or the small hit game. Check which one it was. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the second start winning opening opening control table 118, and energization control data (opening data) of the starting winning opening solenoid 16c according to the state of the pachinko machine P confirmed in step 1802 described above. , The number of times of energization (number of times of opening) and the time of energization (opening time) are set. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

Further, in step 1804 when it is determined in step 1801 that the movable piece 16b is in operation control, whether or not the main CPU 101 has elapsed the energization time (opening time) set in step 1803. To judge. Then, when it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 executes the stop of the operation of the movable piece 16b, that is, the stop of the energization of the start winning opening solenoid 16c. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets "10" in the normal map execution phase data so that the normal symbol variation start process is executed in the normal map related control process. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

(Playability of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined) and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and the first time-saving) A game state that combines game states), a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a second time-shortening game state), or a high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state). One of the game states), which is a combination of the game states), is set so that the game progresses.

At the time when the player starts the game, the normal game state is often set. During this normal gaming state, as described above, the launch of the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the gaming ball is launched in accordance with this, the gaming ball is , There is a possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning opening 16. Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3 are determined (see FIG. 12A). .. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the specific area 57, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined. If this is the case, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the normal game state (see FIGS. 14A and 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the left-handed hit is performed as instructed during the normal gaming state, the pachinko machine P will shift to the normal gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state by winning the jackpot (Fig.). 41). However, since the jackpot symbol X1 is determined at 1% of the case where the jackpot is won (see FIG. 12 (a)), even if the jackpot is won during the normal gaming state, the probability of time is shortened. It is extremely difficult to shift to the game state.

Here, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state, the winning / failing of the time saving grant is determined in the winning / failing lottery, and the winning of the time saving grant is determined with a probability of about 1/100. (See FIGS. 6 (a), 7 (a), 8 (a), 9 (a), 10 (a), 11 (a)). Then, when the time saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 are determined, the gaming state is set to the first low probability time saving gaming state without going through the jackpot and the special game. At the same time, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 10 times without winning the jackpot, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. The first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 20 times without winning the jackpot, and when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state However, if the result of the win / fail lottery is derived 30 times without winning the jackpot and the time saving symbol J4 is determined, the first low probability time saving game state will be the winning / failing lottery without winning the jackpot. If the time-saving symbol J5 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 100 times without winning the jackpot. However, when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 1000 times without winning the jackpot, and the time-saving symbol J7 is determined. The first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived once without winning the jackpot.

Further, during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the first game area 12a (left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game ball is launched. Is a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, as in the normal gaming state. Then, when the jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined as in the normal gaming state, and the determination probability of each jackpot symbol (determination of the jackpot symbol X1). Since the probability is 1% and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is 99%) is the same as in the normal gaming state, if the jackpot is won during the first low probability time-saving gaming state, the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined (see FIG. 12 (a)). When the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state, so that the gaming state after the end of the special game is the second. It is set to a low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-savings is set to 10,000 (see FIGS. 14 (b) and 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the time-saving symbol J2 is determined until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 10 times. If the result is drawn, the time saving symbol J4 is determined until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 20 times, and if the time saving symbol J3 is determined, until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 30 times. In the case, when the time saving symbol J6 is determined until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 50 times, or until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 100 times when the time saving symbol J5 is determined. If you win the jackpot until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 1000 times, and if the time saving symbol J7 is determined, until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived once), it is almost the second low. It will shift to the probability time reduction game state (see FIG. 41).

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game is played. The ball may enter the second starting winning opening 16 and does not enter the first starting winning opening 15. Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 12 (b)). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving game state in the same manner as described above, and the time-saving number of times is set. Is set to 10,000 times. Further, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game is set again to the second low-probability time-saving game state without the predetermined number of game balls entering the specific area 57, and the time-saving. The number of times is set to 100 (see FIG. 14 (c) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the right-handed hit is performed as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, is the second low-probability time-saving game state reset by winning the jackpot? Or, it will shift to a high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 41). Here, when shifting from the first low-probability time-saving gaming state to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000 times, and during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state or the first low probability Since the second start winning opening 16 is much easier to be maintained in the open state than in the time-saving game state, the next big hit can be almost certainly won while suppressing the decrease in the game balls as the game progresses. Since the jackpot symbol X1 is determined by 70% of the case where the jackpot is won (see FIG. 12B), the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the jackpot is won during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. It is easy to shift to a high-probability time-saving game state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed) is instructed, and the game ball is launched according to this. As long as there is, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 12 (b)). ). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving game state again, and the number of time reductions is 10,000. Set to times. Further, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time reductions is 100. It is set to times (see FIG. 12 (c), FIG. 41).
During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the next big hit can be almost certainly won while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls.

Further, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state with 100 times of time reduction is set (FIG. 12 (c)). (See FIG. 41), if a big hit is won before the winning / failing lottery is performed 100 times, it can be expected that the game will shift to the high-probability time-saving gaming state again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state, the first low is determined by winning the time saving grant based on the winning / losing lottery (time saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7). Aiming to shift to the probability time saving game state, during the first low probability time saving game state (until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, 1000 times or once) ) To win the jackpot to move to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and then to continue the second low-probability time-saving game state and high-probability time-saving game state to acquire many game balls. Innovative playability is given. That is, the first low-probability time-saving game state, which can be changed from the normal game state without going through a jackpot winning or special game, shifts to the second low-probability time-saving game state or high-probability time-saving game state, which is advantageous for the player. It is given a playability that serves as a chance zone for the player, and can enhance the interest of the player.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the winning / failing of the time saving grant is determined in the winning / losing lottery during the normal gaming state, and the winning / losing of the time saving is won by the winning / losing lottery, and the time saving symbols J1, J2, J3. , J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined, it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. In addition to giving a novel impression to the person, there are abundant variations in the transition to the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to provide unprecedented playability.
Further, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the winning / failing lottery, when the winning / failing of the jackpot is determined based on the winning / failing random number and it is determined that the jackpot is not won, the same winning / losing is the same during the normal gaming state. Since the judgment of whether or not the time reduction is given is performed based on the random numbers, the types of random numbers used for making various judgments can be suppressed, and the load on the hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 can be reduced. can do.
Further, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, since the probability of winning the time saving grant is the same regardless of the set value, the set value is set by setting the time saving game state without going through the big hit winning. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the gambling becomes too high when a predetermined set value is set due to a change in the advantage of each.

(Outline of production in pachinko machine P)
As described above, by executing various processes on the main control board 100, the special figure game, the normal figure game, the special game, and the small hit game proceed. Then, during the progress of these games, various commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 receives these commands, so that the sub-control board 300 advances the game. Control the production that accompanies.
In the following, it can be executed together with the variable effect that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol and can notify the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the variable effect when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the time saving grant, and the time saving is given. And a special notification effect capable of notifying the number of time reductions in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state based on the winning will be described.

(Outline of variable production)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, during the variable display of the special symbol, a variable effect capable of notifying the result of the winning / failing lottery is executed according to the display mode of the effect symbol 50. In this variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol 50 (dummy symbol) is performed so as to be superimposed on the background image displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21. Then, the result of the winning / failing lottery can be notified to the player by the combination of the effect symbols 50 which are stopped and displayed after the variable display (stop display mode).

Specifically, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of all the effect symbols 50 is started from the state in which all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed (FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), 43 (a) and 43 (b)). The downward arrow in the figure indicates that the effect symbol 50 is displayed to scroll from the upper side to the lower side.
After that, the effect symbol 50 located on the left side (hereinafter referred to as the first stop symbol), the effect symbol 50 located on the right side (hereinafter referred to as the second stop symbol), and the effect symbol 50 located in the center (hereinafter referred to as the third stop symbol). ) Is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 42 (c) to (e) and FIGS. 43 (c) to (e)).

If the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (see FIG. 43 (e)). That is, all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, so that it is notified that the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit.

Further, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a loss, not all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (see FIG. 42 (e)). That is, at least one effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other effect symbols 50, indicating that the result of the winning / failing lottery is lost. It should be noted that the above-mentioned stop display mode does not positively notify that the result of the winning / failing lottery is a loss, but simply makes the player recognize that the result is a loss (not a big hit or a small hit). Is.
Further, although not particularly shown, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit, a specific mode indicating that fact (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same symbol). The effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed by a combination in which the third stop symbol is a special symbol indicating the winning of a small hit, etc.). That is, when the effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, it is notified that the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit.
The stop display mode of the effect symbol 50 in the case of winning a small hit is not limited to the above contents, and is the same as in the case where the result of the winning / failing lottery is a loss (that is, at least one effect symbol 50). May be stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other effect symbols 50). As a result, the player may not be able to grasp whether the result of the winning / failing lottery is a loss or a small hit depending on the stop display mode of the effect symbol 50.

In addition, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning with a reduced working hours, a special mode indicating that fact (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same odd-numbered symbols other than "7", and the first 3 The production symbol 50 is stopped and displayed by the combination in which the stop symbol is "7", etc.), and the setting image (for example, "CHANCE ZONE rush !!" (Character image, etc.) is displayed (see FIGS. 44 (g) to (h)), and the number of time reductions is further notified (see FIG. 44 (i)). That is, by displaying the effect symbol 50 in a special manner and displaying the above-mentioned setting image, it is notified that the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the time saving grant, and the number of time saving is notified. , The determined type of time saving symbol is notified.

Further, the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed almost at the same time as the stop display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 prior to the stop display of the effect symbol 50, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is grasped by the type of the special symbol. It is preventing that.

(Aspects of the first half of the variable production)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the first stop symbol and the second stop are as modes of the first half of the fluctuation effect (from the start of the variation effect to the stop display of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol). A reach-less pattern in which a symbol different from the symbol is stopped and displayed, and a reach variation pattern in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (so-called reach display is performed) are provided. There is.

A plurality of types are provided for each of the non-reach pattern and the reach variation pattern, and various methods of variation and the like are set.
Specifically, as the non-reach pattern, the non-reach pattern A in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed with different symbols without any particular change in the way of fluctuation or the display content of the effect symbol 50. , All the effect symbols 50 are temporarily stopped in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are provisionally stopped with a symbol having a different number, and the third stop symbol is a provisional stop suggesting a temporary stop. The first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are different symbols after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in which the display of the mode of restarting the variable display (temporarily stopped at the stop symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). A non-reach pattern B that is stopped and displayed is provided.
Further, as the reach variation pattern, the reach variation pattern A in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol without any particular change in the variation method or the display content of the effect symbol 50, described above. A reach variation pattern B is provided in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed with different symbols after the pseudo-continuous effect of the above is executed.

It should be noted that various times and various time points may be set for the number of times the temporary stop is performed and the timing at which the temporary stop is performed in the pseudo-continuous production. In addition, it is set so that the pseudo-continuous effect in which the above-mentioned temporary stop is performed a specific number of times (for example, 4 times) is executed only when the jackpot is won or the time reduction is granted, and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. When executed, it may be possible to know that the winning of the big hit or the winning of the time saving grant has been confirmed. In addition, a pseudo-continuous effect is provided in which the third stop symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach display is performed, and then the variable display is restarted. It may be set so that the execution ratio of the continuous production is high.
Further, the no-reach pattern and the reach variation pattern are not limited to the above-mentioned aspects. For example, as the reach variation pattern, the reach display in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol is not performed, and instead of displaying the reach, a predetermined image indicating that reach has occurred is displayed. A mode or the like for notifying by displaying may be provided.

(Aspect of the latter half of the variable production)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the mode of the first half of the variation effect is a non-reach pattern, the second half of the variation effect (the second stop symbol is stopped and then the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed). As an aspect of (up to)), a normal loss pattern is provided in which the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified that the result of the winning / failing lottery is lost by displaying the third stop symbol as it is (see FIG. 42).
When the mode of the first half of the variation effect is the reach variation pattern, as the aspect of the second half of the variation effect, after the reach display, a predetermined development effect image is displayed on the effect display device 21 together with the variation display of the third stop symbol. The reach development effect is executed, and there is a development pattern (see FIG. 44) that informs that the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit winning, a small winning winning, a winning of a time saving grant or a loss, and the above-mentioned reach after the reach is displayed. A no-development pattern (see FIG. 43) is provided to notify that the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, a small hit, a time saving grant, or a loss without executing the development effect.

A plurality of types are provided for the mode of the pattern with development, and various types of the development effect image and the like are set. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a development pattern A and a development pattern B are provided as development patterns.
The development pattern A displays a moving image (hereinafter referred to as the development effect image A) in which the effect symbol 50 is sequentially destroyed and the finally displayed effect symbol 50 is determined as the third stop symbol. Yes (see FIGS. 44 (e) to (g)), and as will be described later, it can be executed in any case of a big hit, a small hit, a time saving grant, or a loss. ..
Then, when the development pattern A is executed and the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, a display indicating that the effect symbol 50 constituting the stop display mode in which the big hit is finally won is displayed. However, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit, it is displayed that the effect symbol 50 constituting the stop display mode in which the small hit is finally won is displayed, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is shortened. When the grant is won, it is displayed that the effect symbol 50 constituting the stop display mode in which the time saving grant is finally won is reached (see FIGS. 44 (e) to (g)), and the winning / failing lottery is performed. When the result of the above is a loss, it is set to display that the effect symbol 50 constituting the stop display mode that finally becomes a loss is reached. As a result, it is notified whether the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, a small hit, a time saving grant, or a loss.

Although not shown in particular, the development pattern B displays a moving image in which a predetermined character challenges a mission and the result of the challenge is shown.
This development pattern B is provided with four types of patterns, development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3, and development pattern B4, and the content of the mission to challenge as a moving image displayed for each pattern. A development effect image B1, a development effect image B2, a development effect image B3, or a development effect image B4, which are different from each other, are associated with each other. Specifically, the development pattern B1 displays the development effect image B1, the development pattern B2 displays the development effect image B2, the development pattern B3 displays the development effect image B3, and the development pattern B4 displays the development effect image B4. It is set to be displayed.

Further, as will be described later, this development pattern B can be executed only in the case of either the big hit winning or the time saving grant winning.
Then, when the development pattern B1, the development pattern B2, the development pattern B3, or the development pattern B4 is executed, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, the above-mentioned mission is finally succeeded. The stop display mode in which the jackpot is won is displayed after the display of (see FIGS. 46 (b) to (d)), and when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the time saving grant, the above-mentioned is finally described. It is set so that the setting image indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and the number of time-savings are displayed after the display indicating that the mission has failed is performed (see FIGS. 45 (e) to 45 (h)). Has been done. As a result, it is notified whether the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit winning or a time saving grant winning.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the variation effect by the development pattern B is executed, it is determined that the result of the winning / failing lottery is either the winning of the big hit or the winning of the time saving grant. , It is possible to enhance the player's interest in the execution of the variable effect by the development pattern B.

The pattern with development is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, as a pattern with development, after a predetermined development effect image is displayed, another development effect image in which the expectation of winning a big hit or the expectation of winning a time saving is set higher than that of the development effect image. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the display is switched, a mode in which the winning of the big hit or the winning of the time saving grant is notified after being notified of the fact that the image is lost.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as an aspect of the variation effect, apart from the above-mentioned various embodiments, all the effect symbols 50 are variablely displayed, and after the variation time elapses, these effect symbols 50 are displayed. There is a special fluctuation pattern in which is displayed as a stop all at once.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effects, not only the image is displayed, but also a predetermined sound may be output, or the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern or color.

(Determining the mode of variable production)
Next, the determination of the execution mode of the above-mentioned variation effect will be described.
The main ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a variation effect determination table 119 that defines an mode of variation effect for each variation pattern command that can be determined in the main control board 100. Then, when the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 100 at the start of the variation, the sub CPU 301 determines the mode of the variation effect based on the received variation pattern command with reference to the variation effect determination table 119. do.

In the variation effect determination table 119, the variation effect mode is defined by associating each variation pattern command and the variation effect random number acquired within a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249 in this embodiment). When the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 100, the sub CPU 301 acquires a variation effect random number of 1 from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249). Then, the sub CPU 301 determines the mode of the variation effect based on the variation effect determination table 119, the received variation pattern command, and the acquired variation effect random number. As a result, the variable effect based on the determined mode is executed in the effect display device 21.

As shown in FIG. 47, according to the variation effect determination table 119, when the received variation pattern command is “00H”, “04H”, “05H” or “08H” (that is, the result of the winning / failing lottery is lost). In the case of), the first half part is the mode of no reach pattern A and the second half part is the mode of the normal loss pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 1), or the first half part is the mode of the pattern B without reach and the second half part is the mode of the normal loss pattern. One of (hereinafter referred to as aspect 2) is determined.

Further, when the received fluctuation pattern command is "01H" (that is, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a loss), the first half portion is the reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half portion is the mode of the no-development pattern (hereinafter). , Aspect 3), or a mode in which the first half portion is the reach variation pattern B and the second half portion is the no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as the mode 9) is determined.

If the received variation pattern command is "02H", "03H", "06H" or "07H" (that is, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a loss), the first half is the reach variation pattern. A and the latter half of the development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as aspect 4), or the first half of the reach variation pattern B and the latter half of the development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as aspect 10) are determined. ..

Further, when the received variation pattern command is "22H", "23H", "26H" or "27H" (that is, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit), the mode 4 or One of aspects 10 is determined.

If the received variation pattern command is "A2H", "A3H", "A6H" or "A7H" (that is, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit), the first half of the fourth aspect. The portion is the reach variation pattern A and the latter half is the aspect of the development pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 5), the first half portion is the aspect of the reach variation pattern A and the latter half portion is the aspect of the development pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 6), and the first half portion is. The reach variation pattern A and the latter half are aspects of the development pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 7), the first half is the aspect of the reach variation pattern A and the latter half is the aspect of the development pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 8), aspects 10, and the first half. Is the aspect of the reach variation pattern B and the latter half is the aspect of the development pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 11), the first half is the aspect of the reach variation pattern B and the latter half is the aspect of the development pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 12), and the first half is the reach. The variation pattern B and the latter half portion are determined as either the aspect of the development pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 13), or the first half portion is determined as the reach variation pattern B and the latter half portion is the embodiment of the development pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 14). Will be done.

Further, when the received variation pattern command is "B3H" (that is, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J1 (time saving number of times 10 times) is determined), the aspect 4 , Aspect 5, Aspect 10 or Aspect 11 is determined.

Further, when the received fluctuation pattern command is "B4H" (that is, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J2 (time saving number of times 20 times) is determined) or "B5H". If there is (that is, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J3 (the number of times of time saving 30 times) is determined), the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, the sixth aspect, the tenth aspect, and the eleventh aspect Alternatively, one of aspects 12 is determined.

Further, when the received variation pattern command is "B6H" (that is, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J4 (the number of times of working hours 50 times) is determined) or "B7H". If there is a case (that is, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J5 (the number of times of working hours is 100 times) is determined), the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, the sixth aspect, the seventh aspect, and the tenth aspect are present. , Aspect 11, Aspect 12 or Aspect 13 is determined.

Further, when the received variation pattern command is "B8H" (that is, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J6 (time saving number of times 1000 times) is determined), the aspect 4 , Aspect 5, Aspect 6, Aspect 7, Aspect 8, Aspect 10, Aspect 11, Aspect 12, Aspect 13 or Aspect 14 is determined.

Further, when the received variation pattern command is "B9H" (that is, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J7 (the number of times of time saving is 1) is determined), the aspect 4 Alternatively, one of aspects 10 is determined.

Further, when the received fluctuation pattern command is "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH" or "BFH" (that is, the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the reduced working hours). In the case), a special variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as aspect 15) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 47, the number shown in each area in which the variation pattern command and the mode of variation effect are associated is the range of the variation effect random number allocated to the area, that is, the selection ratio (determination) of the area. Percentage) is shown.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, regarding the mode of the variable effect, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a loss, if the big hit is won, if the small hit is won, the time saving is given and the predetermined time saving symbol is determined. The selection ratio is set separately for each case.

For example, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit or a short-time grant, the reach fluctuation pattern A is determined at a lower rate than in the case of a loss or a small hit. The decision rate of B is high. Therefore, when the reach variation pattern B is executed, the degree of expectation for winning a big hit or winning a time saving is higher than when the reach variation pattern A is executed.

Further, regarding the development pattern A, although the result of the winning / failing lottery can be determined regardless of whether the result is a loss, a small hit, a big hit, or a time saving grant, the development pattern B ( Regarding B1, B2, B3, B4), the result of the winning / failing lottery can be determined only when either the big hit is won or the time saving is given. Therefore, when the development pattern B is executed, the winning of the big hit or the winning of the time saving grant is confirmed, and it is possible to grasp that one of these has been won.

Regarding the development pattern B1, the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the time saving grant, and the time saving symbols J1 (time saving number 10 times), J2 (time saving number 20 times), J3 (time saving number 30 times), J4 (time saving number 50 times). (Times), J5 (time reduction number 100 times) or J6 (time reduction number 1000 times) can be determined. Regarding the development pattern B2, it can be determined when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbols J2, J3, J4, J5 or J6 are determined. Regarding the development pattern B3, it can be determined when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the reduction of working hours and the reduction of working hours symbols J4, J5 or J6 are determined. Regarding the development pattern B4, it can be determined when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the reduction of working hours and the reduction of working hours symbol J6 is determined.
That is, in the case where the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the time saving grant, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined, only the development pattern B1 can be determined among the development patterns B, and the time saving symbol J2 or J3 can be determined. When is determined, the development pattern B1 and the development pattern B2 can be determined among the development patterns B, and when the time saving symbol J4 or J5 is determined, the development pattern B1 and the development pattern B among the development patterns B can be determined. B2 and the development pattern B3 can be determined, and when the time saving symbol J6 is determined, all of the development pattern B1, the development pattern B2, the development pattern B3, and the development pattern B4 can be determined among the development patterns B. It has become like.

In other words, when the development pattern B is executed when the time reduction symbol J1 for which the number of time reductions is 10 times is determined, the execution ratio of the development pattern B1 is 100%, and the execution of the development patterns B2, B3 and B4. The ratios are all 0%, and the development pattern B is executed when the time-saving symbol J2 in which the number of time reductions is 20 times is determined or when the time-saving symbol J3 in which the number of time reductions is 30 times is determined. Occasionally, the execution rate of the development patterns B1 and B2 is 50%, and the execution rate of the development patterns B3 and B4 is 0%. When the development pattern B is executed when the time-saving symbol J5 for which the number of times is determined to be 100 is determined, the execution ratios of the development patterns B1, B2, and B3 are all about 33%, and the execution ratio of the development pattern B4 is 0. %, And when the development pattern B is executed when the time reduction symbol J6 in which the time reduction frequency of 1000 times is determined is determined, the execution ratios of the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are all 25%. That is, the execution ratios of the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are different depending on the set number of time reductions.

Then, when the development pattern B1 is executed, the jackpot is won or the time reduction is set to 10 times or more (10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times or 1000 times). Winning is confirmed. In addition, when the development pattern B2 is executed, a big hit is won, or a time saving grant is won in which the number of time reductions is set to 20 times or more (20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times or 1000 times). Determine. Further, when the development pattern B3 is executed, the winning of the big hit or the winning of the time saving grant in which the number of time saving times is set to 50 times or more (50 times, 100 times or 1000 times) is confirmed. Further, when the development pattern B4 is executed, the winning of the big hit or the winning of the time saving grant in which the time saving number is set to 1000 times is confirmed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the execution ratios of the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 differ depending on the number of time reductions when the time reduction grant is won, and the execution patterns are executed. Since it is possible to give the player different expectations for the number of time reductions that can be set for each type of B, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the variable production by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, or if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning with a reduced working hours, the development patterns B1, B2, B3 Although the variable effect by B4 can be executed, if the result of the winning / losing lottery is a winning or losing of a small hit, the variable effect by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 is not executed. That is, the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are better when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning of the big hit or the winning of the time saving grant than when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit or a loss. The execution rate of the fluctuation effect is high. Therefore, by executing the variable effect by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4, it is possible to improve the expectation for winning the big hit or winning the time saving, so that the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are used. It is possible to enhance the player's interest in variable production.

It should be noted that the variation effect by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 is not executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small win or a loss, but the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit. It may be executed at a lower rate than in the case of winning the time saving grant.

In addition, during the variable effect, along with the variable display of the effect symbol 50, various advance notice images showing the expected degree of winning the jackpot and the expected degree of winning of the time saving grant are displayed. ing.

Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the high and low of the possibility of being executed when the jackpot is won or when the time saving is won are set separately for the above-mentioned advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to change the player's expectation for winning a big hit or winning a time saving according to the advance notice effect to be executed. Specifically, since it is highly likely that a specific advance notice effect will be executed when a big hit is won or when a time saving grant is won, a player who wins a big hit or a time saving grant is set. Will raise the expectation of.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, it is set that there is a higher possibility that a specific advance notice effect will be executed in the case of winning the time saving grant than in the case of winning the big hit.

For example, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, as a notice effect executed before the reach display during the variation effect, it is possible to execute a line advance notice in which a line by a predetermined character is displayed. There is. As the mode of the dialogue notice, three patterns of the dialogue notice A, the dialogue notice B, and the dialogue notice C are provided.
Further, as a notice effect to be executed after the reach display during the variable effect, it is possible to execute a cut-in notice in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed. The cut-in notice is a blue cut-in notice in which a blue cut-in image is displayed, a red cut-in notice in which a red cut-in image is displayed, and a purple cut-in notice in which a purple cut-in image is displayed. Three patterns are provided.

Then, in the case of winning the time saving by the winning / failing lottery, it is possible to execute the line notice A and the line notice B as the line notice, and in the above case, the ratio of the line notice A being executed is 15%. The rate at which the dialogue notice B is executed is 10%. In addition, as a cut-in notice, a blue cut-in notice, a red cut-in notice, and a purple cut-in notice can be executed. In the above case, the ratio of the blue cut-in notice being executed is 10%, and the red cut-in notice is. The rate of execution is 40%, and the rate of execution of purple cut-in notice is 55%.

In addition, if a big hit is won by the winning / failing lottery, it is possible to execute the dialogue notice A, the dialogue notice B, and the dialogue notice C as the dialogue notice, and in this case, the ratio at which the dialogue notice A is executed. Is 15%, the rate at which the line notice B is executed is 20%, and the rate at which the line notice C is executed is 25%. In addition, as a cut-in notice, a blue cut-in notice and a red cut-in notice can be executed. In the above case, the ratio of the blue cut-in notice being executed is 10%, and the ratio of the red cut-in notice being executed is. It is 25%.

In addition, if a loss or a small hit is won by the winning / failing lottery, it is possible to execute the dialogue notice A and the dialogue notice B as the dialogue notice, and in this case, the ratio of the dialogue notice A being executed is 3%, and the rate at which dialogue notice B is executed is 5%. In addition, as a cut-in notice, a blue cut-in notice and a red cut-in notice can be executed. In the above case, the ratio of the blue cut-in notice being executed is 5%, and the ratio of the red cut-in notice being executed is. It is 10%.

That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the case of winning the time saving grant, the rate at which the dialogue notice A is executed is the same as in the case of winning the jackpot, and the dialogue notice B is executed. Since both the rate and the rate at which the line notice C is executed are small, when the line notice B or the line notice C is executed, the player can have a feeling of expectation for winning the jackpot. ing. In addition, since the dialogue notice C can be executed only when the jackpot is won, when the dialogue notice C is executed, the winning of the jackpot is confirmed and the player's interest can be enhanced. ing.

On the other hand, in the case of winning the time saving grant, the rate of executing the blue cut-in notice is the same as the case of winning the big hit, the rate of executing the red cut-in notice and purple. Since the rate at which cut-in notices are executed is large, when red cut-in notices and purple cut-in notices are executed, it is possible to give players a sense of expectation for winning the time saving grant. ing. In addition, since the purple cut-in notice can be executed only when the time saving grant is won, when the purple cut-in notice is executed, the winning of the time saving grant is confirmed and the player's interest is enhanced. You can do it.
As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the winning of the time saving grant, which is more likely to shift to the high probability time saving gaming state, than the jackpot winning, which is extremely difficult to shift to the high probability time saving gaming state. It has become.

The effect that can be executed by the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned variable effect, and is stored, for example, before the execution of the variable effect related to the hold stored in the hold storage area. A look-ahead effect may be provided to give suggestions regarding the hold.
Specifically, as the look-ahead effect, there are a plurality of normal modes, and a special mode in which the expectation of winning a big hit or winning a time saving is higher than that of the normal mode when a new hold is stored. Hold display being displayed in a predetermined mode at any timing from the time when the hold look-ahead effect is performed to display the hold in any of the above modes and the time when the variable effect based on the hold is completed. Is changed to a mode in which the expectation of winning a jackpot or a time-saving grant is high. High expectation suggestion that the expectation of winning a big hit or winning a time saving is high, straddling multiple variable effects from the variable effect based on the hold stored earlier to the variable effect based on the hold. A look-ahead zone effect for displaying an image (for example, a background image or the like) may be provided.

Then, it is possible to execute the hold look-ahead effect, the hold change look-ahead effect, the look-ahead zone effect, etc. It may be set so that the sex is high.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49, as a hold change look-ahead effect, a blue hold change in which a white hold display changes to a blue hold display, a red hold change in which a white hold display changes to a red hold display, and a white hold change. There are three patterns of purple hold change in which the hold display by purple changes to the hold display by purple, and as a look-ahead zone effect, zone A in which the first high expectation suggestion image is displayed and the second high expectation suggestion image are provided. It is assumed that three patterns of zone B in which is displayed and zone C in which a third high expectation suggestion image is displayed are provided.

Then, if any of the stored holds is determined by the winning / failing lottery to win the time saving grant, the blue hold change, the red hold change, and the purple hold are used as the hold change look-ahead effect for the above hold. The change is feasible, and in the above case, the blue hold change may be executed at 10%, the red hold change may be performed at 40%, and the purple hold change may be performed at 55%. .. Further, zone A and zone B can be executed as the look-ahead zone effect for the above-mentioned hold. In the above-mentioned case, the ratio of zone A being executed is 15% and the ratio of zone B being executed is 10. May be%.

In addition, if any of the stored holds is determined to be a big hit by the winning / failing lottery, the blue hold change and the red hold change can be executed as the hold change look-ahead effect for the above hold. Yes, in the above case, the rate at which the blue hold change is executed may be 10%, and the rate at which the red hold change is executed may be 25%. Further, as a look-ahead zone effect for the above-mentioned hold, zone A, zone B, and zone C can be executed. In this case, the ratio of zone A being executed is 15%, and zone B is being executed. The rate may be 20% and the rate at which Zone C is executed may be 25%.

In addition, if any of the stored holds is determined to be a loss or a small hit by the winning / failing lottery, the blue hold change and the red hold change are displayed as the hold change look-ahead effect for the above hold. It is feasible, and in the above case, the rate at which the blue hold change is executed may be 5%, and the rate at which the red hold change is executed may be 10%. Further, as a look-ahead zone effect for the above-mentioned hold, zone A and zone B can be executed. In this case, the ratio of zone A being executed is 3% and the ratio of zone B being executed is. It may be 5%.

That is, when it is set as described above, when it is determined that the time reduction is awarded, the rate at which the blue hold change is executed is the same as when it is determined that the jackpot is won, and the red hold change is executed. Since both the rate of being executed and the rate of executing the purple hold change are large, when the red hold change or the purple hold change is executed, the player can have a feeling of expectation for winning the time saving grant. In addition, since the purple hold change can be executed only when it is determined that the time reduction grant is won, when the purple hold change is executed, the decision of the purple hold grant is confirmed and the player's interest is enhanced. Can be done.
Even in such a setting, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the winning of the time saving grant rather than the winning of the big hit.

When the settings are made as described above, when it is determined that the time reduction is awarded, the ratio of zone A to be executed is the same as that of the case where it is determined to be a big hit, and zone B is executed. Since both the ratio and the ratio in which the zone C is executed are small, when the zone B or the zone C is executed, the player can have a feeling of expectation for winning the jackpot. In addition, since zone C can be executed only when it is determined that the jackpot is won, when zone C is executed, the jackpot winning is confirmed so that the player's interest can be enhanced. It has become.

(Outline of special notification production)
The special notification effect is when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a winning with a reduced working hours and the variation effect is performed by the special variation pattern (that is, the determined variation pattern commands are "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BCH", " (In the case of "BDH", "BEH" or "BFH"), it is an effect that can be executed in accordance with the variable effect, and the winning of the time saving grant and the number of time saving of the first low probability time saving game state based on the winning. It can be notified.

In this special notification effect, after the variation effect is started, the variation time predetermined for each variation pattern command elapses and the variation effect ends, and then the stop display time (time saving symbol) predetermined for each special symbol is completed. Is to be continuously executed until 3 seconds) elapses.
Specifically, in the special notification effect, all the images (effect symbol 50) displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 after a predetermined time (2 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the variable effect. , Background image, etc.) is erased and the entire surface of the display unit 21a is displayed in black, and a blackout effect is started in which all the lamps (effect lighting device 23) provided in the pachinko machine P are turned off (FIG. 50 (a)-(c)). Then, when the predetermined blackout effect execution time (4 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, variable display by the effect symbol 50 having a size smaller than that before the start of the blackout effect starts in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a. As a result, the variation effect is restarted, a window is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a, and a number count-up display is started in this window (see FIG. 50 (d)). The count-up display is executed until the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern command elapses (see FIGS. 50 (e) to 50 (h)). Then, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the numbers in the above-mentioned window reach the number of time reductions corresponding to the time reduction symbols determined based on the winning of the time reduction grant, and the count is increased when the variation effect ends. The display ends (see FIG. 50 (h)). After that, a setting image indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and the number of times of time-saving are displayed until the stop display time elapses (see FIGS. 50 (i) to 50 (j)). The special notification effect ends with the passage of the stop display time.

In the above-mentioned count-up display, until the number in the window reaches a predetermined value (20 in this embodiment), the number in the window is a predetermined number (1 second in this embodiment) every predetermined count time (1 second in this embodiment). Then, the display is increased by 1) (see FIGS. 50 (d) to (e)).
Further, when the number in the window reaches "10" or "20" (that is, the value of the number of time reductions that can be set), the displayed number and the next displayed number are displayed back and forth. A fanning effect that fuels the expectation of counting up to the next number is executed (see FIGS. 50 (f) to (g), FIGS. 51 (a) to (d), and FIG. 52 (a)). Here, if a time saving symbol corresponding to a larger number of times than the displayed number is determined, the number is counted up to the next number through the above-mentioned fanning effect, and then the count-up display is continuously performed. (See FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (b)). On the other hand, if the time saving symbol corresponding to the same number of times as the displayed number is determined, the count-up display ends with the displayed number without counting up to the next number at the end of the fanning effect. (That is, the fluctuation time elapses at this point and the fluctuation effect ends), and then the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time reductions are displayed (FIGS. 50 (h) to (j), FIGS. 51 (e) to (e). See (g)).

In addition, when the time saving symbol corresponding to the time saving number of times exceeding 20 times (30 times, 50 times, 100 times, 1000 times) is determined, the number in the window exceeds "20" and the count-up display is displayed. After the number in the window exceeds "20" after the above-mentioned fanning effect, the number in the window is covered with a predetermined obstruction image (for example, an image "???"). A hidden shielding effect is performed (see FIG. 52 (b)). Then, when the time corresponding to the determined number of time reductions elapses, the shielded image is erased, and a number indicating the determined number of time reductions is suddenly displayed in the window to end the count-up display (that is,). At this point, the fluctuation time elapses and the fluctuation effect ends), and then the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time reductions are displayed (see FIGS. 52 (c) to 52 (e)). By obscuring the numbers in the window with the shield image in this way, the player is expected to have the numbers finally displayed in the window (that is, the number of time reductions corresponding to the determined time reduction symbol). Can be improved.

Hereinafter, the progress of the special notification effect will be described more specifically.
(1) When the time saving symbol J1 (time saving number 10 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BAH" (variation time 18 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), special variation The blackout effect is started 2 seconds after the start of the variation effect by the pattern, the blackout effect is ended 6 seconds after the start of the variation effect, and the count-up display is started. Then, 16 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the number in the window reaches "10" and the fanning effect is executed, and 18 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the fanning effect ends and the number in the window is "10". Stop as it is. At the same time, the variable effect ends at this point. After that, the above-mentioned set image and the number of time reductions are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds elapses, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the number of time reductions is set to 10 times, the execution time of the special notification effect is 21 seconds from the start of the variation effect to the end of the variation effect and the elapse of the stop display time.

(2) When the time saving symbol J2 (time saving number 20 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BBH" (variation time 30 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), special variation The special notification effect progresses as in (1) until 18 seconds have passed from the start of the variable effect by the pattern, but after 18 seconds have passed from the start of the variable effect and the fanning effect has ended, the numbers in the window. Exceeds "10" and the count-up display continues. Then, 28 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the number in the window reaches "20" and the fanning effect is executed, and 30 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the fanning effect ends and the number in the window is "20". Stop as it is. At the same time, the variable effect ends at this point. After that, the above-mentioned set image and the number of time reductions are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds elapses, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the time reduction number of 20 times is set, the execution time of the special notification effect is 33 seconds from the start of the variation effect to the end of the variation effect and the lapse of the stop display time, and the time reduction number of 10 times is It is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when it is set.

(3) When the time saving symbol J3 (time saving number of times 30 times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BCH" (variation time 36 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), special variation The special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (2) until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the variation effect by the pattern, but after 30 seconds have passed from the start of the variation effect and the fanning effect is completed, the shielding effect is executed. Will be done. Then, 36 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the shielding effect ends, the shielding image is erased, and the number "30" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable effect ends at this point. After that, the above-mentioned set image and the number of time reductions are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds elapses, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the time reduction number of 30 times is set, the execution time of the special notification effect is 39 seconds from the start of the variation effect to the end of the variation effect and the lapse of the stop display time. It is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 times is set.

(4) When the time saving symbol J4 (time saving number of times 50 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BDH" (variation time 46 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the variation effect Until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the above and the shielding effect is executed, the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3). After that, 46 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the shielding effect ends, the shielding image is erased, and the number "50" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable effect ends at this point. After that, the above-mentioned set image and the number of time reductions are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds elapses, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the time reduction number of 50 times is set, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variation effect to the end of the variation effect and the lapse of the stop display time, and the time reduction number of 10 times. It is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 times and 30 times are set.

(5) When the time saving symbol J5 (time saving number of times 100 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BEH" (variation time 66 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the variation effect Until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the above and the shielding effect is executed, the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) and (4). After that, 66 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the shielding effect ends, the shielding image is erased, and the number "100" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable effect ends at this point. After that, the above-mentioned set image and the number of time reductions are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds elapses, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the time reduction number of 100 times is set, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variation effect to the end of the variation effect and the lapse of the stop display time. It is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 times, 30 times, and 50 times are set.

(6) When the time saving symbol J6 (time saving number of times 1000 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BFH" (variation time 68 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), the variation effect Until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the above and the shielding effect is executed, the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) to (5). After that, 68 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the shielding effect ends, the shielding image is erased, and the number "1000" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable effect ends at this point. After that, the above-mentioned set image and the number of time reductions are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds elapses, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the time reduction number of times 1000 is set, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variation effect to the end of the variation effect and the lapse of the stop display time, and the time reduction number of times is 10 times. It is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, and 100 times are set.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the time saving symbol J7 (time saving number of times is 1) is determined, the variation effect by the special variation pattern is not performed, and the special notification effect is not executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the case of winning the time saving grant, the larger the number of time saving times set corresponding to the determined time saving symbol, the more the special notification is given. The execution time of the production becomes longer. In other words, after the special notification effect is executed, the game shifts to the first low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state), which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, but when the execution period of the special notification effect becomes long, The period during which the first low-probability time-saving gaming state that shifts after the execution of the effect is executed becomes longer.
Therefore, if the execution period of the special notification effect is long, the game profit (giving the time-saving game state) given to the player becomes large, so that the player's interest in the special notification effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the time saving is won and the special notification effect is executed, the game ball to the second start winning opening 16 does not go through the big hit winning and the special game. Since the first low-probability time-saving game state is set to facilitate ball entry, the large winning opening 18 is opened during the period from the execution of the special notification effect to the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state. You won't be struck. Therefore, the operation control of the structure (large winning opening 18) during the above period is reduced, and the burden on the hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

Next, the control process in the sub-control board 300 for executing the various processes as described above will be described.
First, the main processing of the sub-control board 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 55.
In step 2000, in response to the power being turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 302, and the initialization and setting processing of the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 303 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2001.
In step 2001, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of updating each effect random number (variable effect random number), and thereafter repeatedly executes the process of step 2001 until the interrupt process is performed. Here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
The sub-control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not particularly shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds). Then, when the clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 301 reads the timer interruption processing program and starts the timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 56.

In step 2100, the sub CPU 301 executes an update process of various timer counters used in the sub control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2101.
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer, and the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300 is executed, and the subtraction is stopped when it reaches 0. It has become.
In step 2101, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 303 and executes various processes according to the received command. Specifically, in the sub-control board 300, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 100, a command reception interrupt process is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 100 is stored in the reception buffer. Then, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer by the command reception interrupt process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2102.

In step 2102, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 9 can be accepted according to the progress of the variable effect during execution, and the operation signal from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c and the press operation detection sensor 9d. Is determined whether or not is input. Then, when the operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c or the pressing operation detection sensor 9d, if the operation of the effect operation device 9 is being accepted, the image indicates that the effect operation device 9 has been operated. A command is sent to the transmission buffer to be sent to various control boards such as a control board (not shown), a voice control board (not shown), and an illuminated control board (not shown). Store. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2103.
In step 2103, the sub CPU 301 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 303 to various control boards such as an image control board, a voice control board, and an illumination control board. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 is completed.

Next, among the command analysis processes of step 2101 described above, the variation pattern command reception process executed when the variation pattern command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57. As described above, the fluctuation pattern command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 903 of the fluctuation pattern determination process, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 by the output control process of step 208.
In step 2200, the sub CPU 301 acquires the variation effect random number updated in step 2001 described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2201.
In step 2201, the sub CPU 301 determines the mode of the variation effect based on the variation effect determination table 119, the variation effect random number acquired in step 2200 described above, and the received variation pattern command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2202.

In step 2202, the sub CPU 301 sets the variable effect execution command according to the determined mode of the variable effect in the transmission buffer. The variation effect execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in step 2103 described above, and these control boards control to execute the variation effect based on the received variation effect execution command. .. Then, the variable pattern command reception process is terminated.

It should be noted that the special notification effect in the above-described embodiment is started at the same time as the start of the variable effect related to the winning of the time saving grant, and ends when the variable effect is finished and the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed. By differentiating the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the time reduction symbol, the execution time of the special notification effect was set to change for each time reduction symbol (set number of time reductions). It is not limited to this.
For example, regardless of the time-saving symbol, the fluctuation time specified in the corresponding variation pattern command is the same, but the stop display time for each time-saving symbol is different, so that the time-saving symbol (the set number of time reductions) It may be set so that the execution time of each special notification effect changes. Further, by making both the above-mentioned fluctuation time and the stop display time different, the execution time of the special notification effect may be changed for each time reduction symbol (set time reduction number of times).
Even when it is set in this way, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, the special notification effect is not executed during the period from the start of the variable effect related to the winning of the time reduction to the lapse of the stop display time of the special symbol after the end of the variable effect, but the start of the above-mentioned variable effect. It may be executed in the period from to the end. Specifically, it starts from a predetermined start time point in the above-mentioned variation effect (for example, a time point after the start time of the variation effect, a time point after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect, etc.), and a predetermined end time point in the variation effect. (For example, a time point after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, a time point at the end of the variable effect, etc.) may be terminated.
In addition, the special notification effect shall be executed during the period from the acquisition of the special figure random number (first special figure random number) that was won for the time reduction grant to the end of the variable effect related to the winning of the time reduction grant. May be good. Specifically, for example, it is executed during the period during one variable effect (hereinafter referred to as pre-reading variable effect) executed before the variable effect related to the winning of the time saving grant (hereinafter referred to as the variable effect). It may be executed in a period spanning a plurality of look-ahead variation effects, or may be executed in a period spanning the look-ahead variation effect to the variation effect.
When set in this way, the execution timing of the special notification effect becomes rich in variation, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the winning of the time saving grant can be derived as a result of the determination in the winning / failing lottery, and the time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state) is set when the time saving grant is won. However, as a result of the judgment in the winning / losing lottery, the winning of the time saving grant is not derived, and it can be decided based on the judgment result other than the big hit winning in the winning / losing lottery (that is, the winning or losing of the small hit). Even if a special symbol (that is, a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is substituted as a time-saving symbol, and whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set (whether or not the time-saving is granted) is determined according to the determined type of the above-mentioned special symbol. good.

For example, the lost symbol ZA1, the lost symbol ZA2, the lost symbol ZA3, etc. are provided as the lost symbols determined when the lost symbol is lost due to the winning / failing lottery based on the winning / losing random number, and when the losing symbol ZA1 is determined, the number of time reductions is 10 times. When the first time-saving game state in which is determined is set and the lost symbol ZA2 is determined, the first time-saving game state in which the number of time reductions of 20 times is determined is set, and when the lost symbol ZA3 is determined, 30 times It may be set so that the first time reduction game state in which the time reduction number is determined is set. Further, in this case as well, the variation effect according to the variation pattern B similar to the above-described embodiment may be executed, or the special notification effect similar to the above-described embodiment can be executed. May be good.

Similarly, the small hit symbol YA1, the small hit symbol YA2, the small hit symbol YA3, etc. are provided as the small hit symbol determined when the small hit is won by the winning / fail lottery based on the winning / fail random number, and the small hit symbol is provided. When the YA1 is determined, the first time-saving game state in which the number of time reductions of 10 times is determined is set, and when the small hit symbol YA2 is determined, the first time-saving game state in which the number of time reductions of 20 times is determined is set. When the small hit symbol YA3 is determined, the first time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings of 30 times is determined may be set. Further, in this case as well, the variation effect according to the variation pattern B similar to the above-described embodiment may be executed, or the special notification effect similar to the above-described embodiment can be executed. May be good.
In addition, as described above, in the case where the time saving game state is set based on the small hit symbol, the special notification effect is based on the small hit winning after the variable effect based on the small hit winning is started. It may be set to be executed until the winning game is completed. When set in this way, the fluctuation time of the above-mentioned fluctuation effect, the stop display time of the special symbol, the opening time of the small hit game, the opening time of the large winning opening 18 during the small hit game, and the small hit game By making any one or more of the ending times different, the execution time of the special notification effect for each small hit symbol may be set to change.
Further, in the above-mentioned special notification effect, similarly to the above, from the acquisition of the special figure random number (first special figure random number) that won the small hit to the end of the variable effect related to the winning of the small hit. It may be executed in a period.
When set in this way, there are abundant variations of winning of the time saving grant, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution time of the special notification effect is set to be longer as the number of time reductions set corresponding to the determined time reduction symbol increases. The target to be controlled is not limited to the special notification effect that can be executed at the time of winning the time saving grant. For example, if one of a plurality of jackpot symbols is determined based on the winning of the jackpot, and the number of round games to be executed during the special game is determined for each jackpot symbol, the number of round games is determined. As the number of round games executed in response to the jackpot symbol increases, the variable time of the variable effect executed based on the winning of the jackpot may be set to be longer. In other words, the longer the variable time of the variable effect executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the larger the number of round games during the special game executed thereafter may be set.
In addition, as the number of round games executed in response to the jackpot symbol increases, the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead effect that can be executed before the variable effect executed based on the winning of the jackpot becomes longer. It may be set as follows. In other words, the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead effect is, the more the number of round games during the special game to be executed thereafter may be set.
When set in this way, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the variable effect based on the winning of the jackpot and the look-ahead effect that can be executed before the variable effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the large winning opening 18 is not opened during the period from the execution of the special notification effect to the setting of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state). However, other winning openings (for example, the second starting winning opening 16) are opened during the period from the execution of the variable effect based on the winning of the jackpot to the start of the special game advantageous to the player. You may not have it.

Further, the variation effect and the special notification effect according to the development pattern B in the above-described embodiment are not only executed when the time reduction is granted by the winning / failing lottery, but also the jackpot is won and the time saving game state is set. It may be executed even when a predetermined jackpot symbol is determined.

(Modification example)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the second starting winning opening 16 is relatively difficult to be maintained in the open state are combined. Only in the winning / failing lottery during the normal gaming state, the winning / failing of the time saving grant is determined, and during other gaming states (during the high probability gaming state where the probability of winning the jackpot is relatively high or the second start winning opening 16 is relative. In the winning / failing lottery during the time-saving game state (that is, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), which is likely to be maintained in the open state, whether or not the time reduction is granted is correct. By not making a judgment, the winning of the time saving grant is made only during the normal gaming state, and the winning of the time saving grant cannot be made during the other gaming states. The control for this is not limited to this.

For example, as the hit / miss random number determination table 110 referred to during the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, a table (FIGS. 6 (b) and 7 (FIG. 6), FIG. 7 (FIG. 6 (b)) and FIG. b), FIG. 8 (b), FIG. 9 (b), FIG. 10 (b), and FIG. 11 (b) are provided. It may be possible to determine whether or not the time reduction is granted. In this case, during the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving grant is determined based on the winning / failing random number determination table 110, which is not determined to be the winning of the time-saving grant. Similar to the embodiment, the time saving grant cannot be won during the game state other than the normal game state.
Further, for example, the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to during the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is also provided with a numerical range of the winning / failing random numbers that wins the time-saving grant, and is in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. In the winning / failing lottery, the winning / failing of the time saving grant is determined based on the table, but if the time saving grant is won, the judgment result of the winning of the time saving grant is forcibly rewritten to the non-winning of the time saving grant. Alternatively, the determination result of winning the time saving grant may be discarded. Even in this case, as in the above-described embodiment, it is not possible to win the time saving grant during a game state other than the normal game state.
In such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the judgment in the winning / failing lottery can be executed in the gaming state other than the normal gaming state as in the normal gaming state. The determination in the lottery can be standardized, and the processing load on the hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of winning the time saving grant is set to be the same regardless of which setting value is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The probability of winning the time saving grant may be set differently depending on the set value. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the probability that the game ball will be won when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 and the time reduction when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16. The probabilities of winning the grant were set to be the same, but the probability is not limited to this, and the case where the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16 It may be set so that the probability of winning the time saving grant is different from the case where the game ball enters. Further, the number of time reductions may be set to be different depending on the set game state and the type of the time reduction symbol determined when the time reduction grant is won. In addition, the number of time reductions determined according to the set game state and the type of time reduction symbol determined when the time reduction grant is won may be 0 times, and must be 1 time or more. May be good.
In addition, when a different number of time reductions is set for each determined time reduction symbol, the number of time reductions and the probability of determining the time reduction symbol are determined in relation to the probability of winning a big hit in the winning / failing lottery, and the gambling becomes too high. Values in a range that does not exist (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state (for a pachinko machine provided with a multi-step setting value associated with a setting related to ball ejection, the lowest jackpot in a low-probability gaming state) If the probability of winning) is 1 / P, the number of time reductions ≤ P × specific coefficient A, and the probability of determining the time reduction symbol ≦ P × specific coefficient B) may be satisfied.
Further, a plurality of types of conditions for ending the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol may be set. For example, the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 reach a predetermined number of times (time reduction number C1). That, or when the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction number C2), the time reduction game state ends. It may be set as follows. In addition, when it is set in this way, the larger number of time reductions out of the time reduction number C1 and the time reduction number C2 is determined in relation to the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning / losing lottery as described above, and the gambling is high. The value may be in a range that does not become too large.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, when the time saving grant is won by the judgment of the winning / failing in the winning / failing lottery using the winning / failing random number, the winning / failing lottery using a special symbol random number different from the winning / failing random number is different. The time reduction symbol is determined by the process of determining the special symbol, and the number of time reductions is determined according to the type of the determined time reduction symbol (J1, J2, J3), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, it may be set so that both the winning of the time saving grant and the determination of the time saving number can be determined by the winning / failing lottery using the winning / failing random number. That is, the winning of the time reduction grant and the determination of the number of time reductions may be performed by the same random number and the same processing, instead of performing by a separate random number and a separate process.
Specifically, in the winning / failing random number determination table 110, when it is determined that the time saving is won, a numerical range to which a predetermined time saving symbol is associated is set, and the acquired winning / failing random number belongs to the numerical range. It can be set so that the winning of the time saving grant and the number of time saving specified in the time saving symbol corresponding to the numerical range are determined. For example, the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 during the low-probability gaming state where the set value is 1 is set as the winning / failing random number. When is 3310 to 3637, it is determined that the time saving symbol J1 (time saving number 10 times) is associated with the winning, and when the winning / fail random number is 3638-3964, the time saving symbol J2 (time saving number 20 times) is determined. ) Can be provided with a table A1a which is determined to be a winner of the time saving grant (see FIG. 58). According to this table A1a, when the winning / failing random number is 3310 to 3637, it is determined that the time saving grant is won, and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, so that the number of time saving is determined to be 10. Become. Further, when the winning / failing random number is 3638 to 3964, it is determined that the time saving grant is won, and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, so that the number of time saving is determined to be 20 times.
In such a case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment is obtained, and the winning of the time saving grant and the number of times of the time saving are determined only by the process of determining whether or not the time saving is granted in the winning / failing lottery. , The processing load in the winning / failing lottery will be reduced.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, after determining whether or not the time reduction is granted in the winning / losing lottery during the normal gaming state, the number of times of working hours is associated when the result of the determination is the winning of the time saving. The time saving symbol was to be determined, but the order of processing is not limited to this.
For example, after determining the time saving symbol, a winning / failing lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the time saving is granted. Then, when the winning of the time saving grant is decided, the time saving game state (the first time saving game state) is set, and the time saving number of times associated with the previously determined time saving symbol is set. good.
Even in this case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not the big hit is successful, the determination of whether or not the small hit is correct, and the determination of whether or not the time reduction is granted are all executed with reference to the same correctness / non-performing random number determination table 110. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the determination of whether or not the time reduction is granted is a table different from the winning / failing random number determination table 110 used for determining whether or not the big hit is correct and whether or not the small hit is appropriate, and is a specific table used only for determining whether or not the time reduction is granted. You may refer to the table and execute it.
Even in such a case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving symbols associated with the time-saving number of times are provided, and the time-saving number of times is determined according to the determined time-saving symbol. Not limited to. For example, one type of time-saving symbol J is provided in which only the winning of the time-saving grant is associated and the number of time-savings is not associated. At the same time, the number of time reductions may be determined by a specific lottery separate from the winning / failing lottery.
In such a case, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, the storage capacity of the special symbol in the main ROM 102 can be reduced, and the space for storing other information can be increased.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the second starting winning opening 16 is relatively difficult to be maintained in the open state are combined. Only in the winning / failing lottery during the normal game state, the winning / failing of the time saving grant is determined, and it is possible to win the time saving grant (determination of the time saving symbols J1, J2, J3), and the probability of winning the jackpot is relative. During a high-probability gaming state or during a time-saving gaming state in which the second starting winning opening 16 is relatively likely to be maintained in an open state (that is, during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, In the winning / failing lottery (during the high-probability time-saving game state), the winning / failing of the time-saving grant was not determined, and it was not possible to win the time-saving grant. Even if there is, the winning or failing of the time saving grant may be determined in the winning or losing lottery.

Specifically, for example, even in the winning / failing lottery during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (that is, during the gaming state in which the time-saving gaming state is set) in which the low-probability gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state are combined, the time saving is granted. It may be set so that the winning or failing of the time saving is determined and the time saving grant can be won (time saving symbols J1, J2, J3). Then, in the winning / failing lottery during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving grant is won by determining whether or not the time-saving grant is successful, and when the time-saving symbol is determined, the first time-saving gaming state is reset. At the same time, the number of time reductions associated with the determined time reduction symbol (10 times for the time reduction symbol J1, 20 times for the time reduction symbol J2, and 1 time reduction for the time reduction symbol J3). It may be set again (overwriting the current time reduction number). For example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the first low probability time reduction game state is 5, the time reduction grant is won and the time reduction symbol J2 (time reduction number 20 times) is determined, the first time reduction game state is set. At the same time as being reset, "20 times" may be set again as the number of time reductions. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 20 times without winning the jackpot again.
Further, in the above case, instead of setting the time reduction number associated with the time reduction symbol again, the time reduction number associated with the time reduction symbol may be added to the remaining time reduction number at that time point. For example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the first low probability time reduction game state is 5, the time reduction grant is won and the time reduction symbol J2 (time reduction number 20 times) is determined, the first time reduction game state is set. At the same time as being reset, the remaining number of time reductions may be updated to "25 times (= 5 remaining time reductions + 20 time reductions specified in the time reduction symbol J2)". In this case, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 25 times without winning the jackpot again.
In such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the chances of setting the time-saving game state without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game are increased, which is more novel. It is possible to give playability and enhance the interest of the player.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the time-saving symbols that can be determined when the time-saving grant is won are the time-saving symbol J1 in which the number of time-savings is set to 10 times, and the time-saving symbol in which the number of time-savings is set to 20 times. The three types of J2 and the time-saving symbol J3 in which the number of time reductions is set to one are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other time-saving symbols in which different number of time reductions are specified may be provided.
Specifically, in addition to these time-saving symbols, the time-saving symbol J4 in which the number of time reductions is set to 30 times, the time-saving symbol J5 in which the number of time reductions is set to 50 times, and the time-saving symbol J6 in which the number of time reductions is set to 10,000 times. Etc. may be provided. Further, as the time saving symbol that can be determined when the time saving grant is won, only one type of time saving symbol in which a predetermined number of time saving is determined may be provided.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the time-saving game state set without the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game can be enriched. , It is possible to give more innovative playability and enhance the interest of the player.
Further, as described above, the set number of time reductions may be predetermined for each type of time reduction symbol, or may be predetermined for each type of time reduction symbol and the set gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state (non-time saving game state), when the time saving symbol J1 is determined, the time saving symbol J2 is determined, and the time saving symbol J3 is determined, the number of time saving is 100 times. Although it is set, in the time saving game state, the time saving number is set to 100 times when the time saving symbol J1 is determined, and the time saving number is set to 50 times when the time saving symbol J2 is determined. When the symbol J3 is determined, the number of time reductions may be set to 0 (that is, the time reduction game state is set and the time reduction game state is set to end at the same time).
In such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the set time reduction number can be enriched, so that more innovative game playability can be imparted to the player. Can enhance the interest of.
In addition, the pachinko machine can win the time saving in both the winning and losing lottery for the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 and the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. If it is set, it is based on the probability of winning a time-saving grant in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. The probability of winning the time saving is different in the winning / failing lottery (for example, in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, the time saving is won at 1/100 and the second starting winning opening is won. In the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into 16, the time saving grant may be won at 1/10).
In such a case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment is obtained, and the advantage regarding the setting of the time-saving gaming state changes for each starting winning opening where the game ball enters, so that the player's interest is enjoyed. Can be enhanced.
Further, in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol according to the determined type of the time-saving symbol, the movable piece 16b opens after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the lottery of the normal symbol (the normal symbol is stopped and displayed). The opening time of the normal drawing, which is the time until the second starting winning opening 16 is opened), may be set to be different. For example, in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, the normal figure opening time is 0.5 seconds, and in the time-saving gaming state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, the normal figure opening time. Is 1.0 second, and in the time-saving gaming state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J3, the normal figure opening time may be set to 1.5 seconds.
In such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the advantage of the set time-saving gaming state changes for each determined time-saving symbol, which enhances the interest of the player. be able to.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the time saving grant can be derived as a result of the determination in the winning / failing lottery, and the time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state) is set when the time saving grant is won. However, as a result of the judgment in the winning / losing lottery, the winning of the time saving grant is not derived, and it is decided based on the judgment result other than the big hit winning in the winning / losing lottery (that is, the winning or losing of the small hit). The special symbol to be obtained (that is, the small hit symbol or the lost symbol) is substituted as the time saving symbol, and whether or not the time saving game state can be set (whether or not the time saving is granted) is determined according to the determined type of the above-mentioned special symbol. May be good.

For example, in the case of losing due to a winning / failing lottery based on a winning / failing random number, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time saving game state in which the number of time saving times of 20 times is determined is set, and the special symbol random number is set. When the lost symbol Z2 is determined by the above method, the first short game state may not be set. Further, the lost symbol that can be determined by the special symbol random number is not limited to these, and the lost symbol in which the first time-saving gaming state of the time-saving number of times different from the losing symbol Z1 is set (for example, the time-saving number of 50 times) A lost symbol Z3 in which the first time-saving gaming state is set, a lost symbol Z4 in which the first time-saving gaming state of 10,000 times of time reduction is set, and the like may be provided.
In addition, instead of determining the lost symbol by the process of determining the winning / failing lottery and the special symbol, in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning / failing random number as in the above-mentioned modification (2), for example, the setting of the first time saving game state and the setting of the first time saving game state and The loss corresponding to the lost symbol Z1 for which the number of time reductions is 20 times and the loss corresponding to the lost symbol Z2 for which the first time reduction game state is not set are set so as to be derivable, and the lost symbol is set by a winning / losing lottery. If the loss corresponds to Z1, the first time reduction game state is set 20 times, and if the loss corresponds to the loss symbol Z2 by the winning / failing lottery, the first time reduction game state is not set. You may do it.

Further, for example, in the case where a small hit is won by a winning or losing lottery based on a winning or losing random number, when the small hit symbol Y1 is determined by a special symbol random number, the first time saving game state in which the time saving number is set to 50 times is set. When the small hit symbol Y2 is set and the small hit symbol Y2 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time saving game state may not be set. Further, the small hit symbol that can be determined by the special symbol random number is not limited to these, and the small hit symbol (for example, the number of time reductions) in which the first time reduction game state of the time reduction number different from the small hit symbol Y1 is set is set. A small hit symbol Y3 in which the first time-saving gaming state of 80 times is set, a small hit symbol Z4 in which the first time-saving gaming state of 10,000 times of time reduction is set, etc. may be provided.
In addition, instead of determining the small hit symbol by the process of determining the winning / failing lottery and the special symbol, in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning / failing random number as in the above-mentioned modification (2), for example, the setting of the first short game state is set. And the winning of the small hit corresponding to the small hit symbol Y1 in which the number of time reductions is 50 times, and the winning of the small hit corresponding to the small hit symbol Y2 in which the first time reduction gaming state is not set can be derived. If the small hit corresponding to the small hit symbol Y1 is won by the winning / failing lottery, the first time-saving game state of 50 times of time saving is set, and the small winning corresponding to the small hit symbol Y2 is set by the winning / failing lottery. If the player wins the game, the first time-saving game state may not be set.
Further, it may be stipulated that the time-saving gaming state is set for all the small hit symbols that can be determined, or that the time-saving gaming state is set for a part of the small hit symbols that can be determined. Further, it may be stipulated that the time-saving gaming state is set for all the lost symbols that can be determined, or that the time-saving gaming state is set for a part of the lost symbols that can be determined. In addition, the small hit symbol or the lost symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state is fixed, and the small hit symbol or the lost symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state is not switched every time the game is played. You may do it.
In this case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment is obtained, and special symbols such as small hit symbols and lost symbols that have been conventionally adopted are not provided as special symbols. It is possible to set a time-saving game state without going through the winning of a big hit and the execution of a special game, and it is possible to simplify the development process of the pachinko machine.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set is determined based on the result of determining whether or not the time-saving gaming state is given in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning / failing random number. The control of the decision is not limited to this.
For example, a time-saving symbol random number, which is a dedicated random number for determining whether or not to set a time-saving game state, is provided separately from the winning / failing random number and the special symbol random number, and the time-saving is set separately from the winning / failing lottery and the determination of the special symbol. The time-saving symbol lottery is set to determine whether or not the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) can be set based on the symbol random number, and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game) is set based on the result of the time-saving symbol lottery. The state) may be set or not, and the number of time reductions when setting the time reduction game state may be determined.
That is, whether or not the time-saving game state can be set by performing a winning / failing lottery based on the winning / failing random number, determining a special symbol based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, and performing a time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number (described later). It can be set to determine the time saving symbol).

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, the above-mentioned first special figure random number and the second special figure random number, as well as the above-mentioned random number dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, are used. One time-saving symbol random number is acquired within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535), and based on the acquired time-saving symbol random number, the type of time-saving symbol for which the setting of the time-saving gaming state is determined is determined. Set to perform a time-saving symbol lottery.
More specifically, a time-saving symbol random number determination table for determining the type of the time-saving symbol in the time-saving symbol lottery is provided. At this time, the time-saving symbol random number determination table may be provided for each type of starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 15, second starting winning opening 16) into which the game ball has entered. Then, when the set gaming state is the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is performed with reference to the predetermined time-saving symbol random number determination table, and the type of the time-saving symbol is determined.

As the time saving symbol, the time saving winning symbol in which the winning of the time saving grant (that is, setting the time saving game state) is defined, and the non-winning of the time saving grant (that is, not setting the time saving game state) is defined. Winning symbols can be provided. In addition, as the time-saving winning symbols, a plurality of types of time-saving winning symbols having different time-saving times (for example, time-saving winning symbols JA1 having 10 time-saving times, time-saving winning symbols JA2 having 20 time-saving times, etc.). Can be provided.
When any of the time-saving winning symbols is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery, for example, the first time-saving gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) is set, and the determined time-saving winning symbol is determined. The number of time reductions is set. As a result, the first low-probability time-saving game state is continued until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived for the set number of time-saving times without winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the time saving non-winning symbol is decided, it remains in the normal game state.
If the set gaming state is other than the normal gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability time-saving gaming state), the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is performed. Instead, it may be forcibly set to determine a time-saving non-winning symbol. As a result, in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is not newly set.

As described above, when it is set to determine the type of the time-saving symbol by the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, the time-saving symbol lottery, the time-saving symbol, the winning / fail lottery, the special symbol, etc. It may be set to perform the same control as the control related to.
For example, the acquired time-saving symbol random numbers are the same as the first special figure random numbers and the second special figure random numbers acquired when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16. It may be stored in the hold storage area and set so that it can be held up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) in the same manner as the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number.
Further, when the time saving symbol is determined as described above, a predetermined display device (time saving symbol display device) different from the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 is similarly to the special symbol. In, the variation display of the time-saving symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as the variation of the time-saving symbol) may be set. The variation display of the time-saving symbol may be set to start at the same timing as the variation display of the special symbol, or may be set to have the same variation time as the variation display of the special symbol. Further, when the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the time-saving symbol are started at the same timing, the time-saving symbol lottery may be set to be performed at the start of the variation display.

In addition, when the time-saving winning symbol is determined in the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and if the winning / failing lottery executed in connection with the time-saving symbol lottery is lost, after the change of the special symbol based on the winning / losing lottery is stopped. (At the start of the change of the next special symbol), the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) may be set. In addition, when a small hit is won in the winning / failing lottery executed in connection with the time-saving symbol lottery, after the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit is completed (the first special after the small hit game is completed). (At the start of the fluctuation of the symbol), the time-saving game state may be set.

On the other hand, when the time-saving winning symbol is determined in the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery and the big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery executed in association with the time-saving symbol lottery, the time-saving winning symbol is determined. The time-saving game state is not set based on the jackpot, and the jackpot determined based on the jackpot winning after the end of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot (at the start of the change of the first special symbol after the special game ends). The game state may be set according to the type of the symbol. That is, if the determination of the time-saving winning symbol and the determination of the jackpot symbol (winning of the jackpot) overlap, the determination of the time-saving winning symbol is invalidated and the game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol is set. good. If the game state is set with priority over the special game based on the determination of the time-saving winning symbol, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot may change, and the special game ends after confirming the presence or absence of the change. It is necessary to set the game state later, and the process of setting the game state may become complicated. However, by performing the above, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, the variation pattern command, the mode of the variation effect, the mode of the look-ahead effect, and the like may be determined based on the results of the determination of the special symbol and the determination of the time saving symbol.
Specifically, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small win or a loss and the time saving winning symbol is determined, the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small winning winning or losing and the time saving non-winning symbol. When is determined, and when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit (when a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined), the variation pattern command and the mode of variation production corresponding to each are determined. May be good. Then, for example, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small win or a loss, and the time-saving winning symbol is determined, or if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, the result of the winning / failing lottery is small. It may be set so that the determination ratio of the variation pattern command associated with the long variation time is higher than that in the case of winning or losing and the time saving non-winning symbol is determined, or the jackpot. It may be set so that the determination ratio of the mode of the variable effect or the mode of the look-ahead effect, which is set with a high expectation of winning or the time saving grant, is high.

In addition, even if it is set to determine the type of the time-saving symbol by the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, whether or not to perform the time-saving symbol lottery in the game state other than the normal gaming state and set the time-saving gaming state. You may decide whether or not. Since the various controls in this case are the same as in (6) above, the description thereof will be omitted.
In addition, instead of determining whether or not to set the time-saving game state and the number of times of time-saving in the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, only determining whether or not to set the time-saving game state in the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number. However, when it is decided to set the time saving game state, a lottery may be performed to determine the time saving number based on another random number (time saving number determination random number) different from the above-mentioned time saving symbol random number. ..

Further, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery may be set to be performed using another random number instead of using the time-saving symbol random number.
For example, as in the above-described embodiment, the hit / fail random number of 1 is used to determine whether or not the jackpot is won or not, instead of both determining whether the jackpot is successful or not and whether or not the small hit is successful. A large hit judgment random number that is used only, a small hit judgment random number that is used only to judge whether or not a small hit is won, and a loss judgment random number that is used only to judge whether or not a loss occurs are provided separately for each random number. By making a judgment for each, the judgment result of winning a big hit, winning a small hit, or losing is derived, and the above-mentioned time saving symbol lottery is performed based on any of these random numbers to shorten the time. You may decide whether or not to set the game state and the number of time reductions.

Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol is not determined by one special symbol random number, but the jackpot used only for determining the type of the jackpot symbol when the jackpot is won. Separately, the random number for determining the symbol, the random number for determining the small hit symbol used only for determining the type of the small hit symbol when the small hit is won, and the random number for determining the lost symbol used only for determining the type of the lost symbol in the case of loss. Based on any random number according to the result of winning a big hit, winning a small hit, or losing, the type of big hit symbol, the type of small hit symbol, and the type of lost symbol are determined, and these random numbers are used. A time-saving symbol lottery may be performed based on any one of them to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set and the number of time-saving games.

Further, as in the above-described embodiment, in the pachinko machine P provided with the setting values of a plurality of stages associated with the settings related to the ball ejection, the lottery probability is set so as to be different according to the set values. Random numbers used in (for example, hit / miss random numbers, big hit judgment random numbers, small hit judgment random numbers, loss judgment random numbers, etc.), or are used in lottery set so that the lottery probabilities are the same regardless of the set value. A time-saving symbol lottery may be performed based on any of random numbers (for example, a special symbol random number, etc.) to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set and the number of time-saving times. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not performed based on the random numbers used in the lottery set so that the lottery probability differs according to the set value, and the lottery probability is set to be the same regardless of the set value. The time-saving symbol lottery may be performed based only on the random numbers used in the lottery to determine whether or not the time-saving game state can be set and the number of time-saving times.

When the settings are made as described above, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the control methods for setting the time-saving gaming state are abundant, and the time-saving gaming state is set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. Is possible.

(10) When the high-probability gaming state is set in the above-described embodiment, a special symbol (big hit symbol X4) in which the jackpot is won and the setting of the low-probability gaming state is determined is determined thereafter. , The high-probability gaming state has ended and the low-probability gaming state has been set, but the control of transition to the low-probability gaming state is not limited to this.
For example, after the high-probability gaming state is set, the high-probability gaming state ends when a predetermined high-probability number of winning / failing lottery (for example, 80 times) is performed without winning the jackpot. (Structured as a so-called ST type pachinko machine). Then, in the pachinko machine set in this way, if a gaming state that combines a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state can be set, the above-described embodiment can be set during the gaming state. When the winning of the time saving grant is determined by the winning / failing lottery and the time saving symbol is determined, the small hit symbol or the losing symbol is determined to set the time saving gaming state as in the above-mentioned modification (8). When this is done, or when the time-saving winning symbol is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery as in the above-mentioned modification (9), the time-saving gaming state may be set based on the determination.
Further, for example, a fall lottery random number used for a fall lottery to determine whether or not to end the high-probability gaming state and set a low-probability gaming state is provided, and the high-probability gaming state is terminated by the fall lottery based on the fall lottery random number. When it is decided to set the low-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state may be terminated. Then, when the fall lottery random number is provided, the time-saving symbol lottery as in the above-mentioned modification (9) may be performed based on the fall lottery random number to determine whether or not the time-saving game state can be set. ..
When the settings are made as described above, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the control methods for setting the time-saving gaming state are abundant, and the time-saving gaming state is set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. Is possible.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, the process of determining the result of the winning / failing lottery is performed in the order of determination of winning / failing of big hit → determination of winning / failing of small hit → determination of winning / failing of time saving grant. The order of is not limited to this.
For example, the determination of the success or failure of the big hit → the determination of the success or failure of the time saving grant → the determination of the success or failure of the small hit may be performed in this order.
Further, as in the above-mentioned modification (8), in the winning / failing lottery, instead of deriving the winning determination result of the time saving grant, the small hit corresponding to the small hit symbol in which the time saving game state is set is defined. It is possible to derive the winning of a small hit (hereinafter also referred to as a small hit with a time reduction) and the small hit corresponding to the small hit symbol that does not set the time reduction game state (hereinafter also referred to as a small hit without a time reduction). In a pachinko machine where the time-saving gaming state is set when a small hit with a hit is won, and the time-saving gaming state is not set when a small hit without a time reduction is won, for example, a judgment of whether or not a big hit is won → Judgment of whether or not a small hit with a time reduction is made → Judgment of whether or not a small hit with a time reduction is made, judgment of whether or not a small hit with a time reduction is made → Judgment of whether or not a small hit with a time reduction is made → Judgment of whether or not a small hit with a time reduction is made. May be good.
Further, as in the above-mentioned modification (8), in the winning / failing lottery, instead of deriving the winning determination result of the time saving grant, the losing pattern corresponding to the losing symbol in which the time saving gaming state is set is defined (hereinafter referred to as “loss”). , Also referred to as time-saving loss), loss corresponding to the loss pattern that stipulates that the time-saving game state is not set (hereinafter, also referred to as time-saving loss) can be derived, and in the case of time-saving game state In a pachinko machine in which the time-saving game state is not set when is set and there is no time-saving loss, for example, the order of hit / fail judgment of big hit → judgment of hit / fail of small hit → judgment of loss with time reduction, big hit The judgment may be made in the order of judgment of hit / fail → judgment of loss with time reduction → judgment of hit / miss of small hit.
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not to end the high-probability gaming state by a fall lottery, a fall lottery → a win / fail lottery (judgment of whether or not a big hit is successful, judgment of whether or not a small hit is successful, and whether or not a time reduction is granted). The lottery process may be performed in the order of determination).

Further, as in the above-mentioned modification (9), in the pachinko machine which is set to determine whether or not the time saving game state can be set by the time saving symbol lottery and the setting value of a plurality of stages is not set, the time saving symbol lottery is performed. → The lottery may be processed in the order of winning / failing lottery, or the lottery may be processed in the order of winning / failing lottery → time-saving symbol lottery. In addition, in pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game state by the time-saving symbol lottery and the setting values of multiple stages are set, the time-saving symbol lottery (lottery probability regardless of the set value). The lottery may be processed in the order of (lottery set so that the numbers are the same) → win / fail lottery (lottery set so that the lottery probabilities differ according to the set value).
Further, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not to set a time-saving gaming state by a time-saving symbol lottery and to determine whether or not to end a high-probability gaming state by a fall lottery, and a setting value of multiple stages is not set. May process the lottery in the order of fall lottery → time-saving symbol lottery → win / fail lottery, or may perform lottery processing in the order of fall lottery → win / fail lottery → time-saving symbol lottery. In addition, the pachinko machine is set to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state by the time-saving symbol lottery, and to determine whether or not to end the high-probability gaming state by the fall lottery, and the setting values of multiple stages are set. In addition, a fall lottery (a lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the set value) → a time-saving symbol lottery (a lottery probability is set to be the same regardless of the set value). The lottery may be processed in the order of (lottery) → win / fail lottery (lottery set so that the lottery probability differs depending on the set value).

When the settings are made as described above, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and a lottery for determining whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state can be performed at the timing according to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the special game is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, but the execution opportunity of the special game is not limited to this. do not have.
For example, a small amount executed not only when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, but also when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a predetermined small hit (when a predetermined small hit symbol is determined). In the winning game, the specific large winning opening equipped with a special area where the game ball can enter is opened, and the game ball that entered the specific large winning opening during the small hit game enters the special area. You may set it so that the special game is executed even if it is done (configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine). In addition, after the end of the special game executed based on the above-mentioned small hit winning, the game state (non-short-time game state, short-time game state) according to the small hit symbol determined at the time of the above-mentioned small hit winning is entered. It may be set to migrate.

Further, even in the pachinko machine set as described above (so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machine), as in the above-described embodiment and modification, the determination of whether or not the time saving is applied (the above-mentioned embodiment and the above-mentioned embodiment) Win / fail lottery of the above-mentioned variant example (2)), determination of small hit symbols and lost symbols that determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state (processing of the above-mentioned variant example (8) win / fail lottery and determination of special symbols) , Determination of time-saving winning symbol or time-saving non-winning symbol (time-saving symbol lottery in the above-mentioned modification (9)), etc. (hereinafter, these judgments and decisions are collectively referred to as time-saving grant determination processing). However, the time-saving game state may be set without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game.
In addition, for example, in the case of performing the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery with a so-called 1-type and 2-type mixed pachinko machine, the time-saving game state is set by the time-saving symbol lottery (the time-saving symbol specified to set the time-saving game state). (Time saving winning symbol)) is decided, and when the winning / failing lottery results in a loss (the losing symbol is decided), after the change of the special symbol based on the winning / failing lottery is stopped, the result of the above-mentioned time saving symbol lottery is displayed. When it is decided to set the time-saving game state according to the time-saving game state and set the time-saving game state by the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and the small hit is won by the winning / failing lottery (the small hit symbol is decided), the above-mentioned The time saving game state is not set according to the result of the time saving symbol lottery, and after the end of the small hit game and the special game based on the winning of the small hit, the type of the small hit symbol determined based on the winning of the small hit is selected. The corresponding gaming state may be set.
Specifically, the time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) associated with setting the first time-saving game state (time-saving number of times is 20 times) is determined by the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and a small hit in the winning / failing lottery. If a small hit symbol associated with setting the second time reduction game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is determined after the small hit game and the special game are completed, the small hit game and special After the end of the game, the first time-saving game state may not be set, and the second time-saving game state may be set.
In this case, in addition to having the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment, pachinko machines having various specifications can be equipped with a lottery function for determining whether or not a time-saving gaming state can be set, and a small hit. When the winning of the game and the determination of the setting of the time-saving gaming state overlap, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the setting process of the time-saving gaming state becomes complicated.

(13) When a plurality of types of determination results are provided as the determination results that can be determined by the above-mentioned time saving determination process, it is easy to keep the second start winning opening 16 in the open state for each determination result. You may set a time-saving game state in which the processing contents for the purpose are different.
For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the time-saving game state is set to be set by the process of winning / failing lottery and the determination of the special symbol is set to be determined, or the above-mentioned modification (9). ), The type of time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) that can be determined when it is set to determine the time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) for which the time-saving game state is set by the time-saving symbol lottery. As a result, the probability of winning in the lottery of the symbol and the normal symbol for which the above-mentioned first time reduction game state is set is higher than that of the non-time reduction game state, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the second start winning opening The opening time of 16 is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state. The symbol is defined to set the third time-shortening gaming state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer than that of the non-time-saving gaming state, but it wins in the lottery of the normal symbol. The probability of becoming the second start winning opening 16 and the opening time of the second starting winning opening 16 are the same as the non-time saving gaming state. Even if a symbol or the like is provided that the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are the same as those of the non-short game state, although it is longer than the state. good. In addition to these, any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 will be higher (or longer) than in the non-time saving gaming state. However, the other one may be provided with a symbol for setting a time-saving gaming state that is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state.
It should be noted that the same setting can be made even when it is possible to derive the result of winning the time saving grant corresponding to the predetermined time saving symbol in the winning / failing lottery as in the above-mentioned modification (2). For example, in the winning / failing lottery, it corresponds to the winning of the time saving grant corresponding to the time saving symbol specified to set the above-mentioned third time saving game state, and the time saving symbol specified to set the above-mentioned fourth time saving game state. It may be set so that the result such as winning of the time saving grant can be derived.

Further, as in the above-mentioned modification (8), when it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set by the small hit symbol or the lost symbol determined in the process of winning / failing lottery and determining the special symbol. , The small hit symbol Y1 (or the lost symbol Z1) that defines the setting of the above-mentioned first time-saving gaming state, and the small hit symbol Y3 (or the losing symbol Y3) that defines the setting of the above-mentioned third time-saving gaming state. Z3), the small hit symbol Y4 (or the lost symbol Z4) that defines the setting of the above-mentioned fourth time-shortening gaming state, and the small hit symbol Y5 (or the small hit symbol Y5) that defines the setting of the above-mentioned fifth time-shortening gaming state. A lost symbol Z5) or the like may be provided. In addition to these, any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 will be higher (or longer) than in the non-time saving gaming state. However, the other one may be provided with a small hit symbol (or a lost symbol) that is defined to set a time-saving gaming state that is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification (8), in the winning / failing lottery, it is stipulated that the winning of the small hit corresponding to the small hit symbol for which the time saving game state is set and the setting of the time saving game state are set. The same setting can be made even when the result with the loss corresponding to the lost symbol can be derived. For example, in the winning / failing lottery, the winning of the small hit corresponding to the small hit symbol Y3 (or the loss corresponding to the lost symbol Z3), which is determined to set the above-mentioned third time-shortened gaming state, and the above-mentioned fourth time-saving gaming state. It may be set so that the result of the small hit winning (or the loss corresponding to the lost symbol Z4) corresponding to the small hit symbol Y4 for which it is determined to be set can be derived.

When set as described above, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the second start winning opening 16 is set in the time-saving game state set without the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. Since it is possible to increase the variation of processing for making it easy to keep the player in an open state, it is possible to impart more innovative playability and enhance the interest of the player.

(14) The types and numbers of symbols (time reduction symbols, time reduction winning symbols, small hit symbols, lost symbols, etc.) that are determined to set the time reduction game state that can be determined by the above-mentioned time reduction grant determination process are for each game state. May be set differently.
For example, when a predetermined type (for example, 5 types) of symbols (time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.) for setting the time-saving gaming state are provided, in the normal gaming state. Although all types can be determined, one or more types may be set so that one or more types can be determined in the low-probability time-saving game state, and all types can be determined in the low-probability time-saving game state. , Any one or a plurality of types may be set so that it can be determined in the normal gaming state.
Further, for example, although all types can be determined in a specific time-saving game state (for example, the first time-saving game state), any one or a plurality of types can be determined in a time-saving game state other than the specific time (for example, the third time-saving game state). It may be set so that the type of can be determined.
When set as described above, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and the ratio at which the time-saving gaming state is set and the type of time-saving gaming state that can be set are changed for each gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to give more innovative playability and enhance the interest of the player.

(15) When it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set depending on the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol, the variation pattern is determined according to the determined type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol. You may do so.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and when the time-saving game state is set without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, a variation effect rich in variation is produced. Can be executed.

(16) When it is set to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state according to the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol, within a predetermined period (for example, from the predetermined start time until the winning / failing lottery is performed 100 times). The time-saving game state is set according to the number of times the small hit symbol that is determined to set the time-saving game state is determined and the number of times the lost symbol that is determined to set the time-saving game state is determined. You may do so.
For example, when the small hit symbol Y1 (the small hit symbol that defines the setting of the first time reduction game state of 20 times reduction number of times) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period. , The time-saving gaming state defined in the small hit symbol Y1 may be set. Further, for example, when the lost symbol Z1 (a small hit symbol for setting the first time-saving game state of 50 times of time reduction) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period. In addition, the time-saving gaming state defined in the lost symbol Z1 may be set.
Even in such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the conditions for setting the time-saving gaming state becomes abundant, so that more innovative game playability can be imparted.

(17) In a so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving game state is set based on the type of the small-hit symbol, the small-hit game state is set. When the game ball enters the special area provided in the specific large winning opening during the small hit game based on the decision, and when the game ball does not enter the special area provided in the specific large winning opening during the small hit game. The number of time reductions in the time reduction game state set after the small hit game may be the same or different from that of the case.
For example, when the small hit symbol Y1 is determined to set the first time reduction game state of 20 times of time reduction, the game ball is in a special area during the small hit game based on the determination of the small hit symbol Y1. After the end of the small hit game and the special game, the first time reduction game state of 20 times is set, and even when the game ball does not enter the special area, the number of time reductions is set after the end of the small hit game. The first time-saving game state of 20 times may be set.
Further, for example, when the above-mentioned small hit symbol Y1 is determined, during the small hit game based on the determination of the small hit symbol Y1, when the game ball enters the special area, after the small hit game and the special game are completed, Even if the first time-saving game state of 20 times of time reduction is set and the first time-saving game state of 5 times of time reduction is set after the end of the small hit game when the game ball does not enter the special area. good.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and different time-saving game states can be set depending on whether or not the game ball can be placed in the special area, and there are abundant variations in playability. Can be.

(18) When setting the time-saving gaming state when a small hit is won in the winning / failing lottery (when the small hit symbol is determined), the relevant small hit is won (decision of the small hit symbol). Any timing until the end of the small hit game based on the small hit winning (for example, at the time of winning the small hit, at the start of the change of the small hit symbol, at the end of the change of the small hit symbol, at the end of the change of the small hit symbol, the small based on the small hit symbol The time-saving game state may be set at the start of the hit game, during the small hit game, at the end of the small hit game (at the start of the change of the first special symbol after the end of the small hit game), and the like).
Similarly, when setting the time-saving game state when a loss occurs in the winning / losing lottery (when the loss symbol is determined), the loss is based on the time when the loss occurs (the loss symbol is determined). Time is shortened at any timing until the end of the change (for example, when the lottery result of the loss is derived, when the change of the lost symbol starts, when the change of the lost symbol ends (when the change of the next special symbol starts), etc.) The game state may be set.
Even when it is set in this way, it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment, and it is possible to increase the variation of the transition to the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to increase the variation of the game playability. ..

(19) When it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set depending on the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol, the number of time reductions in the time-saving gaming state corresponds to the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol. A predetermined number of time reductions may be set, or a lottery for determining the number of time reductions may be performed at the time of transition to the time reduction gaming state, and the number of time reductions determined in the lottery may be set.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the method for determining the number of time reductions can be increased, and the number of time reductions can be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. It becomes.

(20) When it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving game state can be set according to the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol, the time-saving game set according to the determined type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol. The performance of the state (the difficulty level at which the second starting winning opening 16 is maintained in the open state) may be different.
For example, when the small hit symbol Y1 (or the lost symbol Z1) is determined, the second starting winning opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the normal gaming state (the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high). One or more of the settings, the setting with a long fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the setting with a long opening time of the second start winning opening 16 are set). When the symbol Z3) is determined, the time-saving game state B in which the second start winning opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than the time-saving game state A may be set.
Further, the performance of the set time-saving gaming state may be different depending on the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol and the set gaming state.
For example, when the small hit symbol Y1 (or the lost symbol Z1) is determined in the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state A is set, but the small hit symbol Y1 (or the lost symbol Z1) is set in the time-saving gaming state. ) Is determined, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state B may be set.
Even in the above case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the performance of the set time-saving gaming state can be enriched, so that more innovative playability can be imparted. Become.

(21) When the time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the time-saving game state, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games is set. Without (that is, the number of time reductions is infinite), the time reduction game state may be terminated on condition that the jackpot is won, or a lottery for determining the time reduction end symbol stipulated to end the time reduction game state. (Lottery of the time-saving end symbol) may be performed, and the time-saving game state may be terminated on condition that the time-saving end symbol is determined by the lottery. In addition, the time-saving game state is terminated on condition that the time-saving game state is set and the time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol is determined, and the time-saving game based on the decision is newly made. The state and the number of time reductions may be set (overwritten). Further, in the above-mentioned time-saving game state, the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the time-saving number, the big hit is won, and the special game based on the small hit is executed. That is, the time-saving gaming state (second described later) such as the time-saving gaming state (described later (29)) due to the fact that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time-saving activation number LN. It may end when any of the conditions of the time reduction)) is set.
Even in such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the end condition of the time-saving gaming state can be enriched, so that more innovative game playability can be imparted.

(22) When the number of continuous time reduction settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, it is set so that the time reduction game state cannot be set as the next game state (the non-time reduction game state is forcibly set). In the pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter), the time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol that stipulates that the time-saving gaming state is set is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. In that case, the above-mentioned continuous time reduction setting number may or may not be updated based on the stop display.
In addition, even when the time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol that is determined to set the time-saving gaming state is stopped and displayed in the time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned continuation is based on the stop display. The time reduction setting number may or may not be updated.
In addition, when it is determined during the normal game state, the time-saving game state is set, but when it is determined during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is not set. Even when the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed during the time saving game state, the above-mentioned continuous time saving setting number may or may not be updated based on the stop display.
Even in the above case, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the difficulty level at which the number of continuous time reduction settings reaches the upper limit can be changed, so that more innovative playability can be imparted. Become.

(23) In a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, the performance of the time-saving gaming state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, or the loss symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set. The number of remaining times until the number of consecutive time reduction settings reaches a predetermined upper limit for the winning probability of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 and the number of time reductions). It may be different depending on the number of times, or it may be the same regardless of the remaining number of times.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the time-saving gaming state set in the pachinko machine equipped with the time-saving limiter can be enriched, resulting in more innovative game performance. Can be granted.

(24) Pachinko configured so that the time-saving game state is set by the determination of the time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol, which is determined to set the time-saving game state while the fall lottery is performed. When it is determined by the fall lottery that the high-probability gaming state will be terminated and the time-saving gaming state is set, the time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol is determined. As the number of time reductions in the time reduction game state set based on the determination of the symbol, the game state before the above-mentioned determination by the fall lottery is made and the number of time reductions determined according to the type of the determined symbol are set. Alternatively, the number of time reductions determined according to the gaming state before the above-mentioned determination by the fall lottery is made and the type of the determined symbol may be set.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and the variation of the number of time reductions set in the time reduction game state can be enriched, so that more innovative playability can be imparted. Become.

(25) When the look-ahead effect for notifying the result of the winning / failing lottery is being executed, if the time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol is determined to set the time-saving game state, it is being executed. The look-ahead effect may be continued, or the look-ahead effect may be canceled without continuing.
In addition, when a hold for which a time-saving symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol is determined to set a time-saving game state is stored, a specific effect (look-ahead effect, the other) for another hold is stored. The execution of a predetermined effect (such as a predetermined effect) that is executed during the variable effect based on the hold may be restricted, or if a specific effect for the other hold has already been executed, it is being executed. The specific effect may be continued or may be canceled without continuing.
The same applies to the pachinko machine, which is set to determine whether or not the time-saving game state can be set by the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and is set to execute a look-ahead effect for notifying the result of the time-saving symbol lottery. May be controlled.
Even in such a case, the same action and effect as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained, and it is appropriate depending on the situation of determining the time-saving symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol, which is determined to set the time-saving gaming state. It is possible to execute various effects.

(26) In a pachinko machine that can set the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot to the high-probability gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot during the low-probability gaming state is high. The probability A1 that the game state will be set to the probability game state and the probability A2 that the game state after the end of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot in the high probability game state will be set to the high probability game state are. It may be set to have the same value, or it may be set to have different values.
Further, the above-mentioned probabilities A1 and A2 may be set to have the same value regardless of the type of the special figure random number (first special figure random number, second special figure random number) used in the winning / failing lottery. Alternatively, the values may be set to be different depending on the type of the special figure random number. Further, the above-mentioned probabilities A1 and A2 may be set to have the same value regardless of the type of special symbol determined when the jackpot is won, or may be set according to the type of special symbol. It may be set to have different values. Further, the values may be set to be different depending on the type of the special symbol random number used for the winning / failing lottery and the type of the special symbol determined when the jackpot is won.
When set in this way, the probability that the high-probability gaming state is set from the low-probability gaming state through the execution of the special game, and the high-probability gaming state again from the high-probability gaming state through the execution of the special game. There are a lot of variations in the probability that is set, and the playability that can be provided to the player can be made rich in variations.

(27) In a pachinko machine capable of ending a high-probability gaming state and setting a low-probability gaming state by a fall lottery, a value of 1 is set as the determination probability B for ending the high-probability gaming state and setting the low-probability gaming state. Only may be provided, or a plurality of values may be provided.
Then, when only one value is provided, a fall lottery is always performed based on the value, and when a plurality of values are provided, depending on the situation (for example, a special after the high probability gaming state is set). A fall lottery may be performed according to any of the values (depending on the number of changes in the symbol, the type of the starting winning opening into which the game ball has entered, etc.).
Further, the determination probability B has the same value regardless of any of the set gaming states (high-probability non-time-saving gaming state combining high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability short-time gaming state, and non-time-saving gaming state). It may be set as follows. Further, the determination probability B may be set so as to have the same value regardless of the type of the special figure random number (first special figure random number, second special figure random number) used for the winning / failing lottery. The value may be set to be different depending on the type of the special figure random number. Further, the determination probability B may be set so as to have the same value regardless of the type of the special symbol (loss symbol) determined in the case of loss, or differs depending on the type of the special symbol. It may be set to be a value. Further, the values may be set to be different depending on the set game state, the type of the special symbol random number used for the winning / failing lottery, and the type of the special symbol determined in the case of loss.
When set in this way, there are many variations in the probability that the high-probability gaming state will end and the low-probability gaming state will be set, and the gameplay that can be provided to the player will also be rich in variation. can.

(28) When the number of consecutive high-probability settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a probabilistic limiter) that is set to forcibly set a low-probability gaming state after the end of a special game is installed. In the pachinko machine (referred to as a pachinko machine), only one value may be set or a plurality of values may be set as the upper limit number of times. Then, when only one value is provided, the above-mentioned setting is performed when the number of continuous high-probability settings reaches the value, and when a plurality of values are provided, the number of continuous high-probability settings is determined. The above-mentioned setting may be made when any of the values corresponding to (for example, according to the number of transitions from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state) is reached.
Similarly, in the pachinko machine equipped with the time saving limiter, only one value may be set or a plurality of values may be set as the upper limit number of times. When only one value is provided, the above setting is performed when the number of continuous time reduction settings reaches the value, and when a plurality of values are provided, the number of continuous time reduction settings is set according to the situation. Alternatively, the above setting may be made when any of the values (for example, depending on the number of transitions from the non-time saving gaming state to the time saving gaming state) is reached.
When set in this way, there are many variations in the number of continuous high-accuracy settings and the maximum number of continuous time-shortening settings, and the playability that can be provided to the player can also be rich in variations.

(29) In the above-described embodiment, the time-saving game state is set when the time-saving game is won by the determination of whether or not the time-saving is given in the winning / losing lottery during the normal game state. The opportunity for setting the game state is not limited to this.
For example, the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result is derived in the winning / failing lottery) is counted, and the gaming state when the count value reaches the predetermined time-saving activation number LN without winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of other than (normal game state or high probability non-time saving game state), the time saving game state in which the time saving number becomes the specified time saving number TN is set without going through the winning of the big hit and the execution of the special game. You may do it. Further, the specific time reduction number TN may be set to be larger than the time reduction activation number LN.
When set in this way, even if the jackpot is not won, the time-saving game state is set if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN, so there are variations in which the time-saving game state can be set. It becomes abundant and can enhance the interest of the player.

(30) In the pachinko machine set as in the above-mentioned modification (29), the above-mentioned count value is (a) the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the power-on time (RAM clear time) and (b) the normal gaming state. When the number of times of time reduction activation reaches LN, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the normal gaming state reaches the number of times of time reduction activation LN, and then the winning / failing lottery of the specific number of times of time reduction TN is performed without winning the jackpot. Set the time point (when the time saving game state set by reaching the time saving activation count LN ends), (c) when the jackpot is won or when the special game based on the jackpot winning ends, and (d) the time saving game state is set. In the pachinko machine that sets the time-saving gaming state by determining the time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol, the set value is provided at the time when the time-saving gaming state is set. In the pachinko machine, it may be cleared at any one or more of the RAM clearing points performed by changing the set value. That is, the counting of the above-mentioned count values may be started from the time points (a) to (e). It should be noted that the clearing at the time point (c) may be set so as to be always executed.
Further, the above-mentioned count value may be cleared at another time point different from (a) to (e).
Further, the above-mentioned count value may be always counted regardless of the game state in which the set game state is set, or is in a state advantageous to the player (for example, in a high-probability game state, time saving). It may not be counted in the game state, etc.).
In addition, as the timing for counting the above-mentioned count value, when a loss occurs in the winning / failing lottery (when a loss symbol is determined), the loss occurs from the time when the loss symbol is determined (the loss symbol is determined). Any timing until the end of the change based on (for example, when the lottery result of the loss is derived, at the start of the change of the lost symbol, at the end of the change of the lost symbol, and the stop display after the change of the lost symbol ends. It may be the time when time has passed (at the start of the next special symbol change), etc., or when the jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery (when the jackpot symbol is decided), any of the above-mentioned time points. Alternatively, it may be the end time of a special game based on the winning of a big hit.
Further, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set may be set to be the same as the timing at which the above-mentioned count value is counted.
Further, for example, if the above-mentioned count value is in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number mainly acquired during the normal gaming state may be counted. However, not only the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number but also the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number may be counted as a target.
When set in this way, there are abundant variations in the timing at which the time-saving game state is set, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.
In addition, when counting the above-mentioned count value is started from the end of the special game, the fluctuation at the time when the count value reaches the reduced working hours LN can be executed by a specific fluctuation pattern (variation time). May be good. Further, when counting the above-mentioned count value is started from the time when the RAM is cleared, even if the fluctuation at the time when the count value reaches the time reduction activation number LN cannot be executed by a specific fluctuation pattern (variation time). good.

(31) In the pachinko machine set as in the above-mentioned modification (29), the time-saving activation frequency LN is determined in relation to the probability of winning a big hit in the winning / losing lottery, and the gambling is not too high. Value (for example, if the probability of winning a big hit in the winning / failing lottery is 1 / P, P × activation lower limit coefficient (for example, 2.5 etc.) ≤ time saving activation frequency LN ≦ P × activation upper limit coefficient (for example) It may be 3.0 etc.)). Further, the value may be an appropriate value according to the game specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning the jackpot. Further, as the time saving activation frequency LN, only one value may be provided, or a plurality of values may be provided.
When a set value of multiple stages to which the setting related to the payout is associated is provided, a different time saving activation number LN may be set for each setting value, or the same time saving activation may be performed regardless of the setting value. The number of times LN (time saving activation number LN determined based on the probability of winning the jackpot at any set value (for example, the probability of winning the lowest jackpot)) may be set.
When set in this way, it is possible to prevent the gambling based on the setting of the time-saving gaming state from becoming too high, and it is possible to increase the variation of the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set.

(32) In the pachinko machine set as in the above-mentioned modification (29), the specific time saving number TN is determined in relation to the probability of winning a big hit in the winning / losing lottery, and the gambling is not too high. Value (for example, if the probability of winning a big hit in the winning / failing lottery is 1 / P, P × specific lower limit coefficient (for example, 0.4, etc.) ≤ specific time saving number TN ≤ P × specific upper limit coefficient (for example) 3.8 etc.)) may be obtained. Further, the value may be an appropriate value according to the game specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning the jackpot. Further, as the specific time reduction frequency LN, only one value may be provided, or a plurality of values may be provided.
In addition, the time saving game state set based on the time saving number of times of the time saving game state set based on the winning of the big hit, and the time saving game state set based on the determination of the symbol which is determined to set the time saving game state without winning the big hit. The number of time reductions may also be set so as to be within the above range.
Further, when a multi-step setting value to which the setting related to the payout is associated is provided, a different specific time saving number TN may be set for each setting value, and any setting value is the same. A specific time reduction TN (a specific time reduction TN determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot at any set value (for example, the probability of winning the lowest jackpot)) may be set.
In addition, the time-saving gaming state set based on the fact that the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN is based on the determination of the symbol that is determined to win the jackpot or set the time-saving gaming state. It may be set to end by satisfying the same time-saving end condition as the time-saving game state set in. For example, it may be set to end the above-mentioned time-saving game state by winning a big hit or by performing a winning / losing lottery for a specific time-saving number of times without winning a big hit.
Further, as a condition for ending the time saving game state, for example, the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number reaches the specific time saving number TN1. In addition, when a plurality of patterns are provided in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol based on the second special figure random number reaches the specific time reduction number TN2, both the specific time reduction number TN1 and TN2 are within the above range. Alternatively, only one of the specified time saving times TN1 or TN2 (for example, only the larger value of the specified time saving times TN1 or TN2) may belong to the above range.
When set in this way, it is possible to prevent the gambling based on the setting of the time-saving gaming state from becoming too high, and it is possible to increase the variation of the timing at which the set time-saving gaming state ends.

(33) In the pachinko machine set as in the above-described modification (29), the second time-saving gaming state is set based on the fact that the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN. A plurality of time-saving gaming states having different processing contents may be provided so that the starting winning opening 16 can be easily maintained in the open state, and one of the time-saving gaming states may be set according to the situation.
Specifically, the first time-saving game state in the above-described embodiment, the third time-saving game state in the above-mentioned modification (13), the fourth time-saving game state, the fifth time-saving game state, and the like are provided, for example, the time-saving activation. Type of big hit symbol when the last big hit was won before reaching the number of times LN, type of small hit symbol when the last small hit was won before reaching the number of times LN, time saving activation One of the time saving game states is set according to the type of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, the lost symbol, the time saving symbol, and the time saving winning symbol when the time saving game state is set before reaching the number of times LN. You may.
When set in this way, the variation of the time-saving gaming state set based on the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the time-saving activation number LN becomes abundant, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. ..

(34) In the pachinko machine in which the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the time-saving activation number LN as in the above-mentioned modification (29), the normal gaming state. The time-saving game state is set even based on the determination of the symbol (time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small hit symbol or lost symbol) that is set to set the time-saving game state in the middle (during the low-probability gaming state). You may do it.
In the pachinko machine set in this way, the symbol for setting the time-saving gaming state is not determined during the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state is set only during the non-time-saving gaming state. The symbol may be determined, or the symbol may be determined to set the time-saving gaming state even during the time-saving gaming state.
Further, when the above-mentioned count value reaches the reduced working hours LN during the normal gaming state (during the low-probability gaming state), and at the same time, the above-mentioned symbol is determined during the normal gaming state (during the low-probability gaming state) (that is,). , When the setting conditions for a plurality of time-saving gaming states are satisfied at the same time), one of the time-saving gaming states may be set.
In addition, the count value is set to be counted not only during the normal gaming state but also during the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the above-mentioned count value is set to be counted during the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. When the count value reaches the time reduction activation number LN, the time reduction gaming state may be set to be reset. In such a setting, when the time saving game state is reset, the time saving number corresponding to the reset time saving gaming state (that is, the specific time saving number TN) is set again as the time saving number of times. Alternatively, the number of time reductions corresponding to the reset time reduction gaming state may be added to the remaining number of time reductions at that time point. Further, when the above-mentioned count value reaches the time-saving activation number LN, the time-saving gaming state based on the arrival may be set after the time-saving gaming state set at that time is completed.
In this case, it is possible to increase the variation of the set time-saving gaming state and enhance the interest of the player.

(35) Even in the so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, the time-saving gaming state is set based on the fact that the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN, as in the above-mentioned modification (29). It may be done.
Further, the above-mentioned count value may not be cleared based on the winning of a small hit.
Further, in the so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine set as described above, a special game is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is a predetermined small hit. When the special game is set to be executed by the game ball entering the special area of the specific large winning opening in the small hit game executed when the player is elected, the above-mentioned modification (31) or ( As the probability P used to determine the time saving activation number LN and the specific time saving number TN as in 32), the probability of winning the above-mentioned big hit and the probability of winning the above-mentioned predetermined small hit (during the non-time saving gaming state). (Probability of winning a small hit in a winning or losing lottery based on a special figure random number mainly acquired), or using either the above-mentioned probability of winning a big hit and the above-mentioned combined probability of winning a predetermined small hit. May be good.
Further, in the so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine set as described above, no big hit is provided as a result of the winning / losing lottery, and when the result of the winning / losing lottery is a predetermined small hit. When the special game is set to be executed only when the game ball enters the special area of the specific large winning opening in the small hit game to be executed, as in the above-mentioned modification examples (31) and (32). The probability P used to determine the time saving activation number LN and the specific time saving number TN is the probability of winning the above-mentioned predetermined small hit (in the winning / failing lottery based on the special figure random number mainly acquired during the non-time saving gaming state). Either the probability of winning a small hit) or the probability of winning a predetermined small hit and the game ball entering the special area (the probability that the special game will be executed via the winning of the predetermined small hit). You may use it.
Further, when a small hit is won, the time reduction activation number LN may or may not be updated according to the type of the small hit symbol determined based on the winning. ..
Further, in a so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, a time-saving gaming state is set based on the fact that the count value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN, and the normal gaming state is in progress (low probability gaming state). If the time-saving gaming state is set even based on the determination of the time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol, which is determined to set the time-saving gaming state in (middle), the above-mentioned count value is set. When the above-mentioned symbol is determined at the same time when the time-saving activation count LN is reached (that is, when the setting conditions for a plurality of time-saving gaming states are satisfied at the same time), one of the time-saving gaming states is set. May be good.
Further, in a so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaching the number of times of time-saving activation LN, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is set. When the game ball enters the special area during the small hit game based on the small hit, the small hit is won and the predetermined small hit symbol is determined by the winning / losing lottery when the number of times of short-time activation reaches LN. After the end of, the gaming state specified in the predetermined small hit symbol (for example, the time-saving activation number LN) is reached without setting the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the time-saving activation number LN. To set a time-saving game state different from the time-saving game state based on the above (time-saving game state in which the difficulty level at which the second start winning opening 16 is maintained in the open state is different, time-saving game state in which the set number of time reductions is different, etc.) You may do it.
Further, in a so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaching the number of times of time-saving activation LN, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is set. When the game ball does not enter the special area during the small hit game based on the small hit, although the small hit is won and the predetermined small hit symbol is determined by the winning / fail lottery when the number of times of short-time activation reaches LN. After the end of the small hit game, the time-saving game state may be set based on the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the time-saving activation number LN. If the above-mentioned time-saving game state is set during the small hit game, the process of ending the set time-saving game state when the game ball enters the special area and the special game is executed during the small hit game. However, when it is set as described above, it is possible to prevent complicated processing such as ending the set time-saving gaming state.
In the above case, it is possible to increase the variation of the time-saving gaming state set in the pachinko machine of one type and two types, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

(36) Further, in the pachinko machine, the time-saving game state (that is, the jackpot winning) set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol that the time-saving game state is set as the time-saving game state is set. And the time-saving game state set through the execution of the special game, hereinafter also referred to as the first time-saving), the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time-saving activation number LN. The time-saving game state set by the above (that is, the time-saving game state set without the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, hereinafter also referred to as the second time-saving), and the time-saving game state are set. Set based on the determination of the specified symbols (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small hit symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state, lost symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state, etc.) All of the time-saving game states to be played (that is, the time-saving game state set without the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, hereinafter also referred to as the third time-saving) may be provided.
By doing so, the variation of the set time-saving gaming state becomes abundant, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

(37) Further, in the above-mentioned first time reduction, the setting that the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is higher than that in the normal gaming state (non-time reduction gaming state), the setting that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter, and the setting that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter. , The opening time of the second starting winning opening 16 may be set to be long. Further, in the above-mentioned second time reduction, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is the same as the normal game state (non-time reduction game state), and the normal game state (non-time reduction game state) is normal. It is also possible to set the fluctuation time of the symbol to be short and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 to be long. Further, even in the above-mentioned third time reduction, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is the same as the normal game state (non-time reduction game state), and the normal game state (non-time reduction game state) is normal. It is also possible to set the fluctuation time of the symbol to be short and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 to be long.
In addition, only in the first time reduction of the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to be higher than in the normal game state (non-time reduction game state). May be.
By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of various time-saving gaming states, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

(38) Further, when the pachinko machine is equipped with the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction, when the jackpot symbol stipulating that the time reduction game state is set during the first time reduction is determined, (38). 1a) A control may be adopted in which the first time reduction is completed and the first time reduction is newly set after the end of the special game. In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time saving activation number LN during the first time saving, (2a) the first time saving is ended and the second time saving is newly performed. Set the time reduction, (2b) Continue the first time reduction, (2c) End the first time reduction when the number of time reductions when the second time reduction is set is larger than the remaining number of time reductions in the first time reduction. , One of the controls (2a) to (2c) of newly setting the second time reduction may be adopted. In addition, a symbol specified to set the time-saving game state during the first time saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small hit symbol specified to set the time-saving gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state are set. When (3a) the first time reduction is terminated and a new third time reduction is set, (3b) the first time reduction is continued, and (3c) the third time reduction is determined. Of (3a) to (3c), when the number of time reductions when is set is larger than the number of time reductions remaining in the first time reduction, the first time reduction is terminated and the third time reduction is newly set. Either control may be adopted.

Further, when the jackpot symbol for setting the time reduction game state is determined during the second time reduction, (4a) the second time reduction is ended, and the first time reduction is newly set after the end of the special game. You may adopt the control. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of deriving the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery) reaches the predetermined time saving activation number LN during the second time saving, (5a) the second time saving is ended and the second time saving is newly performed. One of the controls (5a) to (5b) of setting the time reduction and continuing the second time reduction (5b) may be adopted. In addition, a symbol specified to set the time-saving game state during the second time reduction (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small hit symbol specified to set the time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state are set. (6a) End the 2nd time reduction and set a new 3rd time reduction, (6b) Continue the 2nd time reduction, (6c) 3rd time reduction Of (6a) to (6c), when the number of time reductions when is set is larger than the number of time reductions remaining in the second time reduction, the second time reduction is terminated and the third time reduction is newly set. Either control may be adopted.

Further, when the jackpot symbol for setting the time saving game state is determined during the third time saving, (7a) the third time saving is ended, and the first time saving is newly set after the special game is completed. You may adopt the control. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time saving activation number LN during the third time saving, (8a) the third time saving is ended and the second time saving is newly performed. Set the time reduction, (8b) Continue the third time reduction, (8c) End the third time reduction when the number of time reductions when the second time reduction is set is larger than the remaining number of time reductions in the third time reduction. , One of the controls (8a) to (8c) of newly setting the second time reduction may be adopted. In addition, a symbol specified to set the time-saving game state during the third time reduction (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small hit symbol specified to set the time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state are set. (9a) End the 3rd time reduction and set a new 3rd time reduction, (9b) Continue the 3rd time reduction, (9c) 3rd time reduction Of (9a) to (9c), when the number of time reductions when is set is larger than the number of time reductions remaining in the third time reduction, the third time reduction is terminated and the third time reduction is newly set. Either control may be adopted.

As the control when various decisions are made in the above-mentioned first time reduction, second time reduction, and third time reduction, an appropriate combination may be applied based on the above contents.
For example, the following control can be used.
In the normal game state (low-probability game state, non-time-saving game state), when the jackpot symbol for setting the time-saving game state is determined, the first time reduction is set after the end of the special game, and the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time saving activation number LN, the second time saving is set and the time saving game state is set. When a symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small hit symbol that specifies that the time-saving game state is set, a lost symbol that defines that the time-saving game state is set, etc.) are determined, the third time reduction is set.
During the first time reduction, when the jackpot symbol for setting the time reduction game state is determined, the first time reduction is ended, the first time reduction is newly set after the end of the special game, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set. When (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time reduction activation number LN, it is stipulated that the first time reduction is continued without setting the second time reduction and the time reduction game state is set. When the symbols (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small hit symbols that specify that the time-saving gaming state is set, lost symbols that specify that the time-saving gaming state is set, etc.) are determined, the third time-saving symbol is determined. Continue the first time reduction without setting.
During the second time reduction, when the jackpot symbol for setting the time reduction game state is determined, the second time reduction is ended, the first time reduction is newly set after the end of the special game, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set. When (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time saving activation number LN, the second time saving set at the present time is continued without setting a new second time saving, and the time saving game state. (The above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small hit symbol that specifies that the time-saving game state is set, lost symbol that determines that the time-saving game state is set, etc.) When it is decided, the second time reduction is continued without setting the third time reduction.
During the third time reduction, when the jackpot symbol for setting the time reduction game state is determined, the third time reduction is ended, the first time reduction is newly set after the end of the special game, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set. When (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time reduction activation number LN, it is stipulated that the third time reduction is ended, the second time reduction is newly set, and the time reduction game state is set. When the symbols (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small hit symbols that specify that the time-saving game state is set, lost symbols that specify that the time-saving game state is set, etc.) are determined, a new number is determined. Continue the 3rd time reduction set at the present time without setting the 3rd time reduction.
When the jackpot symbol that defines the time-saving game state is determined during the high-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability non-time-saving game state (that is, during the high-probability non-time-saving game state), after the end of the special game When the first time reduction is set and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined time reduction activation number LN, the second time reduction is not set and the time reduction game state is set. The symbols to that effect (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small hit symbols that specify to set the time-saving gaming state, lost symbols that specify to set the time-saving gaming state, etc.) have been determined. Occasionally, the third time reduction is not set.
By doing so, the variation of the setting of the time-saving game state becomes abundant, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

As described in (31) above, when the pachinko machine is provided with the second time reduction and the setting value associated with the setting related to the ball ejection is provided, the same time reduction is provided regardless of the setting value. The number of activations LN may be set.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the advantage between the set values is excessively changed due to the setting of the second time reduction.
Further, it is set so that the main control board 100 can count the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of deriving the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery) for determining whether or not the time saving activation number LN has been reached. Counting is always performed during a low-probability gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state), and not during a high-probability gaming state (high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, high-probability time-saving gaming state). You may do so. That is, during the low-probability gaming state, the above-mentioned counting may always be performed regardless of whether or not the time-saving gaming state is set.
By doing so, the second time reduction can be reliably set only during the low-probability gaming state.
Further, the above-mentioned count is performed in a pachinko machine provided with a set value at the time of RAM clearing, which is performed by performing a predetermined operation when the power is turned on (for example, an operation of pressing the RAM clear button for clearing the RAM). The time when the RAM is cleared by changing the set value, the time when the count value by the above count reaches the time reduction activation number LN and the second time reduction is set, the time when the big hit is won (special based on the small hit winning) It may be cleared at the start of the game) or at the end of the special game. It should be noted that the clearing at the time when the second time reduction is set and the clearing at the time of winning the big hit (at the start of the special game based on the winning of the small hit) or at the end of the special game may be executed without fail. ..
Further, as the timing for determining that the count value based on the above-mentioned count has reached the number of times of short-time activation LN, the time when the special symbol changes, the time when the special symbol changes ends, and the time when the special symbol changes end and the stop display time is stopped. It may be any of the elapsed points. Then, the second time reduction may be set at the timing when it is determined that the count value based on the above-mentioned count has reached the time reduction activation number LN.

In addition, as the end condition of the second time reduction, (10a) that the jackpot has been won is set, and (10b) the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 and the second start winning. The total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 16 reaches the number of time reductions, and (10c) the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 reaches the specified number of times. , (10d) One or a plurality of (10a) to (10c) that the number of winnings of a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times may be set.
For example, the following contents can be set as the end conditions for the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine, as the jackpot symbol for setting the time-saving gaming state, the jackpot symbol XA1 (in the variable effect, the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all ". 7 ”) and the jackpot symbol XA2 (in the variable effect, the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all other than“ 7 ”), and the time-saving game is provided. The time-saving symbol JD1 (a mode in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same odd-numbered symbols other than "7" and the third stop symbol is "7" in the variable effect) is defined to set the state. It is provided, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the predetermined time-saving activation number LN (for example, 1000 times), the time-saving is achieved. It is assumed that the game state is set and it is possible to win a small hit in the winning / losing lottery.
In this pachinko machine, the first time reduction set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol XA1 is set to end based on the winning of the jackpot, and the game ball to the first start winning opening 15 is set. The game ends when the total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the ball and the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 reaches 100 times (time reduction number), and the game to the second start winning opening 16 is completed. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the ball reaches 10 times (specified number of times), and ends when the number of winning small hits reaches 2 times (predetermined number of times).
In addition, the first time reduction set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol XA2 is set to end based on the winning of the jackpot, and the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15. It ends when the total number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 reaches 50 times (the number of time reductions), and the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations based on the ball reaches 4 times (specified number of times), and ends when the number of winning small hits reaches 1 time (predetermined number of times).
In addition, the second time reduction set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the predetermined time reduction activation number LN is a big hit. It is set to end based on the winning, and the total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is It ends when it reaches 600 times (time reduction number), and ends when the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 reaches 50 times (specified number of times), and the small hit is won. It can be set to end when the number of times reaches 10 times (predetermined number of times).
In addition, the third time reduction set by determining the time reduction symbol JD1 is set to end based on the winning of the jackpot, and the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15. And, it ends when the total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 reaches 60 times (time reduction number), and is based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations reaches 8 times (specified number of times) and ends when the number of winning small hits reaches 3 times (predetermined number of times).
By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to provide various playability.

Further, if the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to be the same as that of the normal gaming state (non-time saving game state) for the second time saving, the second start winning opening 16 is opened during the second time saving. In order to make it easy to maintain the state, it is necessary to set the above-mentioned hit probability to some extent during the normal gaming state. In this case, the movable piece 16b has a structure that can be retracted with respect to the game board 11, and when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the game board 11, the movable piece 16b guides the game ball to the second start winning opening 16. While the ball can be entered into the second start winning opening 16, when the movable piece 16b is immersed in the game board 11, the game ball is not guided to the second starting winning opening 16. By configuring the structure so that the ball does not enter the starting winning opening 16 and setting the protrusion time (opening time) of the movable piece 16b to be shorter during the normal game state than during the second time reduction, the movable piece 16b is set to be shorter during the normal game state. In the case of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols, the rate of entering the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 may be lower than in the case of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols during the second time reduction. can.

Further, the number of times that the second time reduction can be set may be only once between the time when the big hit is won and the time when the next big hit is won. Specifically, after the jackpot is won (the end of the special game), the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value based on the above-mentioned count) is set to the predetermined number of time-saving activations LN. After the second time reduction is set due to the arrival, the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value based on the above count) is the number of times the time reduction is activated LN again without winning the jackpot. The second time reduction may not be set even if the time is reached.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the time-saving gaming state from being excessively set and the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as described above, the main control board 100 is used to determine whether or not the time-saving activation count LN has been reached during the low-probability gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state). The number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning or losing lottery is derived) is counted, but after the big hit is won (the end of the special game), the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the winning or losing lottery is derived) is shortened. After the second time reduction is set by reaching the activation count LN, the above-mentioned counting may be stopped.
By doing so, the processing load of the main control board 100 can be reduced.

In addition, the symbols specified to set the time-saving game state during the first time reduction or the second time reduction (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol specified to set the time-saving game state, and the time-saving). Even if the first or second time reduction is set to continue without setting the third time reduction when the lost symbol, etc. that is determined to set the game state) is determined. , The winning / failing lottery of the last round of the 1st time saving or the 2nd time saving (the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value by the above count) reaches the number of times shortened) Based on the above, it is stipulated that the symbol for setting the time-saving game state (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, the time-saving winning symbol, the small hit symbol for setting the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state are set. When the lost pattern, etc.) is determined, the third time reduction may be set.
By doing so, the continuity of the short-time gaming state can be enhanced, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.
Further, in the case of setting as described above, the winning / failing lottery of the final round of the first time saving or the second time saving (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value by the above-mentioned count) is Designs that specify that the time-saving game state is set in the winning / failing lottery immediately before reaching the number of time-saving times (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small hit symbol that defines that the time-saving game state is set, time-saving game) When the lost symbol, etc. for which the state is set is determined), the non-time saving game state is set by ending the first time reduction or the second time reduction at the end of the change of the special symbol in the final round. After the non-time saving game state is set, the stop display of the symbol in which the above-mentioned time saving game state is set may be performed, and the third time reduction may be set after the stop display is performed. Further, along with the setting of the non-time-saving gaming state described above, the transmission of the external signal (time-saving signal) transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine in the time-saving gaming state to indicate that the pachinko machine is in the time-saving gaming state is terminated, and the above-mentioned third The external signal may be transmitted again according to the time reduction setting.
By doing so, it is possible to reliably execute the end of the time-saving gaming state and control of new settings, and it is possible to reliably notify the outside of the pachinko machine of the change of the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the predetermined time-saving activation number LN, the small hit is won by the winning / failing lottery. May be set so that both the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit and the setting of the second time reduction due to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the time reduction activation number LN are executed.
In addition, when set in this way, the second time reduction is (a) from the start of the small hit game to the end of the small hit symbol from the winning of the small hit to the start of the small hit game. Until, (c) after the end of the small hit game, it may be set at any timing in.
By doing so, when the winning of the small hit and the establishment of the condition for setting the second time reduction overlap, there are abundant variations in the timing at which the second time reduction is set, so that there are many variations. However, it is possible to give playability.

Further, when the second time reduction and the third time reduction are installed, the advantage may be set to be the same in both the second time reduction and the third time reduction (that is, a winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols). The probability of becoming, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 may all be the same), or the advantages may be set differently (lottery of the normal symbol). Any one or more of the probability of winning, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting winning opening 16 may be set differently). For example, the second time reduction may be set to have a higher advantage than the third time reduction (a setting in which the probability of winning in a lottery of ordinary symbols is high, a setting in which the fluctuation time of ordinary symbols is shortened, and a second setting. Any one or more of the settings that increase the opening time of the starting winning opening 16 may be performed).
By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the advantages of the second time reduction and the third time reduction, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.
In addition, it is stipulated that the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value based on the above-mentioned count) reaches the predetermined time-saving activation number LN, and the time-saving gaming state is set. When the above-mentioned symbols (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small hit symbols that specify that the time-saving gaming state is set, lost symbols that specify that the time-saving gaming state is set, etc.) are determined, the third symbol is determined. The second time reduction may be set in preference to the time reduction.
By doing so, even when the conditions for setting the second time reduction and the third time reduction overlap, the second time reduction can be surely set.

(39) Regarding the 1st time reduction, the 2nd time reduction, and the 3rd time reduction, the change of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start winning opening 15 and the change of the game ball into the 2nd start winning opening 16. The special symbol is changed at the same time based on the entry of the ball (that is, the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 and the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16). It is also installed in a pachinko machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a simultaneous turning machine) set to process both holds at the same time when is stored, so-called simultaneous turning control), and the above-mentioned (1) to (1) to ( 38) may be set.
Then, when the simultaneous turning machine is equipped with the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction, based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16. A symbol that defines the time-saving game state (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small hit symbol that determines that the time-saving game state is set, and a lost symbol that determines that the time-saving game state is set). Etc.) are determined, and during the change of the special symbol based on the decision, the number of changes of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into one of the other (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / losing lottery is derived, that is, the above-mentioned count). When the predetermined number of times of short-time activation (LN) is reached, the game ball enters one of the above while the special symbol is changed based on the entry of the game ball into one of the above. The second time reduction is set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value by the above count) reaches the time reduction activation number LN based on the sphere, and the second time reduction is set. Although the stop display of the symbol that is determined to set the time saving game state determined based on the entry of the game ball into one of the above is performed later, even if the control is made so that the third time saving is not set. good.
In addition, a symbol stipulating that the time-saving gaming state is set based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol). , A small hit symbol that defines the time-saving gaming state, a lost symbol that defines the time-saving gaming state, etc.) is determined, and during the change of the special symbol based on the decision, one of them When the jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball (winning the jackpot), the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into one of the above is changed to one of the above. The first time reduction is set because the jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball, and after the setting of the first time reduction, the time reduction game determined based on the entry of the game ball into any one of the above. Although the stop display of the symbol for which the state is set is set, the control may be performed so that the third time reduction is not set.
By doing so, even if the conditions for setting the first time reduction or the second time reduction are satisfied in the simultaneous turning machine and the conditions for setting the third time reduction are satisfied in duplicate, even if the conditions are satisfied. The first time reduction or the second time reduction can be surely set.

(40) Further, when the time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game (that is, when the first time-saving is set) based on the determination of the jackpot symbol for setting the time-saving game state. , During the fluctuation of the jackpot symbol (during the execution of the variation effect based on the determination of the jackpot symbol), and during the execution of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol, for a predetermined period (for example, the most On the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, a period shorter than a long fluctuation time, a period shorter than the time from the start to the end of the special game when the number of round games is the smallest (for example, 10 seconds, etc.), etc. A display is performed in a predetermined area (for example, the entire area of the display unit 21a, etc.) to instruct the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed), and after the lapse of the predetermined period, the above-mentioned predetermined area is displayed. Even if the mark suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b is continuously displayed in the area smaller than the area of (for example, the area in the upper right corner or the area in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a). good.
By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time-saving game state is set after the variable effect and the special game are completed, and after the variable effect and the special game are completed, the player is directed to the second game area 12b. It is possible to make an impression that all the game balls are launched.

Further, when the time saving game state is set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the time saving activation number LN (that is, the second time saving). (When is set), during the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time when the time reduction activation number LN is reached (during the execution of the fluctuation effect), for a period shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, from the shortest fluctuation time). In a specific area (for example, an area about half the size of the display unit 21a) in the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 toward the second gaming area 12b for a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds or the like). A display instructing the launch of the game ball (so-called right-handed) is performed, and after a period shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined period elapses, an area smaller than the above-mentioned specific area (for example, an area in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a) is displayed. And the area in the lower right corner, etc.) may continue to display a mark suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b.
By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time-saving gaming state is set after that during the variation effect at the time when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN, and as described above. Even if a short fluctuation time is determined as the fluctuation time at the time point, it is stated that the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b after the variation effect is completed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. You can make an impression.
The above-mentioned predetermined region and the above-mentioned specific region may be the same region or different regions. Further, the above-mentioned specific region may be a part of the above-mentioned predetermined region. Further, when the first time reduction is set, the area where the mark suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b is displayed, and when the second time reduction is set, the second game area 12b The areas in which the marks suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the ball are displayed may be the same area, different areas, or areas having different sizes from each other. Further, one region may be a part of the other region.

In addition, the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value by the above-mentioned count) reaches the time-saving activation number LN, and the time-saving gaming state is set. If a jackpot symbol that is determined not to be used is determined, the second reduction of working hours may be set after the end of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot.
By doing so, there are many opportunities to set the time-saving game state, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.
In addition, the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is derived, that is, the count value based on the above-mentioned count) reaches the number of times of short-time activation LN, and the winning / failing lottery wins the jackpot, and the high-probability gaming state and If a jackpot symbol that stipulates that a time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state) is set is determined, the jackpot will not be set after the end of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot. A high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state) may be set based on the symbol.
By doing so, after the end of the special game, a game state having a higher advantage for the player is set, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

(41) In a pachinko machine set to execute a special game only based on the winning of a big hit, the stop display time (so-called symbol confirmation time) in the fluctuation when the time reduction activation number LN is reached has elapsed or the stop is concerned. The second time reduction may be set at a predetermined time after the lapse of the display time.
In addition, in a so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, if the result of the winning / failing lottery at the time when the time-saving activation frequency LN is reached is lost, the stop display time after the change of the special symbol at that time is stopped. The second time reduction may be set at any time until the elapse (for example, the time when the change of the special symbol stops, the time when the stop display time elapses, etc.). In addition, if the result of the winning / failing lottery at the time when the time reduction activation number LN is reached is the winning of the small hit, the end time of the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit (the end time of the ending process in the small hit game). Then, the second time reduction may be set.
Further, in the so-called simultaneous turning machine, the second time saving may be set at the start of the fluctuation when the time saving activation number LN is reached.
By doing so, it is possible to set the second time reduction at an appropriate timing according to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(42) Further, the pachinko machine P is a hall computer and a data display device that displays the number of times the jackpot is won (the number of times the special game is executed), the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game, the number of times the time-saving game state is set, and the like. For example, it may be set so that a plurality of external signals can be transmitted to an external device installed outside the pachinko machine P.
For example, as an external signal, a plurality of jackpot signals transmitted based on the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game can be provided.
Then, the first jackpot signal among the plurality of jackpot signals is set to be continuously transmitted to the hall computer or the data display device from the start to the end of the special game, and the jackpot is hit in the hall computer or the data display device. The number of winnings (the number of times the special game is executed) may be counted, and the number of times may be displayed. Further, in the hall computer or the data display device, when the first jackpot signal is received, the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game may be reset.
Further, regarding the second jackpot signal among the plurality of jackpot signals, the hall computer and the data display device continue from the start of the special game to the end of the time-saving game state (third time-saving) set after the end of the special game. The number of times of the third time reduction may be counted in the hall computer or the data display device, and the number of times may be displayed. Further, in the hall computer or the data display device, when the second big hit signal is received, the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game may be reset.
In addition, the third jackpot signal among the plurality of jackpot signals is set to be continuously transmitted to the hall computer or data display device from the time when the second time reduction is set until the end, and the hall computer or data display is performed. The device may be able to count the number of times of the second time reduction and may be able to display the number of times. Further, in the hall computer or the data display device, when the third big hit signal is received, the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game may be reset. Further, in the data display device, when the third jackpot signal is received, the notification to the effect that the second time reduction is set may be performed. It should be noted that the third jackpot signal is not transmitted continuously from the time when the second time reduction is set until the end, but is transmitted only when the second time reduction is set. May be good.
Further, the above-mentioned jackpot signal may not be transmitted to both the hall computer and the data display device, but may be transmitted to only one of them. For example, the first jackpot signal and the second jackpot signal may be transmitted only to the data display device, and the third jackpot signal may be transmitted only to the hall computer.
By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the second time reduction has been set outside the pachinko machine P.

(43) In the above-described embodiment, after the above-mentioned continuous jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times) is satisfied, the determination ratio of the fluctuation time longer than before the continuous jackpot count condition is satisfied is determined. By increasing the number, the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time) was reduced, but in order to reduce the number of special games executed per unit time. The control method by the main CPU 101 is not limited to this. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.
As described above, the continuous jackpot is a continuous jackpot without shifting to the normal gaming state after winning the jackpot in the normal gaming state and shifting to at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. It shall be the winning jackpot.

(Specific example 1)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times, etc.), in the fluctuation executed after that, (A) the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol executed before this is longer than the fluctuation time. It may be set so that the determination rate of a long fluctuation time is high. Further, in the special game executed after this, (B) the opening time longer than the opening time in the special game executed before this may be set, or (C) the execution before this may be set. The ending time may be set longer than the ending time in the special game that has been played, or (D) the interval time may be set longer than the interval time in the special game that was executed before this. Alternatively, (E) an opening time longer than the opening time of the large winning opening 18 in the special game executed before this may be set.

(Specific example 2)
For example, when the total number of rounds executed during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games executed thereafter, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) It may be set as follows.
(Specific example 3)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) and the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the execution is performed thereafter. The fluctuations and special games may be set as described in (A) to (E) above.

(Specific example 4)
For example, the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot when the predetermined number of hits is reached or after the predetermined number of hits is reached is a specific symbol (during a special game). When the number of rounds to be executed is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) and the set jackpot symbol, etc.), in the fluctuation related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuation executed after that, also In the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.
(Specific example 5)
For example, during a continuous jackpot, the total number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game). When the number of rounds executed in is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) and the set jackpot symbol, etc.), in the fluctuation related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuation executed after that, , In the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.

(Specific example 6)
For example, when the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to winning the next jackpot is less than or equal to a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) during a continuous jackpot, or for all special games during a continuous jackpot. When the total number of fluctuations after the end reaches a specific number, in the fluctuations related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuations executed after that, the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special executed after that In the game, it may be set as described in (A) to (E) above.
(Specific example 7)
For example, it is determined when the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to winning the next jackpot during a continuous jackpot is less than or equal to a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) and the next jackpot is won. If the jackpot symbol is a specific symbol (a jackpot symbol set with a relatively large number of rounds executed during a special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the jackpot is won. In the fluctuation and the fluctuation executed after that, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.

(Specific Example 8)
For example, when the total number of prize balls paid out during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games executed thereafter, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) ) May be set.
(Specific example 9)
For example, the total number of prize balls paid out during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game). When the number of rounds executed in is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) and the set jackpot symbol, etc.), in the fluctuation related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuation executed after that, , In the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.

(Specific Example 10)
For example, when the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot and the number of fired balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 pieces, etc.), the above-mentioned fluctuations and special games to be executed thereafter are described above. It may be set as (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 11)
For example, the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot and the number of fired balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is specified. If the number of symbols (such as a jackpot symbol set with a relatively large number of rounds executed during a special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the change related to the winning of the jackpot or the execution after that In the fluctuations to be made, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game executed thereafter, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.

(Specific Example 12)
For example, the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of winning a predetermined jackpot during a continuous jackpot is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds, 6 seconds, etc.) is set, etc.). In some cases, in the fluctuation executed thereafter, the setting may be made as described in (A) above, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot or the special game executed thereafter, the above-mentioned It may be set as in (B) to (E).
(Specific Example 13)
For example, when the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number is stored, the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number or the second special figure random number is stored before the fluctuation start based on the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number. It is set so that the pre-judgment process for performing various judgments (judgment as to whether or not a big hit is won, judgment of the type of special symbol to be determined, etc.) regarding the winning / failing lottery and the determination of the special symbol is executed for the figure random number. During the continuous jackpot, if the determination result by the pre-judgment process has the predetermined content (for example, the hold stored at the end of the special game includes the one that wins the jackpot). In the variation or special game executed after that, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.

(Specific Example 14)
For example, when the total elapsed time during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games executed after that, as described in (A) to (E) above. It may be set.
(Specific Example 15)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) and the total elapsed time during the continuous jackpot is less than or equal to a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), the game is executed thereafter. In the fluctuation or special game, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.

(Specific Example 16)
For example, when the total execution time of the special game during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games executed after that, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) It may be set as follows.
(Specific example 17)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times, etc.) and the total execution time of special games during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), after that. In the variation to be executed or the special game, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.

Even when the above settings are made, the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of big hit wins per unit time) can be reduced as in the above-described embodiment. As a result, a large number of special games are executed intensively in a short period of time, and the number of prize balls acquired by the player increases sharply, resulting in an extremely high gambling situation. It can be prevented appropriately.

Further, the various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 can be set in combination with each other as long as there is no contradiction. Further, regarding the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) when various conditions are satisfied, only one of them may be set, or a plurality of settings may be set.

Further, the main control board 100 is provided with a counter (consisting of a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103) for counting the number of continuous jackpots, and the number of continuous jackpots reaches a predetermined number based on the count value of the counter. It may be determined whether or not. Then, when various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, any one or a plurality of the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) may be set.
Further, since the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 during the high-probability short-time game state, the continuous jackpot is mainly the jackpot won based on the second special figure random number. Therefore, the above-mentioned counter counts the number of consecutive big hits based on the second special figure random number, and resets the count value of the counter when the big hit is won based on the first special figure random number. When the number of consecutive jackpots won based on the second special figure random number reaches a predetermined number, it is determined that the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 is satisfied. You may try to do it. That is, when a big hit is won based on the first special figure random number, it is treated as if the continuous big hit is interrupted, and if the big hit is not continuously won based on the second special figure random number, the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 1 to It may be set so as not to satisfy the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in 17.
When the jackpot is won based on the second special figure random number, it is decided to execute a special game in which the number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively larger than when the jackpot is won based on the first special figure random number. It is easy to get rid of it, and there is a high possibility that the number of prize balls won by the player in a short period of time will increase sharply. In the case of setting as described above, since only the jackpot based on the second special figure random number is subject to the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots, the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) are excessively performed. The situation can be prevented.

Further, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, at least one of (A) regarding the variable time and (B) to (E) regarding the various times during the special game is set in combination. Sometimes, after the various conditions are met, the fluctuation time and the various times during the special game are both longer than before the various conditions are met, but the change rate of the fluctuation time is longer than the change rate of the various times during the special game. May be set to be larger.
For example, when the conditions in Specific Example 1 are satisfied and the combination of (A) and (B) is set, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol is 3 seconds before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number of times. 6 seconds is easy to determine, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the specified number of times, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 13 seconds or 15 seconds (2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the specified number of times). The change) is set so that it is easy to determine, and before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the opening time during the special game is 10 seconds, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, it is special. The opening time during the game may be set to 15 seconds (changes to 1.5 times the opening time before reaching a predetermined number of times).

Further, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and (A) regarding the fluctuation time is set, the fluctuation pattern becomes a non-reach fluctuation pattern after the various conditions are satisfied, as compared with before the various conditions are satisfied. Although both the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern are longer, the change rate of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the change rate of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern. It may be set to be large, or it may be set so that the change rate of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach-less fluctuation pattern is larger than the change rate of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern. ..
For example, when (A) is set when the condition in the specific example 2 is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reachless fluctuation pattern is 3 before the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number. Seconds and 6 seconds are easy to determine, and after the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reachless fluctuation pattern is 13 seconds or 15 seconds (before reaching the predetermined number). (Changes from 2.5 times to 5 times the fluctuation time of It is easy to determine 20 seconds or 30 seconds as the time, and after the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, 180 seconds or 240 seconds (to a predetermined number) as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern. It may be set so that it is easy to determine (changes from 6 to 12 times the fluctuation time before reaching).
Further, when (A) is set when the condition in the specific example 8 is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the non-reach fluctuation pattern before the total number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number. 3 seconds or 6 seconds is easy to determine, and after the total number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reachless fluctuation pattern is 13 seconds or 15 seconds (predetermined). (Changes to 2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the number) is set so that it is easy to determine, and the reach fluctuates before the total number of prize balls paid out during the continuous jackpot reaches the predetermined number. It is easy to determine 20 seconds or 30 seconds as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during the continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern is 40 seconds or so. It may be set so that 45 seconds (changes from about 1.3 times to 2.25 times the fluctuation time before reaching a predetermined number) can be easily determined.
Further, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, at least one of (B) to (E) regarding various times during the special game is set without setting (A) regarding the fluctuation time. By doing so, after satisfying various conditions, the fluctuation time does not change, but the execution time of the special game (opening time, ending time, interval time, opening time of the big winning opening 18) may be lengthened. .. Further, in this case, for example, the opening time after satisfying various conditions is larger than the other times (ending time, interval time, opening time of the big winning opening 18) after satisfying the conditions. It may be set to be long, or the rate of change of the opening time before and after satisfying various conditions may be set to be larger than the rate of change of other times.

Further, when the various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, other settings may be made instead of the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E). For example, when various conditions are satisfied, the determination rate of the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (F) executed before this becomes higher in the normal drawing game executed after that. (G) It may be set so that the opening time is shorter than the opening time of the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 before this.
Further, for example, when various conditions are satisfied, the number of time reductions set after the end of the special game after that (H) is set to be smaller than the number of time reductions set after the end of the previous special game. You may.
By setting in this way, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is reduced, and the chance of winning or losing lottery is also reduced. Therefore, the number of special games executed per unit time (per unit time). The number of winning jackpots) can be reduced.

Further, for example, when various conditions are satisfied, in the special game to be executed thereafter, (I) a mode in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than during the special game before this (for example, 0.5 seconds). The large winning opening 18 may be set to open and close in a mode in which opening and closing for 1.0 second are repeated a predetermined number of times.
When set in this way, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the special game is reduced, and the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. As a result, even when a large number of special games are executed intensively in a short period of time, the number of prize balls acquired by the player can be suppressed, resulting in extremely high gambling. It is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, for example, when various conditions are satisfied, the second special figure is stored when both the (J) first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are stored in the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol. The first special figure random number may be set to be processed in preference to the random number.
When set in this way, it is decided to execute a special game with a smaller number of rounds when the jackpot is won based on the first special figure random number than when the jackpot is won based on the second special figure random number. Since the ratio is high, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the special game is reduced, and the expected value of the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. As a result, even when a large number of special games are executed intensively in a short period of time, the number of prize balls acquired by the player can be suppressed, resulting in extremely high gambling. It is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, regarding the settings of (F) to (J), only one of them may be set or a plurality of settings may be set as in (A) to (E). Further, it may be set in combination with at least one of (A) to (E).
Further, in the settings of (A) to (G), when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the various times are longer, but the predetermined time is longer. , Other times may be set to be shorter. For example, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the determination rate of the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol executed before this is set to be higher ((A)). (Setting), the ending time shorter than the ending time in the special game executed before this may be set (setting of (C)).
In this case, after satisfying the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17, the time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the special game becomes too long, and the profit of the player is extremely hindered. It is possible to prevent such a situation.

Further, when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the settings (A) to (E) are set, and when the various times are set to be long, the execution of a specific effect within the long period. It may be set so that the frequency is high.
For example, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the determination rate of the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special symbol executed before this is set to be higher (setting of (A)). ), When a long fluctuation time is determined, it may be set so that the execution frequency of the suggestion effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in the change is high. Further, it may be set so that the execution frequency of the special effect (specific effect) indicating the content irrelevant to the result of the winning / failing lottery is high.

Further, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, an opening time longer than the opening time in the special game executed before this is set (setting of (B)), or when the opening time is set (setting of (B)). When the ending time longer than the ending time in the special game executed before this is set (setting of (C)), it is stored at that time until the opening time and the ending time elapse. It may be set so that the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect (specific effect) suggesting that there is a hold that can be determined as a big hit is high.
The degree of change in the execution frequency of a specific effect is not particularly limited. For example, although the specific effect was not executed before the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied, the specific effect may be set to be executed after the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied. Before the various conditions were met, a specific effect was executed at a predetermined execution rate, but after the above-mentioned various conditions were met, a specific effect was executed at a rate higher than the above-mentioned predetermined execution rate. May be set to be executed.
In this case, as described above, while appropriately preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the gambling becomes extremely high, the player's interest is reduced due to the lengthening of various times. Can be prevented.

Further, when one or a plurality of settings of (A) to (J) are set when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the said The setting may be canceled (that is, the setting may be returned to the setting before the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied).
It should be noted that the predetermined end conditions include, for example, that the variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) by the setting made after satisfying the above-mentioned various conditions, and after satisfying the above-mentioned various conditions. Due to the settings made, it was determined that a predetermined number of special games (for example, 3 times) were played (a predetermined number of times the jackpot was won) and that the continuous jackpot was interrupted (for example, a normal game after the end of the special game). It is possible to set that the jackpot symbol for which the state is to be set has been determined, that the normal game state has been set, that the normal game state has been set and then the fluctuation has been performed a predetermined number of times, etc.). ..
In such a case, the setting for preventing the situation where the gambling becomes high continues for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

In addition, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of (A) to (J) are set, at least one of the time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state is set. Even when it is continuous (that is, when it is a continuous jackpot), if certain conditions are met (for example, a special game in which the number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively large) is executed. When the associated jackpot symbol X2 is determined consecutively a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, etc.), the above-mentioned setting is canceled (that is, the setting before the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied). (Return to).
In such a case, the setting for preventing the situation where the gambling becomes high continues for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

Further, when various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, specific external information is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a pachinko machine such as a hall computer) in order to transmit the setting made based on the conditions. It may be transmitted to a device provided outside P), or a predetermined display (for example, a specific display) may be displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 in order to notify that the above setting has been made. A mark image may be displayed, a caution display such as "game progress time is being changed") may be displayed, or the lamp may be turned on in a predetermined manner.
Further, when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the history information indicating to that effect may be stored in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100 or the sub RAM 303 of the sub control board 300. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency and period of setting to prevent the situation of high gambling, which is useful for the development of pachinko machines that are unlikely to have high gambling. can.

Further, the pachinko machine P is provided with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables 114 set so that the length of the fluctuation time that can be determined and the determination ratio of the fluctuation time are different, and is a big hit in a state where various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied. After the special game based on the jackpot is completed, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the different variation pattern table 114 based on the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. It is assumed that it has been set.
And even when it is set in this way, if one or more of (A) to (J) are satisfied and one or more of the above conditions are satisfied and the jackpot is won, the jackpot is won. Regardless of which jackpot symbol is determined at the time of winning the jackpot, the variation pattern (variation time) may be determined with reference to the common variation pattern table 114.
Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in a state where the above-mentioned various conditions are not satisfied, a relatively long fluctuation time is set after the end of the special game based on the jackpot. When the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined with reference to the first fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio is set high, and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined by winning the jackpot without satisfying the above-mentioned various conditions. After the end of the special game based on the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined with reference to the second fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio of the relatively short fluctuation time is set high. It is assumed that it was set to. Then, when it is set in this way, even when the jackpot is won and either the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined in a state where the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied, after the end of the special game based on the jackpot. Determines the variation pattern (variation time) with reference to the third variation pattern table 114 in which the determination rate of the variation time longer than the variation time that can be determined by the first variation pattern table 114 is set higher. You may.

Further, the pachinko machine P may be provided with the following variation pattern table 114. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern table 114 will be specifically described. Here, the winning of the time saving grant (determination of the time saving symbol) is not considered, and the winning of the small hit is not decided in the winning / failing lottery, and it is decided when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. An example will be described in which the jackpot symbol to be played is two types of X1 and X2, and the lost symbol is one type of Y2.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, refer to the case where the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied during the high-probability time-saving game state. The second is when one or a plurality of the above-mentioned (A) to (J) are set while the various conditions of the specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied in the table C and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Tables D1, D2, and D3 that are referred to when a game ball enters the starting winning opening 16 may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 59, according to Table C, when the lost symbol Y2 is determined, “3 seconds fluctuation” is performed when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49 regardless of the current second hold number. When the fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, "5-second fluctuation" is performed. When the fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 224, "10-second fluctuation" When the fluctuation pattern command "C2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 225 to 249, "15 seconds fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern command "C3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds) is determined.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is 30 seconds) when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, regardless of the current second hold number. The fluctuation pattern command "D0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time becomes 60 seconds). The fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with the set fluctuation pattern) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is set to 100 seconds). The fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is set to 120 seconds) is set. The variation pattern command "D3H" associated with the variation pattern) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), according to the table D1, when the lost symbol Y2 is determined, “3 seconds” when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 12, regardless of the current second hold number. The variation pattern command "C0H" to which the variation pattern of "variation" is associated is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 13 to 25, the variation pattern command "C1H" to which the variation pattern of "5-second variation" is associated is determined. Is determined, and when the random number is 26 to 50, the variation pattern of "50 seconds variation" (the variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 50 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern command "C4H". Is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 51 to 150, the variation pattern command "C5H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 225 to 249. The fluctuation pattern command "C6H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "100-second fluctuation" is associated with is determined.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, regardless of the current second hold number. The command "D1H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the variation pattern command "D2H" associated with the variation pattern of "100 second variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 125 to 174. At that time, the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 150 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random numbers are 175 to 249. At that time, the fluctuation pattern command "D5H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 200 seconds) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), according to the table D2, when the lost symbol Y2 is determined, "50 seconds" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 24 regardless of the current second hold number. The variation pattern command "C4H" to which the variation pattern of "variation" is associated is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 25 to 74, the variation pattern command "C5H" to which the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is associated is determined. Is determined, and when the random number is 75 to 149, the variation pattern of "70 seconds variation" (the variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 70 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern command "C7H". Is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 150 to 249, the variation pattern command "C6H" associated with the variation pattern of "100-second variation" is determined.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, regardless of the current second hold number. When the command "D1H" is determined and the variation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the variation pattern command "D2H" associated with the variation pattern of "100 second variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 125 to 174. When the fluctuation pattern is "150 seconds fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, the fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" corresponds. The attached fluctuation pattern command "D5H" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60 (c), according to the table D3, when the lost symbol Y2 is determined, “60 seconds” when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249 regardless of the current second hold number. The variation pattern command "C5H" to which the variation pattern of "variation" is associated is determined.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, regardless of the current second hold number. When the command "D1H" is determined and the variation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the variation pattern command "D2H" associated with the variation pattern of "100 second variation" is determined, and the variation pattern random number is 125 to 174. When the fluctuation pattern is "150 seconds fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, the fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" corresponds. The attached fluctuation pattern command "D5H" is determined.

Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied in the high-probability time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern (refer to the table C). That is, when the fluctuation time) is determined, and one or more of the above (A) to (J) are set while the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied during the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the variation pattern table 114 of any of the tables D1, the table D2, and the table D3.
Further, when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the above-mentioned (A) to (J) are set in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning opening 16 When the game ball enters the ball, the variation pattern table 114 to be referred to may be switched by satisfying a predetermined switching condition. Specifically, the variation pattern table 115 to be referred to may be switched from table D1 → table D2 → table D3 according to the number of consecutive jackpots. Further, the fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referred to may be switched from table D3 → table D2 → table D1 according to the number of fluctuations.

(Other game characteristics to which the setting of the time saving game state is applied)
Next, an example of other playability to which the control of setting the time-saving game state without going through the winning of the big hit and the execution of the special game will be described. In the following, explanations will be given focusing on configurations and controls different from those of the above-described embodiment, and the same configurations and controls will be omitted unless necessary. Further, it is assumed that none of the pachinko machines P according to the following other application examples are provided with set values.
(Other application example 1)
(Overview of configuration and control)
Although not particularly shown, the configuration, installed devices, and members of the gaming board 11 (gaming area 12) of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1 are substantially the same as those in the above-described embodiment. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined) and a second low-probability time-saving gaming state are similar to those in the above-described embodiment. Either (a gaming state that combines a low-probability gaming state and a second time-shortening gaming state) or a high-probability time-saving gaming state (a gaming state that combines a high-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state) is set. It is supposed to be done.
Then, as in the above-described embodiment, during the normal game state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a, so as long as the game ball is launched according to this instruction. In, the game ball can enter the first starting winning opening 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small hit game, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b. As long as the game ball is launched according to this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the large winning opening 18 (see FIG. 3). ..

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15. When a jackpot is won based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot in a normal gaming state is set to about 1/150, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving gaming state is set to about 1/110.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number (for example, one) is executed in a specific round game (for example, three rounds). The game ball cannot enter the specific area 57, and the normal game state is set after the end of the special game. In addition, about 400 game balls can be acquired during the special game.
On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in the specific round game. After the end of the special game, a high-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 10,000 times) is set. In addition, about 1000 game balls can be acquired during the special game.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the judgment of whether or not the time reduction is granted in the winning / failing lottery and the determination of the time saving symbol in the case of winning the time saving are not performed as in the above-described embodiment. .. Instead of this, as a loss symbol that can be determined when the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 is a loss, the second time reduction game state (the set number of time reductions is predetermined). A lost symbol Z1 that defines that the number of times (10000 times in this application example) is set, and a lost symbol Z2 that defines that the time-saving gaming state is not set are provided. Then, in the normal gaming state, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined due to the loss based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, the above-mentioned second time-saving gaming state is set. That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state, the subsequent game state shifts from the normal game state to the second low-probability time-saving game state. It is designed to do. On the other hand, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
It should be noted that the probability that the lost symbol Z1 is determined when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to about 1/500.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if a loss occurs based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 16, the loss symbol Z1 is not determined. Further, even if the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during a game state other than the normal game state (second low-probability time-saving game state or high-probability time-saving game state), the lost symbol Z1 is determined. , The setting of the second short game state is not performed. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball of the first start winning opening 15, the game state at that time is changed. There is no such thing, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 is not reset. The remaining number of time reductions at that time point is updated (that is, subtracted by 1).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the upper limit of the number of continuous probability variation settings is set to five. In the pachinko machine P, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined as described above, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row because the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. Then, after the end of the special game based on the decision, the normal game state is forcibly set.

(Gameability of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, as described above, a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined), a second low-probability time-saving gaming state (a low-probability gaming state, and a non-time-saving gaming state) A game state in which the second time-shortening game state is combined) or a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state in which the high-probability game state and the second time-shortening game state are combined) is set so that the game progresses. It has become.

At the time when the player starts the game, the normal game state is often set. During this normal gaming state, as described above, the launch of the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the gaming ball is launched in accordance with this, the gaming ball is , There is a possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning opening 16. Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the normal game state (see FIG. 61). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is not set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special gaming during the normal gaming state.

Here, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state, the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes a loss and the lost symbol Z1 can be determined (decision probability is about 1/500). There is. When the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state is set to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state without going through the jackpot winning and the special game, and this second low-probability time-saving gaming state is won by the jackpot. It will continue until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 10,000 times.

During the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the launching (right-handing) of the gaming ball toward the second gaming area 12b is instructed, and as long as the gaming ball is launched in accordance with this, the gaming ball is the first. 2 There is a possibility of entering the starting winning opening 16, and the ball will not enter the first starting winning opening 15. Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined. When the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability time saving game state, and the time saving number is set to 10,000 times. .. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if the right-handed machine is hit as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the pachinko machine P will shift to the high-probability time-saving game state by winning the jackpot. (See FIG. 61). Here, during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second starting winning opening 16 is much easier to be maintained in the open state than during the normal gaming state, so that while suppressing the decrease in the number of gaming balls as the game progresses. , You can almost certainly win the next big hit and move to a high-probability time-saving game state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed) is instructed, and the game ball is launched according to this. As long as there is, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving game state again, and the number of time reductions is 10,000. Set to times. During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the next big hit can be almost certainly won while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls, and the high-probability time-saving game state is set again. To.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, when the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the jackpot is substantially won again during the gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state is changed again. Set. Therefore, once the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X2 can be continuously determined, and until the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row (the number of continuous probability variation settings reaches the upper limit). (Until) The high-probability time-saving game state continues. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, when the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the special gaming based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 is executed five times in a row without shifting to the normal gaming state. Will be done.

Here, for example, it is assumed that the pachinko machine P is configured to set a high-probability time-saving gaming state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (400 gaming balls that can be acquired during the special game). .. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and when the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the jackpot does not shift to the normal gaming state as described above. The symbol X2 can be continuously determined.
However, in the pachinko machine P configured in this way, since the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is also counted as the number of continuous probability variation settings. Become. Then, after setting the high-probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined four times in a row, the number of continuous probability variation settings reaches the upper limit, and the special game based on the determination is performed. The game state after the end is set to the normal game state. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired between the time when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined (the transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is determined) and the time when the normal gaming state is set is 4400 (= the jackpot symbol X1 is determined). 400 game balls that can be obtained in one special game based on + 1 time + 1000 game balls that can be obtained in one special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, as described above, the first low probability means the first low game state, which is set based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1 in the normal game state. Since the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 in the probability time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is changed after the jackpot symbol X2 is determined (the transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is determined). The number of game balls that can be acquired until the setting is 5000 (= 1000 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 x 5 times).

Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a jackpot is won based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, either the first jackpot symbol or the second jackpot symbol is determined. When any of the jackpot symbols is determined, the high-probability gaming state is always set on condition that the number of continuous probability variation settings has not reached the upper limit, but the first jackpot is set. It is assumed that when the symbol is determined, the time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game, and when the second jackpot symbol is determined, the non-time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game. Further, in this pachinko machine P, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, the number of continuous probability variation settings has reached the upper limit. The number of game balls that can be obtained during the special game when the game ball is set to the high probability game state without fail and the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 and becomes a big hit is the first. It is assumed that the number of game balls is set to be larger than the number of game balls that can be obtained during the special game in the case of a big hit due to the entry of the game balls into the start winning opening 15. Further, in this pachinko machine P, during the non-time-saving gaming state, the gaming ball is launched toward the first gaming area 12a in order to allow the gaming ball to enter the first starting winning opening 15, and the gaming ball is launched during the time-saving gaming state. It is assumed that the gaming ball is launched toward the second gaming area 12b in order to allow the gaming ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16.

In the pachinko machine configured as described above, when the second jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15, the high is high after the end of the special game based on the determination. Since the transition to the stochastic gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state is performed, the number of continuous probability variation settings increases, but after that, the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is performed. Then, when the first jackpot symbol is determined and the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state, the number of continuous probability variation settings has already increased, which is advantageous for the player by the time the number of continuous probability variation settings reaches the upper limit. This is disadvantageous for the player because the number of times a jackpot can be won based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 is reduced.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine according to the other application example 1 is set to shift to the time-saving game state based on the determination of a specific lost symbol or small hit symbol that is not a big hit symbol, the time-saving game is played. Since the number of continuous probability variation settings does not increase before the transition to the state and the transition to the time-saving gaming state is performed with the continuous probability variation setting number of 0, the above-mentioned disadvantageous situation does not occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the second directly is based on the determination of the predetermined jackpot symbol by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 in the normal gaming state. A specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) due to the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 during the normal gaming state, instead of shifting to the high-probability time-saving gaming state in which the game ball enters the start winning opening 16. ), The game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 via the low-probability time-saving gaming state (second low-probability time-saving gaming state) in which the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16. It is designed to shift to a high-probability time-saving gaming state based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot symbol by.
Therefore, from the time when the jackpot symbol that determines the transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is determined until the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state, all the game balls enter the second start winning opening 16. It is possible to obtain game profits that can be granted based on (for example, the number of rounds during a special game executed based on the winning of a big hit), and it is possible to grant a novel game property that enhances the interest of the player.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the time-saving gaming state is set by determining a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) during the normal gaming state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the time-saving gaming state may be set by determining a specific small hit symbol during the normal gaming state.
Further, as in the above-described embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the lost symbol Z1 in which the setting of the time-saving gaming state is determined is determined, a specific effect is obtained as compared with the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. It may be set so that the execution rate of (a look-ahead effect, a reach development effect with a high expectation of the player during the variable effect, etc.) is high.

(Other application example 2)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2 has substantially the same configuration and control as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the number of time reductions is reduced after the end of the special game based on the determination. A high-probability time-saving game state of 100 times is set. Since the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 is set to about 1/110 as in the other application example 1, it is not always the case that the next jackpot is won during the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot is won. When the winning / failing lottery is performed 100 times, the normal game state is set.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the upper limit of the number of continuous probability variation settings is not particularly set, and the condition for setting the low-probability time-saving game state (winning a big hit during the high-probability time-saving game state). The high-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the winning / failing lottery is performed 100 times without doing this).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, when the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into not only the first starting winning opening 15 but also the second starting winning opening 16 is lost. However, it is stipulated that the lost symbol Z1 that stipulates that the second time-saving game state (the set number of time-saving games is a predetermined number of times (10000 times in this application example)) is set, or that the time-saving game state is not set. The lost symbol Z2 can be determined. Then, in the normal gaming state, even when the losing symbol Z1 is determined due to the loss based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, the above-mentioned second time-saving gaming state is set. That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball of the second start winning opening 16 during the normal game state, the subsequent game state shifts from the normal game state to the second low-probability time-saving game state. It has become like. On the other hand, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined in the normal game state, the game state remains in the normal game state.
The probability that the lost symbol Z1 is determined when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 is set to about 1/7.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (second low-probability time-saving gaming state or high-probability time-saving gaming state), the gaming ball of the second start winning opening 16 enters. Even if the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the above, the second short game state is not reset. That is, even if the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball of the second start winning opening 16 in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the gaming state at that time is changed. There is no such thing, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 is not reset. The remaining number of time reductions at that time point is updated (that is, subtracted by 1).

(Playability of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2)
Regarding the flow of the game from the normal gaming state and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2 to the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1 Is the same as.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, as described above, the number of time reductions in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set to 100 times. The probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
Here, the game ball is always launched into the second game area 12b during the high-probability time-saving game state, and the game ball can pass through the gate 20. Then, when the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set, the second holding number is 4, which is the upper limit number (that is, the second special figure random number is the upper limit number of 4 holding storages). Is likely). Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the second special figure random number is preferentially processed over the first special figure random number, as in the above-described embodiment. Prior to the first special figure random number that is reserved and stored at the time when the normal game state of Random numbers.

After the normal game state is set, the launch of the game ball toward the first game area 12a is restarted, and the game ball is aimed at entering the first start winning opening 15, and the game state is changed to a high probability time-saving game state. Will aim for the transition again.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the lost symbol Z1 is determined in the winning / failing lottery based on a maximum of four second special figure random numbers that are held and stored at the time when the above-mentioned normal gaming state is set. Then, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state of 10,000 times is set, and then the high-probability time-saving gaming state is reset. That is, even if the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the second special figure random number held at this point, so that the second low-probability time-saving game state is entered. By shifting, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second start winning opening 16, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the entry, the player shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the specific figure is specified based on the second special figure random number acquired by the ball entering the second starting winning opening 16 in the normal gaming state. When the lost symbol (missing symbol Z1) is determined, it is possible to shift to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, and then to the high-probability time-saving gaming state, without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. There is.
As a result, based on the second special figure random number that is reserved and stored when the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the high-probability time-saving game is performed without the intervention of winning a jackpot and executing a special game. It will be possible to re-shift to the state, and it will be possible to give a novel playability that enhances the interest of the player.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, as in the other application example 1, the time-saving gaming state may be set by determining a specific small hit symbol during the normal gaming state.

(Other application example 3)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3 is a so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machine, and either wins a big hit or plays a game in a special area described later during a small hit game based on the small hit winning. It is configured so that a special game is executed when the ball enters.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, and the devices and members installed on the game board 11 are other than the attacker device 17, and other application examples 1 and other application examples 2. It is the same.
Although not particularly shown, the attacker device 17 has the same structure as the specific area 57 in place of the specific area 57 provided in the above-described embodiment, the other application example 1 and the other application example 2. It has the same internal structure as the above-described embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2, except that it has a special area having a different function.

Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2, the big winning opening 18 is during the special game based on the winning of the big hit or during the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit. Opens, and the game ball can enter the large winning opening 18. However, during the special game, the distribution member 59 is stopped at the first position, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 does not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. On the other hand, during the small hit game, the distribution member 59 is stopped at the second position, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 does not enter the general area 58, but all enters the special area. It is designed to do.
That is, the game ball can enter the special area only during the small hit game, so that the game ball enters the special area during the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit, and the special game is executed. It is supposed to be done.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, a predetermined area (specific area 57) of the large winning opening 18 during the special game, as in the above-described embodiment, the other application example 1 and the other application example 2. Depending on whether or not a predetermined number of gaming balls have entered), the gaming state after the end of the special game is not set, but the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot or the small determined at the time of winning the jackpot. The above-mentioned gaming state is set according to the winning symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, the normal gaming state, the low-probability gaming state, and the first time-saving gaming state (the winning probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol), which is a combination of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, are used. The first low-probability time-saving gaming state, or the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state (winning of a normal symbol) in which the fluctuation time and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 are the same as those in the above-described embodiment). The game state of any of the second low-probability time-saving game states is set by combining the probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second start winning opening 16 with the same contents as those of the above-described embodiment).
Then, as in the above-described embodiment, during the normal gaming state and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the player is instructed to launch the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a, and thus this instruction. As long as the game ball is launched in accordance with the above, the game ball can enter the first start winning opening 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the special game, and during the small hit game, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b, so that the game ball is launched according to this instruction. As long as this is done, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the large winning opening 18 (see FIG. 3).

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, when a game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15, a jackpot can be won, and if the jackpot is won, a jackpot can be won. The symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (left-handed), the special game is executed based on the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
The probability of winning a big hit when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state. Further, the upper limit number of hold of the first special figure random number (upper limit number of the first hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to two. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of continuous time reduction settings described later has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state. In any of the (first low-probability time-saving game states), the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. On the other hand, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if a loss occurs in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, the loss symbol Z1 is determined. When the lost symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming states at the time of the determination are the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state). In any case, the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving is 100 times) is set after the determination. On the other hand, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached the upper limit, the normal gaming state is set after the determination.
That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the continuous time-saving set number of times has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving number of times are reset. Will be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, it is possible to win a big hit or a small hit, and the big hit. If you win, the big hit symbol X2 is determined, and if you win the small hit, the small hit symbol Y1 is determined. That is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (right-handed), the jackpot is won (whether the jackpot symbol X2 is determined) or the small hit is won (decision of the small hit symbol Y1). A special game is executed through the small hit game to be executed.
As shown in FIG. 62, the probability of winning a big hit when a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the second start The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning opening 16 is set to about 299/300 regardless of the game state. That is, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, either the big hit or the small hit is determined in the winning / losing lottery, and the loss is not determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, a special game is always executed.
Further, the upper limit number of hold of the second special figure random number (upper limit number of the second hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to one. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined and when the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls are executed. Can be acquired.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of continuous time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the second low probability. When the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the decision when the time-saving game state is set, and the game state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state. In addition, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game based on the decision. On the other hand, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.
That is, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the continuous time-saving set number of times has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving number of times are set. It will be reset.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, the upper limit of the number of continuous time reduction settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set during the normal gaming state or the first. When the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. Then, since the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, any one of these determinations is counted as the number of consecutive time-saving setting times. Then, when these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time reduction settings reaches the upper limit, so that after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or the small hit symbol described above, the above-mentioned After the lost symbol is determined, the normal game state is forcibly set.

(Playability of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, as described above, a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined), a first low-probability time-saving gaming state (a low-probability gaming state, and a non-time-saving gaming state) Either the first time-shortening gaming state (game state combined) or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (game state combining the low-probability gaming state and the second time-shortening gaming state) is set, and the game progresses. It has become like.

(1) When a jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) When the player starts the game, the normal game state is set. In the normal game state, the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0 (that is, the remaining 3 times until the upper limit is reached).
During the normal gaming state, as described above, the launching of the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the gaming ball is launched in accordance with this, the gaming ball is Since there is a possibility of entering only the first starting winning opening 15, a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is performed during the game state. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 62 and 63).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0) as described above, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, so that the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on the above, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 1 (the remaining 2 times until the upper limit is reached).
Further, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched according to this. Since the game ball may enter only the second start winning opening 16, a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is performed during the game state. In the hit / fail lottery, as described above, the lottery result of either the big hit winning (determination of the big hit symbol X2) or the small hit winning (determination of the small hit symbol Y1) is derived. Then, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the end of the special game based on the determination (FIG. 62, (See FIG. 63), the number of continuous time reduction settings is increased by one (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached is decreased by one). Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the special game is continuously executed until the number of times of continuous time-saving setting reaches the upper limit.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one, so if the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined twice thereafter, the normal gaming state is forcibly set after the end of the special game based on the determination. ..
As described above, the upper limit number of the second special figure random number hold (the upper limit number of the second hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to one. During the fluctuation based on the determination of the big hit symbol X2 and the small hit symbol Y1, the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 and one second special symbol random number is reserved and stored. Therefore, even if the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined twice and the normal game state is forcibly set, one more big hit is made based on one second special symbol random number held and stored at this point. The symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, and the special game based on the determination is executed. When the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined in the normal game state, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal game state (see FIGS. 62 and 63). ), After the above-mentioned special game is completed, the normal game state is maintained as it is before the special game is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state in which the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0, it is until the normal gaming state is set again. A total of 2 special games (3 times in total including the special game executed based on the big hit or small hit by the second special figure random number stored on hold) will be executed.

(2) When the jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of continuous time-saving setting times is one) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (1), the first start in the normal gaming state If the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the winning opening 15 results in a loss and the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state after the determination is set to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (FIG. 62, See FIG. 63). Then, based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one (the remaining two until the upper limit is reached).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of times of continuous time-saving setting is one), the game ball is continuously launched into the first game area 12a. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving game state. Therefore, based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIGS. 62 and 63), the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two (the remaining one until the upper limit is reached).

Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (when the number of continuous time-saving setting times is one) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, then the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit When the symbol Y1 is determined once, the normal gaming state is forcibly set after the end of the special game based on the determination.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, if the jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state in which the number of continuous time-saving setting times is one, the normal gaming state is set again. In the meantime, one special game (a total of two times including the special game executed based on the big hit or the small hit by the second special figure random number stored on hold) will be executed.

(3) When the jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. Also, based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1 in the normal game state. When the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive billion-time saving setting times is one) is set, if the lost symbol Z1 is further determined in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is the first. 1 It is reset to the low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 62 and 63). Then, based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two (the remaining one until the upper limit is reached).
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 in this first low-probability time-saving gaming state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two), the jackpot symbol is determined. Based on the determination of X1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 3 (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached is 0).
Then, even though the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the continuous time reduction setting number reaches the upper limit of 3 times, so that the second low probability time reduction game state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. The normal game state is forcibly set without any problem.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, if the jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of continuous time-saving settings is two, the game to the second start winning opening 16 is performed. The normal game state is set again without executing the special game based on the ball entering.

If the loss symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 in the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two), the loss is determined. Based on the determination of the symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 3 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 0), so that the normal gaming state is forcibly set after the determination (FIG. 62, FIG. See FIG. 63). Then, the above-mentioned (1) to (3) are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, a specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) is performed without winning a big hit and executing a special game. Is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the number of continuous time-saving setting times is updated. Then, according to the number of times that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set in the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the upper limit of the number of continuous time-saving setting times is set at the time when the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. The remaining number of times to reach is changed. As a result, the number of times the special game is continuously executed during the second low-probability time-saving game state (until the normal game state is set again) changes, which is a novelty that enhances the interest of the player. It is possible to give a good playability.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to set the winning of the big hit or the small hit when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, but it may be set so as to be lost with a predetermined decision probability. ..

(Other application example 4)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 4 is also a so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machine, and has a configuration of a game board 11, devices and members installed on the game board 11, and a game state to be set. The gaming area 12 for launching the gaming ball during each gaming state is the same as that of the other application example 3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, as in the other application example 3, when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15, a big hit can be won. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (left-handed), the special game is executed based on the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
The probability of winning a big hit when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state. Further, the upper limit number of hold of the first special figure random number (upper limit number of the first hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to two. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 400 game balls can be acquired.
Further, as shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings described later has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state. In any of the (first low-probability time-saving game states), the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. On the other hand, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, in the case of a loss in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined. The determination probability of the lost symbol Z1 is set to about 1/50, and the determination probability of the lost symbol Z2 is set to about 49/50.
When the lost symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming states at the time of the determination are the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state). In any case, the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving is 10,000 times) is set after the determination. On the other hand, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached the upper limit, the normal gaming state is set after the determination.
That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the continuous time-saving setting number has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving number of times are reset. Will be.

On the other hand, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined, the time saving game state is not set. That is, if the lost symbol Z2 is determined during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues even after the determination, and if the lost symbol Z2 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the relevant symbol Z2 is determined. Even after the decision, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, it is possible to win a big hit or a small hit, and the big hit. If a winner is won, the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and if a small hit is won, the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined. That is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (right-handed), the jackpot is won (whether the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined), or the small hit is won (decision of the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2). ) Is executed, a special game is executed through a small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 64, the probability of winning a big hit when a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the second start The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning opening 16 is set to about 299/300 regardless of the game state. That is, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, either the big hit or the small hit is determined in the winning / losing lottery, and the loss is not determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, a special game is always executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X3 at the time of winning the jackpot are both halved. Similarly, the probability of determining the small hit symbol Y1 and the probability of determining the small hit symbol Y2 at the time of winning the small hit are both halved.
Further, the upper limit number of hold of the second special figure random number (upper limit number of the second hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to two. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the big hit symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 400. You can get individual game balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of continuous time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state and In any of the second low-probability time-saving gaming states, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time reductions is 100) is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. On the other hand, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.
That is, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state and the continuous time-saving set number of times has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-saving game The state and the number of time reductions will be set (reset during the second low probability time reduction game state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, if the number of continuous time reduction settings has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the second. 2 When the low-probability time-saving game state is reached, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the end of the special game based on the decision, and the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state. At that time, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game based on the decision. On the other hand, when the number of continuous time reduction settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game.
That is, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the continuous time-saving set number of times has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving number of times are set. It will be reset.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the upper limit of the number of continuous time reduction settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set during the normal gaming state or the first. When the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. When this is done, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Any of these decisions will be counted as the number of consecutive time reduction settings. Then, when these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time reduction settings reaches the upper limit, so that after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or the small hit symbol described above, the above-mentioned After the lost symbol is determined, the normal game state is forcibly set.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the upper limit of the number of pachinko machines held is set to 0, and the pachinko machine P does not hold the pachinko machine when the game ball passes through the gate 20. Then, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state set as described above ends at the start of fluctuation based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and then the normal gaming state is set. ing.
Here, for example, when the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state is changed to the second low-probability time-saving game state through the execution of the special game, the second special figure random number is not stored in the hold. 2 A low-probability time-saving game state may be set. In this case, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the second start winning opening 16 is opened, and the first game ball enters the opening second starting winning opening 16 and enters the ball. When the fluctuation is started based on the above, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends. However, since the second start winning opening 16 is still open at the start of the fluctuation, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 during this period, so that the second special figure random number is up to two, which is the upper limit. It will be stored on hold.

Further, as described above, since a big hit or a small hit is always won based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, after the special game based on the winning is completed, the second special figure random number is obtained. The second low-probability time-saving game state may be set in the state where is held and stored. In this case, as soon as the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, a governing lottery based on the second special figure random number stored on hold (the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit) is performed and the fluctuation is started. Therefore, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends immediately after the setting of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20 after the end of the above-mentioned special game, the second low-probability time-saving game state has already ended, so that the second start winning opening 16 is extremely difficult to be maintained in the open state. , The game ball does not enter the second start winning opening 16.

When the winning / failing lottery is performed based on the last second special figure random number that has been held and stored, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again with the second special figure random number not being held and stored. .. In this case, the same processing as described above is performed.

(Playability of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined) and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state) Either a game state in which states are combined) or a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state in which a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state are combined) is set, and the game progresses. There is.

(1) When a jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) When the player starts the game, the normal game state is set. In the normal game state, the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0 (that is, the remaining 3 times until the upper limit is reached).
During the normal gaming state, as described above, the launching of the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the gaming ball is launched in accordance with this, the gaming ball is Since there is a possibility of entering only the first starting winning opening 15, a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is performed during the game state. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0) as described above, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, so that the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on the above, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 1 (the remaining 2 times until the upper limit is reached).
Further, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched according to this. Since the game ball may enter only the second start winning opening 16, a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is performed during the game state.
When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above, the second special figure random number is not stored on hold. Therefore, the second start winning opening 16 is opened after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the first game ball into the opening second starting winning opening 16 is performed. And fluctuations are made, and further, based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second start winning opening 16, up to two second special figure random numbers, which is the upper limit number, are reserved and stored.

Then, in the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, as described above, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the jackpot winning, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined based on the jackpot winning, the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the small hit winning, or the small. The lottery result of any of the determination of the small hit symbol Y2 based on the winning is derived. In the second low-probability time-saving game state, even if any of the above symbols is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the end of the special game based on the determination (FIG. 64, FIG. (Refer to 65), the number of continuous time reduction settings increases by one (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached decreases by one). Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the special game is continuously executed until the number of times of continuous time-saving setting reaches the upper limit.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time reduction settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Since the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one, if any one of the jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small hit symbol Y1 or small hit symbol Y2 is determined twice, the special game based on the determination ends. After that, the normal game state is forcibly set. Further, since the normal game state is forcibly set, the continuous time reduction setting number is reset to 0 times.

Here, as described above, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, two second special figure random numbers are reserved in addition to the second special figure random number used for the first hit / miss lottery and fluctuation. It will be remembered. Therefore, when the above-mentioned symbol is determined twice and the normal game state is forcibly set, the remaining one second special symbol random number is reserved and stored.
Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the last one second special symbol random number stored in this hold, and one of the big hit symbol X2, the big hit symbol X3, the small hit symbol Y1 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined. .. Here, since the normal gaming state is set at the time of the lottery, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set again (FIG. 64, (Refer to FIG. 65), the number of continuous time reduction settings is one (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is two). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the normal gaming state is set (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

Since the second special symbol random number is not stored on hold due to the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1. If this is the case, the second start winning opening 16 is opened again, and a winning / failing lottery and variation based on the entry of the first game ball into the opening second starting winning opening 16 are performed, and further. , Based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second start winning opening 16, up to two second special figure random numbers, which is the upper limit number, are stored on hold.
As a result, the special game is continuously executed until any one of the big hit symbol X2, the big hit symbol X3, the small hit symbol Y1 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined twice.

On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined and the normal gaming state is set, the jackpot is won again from the normal gaming state (determination of the jackpot symbol X2), and the first based on the winning. 2 We will aim to shift to a low-probability time-saving game state.

In this way, if the jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time-saving setting times is 0), it remains when the game shifts to the normal gaming state. Unless the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined based on the last one second special symbol random number, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is repeatedly set, and the special gaming is continuously executed. ..
For example, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined at the first transition to the normal gaming state, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is changed to the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2. Up to the special game based on it, a total of 4 special games will be executed. Further, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined when the transition to the normal gaming state is performed for the first time, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined when the transition to the normal gaming state is performed for the second time. From the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 described above, a total of seven special games will be executed.

(2) When the jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of continuous time-saving setting times is one) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (1), the first start in the normal gaming state If the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the winning opening 15 results in a loss and the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state after the determination is set to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (FIG. 64, See FIG. 65). Then, based on the determination of the lost symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one (the remaining two until the upper limit is reached).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of times of continuous time-saving setting is one), the game ball is continuously launched into the first game area 12a. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving game state. Therefore, based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIGS. 64 and 65), the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two (the remaining one until the upper limit is reached).
Further, as in the case of (1), after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the first game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, and the winning / failing lottery and fluctuation are performed based on this. Further, based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second start winning opening 16, the second special figure random numbers are reserved and stored up to the upper limit of two.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of continuous time reduction settings is one) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Since the number of consecutive time reduction settings is two times, if any one of the jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small hit symbol Y1 or small hit symbol Y2 is determined once, the special game based on the determination ends. After that, the normal game state is forcibly set. Further, since the normal game state is forcibly set, the continuous time reduction setting number is reset to 0 times.

(B) When the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the second special symbol random number previously reserved and stored in the forcibly set normal game state. Here, as described above. When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, two second special figure random numbers are reserved and stored in addition to the second special figure random number used for the first winning / losing lottery and fluctuation. Therefore, when the above-mentioned symbol is determined once and the normal game state is forcibly set, the remaining two second special symbol random numbers are reserved and stored.
Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number stored earlier in the two reserved and stored, and the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small hit symbol Y1 or the small hit symbol Y2 is performed. Is determined. Here, since the normal gaming state is set at the time of the lottery, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the second low probability time reduction is performed again as in the case of (1). The game state is set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time reduction settings is one (the remaining two times until the upper limit is reached).
Then, at this point, since the remaining one second special figure random number is reserved and stored, any of the above-mentioned symbols is determined based on the last one second special figure random number, and the second special figure again. 2 The low-probability time-saving game state is set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the number of continuous time-saving settings is 2 (the remaining one until the upper limit is reached).

Since the second special figure random number is not stored on hold due to the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of any of the above-mentioned symbols. In that case, the second start winning opening 16 is opened again, and the winning / failing lottery and the change based on the entry of the first game ball into the opening second starting winning opening 16 are performed, and further, the first 2 Based on the entry of the 2nd to 3rd game balls into the starting winning opening 16, up to 2 random numbers of the second special figure, which is the upper limit, are stored on hold.
As described above, at this point, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 2 times (the remaining 1 time until the maximum number of times is reached). When any of the big hit symbol X2, the big hit symbol X3, the small hit symbol Y1 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the normal gaming state is forcibly set, and the situation is the same as described above.

(B) When the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined based on the second special symbol random number previously reserved and stored in the forcibly set normal game state. The normal game state is forcibly set in, and the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined based on the second special symbol random number that was previously reserved and stored out of the two reserved and stored at this time. If so, the normal gaming state is set again based on the determination (see FIGS. 64 and 65).
Then, since the remaining one second special symbol random number is reserved and stored at this point, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the last one second special symbol random number. The second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set again (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the situation is the same as in (1) above.
On the other hand, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the normal gaming state is continuously set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and in this case as well, the same situation as in (1) above. Will be.

In this way, if the jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is one), it remains when the game shifts to the normal game state. For both of the two second special symbol random numbers, the second low-probability time-saving game state is repeatedly set and the special game is continuously executed unless the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined. Become.
For example, if the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second second special symbol random numbers that were reserved and stored when the first normal game state was entered, From the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 described above, a total of four special games will be executed. In addition, the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special symbol random number that was reserved and stored when the first transition to the normal gaming state is performed, and the second special gaming state is entered. If the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second special symbol random numbers that were reserved and stored at the time of this, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. A total of 7 special games will be executed up to the special game based on the determination of the above-mentioned big hit symbol X3 or small hit symbol Y2.
In addition, the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special symbol random number that was reserved and stored when the first normal game state was entered, and the second normal game state was entered. The big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special symbol random number that was reserved and stored at the time of the third time, and the one that was reserved and stored when the game transitioned to the normal gaming state for the third time. When the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined for both the eye and the second special symbol random number, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is selected from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. A total of 10 special games will be executed up to the special game based on the decision of.

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive time-saving setting times is 2) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, as in the pachinko machine P according to other application examples 3. If a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two, the special game based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is not executed. , The normal gaming state will be set again.
In addition, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 in the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of continuous time-saving settings is two), the other Similar to the pachinko machine P according to the application example 3 of the above, after the determination, the normal gaming state is forcibly set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the above-mentioned (1) to (3) are repeated. Become.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, a specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) is performed without winning a big hit and executing a special game. Is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the number of continuous time-saving setting times is updated. In addition, when the game shifts from the second low-probability time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state through a special game, a predetermined jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X2) is obtained based on the remaining second special symbol random numbers stored at that time. ) Or the small hit symbol (small hit symbol Y1) is determined, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set again. Then, according to the number of times that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set in the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the upper limit of the number of continuous time-saving setting times is set at the time when the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. The remaining number of times until reaching is changed, and the second low-probability time-saving game can be re-shifted to the second low-probability time-saving game state according to the lottery result at the time of the transition to the normal game state. During the state (until the normal game state is set again), the number of times the special game is executed continuously changes, and it becomes possible to impart a novel game property that enhances the player's interest.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to set the winning of a big hit or a small hit when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, but it may be set so as to be lost with a predetermined decision probability. ..
In addition, whenever a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 and a loss is determined, a specific loss symbol (loss) in which the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) is set is set. The symbol Z1) may be determined.
Further, when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 and a big hit is won, the big hit symbol in which the normal game state is set may be determined.
In addition, the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) is set based on the determination of a specific loss symbol (loss symbol Z1) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15. Instead of doing so, a specific jackpot symbol or small hit symbol that sets the first time-saving gaming state by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 is provided, and the specific jackpot symbol or small hit symbol is provided. The first time-saving game state may be set based on the determination of.

(Other application example 5)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 5 is also a so-called one-type and two-type mixed pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as shown in FIG. 66, a normal drawing start port 70 into which a game ball can enter is provided in the lower center of the game area 12. Only the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the normal drawing start winning opening 70.

Further, an approach device 80 through which a game ball can enter is provided at the lower left of the normal drawing start port 70. As shown in FIG. 66, the approach device 80 enters through an entry port 81 into which a game ball can enter, an opening / closing door 82 (ordinary electric accessory) that opens and closes the entry opening 81, and an entry port 81. The ball was entered from the first flow passage 83 and the second flow passage 84, which can flow down, and the ball entry port 81, which can be displaced to the first position or the second position and is in the first position. A distribution member 85 that distributes a game ball to the first flow passage 83 and distributes a game ball that has entered from the entry port 81 to the second flow passage 84 when it is in the second position, and a game that flows down the first flow passage 83. The game board 11 uses the first gate 86 through which the ball can pass, the second gate 87 through which the game ball flowing down the second flow passage 84 can pass, and the game ball passing through the first gate 86 and the second gate 87. It is equipped with a discharge port (not shown) that discharges to the back.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the center of the left portion of the game area 12, a first start winning opening 15 having an openable opening / closing door 90 and a second starting winning opening having an openable opening / closing door 91 are provided. 16 and 16 are installed side by side. Further, in the lower left portion of the game area 12, an attacker device 17 having the same configuration as that of the other application example 3 and the other application example 4 is provided.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, similarly to the other application examples 3 and the other application examples 4, the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. Either one is set, but in any of the gaming states, the launching (left-handed) of the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a is instructed.
Then, when the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a enters the normal drawing start port 70, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed, and when the result of the lottery is successful, the opening / closing door 82 opens and the approach device 80 enters. The game ball can enter the ball opening 81, and the distribution member 85 stops at the first position or the second position, so that the game ball entered from the entry port 81 can enter the first flow passage 83 or the second position. It is led to the flow passage 84. Which flow passage the game ball is guided to is predetermined according to the set game state.

Further, when the game ball guided to the first flow passage 83 passes through the first gate 86, the opening / closing door 90 opens (the second start winning opening 16 is opened), and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. It will be possible. Then, when two game balls enter the second start winning opening 16, the opening / closing door 90 closes. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, the upper limit number of hold of the first special figure random number (the upper limit number of the first hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is It is set to one.
Further, when the game ball guided to the second flow passage 84 passes through the second gate 87, the opening / closing door 91 opens (the first start winning opening 15 is opened), and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. It will be possible. Then, when two game balls enter the second start winning opening 16, the opening / closing door 91 closes. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, the upper limit number of the second special figure random number hold (the upper limit number of the second hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is It is set to one.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol during the non-time-saving gaming state (during the normal gaming state) is set to about 1/150. The opening time of the opening / closing door 82 in the case of a hit is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a hit is made in the lottery of the normal symbol during the non-time saving game state, the distribution member 85 is stopped at the second position, whereby the game ball entered from the entry port 81 is placed in the second gate 87. The second start winning opening 16 is opened by passing through.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) is set to about 1/2, and the winning is achieved. In this case, the opening time of the opening / closing door 82 is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds × 2 times). Then, if a hit is made in the lottery of the normal symbol during the first short game state, the distribution member 85 is stopped at the first position, whereby the game ball entered from the entrance 81 is the first gate. By passing through 86, the first starting winning opening 15 is opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state) is set to about 1 / 1.1. In this case, the opening time of the opening / closing door 82 is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, if a hit is made in the lottery of the normal symbol during the second short game state, the distribution member 85 is stopped at the second position, whereby the game ball entered from the entry port 81 is entered into the second gate. By passing through 87, the second starting winning opening 16 is opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, similarly to the other application examples 3 and 4, when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 15. It is possible to win a jackpot, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and if it is lost, the lost symbol Z1 is determined. The probability of winning a big hit when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state at the time of the determination may be either the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state). After the end of the special game based on the determination, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set.
Further, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is set after the determination. .. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is not set. That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues even after the determination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, it is possible to win a big hit or a small hit, and the big hit. If a winner is won, the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, if a small hit is won, the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and if a loss occurs, the lost symbol Z2 is determined.
Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, the jackpot is won (whether the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined), or the small hit is won (small hit symbol Y1 or Y2). A special game is executed through a small hit game executed based on (decision of).

As shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning a big hit when a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the second start The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning opening 16 is set to about 149/300 regardless of the game state. That is, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit and executing a special game is about 1/2.
Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X3 at the time of winning the jackpot are both halved. Similarly, the probability of determining the small hit symbol Y1 and the probability of determining the small hit symbol Y2 at the time of winning the small hit are both halved.
Then, in both cases where the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 round games are executed. You can get individual game balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, after the end of the special game based on the determination. When the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set and the gaming state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination. Is set.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the gaming state at the time of the determination is either the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. Also, after the end of the special game based on the determination, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving is 100 times) is set. That is, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined during the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state and the number of time-savings are set (second low-probability time-saving game). It will be reset) during the state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, when the lost symbol X2 is determined, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time reductions is 999 times) is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is not set. That is, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state continues even after the determination.

(Playability of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as described above, a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined), a first low-probability time-saving gaming state (a low-probability gaming state and a low-probability gaming state and) Either the first time-shortening gaming state (game state combined) or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (game state combining the low-probability gaming state and the second time-shortening gaming state) is set, and the game progresses. It has become like.

Immediately after factory shipment or in the initial state after reset, the normal game state is set.
During the normal game state, the game ball can enter the normal drawing start winning opening 70, and a lottery of the normal symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing starting winning opening 70 is performed. .. If the lottery of the ordinary symbol is successful, as described above, the opening / closing door 82 is opened so that the game ball that has entered the approach device 70 can pass through the second gate 87, and the game ball passes through the gate. Then, the second start winning opening 16 is opened. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second start winning opening 16, the second starting winning opening 16 is closed, and the winning / failing lottery is 1 based on the entered game ball. It will be done once.
In this winning / losing lottery, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and after the end of the special game based on the determination, the second low-probability time-saving game state (time reduction number of times 100 times) is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68). ). On the other hand, when it becomes a loss, the loss symbol Z1 is determined, and after the determination, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (time reduction number of times 999 times) is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68).

(1) When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set Even during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the normal drawing start winning opening 70 as in the normal game state. The opening / closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that has entered the approach device 70 is the second gate when it is won in the lottery of the normal symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing start winning opening 70. It becomes possible to pass through 87, and the second start winning opening 16 is opened when the game ball passes through the gate. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second start winning opening 16, the second starting winning opening 16 is closed, and a winning / failing lottery is performed once based on the entered game ball.

In this winning / failing lottery, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, if the jackpot is won, the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and if the jackpot is lost, the lost symbol Z2 is determined (see FIGS. 67 and 68). ). Then, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set again after the end of the special game based on the determination (see FIGS. 67 and 68). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the normal game state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination (see FIGS. 67 and 68). Further, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state continues even after the determination (see FIGS. 67 and 68).

Since the number of time reductions in the second low-probability time-saving game state is set to 100 times, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends when the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery is performed 100 times without winning the jackpot. Become. However, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning opening 16 is frequently opened, and in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, a big hit or a small hit is made. Since the winning probability is set to about 1/2, the second low probability time-saving gaming state is substantially continued until the big hit or the small hit is won again.
Then, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, unless the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1 is determined in the above-mentioned winning / losing lottery, the second low is performed through the special game based on the winning of the big hit or the small hit. The probability time saving game state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, if the normal game state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the big hit symbol X2 or the small hit symbol Y1, the normal symbol lottery will be won as described above. 2 A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning opening 16. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state (100 times of time reduction) is set again, and when the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. Is set.

(2) When the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set As described above, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined in the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.
Even during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the normal drawing start winning opening 70 as in the normal game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state. When a normal symbol is drawn based on the entry of a game ball into the normal drawing start winning opening 70, the opening / closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that has entered the approach device 70 can pass through the first gate 86. When the game ball passes through the gate, the first start winning opening 15 is opened. Then, when two game balls enter the opened first start winning opening 15, the first starting winning opening 15 is closed, and a winning / failing lottery and a winning / failing lottery are performed based on the previously entered game ball. The fluctuation is performed, and the first special figure random number acquired based on the game ball that has entered later is stored on hold. Further, when the change during execution is completed, the winning / fail lottery and the change based on the first special figure random number stored on hold are continuously performed.

Then, in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 described above, if the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second is after the end of the special game based on the determination. A low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68). The flow of the game after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set is the same as in (1).
On the other hand, in the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the time-saving gaming state is not set, and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues as it is. Further, by performing the winning / failing lottery once, the remaining number of times of the time saving in the first low probability time saving gaming state is reduced by one.

Here, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, two game balls enter while the first start winning opening 15 is opened by the winning decision in the lottery of the normal symbol, so that the first special figure random number is generated. The state in which one is held and stored is maintained. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as described above, the number of time reductions in the first low probability time reduction gaming state is set to 999 times, which is an odd number. Then, if the winning / failing lottery is performed 999 times without winning the jackpot during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set (see FIG. 68). At this point, one first special figure random number is reserved and stored.
Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the first special figure random number that was held and stored at the time when the normal game state is set, and if a big hit is won and the big hit symbol X1 is determined, a special based on the decision is made. After the end of the game, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68). Further, even when the lost symbol Z1 is determined due to a loss in the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set after the determination (see FIGS. 67 and 68).
That is, if the winning / failing lottery is performed 999 times without winning the jackpot after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the subsequent game state is always the second low-probability time-saving game that is highly advantageous to the player. It will be set to the state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, if the winning / failing lottery is performed a predetermined number of times in a predetermined gaming state (first low-probability time-saving gaming state) without winning a big hit, the pachinko machine P is executed next. Whether a specific jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X1) is determined or a specific lost symbol (missing symbol Z1) is determined in the winning / failing lottery, it is advantageous for the player. A high specific gaming state (second low-probability time-saving gaming state) is set. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit (so-called ceiling) for the number of winning / failing lottery until the player shifts to a specific gaming state, and it is possible to impart a novel playability that enhances the interest of the player.
In addition, in the case of a loss based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16, the loss symbol stipulated that the first low-probability time-saving game state (time reduction number of times 999 times) is set. Only Z2 was to be determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lost symbol Z1 in which it is defined that the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (time reduction number of times 100 times) is set is It may be possible to determine.

(Other application example 6)
(Overview of configuration and control)
Although not particularly shown, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 is not a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and the special game is executed only based on the winning of the jackpot, as in the above-described embodiment. It is configured to.

(Outline of the structure in the game area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the general winning opening 14, the first starting winning opening 15, the second starting winning opening 16, the movable piece 16b, as in the above-described embodiment, An attacker device 17, an out port 19, a gate 20, and an effect display device 21 are provided (see FIG. 69).
The structure, installation position, and the like of some of these devices and members are different from those of the above-described embodiment.
Hereinafter, the structure of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 in the gaming region 12 will be described focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, as shown in FIG. 69, the gate 20 is provided on the upper right side of the effect display device 21 (upper part of the second gaming area 12b). Only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through the gate 20. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, almost all the gaming balls that have entered the second gaming area 12b are configured to pass through the gate 20.

As shown in FIG. 69, below the gate 20, a second start winning opening 16 and a flat plate-shaped movable piece 16b (ordinary electric accessory) that can be retracted with respect to the game board 11 are arranged side by side. ing.
The upper surface of the movable piece 16b is formed so as to be inclined downward from the right end to the left end in a state of protruding from the game board 11. The right end of the movable piece 16b is located directly below the gate 20, and the second starting winning opening 16 is arranged on the left side of the left end of the movable piece 16b. Further, the second starting winning opening 16 has a cup shape that opens upward, and the game ball that has reached the opening enters the second starting winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the game board 11, the upper surface of the movable piece 16b guides the game ball to the opening of the second starting winning opening 16. By functioning as, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 (see FIG. 70 (b)). On the other hand, in the state where the movable piece 16b is immersed in the game board 11, the movable piece 16b cannot guide the game ball to the opening of the second start winning opening 16, and the second starting winning opening 16 It is not possible to enter a game ball into (see FIG. 70 (a)). Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the length from the right end of the movable piece 16b to the second starting winning opening 16 is almost the same as the width of the flow passage through which the game ball flows down in the second game area 12b. Therefore, in the state where the movable piece 16b is projected, almost all of the game balls that have entered the second gaming area 12b and passed through the gate 20 can enter the second starting winning opening 16.

Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the variable display of the normal symbol is started. When the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, after the variation display of the ordinary symbol is executed for a predetermined variation time, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b protrudes for a predetermined operation time. It becomes a state (see FIG. 70 (b)). On the other hand, when the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, and then the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b is a game board. It remains immersed in 11 (see FIG. 70 (a)).
Only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the second start winning opening 16, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through.
Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16, a predetermined number of game balls (one in another application example 6) are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 69, an attacker device 17 is provided below the second starting winning opening 16 and the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 are not provided in the large winning opening 18.
It should be noted that only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the large winning opening 18, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through.
Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, after the end of the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the gaming state according to the type of the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot is set. It has become so.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 will be described focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiments.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the normal gaming state, the low-probability gaming state, and the first time-saving gaming state, which are the gaming states in which the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are combined, are the gaming states. 1 In the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a gaming state in which the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the low-probability gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are combined, or in the gaming state in which the high-probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are combined. One of the high-probability time-saving gaming states is set.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are the frequencies of the game balls entering the second starting winning opening 16. The difficulty level of the ball, in other words, the frequency of winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16) is set to be different. The details of the specific settings will be described later.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after resetting.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the gaming ball flowing down the first gaming area 12a can enter the first starting winning opening 15, and flows down the second gaming area 12b. The pachinko ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the large winning opening 18.
Then, during the normal game state, the player is made to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed) so that the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15, and the first During the low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the special game, the game ball passes through the gate 20, enters the second start winning opening 16, and also. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the large winning opening 18.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, it is possible to win a big hit in the winning / losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and the big hit. If you win, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 will be decided. Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming state). ), The probability of winning a jackpot is set to about 1/300, and the probability of winning a jackpot when the above-mentioned gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state) is , Is set to about 3/300 (ie, about 1/100).
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X1 and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 are both set to 50/100 (that is, 50%).
Further, if the result is lost by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the lost symbol Z1 is determined.
It should be noted that the upper limit number of hold of the first special figure random number (upper limit number of the first hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to four. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), it is possible to win a big hit in a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X3 is determined. It has become like. Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 15 is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming state). ), The probability of winning the jackpot is set to about 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above-mentioned gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state) is , Is set to approximately 3/300 (1/100).
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 100/100 (that is, 100%).
Further, if the result is lost by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the lost symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 (the upper limit of the number of second hold) is set to four. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X1 and X2 are determined, the jackpot 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds during the special game based on the determination. The round game that ends when either the condition that 10 game balls enter the large winning opening 18 is satisfied is executed 5 times, and about 500 game balls can be acquired. ing.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.

(Outline of Fuzu game)
Next, the outline of the normal drawing game executed by the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 71 (c), in the non-time-saving gaming state (during the normal gaming state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.2, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds. The operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state) when a hit is made by a normal symbol lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not shown in particular, it is set in the same manner during the special game.
In addition, in the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.2, which is the same as in the non-time-saving game state. The fluctuation time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a hit is made by drawing a normal symbol is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving game state. There is.
Further, in the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is in the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state. Approximately 1 / 1.1, which is higher than the inside, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first short game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when it is won by the lottery of the normal symbol is , It is set to 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first short game state.

That is, in both the non-time-saving game state and the special game, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the lottery of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and the movable piece 16b will be in a protruding state. many. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 5 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time from the immersed state to the protruding state of the movable piece 16b (from the protruding state). The interval until the next protruding state is long), but the time for the movable piece 16b to be maintained in the protruding state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost immersed, and it is almost impossible for the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b to enter the second start winning opening 16.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-time-time-saving game state), the lottery of the normal symbol is won with the same probability as during the non-time-saving game state, so that it is the same as during the non-time-saving game state. In addition, there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state. Further, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is longer than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is in a immersive state. Although the time from the protruding state to the protruding state is short (the interval from the protruding state to the next protruding state is short), the time for the movable piece 16b to be maintained in the protruding state is long. Therefore, during the first short game state, the movable piece 16b is in a state of protruding substantially, and there is a high possibility that the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b will enter the second start winning opening 16.

In addition, during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), there is a higher probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery than during the non-time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state. Therefore, there are extremely many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in a protruding state. Further, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortening game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortening game state, the first time-shortening game state. Similar to the inside, the time from the immersed state to the protruding state of the movable piece 16b is short (the interval from the protruding state to the next protruding state is short), but the movable piece 16b is in the protruding state. It takes a long time to be maintained. Therefore, during the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to protrude than during the first time-saving game state, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b can enter the second start winning opening 16. The sex is higher than during the first short game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the probability of winning by lottery of ordinary symbols is high in any of the non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, and the second time saving game state. Although it is set, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 by making the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operating time of the movable piece 16b different (that is, the second starting winning opening 16). The frequency of entering the game ball, in other words, the frequency of executing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16) is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in a protruding state than in the non-time-saving game state, so that the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning opening 16 and the second time-saving game state. In the middle, since the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in a protruding state than in the first short game state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.
Therefore, during the second time-shortening game state, the decrease of the game ball with the progress of the game is suppressed more than during the non-time-saving game state and the first time-shortening game state, and during the first time-shortening game state, than during the non-time-saving game state. However, you will be able to get the chance to win or lose the lottery.

(Outline of the game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, one of the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Will be done.
Specifically, as long as the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a as instructed during the normal game state, a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 The jackpot can be won, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the low-probability gaming state and is set to the second short-time gaming state. The second low-probability time-saving game state is set. When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving games is set to 100 times.
That is, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times (that is, until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 100 times) without winning the jackpot. The second low-probability time-saving game state continues.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state is set. By doing so, a high-probability time-saving game state is set. When the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the high-probability number of times and the time-saving number of times are both set to 100 times.
That is, after the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the high-probability time-saving is performed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times (that is, until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 100 times) without winning the jackpot. The game state continues.

Further, in both the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b wins the second start. There is a high probability that the ball will enter the mouth 16. Therefore, as long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game ball goes to the second start winning opening 16. Enters the ball. Then, in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning ball, a big hit can be won, and if the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X3 is determined.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability gaming state and is set to the second short-time gaming state. Therefore, a high-probability time-saving game state is set, and both the high-probability number of times and the time-saving number of times are set to 100 times.

In addition, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is other than a big hit (that is, loss) 100 times, the second time-saving game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state. The normal game state is set.
Similarly, after the high-probability time-saving game state is set, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is other than a big hit, the high-probability game state is changed to the low-probability game state, and the second time-saving game state is non-time-saving. By changing to the gaming state, the normal gaming state is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the normal gaming state is set after the RAM is cleared. Further, after the end of the special game based on the jackpot symbol X1, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times without winning the jackpot, the normal gaming state is set. Further, after the end of the special game based on the jackpot symbol X2 or X3, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times without winning the jackpot, the normal gaming state is set.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), after the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the predetermined number of time-saving activations (others) without winning the jackpot. When the number of times (500 times in the application example 6) is reached (that is, after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, all the results of the 500 win / fail lottery are other than the big hit), the low-probability game state is changed. As it is, the non-time-saving gaming state is changed to the first time-saving gaming state, so that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving games is set to 600 times.
That is, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the result of the 600 win / fail lottery is all other than the jackpot until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times without winning the jackpot. Until), the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues.

Further, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is in a state in which the movable piece 16b protrudes, and the game enters the second game area 12b. There is a high probability that the ball will enter the second starting winning opening 16. Therefore, as long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b as instructed during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16. Then, in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning ball, a big hit can be won, and if the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X3 is determined.
On the other hand, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times without winning the jackpot (that is, when the result of the 600 win / fail lottery is all other than the jackpot), The normal gaming state is set by changing the first time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the time-saving activation for counting the number of time-saving activations (500 times) in which the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set is set. The number of times counter is configured by a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of the time-saving activation count counter is set to clear (reset) the RAM by a predetermined operation, end the special game, or set the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state). It is reset when one of the reset conditions is satisfied. Then, when the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, counting by the time-saving activation number counter is started, and the counting is performed during the normal gaming state and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (that is, low probability). It is designed to be executed only (during the game state).

Specifically, when the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), and counting by the time-saving activation number counter starts from this point.
Further, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is completed, the subsequent game state is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state (low-probability game state), and counting by the time-saving activation number counter starts from this point. ..
On the other hand, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is completed, the subsequent game state is set to the high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state). Therefore, the counting by the time saving activation number counter does not start from the time when the special game ends, and the counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from the time when the high probability time saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set.

Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, each time the special symbol is changed, the pachinko machine P is counted by the time saving activation number counter. When the count value of the time reduction activation number counter reaches the above-mentioned time reduction activation number, the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of arrival ends (that is, the special symbol is stopped and displayed), and when the predetermined stop display time elapses, the first stop display time elapses. 1 Low probability time saving game state is set.
That is, according to the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the number of changes in the special symbol (count value by counting the number of times of time reduction) after the normal game state or the second low probability time reduction game state is set is the time reduction activation. By reaching the number of times, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set without going through the winning of a big hit and the execution of a special game, so that it is possible to give a novel playability and enhance the interest of the player. ..

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the first low probability time reduction is performed after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the special game based on the jackpot winning is completed until the next jackpot is won. The game state (first time-saving game state) can be set only once.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation count counter after the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set reaches the time-saving activation number (500 times) and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. , The first low-probability time-saving gaming state cannot be set again until the next big hit is won.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, after the count value of the time-saving activation number counter is reset by setting the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the said until the next big hit is won. It is set so that the count by the time saving activation count counter is stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, it is not defined that the time-saving gaming state is set for any of the lost symbols (Z1 and Z2). Therefore, the gaming state is not changed after the lost symbol is stopped, and the gaming state at the time of determining the lost symbol continues.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the number of continuous time reduction settings and the number of continuous probability variation settings as in the above-described embodiment are not set, and whenever the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, A low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game based on the decision, and whenever a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game based on the decision. ..

(Summary of transmission of information regarding game status)
At various time points, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 transmits information regarding the game state at that time point (hereinafter, also referred to as game state designation information) to the sub-control board 300.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, as the game state designation information, the normal A designation information, the second low probability time reduction designation information, the second low probability time reduction end predetermined number of times before designation information, and the second Low probability time saving final designation information, high probability time saving hold designation information, high probability time saving designation information, high probability time saving end predetermined number of times before designation information, high probability time saving final designation information, first low probability time saving before arrival designation information, first low Thirteen types of information are provided: probability time saving designation information, first low probability time saving end designation information before a predetermined number of times, first low probability time saving final designation information, and normal B designation information.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the main CPU 101 changes the above-mentioned game state designation information transmitted to the sub-control board 300 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed. In the case (for example, when the gaming state is changed from the second low-probability time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state), when the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed (that is, when the stop-displayed special symbol is confirmed). ), Send a game state change specification command including information that the game state specification information is changed.
Further, when the special game is completed, the main CPU 101 transmits a special post-game game state designation command including information on the game state set thereafter.
Further, the main CPU 101 stops and displays the time when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without displaying the change of the special symbol, the time when the change of the special symbol starts, and the stop display time elapses. When the special game is executed, the opening process starts when the special game is executed, the round game starts when the special game is executed (when the large winning opening 18 is opened), and the round game when the special game is executed. At the end of (when the big winning opening 18 is closed), at the start of the ending process when the special game is executed, at the end of the ending process when the special game is executed, at the time of clearing the RAM, at the time of turning on the power (electricity) At the time of disconnection / recovery), a spec specification command including model information of the pachinko machine P is transmitted. In addition, each of the above-mentioned time points when the spec specification command is transmitted is collectively referred to as the time point when the spec specification command is transmitted.
Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, predetermined game state designation information is included in the game state change designation command, the special game post-game state designation command, or the spec designation command, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. It has become like.

(1) Normal A designated information After clearing the RAM, the normal A designated information ends after the second low-probability time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot, or after the high-probability time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot. It indicates that the player is in the normal game state (hereinafter, also referred to as the normal game state A) set after the game has been completed.
Normally, the A designation information is that the 100th variation reached without winning the jackpot after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (that is, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends without winning the jackpot). The 100th change (that is, winning the jackpot) reached without winning the jackpot after the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, or after the high probability time saving game state is set. It is included in the game state change specification command that is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. It has become.
Further, the normal A designation information is included in the spec designation command transmitted when the spec designation command is transmitted during the normal game state A, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, every time the change of the special symbol is started in the normal game state A, the normal A designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs during the normal game state A, at the time of recovery from the power failure, and when the RAM is cleared and the normal game state A is set, at the time of the RAM clear, the normal A is performed. The designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, for example, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed during the normal game state A, the normal A designated information is specified at the start time of the opening process, the start time of the round game, the start time of the ending process, and the like. It is included in the designated command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(2) Second low-probability time-saving designation information The second low-probability time-saving designation information indicates that the first to 95th special symbol changes after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.
The second low-probability time-saving designation information is included in the special post-game game state designation command transmitted when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is completed, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. ..
Further, the second low-probability time-saving designation information is a spec-designating command transmitted when the spec-designating command is transmitted in the first to 95th changes in the special symbol after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It is included in the sub-control board 300 and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, every time the first to 95th special symbol changes are started after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving designation information is included in the spec designation command, and the sub-control board 300 Will be sent to. Further, for example, if a power failure occurs during the first to 95th changes in the special symbol after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving designation information is obtained at the time of recovery from the power failure. Is included in the spec specification command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed by the first to 95th winning / failing lottery after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the opening process starts, the round game starts, and the ending. At the start of processing or the like, the second low-probability time-saving designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(3) Second low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of pre-designated information The second low-probability time-reduced end predetermined number of pre-designated information is the 96th to 99th special symbol changes after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It indicates that there is a certain effect (that is, it is a change 4 times before, 3 times before, 2 times before, or 1 time before the last change of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state).
The second low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time elapses in the 95th change after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. It is included in the change designation command and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, the second low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is transmitted when the spec designation command is transmitted at the 96th to 99th special symbol changes after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It is included in the spec specification command and sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, every time the 96th to 99th special symbol changes are started after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the specification information before the second low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times is included in the spec specification command. It is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, for example, if a power failure occurs during the 96th to 99th special symbol changes after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving end predetermined at the time of recovery from the power failure. The pre-designated information is included in the spec-designated command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, when the big hit is won and the special game is executed by the 96th to 99th winning / failing lottery after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the opening process start time, the round game start time, and the ending At the start time of the process or the like, the second low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(4) Second low-probability time-saving final designation information The second low-probability time-saving final designation information is the 100th change in the special symbol after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (that is, the second low-probability time-saving final designation information). It indicates that it is the last change in the time-saving game state).
The second low-probability time-saving final designation information is a game state change designation command transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time elapses in the 99th change after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. It is included in the sub-control board 300 and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, the second low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec-designating command transmitted when the spec-designating command is transmitted in the 100th change of the special symbol after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It is designed to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, at the time when the 100th change of the special symbol is started after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec specification command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Will be done. Further, for example, if a power failure occurs during the 100th change of the special symbol after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving final designation information is specified at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is included in the designated command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, when the big hit is won and the special game is executed by the 100th winning / losing lottery after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the opening process starts, the round game starts, and the ending process starts. At a time point or the like, the second low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(5) High-probability time-saving hold designation information The high-probability time-saving hold designation information is stored in the second special figure random number hold storage (hereinafter, also referred to as high-securing retention) stored at the time when the high-probability time-saving game state is set. It indicates that the special design is based on the change.
The high-probability time-saving hold designation information is included in the special post-game game state designation command transmitted when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is completed, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. There is.
Further, the high-probability time-saving hold designation information is included in the spec designation command transmitted when the spec designation command is transmitted in the above-mentioned fluctuation of the special symbol based on the high secure retention, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. It has become like. For example, every time the change of the special symbol based on the high secure retention is started, the high probability time saving hold designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned high securing retention, the high probability time saving hold designation information is included in the spec designation command at the time of recovery from the power failure, and the sub-control board 300 Will be sent to. In addition, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed by the winning / failing lottery based on the above-mentioned high security retention, a high probability time saving hold is made at the start time of the opening process, the start time of the round game, the start time of the ending process, etc. The designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(6) High-probability time-saving designation information The high-probability time-saving designation information is the 95th time that the special symbol has changed since the high-probability time-saving gaming state was set after the change of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned high securing retention was completed. It shows that the fluctuation is up to.
The high-probability time-saving designation information is the game state change designation that is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time elapses in the change of the special symbol based on the hold stored at the latest among the above-mentioned highly secured stays. It is included in the command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, the high-probability time-saving designation information is a spec specification command from the next change after the end of the change of the special symbol based on the highly secured stay to the 95th change of the special symbol after the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It is included in the spec specification command to be transmitted when the transmission time is reached, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, if four high-secured stays are stored at the time when the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the fifth to 95th special symbol changes start after the high-probability time-saving game state is set. Each time, the high-probability time saving designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, for example, in the above case, when a power failure occurs during the fifth to 95th change of the special symbol after the high probability time saving game state is set, the high probability time saving designation information is displayed at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is included in the spec specification command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, in the above case, when the big hit is won and the special game is executed by the 5th to 95th winning / failing lottery after the high probability time saving game state is set, the opening process start time, the round game start time, At the start time of the ending process or the like, the high-probability time saving designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(7) High-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information High-probability time-saving end of predetermined number of times before designation information indicates that the 96th to 99th special symbol changes (that is, high) after the high-probability time-saving game state is set. It indicates that the change is 4 times before, 3 times before, 2 times before, or 1 time before from the last change of the probability time shortening gaming state).
The high-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is a game state change specification command sent when the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time elapses in the 95th change after the high-probability time-saving game state is set. It is included and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, the high-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is a spec specification command that is transmitted when the spec specification command is transmitted at the 96th to 99th special symbol changes after the high-probability time-saving game state is set. It is included in the sub-control board 300 and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, every time the 96th to 99th special symbol changes are started after the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the high-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before specification information is included in the spec specification command, and the sub-control board 300 Will be sent to. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs during the 96th to 99th special symbol changes after the high probability time saving game state is set, the high probability time saving end predetermined number of times before the specified information is specified at the time of returning to the power failure. It is included in the designated command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed by the 96th to 99th winning / losing lottery after the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the opening process starts, the round game starts, and the ending process is performed. At the start time and the like, the high-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(8) High-probability time-saving final designation information The high-probability time-saving final designation information is the change of the 100th special symbol after the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set (that is, the final change of the high-probability time-saving gaming state). It indicates that there is).
The high-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the game state change designation command transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time elapses in the 99th change after the high-probability time-saving game state is set. It is designed to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, the high-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec-designating command transmitted when the spec-designating command is transmitted in the 100th change of the special symbol after the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and is sub-controlled. It is designed to be transmitted to the board 300. For example, at the time when the 100th change of the special symbol is started after the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the high-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs during the 100th change of the special symbol after the high probability time saving game state is set, the high probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec specification command at the time of returning from the power failure. It is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed by the 100th winning / losing lottery after the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the opening process start time, the round game start time, the ending process start time, etc. In, the high-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(9) First low-probability time-saving pre-arrival designation information The first low-probability time-saving pre-arrival designation information is obtained after the normal game state (normal game state A) or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game. It indicates that the special symbol is changed for the 500th time (that is, it is the change immediately before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set).
For the first low-probability time-saving pre-arrival designation information, the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the 499th change after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game. It is included in the game state change designation command transmitted at the time point, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, when a power failure occurs during the 499th change of the special symbol after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game, the first low-probability time-saving time is reduced at the time of recovery from the power failure. The pre-arrival designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, if a big hit is won by the 499th win / fail lottery after the normal game state or the second low probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game and the special game is executed, the round at the start of the opening process. At the start time of the game, the start time of the ending process, etc., the first low-probability time reduction pre-arrival designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(10) First low-probability time-saving designation information The first low-probability time-saving designation information indicates that the special symbol changes from the first time to the 595th time after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.
The first low-probability time-saving designation information is the 500th change after the normal game state is set after the RAM is cleared, or the 500th time since the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game. The special symbol is included in the game state change designation command transmitted when the stop display time has elapsed, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Further, the first low-probability time-saving designation information is a spec-designating command transmitted when the spec-designating command is transmitted in the first to 595th special symbol changes after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It is included in the sub-control board 300 and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, every time the first to 595th special symbol change is started after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving designation information is included in the spec designation command, and the sub-control board 300 Will be sent to. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs during the first to 595th special symbol change after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving designation information is specified at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is included in the designated command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed by the first to 595th winning / failing lottery after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the opening process starts, the round game starts, and the ending. At the start of processing or the like, the first low-probability time-saving designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(11) First low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of pre-designated information The first low-probability time-reduced end predetermined number of pre-designated information is the 596th to 599th change of the special symbol after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It indicates that there is (that is, the change is 4 times before, 3 times before, 2 times before, or 1 time before from the last change of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state).
The first low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time elapses in the 595th change after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. It is included in the change designation command and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Further, the first low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times advance designation information is transmitted when the spec designation command is transmitted at the 596th to 599th special symbol changes after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It is included in the spec specification command and sent to the sub-control board 300. For example, every time the 596th to 599th special symbol changes are started after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the specification information before the predetermined number of times before the end of the first low-probability time-saving is included in the spec specification command. It is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs during the 596th to 599th special symbol changes after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving end is set a predetermined number of times before the power failure is restored. The designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed by the 596th to 599th winning / failing lottery after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the opening process starts, the round game starts, and the ending. At the start time of the process or the like, the first low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(12) First low-probability time-saving final designation information The first low-probability time-saving final designation information is the change of the 600th special symbol after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (that is, the first low-probability time-saving final designation information). It indicates that it is the last change in the time-saving game state).
The first low-probability time-saving final designation information is a game state change designation command transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the 599th change after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. It is included in the sub-control board 300 and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, the first low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec-designating command transmitted when the spec-designating command is transmitted in the 600th special symbol change after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. It is designed to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, at the time when the 600th special symbol change is started after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec specification command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Will be done. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs during the 600th change of the special symbol after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving final designation information is a spec specification command at the time of recovery from the power failure. And transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed by the 600th winning / losing lottery after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the opening process starts, the round game starts, and the ending process starts. At a time point or the like, the first low-probability time-saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(13) Normal B designated information The normal B designated information is in the normal gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as the normal gaming state B) set after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is completed without winning the jackpot. Is shown.
Normally, the B designation information is that the 600th variation reached without winning the jackpot after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (that is, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state ends without winning the jackpot). The special symbol is stopped and displayed, and is included in the game state change designation command transmitted when the stop display time has elapsed, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Further, the normal B designation information is included in the spec designation command transmitted when the spec designation command is transmitted during the normal game state B, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. For example, every time the change of the special symbol is started in the normal game state B, the normal B designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs during the normal game state B, the normal B designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the time of recovery from the power failure. Further, for example, when a big hit is won and a special game is executed during the normal game state B, the normal B designation information is specified at the start time of the opening process, the start time of the round game, the start time of the ending process, and the like. It is included in the designated command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the above-mentioned game state designation information according to the set game state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, etc. is stored in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100. When the data is stored in the area and a power failure occurs, the stored data of the main RAM 103 including the above-mentioned game state designation information is backed up. As a result, the above-mentioned game state designation information according to the game state set before the occurrence of the power failure, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the like can be acquired at the time of recovery from the power failure and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Then, when the sub CPU 301 receives the game state designation information, the sub CPU 301 stores the received game state designation information in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303 in the sub control board 300.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, at each of the above-mentioned time points, the gaming state designation information according to the set gaming state, the number of changes in the special symbol, and the like is provided in the sub-control board 300. Since it is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, it is possible to grasp the gaming state set at each of the above-mentioned time points, the number of changes in the special symbol since the gaming state is set, and the like, and the gaming state. It is possible to perform an effect according to the number of changes in the special symbol and the number of changes.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, at the time of recovery from the power failure (when the power of the pachinko machine P is turned on from off), the game state designation information before the power failure occurs is the sub-control board 300. Will be sent to.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, for example, when an unexpected power failure occurs in the pachinko machine P due to a lightning strike or the like, the stored data of the main RAM 103 in the main control board 100 is backed up, but the sub-control The storage data of the sub RAM 303 on the board 300 is not backed up. Therefore, when the sub-control board 300 is reset due to the above-mentioned power failure, the stored data of the sub-RAM 303 in the sub-control board 300 is cleared. Then, as described above, the game state designation information stored in the sub RAM 303 is also cleared. Further, since the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can communicate from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300 in one direction, the main control board 300 is reset to the sub control board 300. I can't figure out what I did. Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the main CPU 101 transmits the game state designation information stored in the main RAM 103 to the sub control board 300 at the time of recovery from the power failure, so that the sub control board 300 , It is possible to grasp the game state designation information before the power failure occurs. As a result, even when a power failure occurs, it is possible to re-execute the effect according to the game state set before the power failure occurred.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the first setting is made when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set reaches the number of time-saving activations. Low probability During the time-saving game state (that is, during the time-saving game state set without winning the jackpot and executing the special game), and after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the second low probability is set. During the time-saving game state (that is, during the time-saving game state set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game), the game state designation information corresponding to each time-saving game state is defined.
Therefore, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, is the time-saving game state set in the sub-control board 300 set without the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game (that is,)? , Is it the first low-probability time-saving game state), or is it set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game (that is, is it the second low-probability time-saving game state)? It is possible to execute the production according to each time-saving game state.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, when the stop display time in the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation in which the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set has elapsed, the main CPU 101 determines the following. The first low-probability time-saving pre-arrival designation information indicating that the fluctuation is the fluctuation immediately before the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
As a result, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, data of the effect to be executed at the time when the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set can be prepared before the time. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is given a sense of discomfort regarding the progress of the production, such as sudden switching of the production content at that time point.

(Summary of transmission of various times)
The main CPU 101 of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 has numerical information regarding various times such as the number of times of time reduction and the number of times of time reduction at the time of setting each of the above-mentioned gaming states and the time of starting counting by the time reduction activation number counter. (Numerical data) is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

Specifically, the main CPU 101 is the number of time reductions in the second low-probability time-saving game state at the time of setting the second low-probability time-saving game state (that is, the end time of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1). The numerical information "100 times" is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Further, the main CPU 101 is referred to as "100 times", which is a high probability number of times in the high-probability time-saving game state at the time of setting the high-probability time-saving game state (that is, the end time of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3). Numerical information and numerical information of "100 times", which is the number of time reductions, are transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Further, the main CPU 101 is the first at the start of counting by the time reduction activation number counter (that is, at the time when the RAM is cleared, or when the normal game state or the second low probability time reduction game state is set after the end of the special game). Numerical information of "500 times", which is the number of times of short-time activation in the low-probability time-saving game state, is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Further, the main CPU 101 has a time saving in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state at the time when the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (that is, when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number (500 times)). Numerical information of "600 times", which is the number of times, is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

Here, although not particularly shown, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the numerical information corresponding to the above-mentioned various times is the number data A which is 1 byte (8 bits) binary data. And it is composed (expressed) by the number of times data B.
Specifically, both the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B are "0000000b" (0 in decimal. The number with "b" at the end is 2 by the lower 7 bits excluding the upper 1 bit. Numerical notation. The same shall apply hereinafter) to "1111111b" (127 in decimal). The lower 7 bits of the number-of-times data A are the remainder values obtained by dividing the above-mentioned various numbers of times by "128", which is the maximum value "127" (decimal number) that can be expressed by a 7-bit binary number and 1 is added. The lower 7 bits of the number-of-times data B are quotient values obtained by dividing the above-mentioned various number-of-times values by the above-mentioned "128".
The main CPU 101 transmits the number-of-times data A configured as described above to the sub-control board 300 at various time points described above, and then transmits the number-of-times data B configured as described above to the sub-control board 300. Then, when the sub CPU 301 receives the number of times data A and the number of times data B, the sub CPU 301 is the product of the value of the lower 7 bits of the number of times data B received later and the above-mentioned "128", and is lower than the number of times data A received earlier. By adding the 7-bit values, the corresponding number of times can be calculated. As a result, the sub-control board 300 can grasp the above-mentioned various times.

For example, if the number of time reductions in the second low-probability time-saving game state is "100 times", the quotient obtained by dividing this "100 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "0", and the remainder is "100". Therefore, in the number of times data A corresponding to this time reduction number of times "100 times", the lower 7 bits are "1100100b" (decimal number 100), and in the number of times data B, the lower 7 bits are "0000000b" (decimal number 0). Will be.
Then, at the time of setting the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 transmits the number-of-times data A in which the lower 7 bits are "1100100b" to the sub-control board 300, and then the lower 7 bits are the number-of-times data B in which the lower 7 bits are "00000000b". Is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
When the sub CPU 301 receives the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B, the number-of-times data A is added to "0", which is the product of the lower 7 bits "0000000b" (decimal number 0) of the number-of-times data B and the above-mentioned "128". By adding the lower 7 bits "1100100b" (100 in decimal), it is possible to calculate "100 times" which is the number of time reductions in the second low probability time reduction game state. As a result, on the sub-control board 300, it is possible to acquire the numerical information of "100 times", which is the number of times of time reduction, at the time of setting the second low-probability time-saving game state.

Further, for example, if the number of times of time saving activation in the first low probability time saving game state is "500 times", the quotient obtained by dividing this "500 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "3" and the remainder is "116". .. Therefore, in the number-of-times data A corresponding to the time-saving activation number of "500 times", the lower 7 bits are "1110100b" (116 in decimal), and in the number-of-times data B, the lower 7 bits are "00000011b" (3 in decimal). ).
Then, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A in which the lower 7 bits are "1110100b" to the sub-control board 300 at the start of counting by the time saving activation number counter, and then the lower 7 bits transmit the number data B in which the lower 7 bits are "00000011b". It is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
When the sub CPU 301 receives the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B, the number-of-times data A is added to "384", which is the product of the lower 7 bits "00000011b" (decimal number 3) of the number-of-times data B and the above-mentioned "128". By adding the lower 7 bits "1110100b" (116 in decimal), it is possible to calculate "500 times", which is the number of times of time saving activation in the first low probability time saving game state. As a result, on the sub-control board 300, it is possible to acquire the numerical information of "500 times", which is the number of times of time reduction activation, at the start of counting by the time reduction activation number counter.

Further, for example, if the number of time reductions in the first low-probability time-saving game state is "600 times", the quotient obtained by dividing this "600 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "4" and the remainder is "88". Therefore, in the number-of-times data A corresponding to the time-saving number of times "600 times", the lower 7 bits are "1011000b" (88 in decimal), and in the number-of-times data B, the lower 7 bits are "0000100b" (4 in decimal). Will be.
Then, at the time of setting the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 transmits the number-of-times data A in which the lower 7 bits are "1011000b" to the sub-control board 300, and then the lower 7 bits are the number-of-times data B in which the lower 7 bits are "0000100b". Is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
When the sub CPU 301 receives the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B, the number-of-times data A is added to "512", which is the product of the lower 7 bits "0000100b" (decimal number 4) of the number-of-times data B and the above-mentioned "128". By adding the value "1011000b" (88 in decimal) of the lower 7 bits of, it is possible to calculate "600 times" which is the number of time reductions in the first low probability time reduction game state. As a result, the sub-control board 300 can acquire the numerical information of "600 times", which is the number of times of time reduction, at the time of setting the first low-probability time-saving game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, various times such as the number of times of time reduction and the number of times of activation of the time reduction can be expressed by a binary number of a plurality of bits (7 bits in the other application example 6). The number-of-times data A including the remainder value divided by one larger than the value and the number-of-times data B including the quotient value are transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data received by the sub-control board 300. The above-mentioned number of times can be calculated based on B.
As a result, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the number of data to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 is reduced even when various times such as the number of times of time reduction and the number of times of activation of time reduction become large values. While doing so, the above number of times can be transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, after the number-of-times data A including the above-mentioned remainder value is sent, the number-of-times data B including the above-mentioned quotient value is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. ing.
As a result, for example, in a pachinko machine, when various times such as the number of times of time reduction and the number of times of activation of time reduction are set to be equal to or less than the maximum value that can be expressed by the binary numbers of the plurality of bits described above, the number of times data B Since the value of the quotient included in is always 0, the above-mentioned number of times can be calculated based only on the number of times data A previously transmitted. Therefore, in the above case, the calculation process of the above-mentioned number of times on the sub-control board 300 can be simplified.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the first setting is made when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the normal gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set reaches the number of time-saving activations. The number of time reductions in the low-probability time-saving game state (that is, the time-saving game state set without winning the jackpot and executing the special game), and the second set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. Regardless of the number of time reductions in the low-probability time-saving game state (that is, the time-saving game state set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game), the data configured in a predetermined format (number data A, By transmitting the number of times data B) to the sub-control board 300, the sub-control board 300 can acquire (understand) the above-mentioned time saving number based on the data.
Therefore, in the sub-control board 300, by executing the same process, the number of time reductions in the time-saving game state set without the execution of the jackpot winning and the special game, and the execution of the jackpot winning and the special game It is possible to acquire any of the time reduction times of the time reduction game state set via the above, and it is possible to prevent the acquisition process from becoming complicated.

Next, the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game will be described with reference to the flowchart, focusing on the points different from the above-described embodiment.
First, the post-stop processing executed after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time for stopping and displaying the special symbol is set in the stop display time timer counter will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72.
In step 3000, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 3001.
In step 3001, the main CPU 101 stores the current gaming state in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3002.

In step 3002, the main CPU 101 executes the time saving number update process. Since this time reduction number update process is the same as the time reduction number update process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3003.
In step 3003, the main CPU 101 executes the high-accuracy number-of-time update process. Since this high-accuracy number update process is the same as the high-accuracy number update process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3004.

In step 3004, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a jackpot symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 3009. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 3005.
In step 3005, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot winning command for transmitting the game state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of jackpot symbol (big hit symbols X1, X2, X3) displayed as a stop to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3006.

In step 3006, the main CPU 101 resets the current gaming state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3007.
In step 3007, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and issues an opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. Remember in. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3008.

In step 3008, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "5" as the number of rounds if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X1 or X2, and sets the number of rounds as the number of rounds if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X3. Set "10". Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 3009, which proceeds when it is determined that the special symbol stopped and displayed in step 3004 is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation count execution process for counting by the time-saving activation count counter. do. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3010.
In step 3010, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability time-saving gaming state is finished. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second time-saving game flag is turned from on to off in the above-mentioned step 3002, and the high-probability game flag is turned from on to off in the above-mentioned step 3003. Then, if it is determined that it is not the time when the high-probability time-saving gaming state is finished, the process proceeds to step 3012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high-probability time-saving gaming state has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 3011.

In step 3011, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation number counter to "500". Further, the main CPU 101 transmits the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B corresponding to the time-saving activation number of times "500" to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3012.
In step 3012, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game state designation information transmitted to the sub-control board 300 is changed at that time, and if it is determined that the game state designation information is changed, after the change. The game state change specification command including the game state specification information of is stored in the transmission data storage area for production. If it is determined that the game state designation information is not changed, the main CPU 101 does not execute anything here. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the time-saving activation number count execution process in step 3010 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.
In step 3100, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high probability game flag is off. Then, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is not off (that is, it is on), the time saving activation number count execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability game flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 3101.

In step 3101, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving activation number arrival flag indicating that the count value of the time-saving activation number counter has reached the time-saving activation number is off. Then, when it is determined that the time saving activation number arrival flag is not off (that is, it is on), the time saving activation number count execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving activation number arrival flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 3102.
In step 3102, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time saving activation number counter by one. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3103.

In step 3103, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the count value of the time saving activation number counter has reached 0. Then, when it is determined that the time has not been reached, the time saving activation count execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the item has been reached, the process proceeds to the next step 3104.
In step 3104, the main CPU 101 executes the first low-probability time-saving game state setting process for setting the first low-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time saving game flag and sets "600" to the number of time saving games. When the number of time-saving activations is reached, the normal game state is set, and the high-probability game flag is off. This high probability game flag remains off. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B corresponding to the time-saving number of times "600" in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3105.

In step 3105, the main CPU 101 resets (clears zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3106.
In step 3106, the main CPU 101 turns on the time saving activation number arrival flag. Then, the time-saving activation count execution process is terminated.

Next, the special game end process executed when the special game is completed will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74.
In step 3200, the main CPU 101 confirms the jackpot symbol (stored in the processing area of the main RAM 103) that triggered the execution of the completed special game, and determines the game state after the end of the special game according to the above-mentioned jackpot symbol. Execute the game state setting process to be set.
Specifically, when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is X1 (that is, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set), the main CPU 101 turns off the high-probability game flag and turns off the second time-saving game. Turn on the flag and set "100" to the number of time reductions. Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is X2 or X3 (that is, when a high probability time saving game state is set), both the high probability game flag and the second time saving game flag are turned on, and the high probability number of times is set. And set "100" to the number of time reductions.
Further, when the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B corresponding to the high-probability number of times "100" to the sub-control board 300, and the time-saving number of times "100". The number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B corresponding to the above are transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B corresponding to the time-saving number of times "100" are transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3201.

In step 3201, the main CPU 101 stores the game state set in step 3200 described above and the special post-game game state designation command including the corresponding game state designation information in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3202.
In step 3202, the main CPU 101 resets (clears zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3203.

In step 3203, the main CPU 101 turns off the time saving activation number arrival flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3204.
In step 3204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set in step 3200 described above. Specifically, in step 3200 described above, it is determined whether or not the high accuracy flag is off and the second time saving game flag is on. Then, when it is determined that the second low-probability time-saving game state is not set, the special game end process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second low-probability time-saving gaming state has been set, the process proceeds to the next step 3205.

In step 3205, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation number counter to "500". Further, the main CPU 101 transmits the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B corresponding to the time-saving activation number of times "500" to the sub-control board 300. Then, the special game end process is terminated.

Next, the RAM clearing process executed based on the RAM clearing (reset) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 3300, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process for setting a normal game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns off all of the high-probability game flag, the first time-saving game flag, and the second time-saving game flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3301.
In step 3301, the main CPU 101 resets (clears zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3302.

In step 3302, the main CPU 101 turns off the time saving activation number arrival flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 3303.
In step 3303, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation number counter to "500". Further, the main CPU 101 transmits the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B corresponding to the time-saving activation number of times "500" to the sub-control board 300. Then, the post-processing after clearing the RAM is completed.

Next, the process at the time of transmission of the spec specification command, which is executed at the time of transmission of the spec specification command, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 3400, the main CPU 101 stores the model information of the pachinko machine P and the spec designation command including the corresponding game state designation information in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the processing at the time of transmission of the spec specification command is terminated.

(Overview of various displays such as background image display, countdown display of the remaining number of time reductions, countup display of the number of times to activate the time reduction)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, as a background image displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, a normal background image corresponding to a normal gaming state (see FIGS. 77 (d) to 77 (e), etc.). , The first low-probability time-saving background image corresponding to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 77 (i) to (j), etc.), and the second low-probability time-saving background image corresponding to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 77 (i) to 77 (j), etc.). (See FIGS. 77 (a) to (b), etc.), high-probability time-saving background images corresponding to the high-probability time-saving gaming states (see FIGS. 79 (a) to (c), etc.) are provided, and each gaming state is provided. The corresponding background image is displayed on the display unit 21a.

Specifically, a normal background image is displayed during the normal game state, and a second low-probability time-saving background image is set during the second low-probability time-saving game state set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. Is displayed, a high-probability time-saving background image is displayed during the high-probability time-saving game state set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3, and the count value of the time-saving activation count counter is changed to the time-saving activation number. The first low-probability time-saving background image is displayed during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state set by reaching.
Then, when the gaming state is switched, the displayed background image is also switched at the same time (see FIGS. 77 (d), 77 (i), etc.).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, both in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state and in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the predetermined position of the display unit 21a (in the other application example 6, the upper right). An upper display frame for performing a predetermined display is displayed in the corner), and in this upper display frame, each time a special symbol change (variation effect) is performed, a countdown display of the remaining time reduction number is performed. (See FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c), FIGS. 77 (j), 78 (a), etc.). Similarly, during the high-probability time-saving game state, a countdown display of the remaining high-probability number of times (time-saving number of times) is performed for each change (variation effect) of the special symbol in the above-mentioned upper display frame. (See FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c), etc.).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, while the counting by the time saving activation number counter is performed (that is, while the second low probability time saving gaming state and the normal gaming state A are set), A lower display frame for performing a predetermined display is displayed at a predetermined position (lower right corner in another application example 6) of the display unit 21a, and the special symbol changes (variation effect) once in the lower display frame. Each time it is performed, a count-up display of the number of times toward 500 times, which is the number of times of shortening the time, is displayed (FIGS. 77 (a) to (h), FIGS. 79 (d) to (g), (A) to (c) and the like).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving background image is displayed and the first low-probability time-saving game is displayed in the above-mentioned lower display frame. A display indicating that the state is in progress (in another application example 6, the character display of "in lucky time") is performed (FIGS. 77 (i) to (j), FIGS. 78 (a), See FIGS. 79 (h), 80 (d), etc.).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned various indications will be described more specifically.
(1) Display after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 As described above, after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the time-saving activation count counter is used. The count starts.
Then, along with the setting of the second low-probability time-saving game state, the display unit 21a displays the second low-probability time-saving game state and displays that the second low-probability time-saving game state is set (other application examples 6). Then, the initial value of the remaining time reduction times (that is, the time reduction number "100" in the second low probability time reduction game state) in which the characters "Revenge mode start!" Is displayed), the upper display frame is displayed, and the countdown display is performed is displayed. , The lower display frame is displayed, and the initial value (“1”) of the count-up display for the number of times of shortened activation is displayed (see FIG. 77 (a)).

After that, every time the change of the special symbol (variation display) is executed, the countdown display of the remaining time reduction number is performed at the time when the stop display time in the change elapses, and the number of times toward the time reduction activation number is displayed. The count-up display is performed.
Then, if the special symbol is changed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the display of the remaining time reduction count becomes "0" and the display of the number of times toward the time reduction activation count becomes "100" (Fig.). 77 (b)), when the stop display time in the fluctuation has elapsed, the normal gaming state (normal gaming state A) is set. Along with the setting of this normal gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving background image is switched to the normal background image, and a display indicating that the second low-probability time-saving gaming state has ended (in another application example 6, "revenge mode end". ”), Clearing the display of the upper display frame, and clearing the display of the remaining number of time reductions (see FIGS. 77 (c) to 77 (d)). In addition, the count-up display is continuously performed for the number of times to activate the time saving (see FIG. 77 (d)).

After that, every time the change (variation display) of the special symbol is executed, the count-up display of the number of times toward the time reduction activation number is performed at the time when the stop display time in the change elapses (FIG. 77 (e). )-(G)).
Then, if the special symbol is changed 400 times without winning the jackpot, the display of the number of times for the time saving activation number becomes "500" (see FIG. 77 (g)), and the stop display in the change is made. When the time elapses, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Along with the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state, the normal background image is switched to the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the display indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is set (in another application example 6). , "Lucky time start!"), The initial value of the remaining number of time reductions for which the countdown is displayed (that is, the number of time reductions "600" in the first low probability time reduction game state) is displayed, and the countup is displayed. The display of the number of times has been cleared and the display indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress are performed (see FIGS. 77 (h) to 77 (i)).

After that, every time the change of the special symbol (variation display) is executed, the countdown display of the remaining number of time reductions is performed at the time when the stop display time in the change elapses.
Then, if the special symbol is changed 600 times without winning the jackpot, the display of the remaining time reduction number becomes "0" (see FIG. 77 (j)), and when the stop display time in the change elapses. , The normal gaming state (normal gaming state B) is set. Along with the setting of this normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving background image is switched to the normal background image, and a display indicating that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state has ended (in another application example 6, "lucky time ends". ”), The display of the lower display frame is cleared, and the display indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress is cleared (see FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (b)).

Since the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set once, after the above-mentioned normal gaming state (normal gaming state B) is set, the counting by the time-saving activation number counter is not performed. Therefore, until the next big hit is won, the lower display frame is not displayed and the count-up display of the number of times toward the number of time-saving activations is not performed (see FIG. 78 (c)). ..

(2) Display after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 As described above, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3. As described above, during the high-probability time-saving game state, the counting by the time-saving activation number counter is not performed.
Then, along with the setting of the high-probability time-saving game state, the display unit 21a displays the high-probability time-saving background image and the display indicating that the high-probability time-saving game state is set (in another application example 6, "super mode start". The initial value of the remaining high-probability and time-saving times for which the upper display frame is displayed and the countdown display is performed (that is, the high-probability and time-saving times in the high-probability time-saving game state "100"). Is displayed (see FIG. 79 (a)). Since the counting by the time saving activation number counter is not performed, the lower display frame is not displayed and the initial value of the count-up display for the time saving activation number is not displayed at this point (FIG. 79 (Fig. 79). a) See)

After that, every time the change of the special symbol (variation display) is executed, the countdown display of the remaining number of time reductions is performed at the time when the stop display time in the change elapses.
Then, if the special symbol is changed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the display of the remaining high-accuracy number and time reduction number becomes "0" (see FIG. 79 (b)), and the stop display time in the change becomes "0". After that, the normal gaming state (normal gaming state A) is set. Along with the setting of this normal game state, the high-probability time-saving background image is switched to the normal background image, and a display indicating that the high-probability time-saving game state has ended (in other application example 6, the character display "super mode end" is displayed. ), The display of the upper display frame is cleared, and the display of the remaining number of time reductions is cleared (see FIGS. 77 (c) to 77 (d)). In addition, since the count by the time reduction activation number counter is started by setting the normal game state, the initial value of the display of the lower display frame and the count-up display toward the time reduction activation number (“1”). Is displayed (see FIG. 79 (d)).

After that, every time the change (variation display) of the special symbol is executed, the count-up display of the number of times toward the time reduction activation number is performed at the time when the stop display time in the change elapses (FIG. 79 (e). )-(F)).
Then, if the special symbol is changed 500 times without winning the jackpot, the display of the number of times for the time saving activation number becomes "500" (see FIG. 79 (f)), and the stop display in the change is made. When the time elapses, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Along with the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state, the fact that the normal background image is switched to the first low-probability time-saving background image and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set is set in the same manner as in (1) above. The display indicating, the display of the initial value (“600”) of the remaining time reduction times when the countdown display is performed, the display of the number of times when the countup display was performed are cleared, and the first low probability time reduction game state is in progress. Is displayed (see FIGS. 79 (g) to 79 (h)).
Further, since the subsequent display flow is the same as that in (1) above, the description thereof is omitted.

(3) Display after clearing the RAM As described above, after clearing the RAM, the normal gaming state (normal gaming state A) is set, and counting by the time saving activation number counter is started.
Then, along with the setting of the normal gaming state, the display unit 21a displays the normal background image, the display of the lower display frame, and the initial value (“1”) of the count-up display for the number of times of shortened activation. It is done (see FIG. 80 (a)).

After that, every time the change of the special symbol (variation display) is executed, the countdown display of the remaining time reduction number is performed at the time when the stop display time in the change elapses, and the number of times toward the time reduction activation number is displayed. The count-up display is performed.
Then, if the special symbol is changed 500 times without winning the jackpot, the display of the number of times toward the number of time-saving activations becomes "500" (see FIG. 80 (b)), and the stop display time in the change. After that, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. With the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state, the normal background image is switched to the first low-probability time-saving background image and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the same manner as in (1) and (2) above. Display indicating that it has been done, displaying the initial value of the remaining time saving number of times that the countdown display is performed, clearing the display of the number of times that the countup display was performed, and indicating that the first low probability time saving game state is in progress. The display is shown (see FIGS. 80 (c) to 80 (d)).
Further, since the subsequent display flow is the same as that in (1) above, the description thereof is omitted.

(Summary of the above display after recovery from power failure)
As described above, for example, when an unexpected power failure occurs in the pachinko machine P due to a lightning strike or the like, the game state designation information stored in the sub RAM 303 is cleared. However, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the gaming state designation information backed up by the main control board 100 at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is transmitted to the sub control board 300 at the time of recovery from the power failure. As a result, based on the above-mentioned game state designation information received, the predetermined display that was executed before the occurrence of the power failure can be executed even after the power failure is restored.

For example, if the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set before the power failure occurs, the second low-probability time-saving game state stored from the main control board 100 before the power failure occurs at the time of recovery from the power failure. Game state designation information such as low-probability time-saving designation information, second low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information, and second low-probability time-saving final designation information is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. As a result, in the sub-control board 300, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state set before the occurrence of the power failure is the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, so that the second low-probability time-saving background image is displayed as the background image. At the same time, the upper display frame can be displayed, the lower display frame can be displayed, and the like.

Further, when the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set before the occurrence of the power failure, the first stored from the main control board 100 before the occurrence of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. Game state designation information such as low-probability time-saving designation information, first low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before designation information, and first low-probability time-saving final designation information is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. As a result, in the sub-control board 300, since it is possible to grasp that the gaming state set before the occurrence of the power failure is the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving background image is displayed as the background image. At the same time, the upper display frame can be displayed, the lower display frame can be displayed, and the display indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress (character display of "lucky time") and the like can be performed.

If the normal gaming state A is set before the power failure occurs, the normal A designation information stored from the main control board 100 before the power failure occurs at the time of recovery from the power failure. The game state designation information is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. As a result, in the sub-control board 300, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state set before the occurrence of the power failure is the normal gaming state A, so that the normal background image is displayed as the background image and the lower display frame is displayed. And so on.

If the normal gaming state B is set before the power failure occurs, the normal B designation information stored from the main control board 100 before the power failure occurs at the time of recovery from the power failure. The game state designation information is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. As a result, in the sub-control board 300, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state set before the occurrence of the power failure is the normal gaming state B, so that the normal background image is displayed as the background image and the display of the lower display frame is displayed. You can avoid doing it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, when the power failure is restored, the game state designation information stored before the power failure occurs is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the game state designation information is used as the game state designation information. Based on this, it is possible to display a background image or the like.
That is, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, various displays according to the gaming state set before the occurrence of the power failure can be reliably restarted after the power failure is restored, so that the power failure can be reliably resumed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which an inappropriate effect is executed when it occurs.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, at the time of recovery from the power failure, the remaining number of time reductions and the count value of the time reduction activation number counter before the occurrence of the power failure are transmitted to the sub-control board 300. It is designed not to be sent. Therefore, in the sub-control board 300, these values cannot be grasped and accurate display cannot be performed.
Therefore, although not particularly shown, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, a power failure occurs in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, or the high-probability time-saving gaming state. After recovering from the power failure, the upper display frame is displayed, but in this upper display frame, a specific display (for example, "?" Mark display or "0") that cannot recall the exact number of times is displayed. Display, etc.) is to be performed. Similarly, a power failure occurs in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, or the normal game state A, and after recovering from this power failure, the lower display frame is displayed, but this lower part. The above-mentioned display is performed in the display frame.
This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player misidentifies the remaining number of time reductions, the number of remaining time reductions, and the like.

At the time of recovery from the power failure, the remaining number of time reductions before the power failure and the count value of the time reduction activation number counter are set to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the accurate number of times is displayed after the power failure is restored. It may be possible to execute it.

(Modification example of pachinko machine P according to other application example 6)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, one gate 20 is provided only in the second gaming area 12b, but the installation position and the number of the gates 20 are not limited to this.
For example, one gate 20 may be provided in the first game area 12a, or one gate 20 may be provided in each of the first game area 12a and the second game area 12b.
In this case, even when the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, the lottery of the normal symbol is obtained, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.
In addition, almost all of the game balls that entered the second game area 12b and did not enter the second start winning opening 16 and the large winning opening 18 can enter the second game area 12b. When a game ball enters, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be paid out, and a normal symbol operation winning opening may be provided so that a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed.
In this case, for example, if the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b during the non-time saving game state, the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening 16, but the normal drawing operation prize is won. A game ball enters the mouth, which gives an opportunity to pay out the game ball and execute a lottery of ordinary symbols, which can enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) set when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number. , It was supposed to win in the lottery of the normal symbol with the same probability as in the non-short-time game state, but it is not limited to this, and it is higher in the first short-time game state than in the non-time-short game state. You may set it so that it will be a hit in the lottery of ordinary symbols with a probability.
Further, in the first time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is higher than in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be shorter, and the movable piece 16b is operated. By setting at least one of the settings for increasing the time, it may be possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the time-saving game state (second) set as the time-saving game state through the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3) and the execution of the special game. Time-saving game (time-saving game state) and low-probability game state (normal game state, second low-probability time-saving game state) are set by the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning a big hit. Although the state (first time-saving game state) is provided, the type of the time-saving game state is not limited to these.
For example, a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state (for example, a lost symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state, or a small symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state). A time-saving game state or the like set based on the determination of the winning symbol or the like may be provided.
In addition, in the time-saving game state set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, the time-saving game set by reaching the number of times of activation of the special symbol without winning the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state. The time-saving game state set based on the determination of the state and the special symbol other than the jackpot symbol and which is determined to set the time-saving game state is the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16. The difficulty levels may be set to be different, or the difficulty levels may be set to be the same.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, all 13 types of game state designation information (normal A designation information, second low probability time reduction designation information, second low probability time reduction end predetermined number of times before designation information, second Low probability time saving final designation information, high probability time saving hold designation information, high probability time saving designation information, high probability time saving end predetermined number of times before designation information, high probability time saving final designation information, first low probability time saving before arrival designation information, first low Probability time reduction designation information, first low probability time reduction end predetermined number of times before designation information, first low probability time reduction final designation information, normal B designation information game state designation information) were provided, but other than these game status designation information. May be provided.

For example, in the normal gaming state set after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends, a special fluctuation pattern is determined for a specific period until a predetermined number of fluctuations are made. In the set pachinko machine, as the game state designation information, the specific period designation information indicating that the special symbol is changed in the above-mentioned specific period and the last special symbol change in the above-mentioned specific period are used. The final designation information for a specific period may be provided to indicate the fact.
Further, for example, in a pachinko machine in which it is possible to win a small hit by a winning or losing lottery, and it is stipulated that a time-saving gaming state is set for a predetermined small hit symbol that can be determined when the small hit is won, the game is played. As the state designation information, the small hit time saving designation information and the small hit indicating that the special symbol is changed in the time saving gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as the small hit time saving gaming state) set based on the determination of the small hit symbol described above. A small hit time saving final designation information or the like indicating that the last special symbol is changed in the time saving game state may be provided.
Further, for example, in a pachinko machine in which it is stipulated that a time-saving gaming state is set for a predetermined losing symbol that can be determined in the event of a loss, the gaming state designation information is based on the above-mentioned determination of the lost symbol. Loss time reduction designation information indicating that the special symbol is changed in the time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as lost time-saving gaming state), and loss time reduction indicating that the last special symbol is changed in the losing time-saving gaming state. The final designated information and the like may be provided.
Even when the settings are made in this way, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the game state designation information includes the time when the stop display time has elapsed, the time when the special game ends, and the time when the spec designation command is transmitted (when the customer waiting time has elapsed, the special symbol). At the start of fluctuation, the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the end of the round game, the start of the ending process, the end of the ending process, the RAM clear time, and the power-on time (power-on recovery time). Although it was supposed to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300, the transmission timing of the game state designation information is not limited to these.
For example, in a pachinko machine that can win a small hit by a winning or losing lottery and is set to execute a small hit game when the small hit is won, the small hit game starts at the start of the small hit game. At the end time or the like, the game state designation information may be transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, for example, a setting value associated with a setting related to a ball ejection is provided, and as a mode related to the setting value, a setting value change mode for changing the setting value and a set setting value are confirmed. In a pachinko machine provided with a set value confirmation mode for this purpose, game state designation information is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the time when the set value change mode is terminated, when the set value confirmation mode is terminated, and the like. You may try to do it.
Even when the settings are made in this way, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the number of times composed of the above-mentioned number-of-times data A and number-of-times data B is a high-accuracy number of times, a time-saving number of times, and a time-saving activation number, but is limited to these. It's not something.
For example, there is a pachinko machine that is set to be able to switch the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the special game (hereinafter, also referred to as the special number of times). Alternatively, the special number of times may be configured by the above-mentioned number of times data A and number of times data B.
In addition, for example, as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state, a predetermined event occurs a specific number of times (for example, in a pachinko machine that can win a small hit by a winning / losing lottery, a small hit is won. For pachinko machines in which the number of times reaches a specific number of times, the number of times a predetermined small hit symbol is determined reaches a specific number of times, etc.), the specific number of times is determined by the above-mentioned number of times data A and number of times data B. It may be configured.
Further, for example, the total number of fluctuations based on the first special figure random number and the number of fluctuations based on the second special figure random number reaches the first time saving number, and the number of fluctuations based on the second special figure random number is the second. For pachinko machines set to end the time-saving game state when any of the conditions for reaching the time-saving number of times is satisfied, both the first time-saving number and the second time-saving number of times are both. It may be composed of the above-mentioned random number data A and random number data B.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B are both 1-byte data, and the lower 7 bits of the number-of-times data A are used to set the numerical values of various times to 7. The value of the quotient was constructed by using the lower 7 bits of the number of times data B by constructing the remainder value divided by a value 1 larger than the maximum value that can be expressed by the binary number of the bit. The format is not limited to this.
For example, the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B may both be binary data of 2 bytes or more, and the data sizes of the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B may be set to be different from each other.
Specifically, for example, both the number-of-times data A and the number-of-times data B may be configured as 2-byte data composed of upper 1-byte data and lower 1-byte data. When configured in this way, the type of the data to be transmitted (for example, the number of times data A related to the high probability number of times, the number of times data B related to the high probability number of times, etc.) of the upper 1 byte data is set. The data for specifying may be used, and the lower 1-byte data may be used as the data for specifying the numerical value of the above-mentioned number of times. Thereby, by referring to the data of the upper 1 byte, the type of the number of times specified by the data of the lower 1 byte that follows can be reliably transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Further, not only the number of times data A and the number of times data B, but also other commands and data transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300 (for example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined at the start of fluctuation, a pre-determination process). As described above, the upper 1 byte (type of command or data to be transmitted) also for the pre-judgment command indicating the result of It may be configured as 2-byte data consisting of (things that specify) and lower 1-byte data (things that specify the specific contents of commands and data). As a result, the format of the data transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300 can be standardized, and the processing load related to the reception of the data transmitted from the main control board 100 can be reduced.
Further, when the number-of-times data A, the number-of-times data B, and the like are configured as 2-byte data consisting of the upper 1 byte and the lower 1 byte as described above, the first bit of the upper 1 byte is always a predetermined value (for example, 1). ), And a value different from the predetermined value (for example, 0) may always be set for the first bit of the lower 1 byte. As a result, in the sub-control board 300, by determining the value set in the first bit, it is possible to surely grasp whether the data is the upper 1-byte data or the lower 1-byte data.
The sub-control board 300 has one byte of data continuously received (the previously received data is also referred to as preceding data, and the data received following the preceding data is also referred to as succeeding data). When the values are the same (when the first bit of the preceding data and the first bit of the succeeding data are both predetermined values, the first bit of the preceding data and the first bit of the succeeding data are both different values from the predetermined values. In the case), it is determined that the upper 1-byte or lower 1-byte of the various commands and data configured as described above could not be received due to the generation of noise or the like, and the preceding data described above is discarded or the above-mentioned preceding data is discarded. By discarding the subsequent data of the above, or by discarding both the above-mentioned preceding data and the above-mentioned succeeding data, various processes based on the received data may not be performed.
On the other hand, when the first bit of the preceding data is a predetermined value and the first bit of the succeeding data is a value different from the predetermined value, the upper 1 in the various commands and data configured as described above. It may be determined that the bytes and the lower 1 byte have been appropriately received, and various processes may be performed based on the received data.
The bit for setting the above-mentioned predetermined value or a value different from the predetermined value is not limited to the first bit, and may be another bit.
Further, the bits constituting the above-mentioned remainder value and quotient value may be, for example, the upper 7 bits or 7 bits excluding a predetermined bit (for example, the 4th bit from the first bit).
Further, a plurality of bits other than 7 bits (for example, 5 bits, 8 bits, etc.) may be used to form the above-mentioned remainder value and quotient value. For example, using the lower 5 bits of the number data A, the remainder value obtained by dividing the numerical value of each number of times by a value 1 larger than the maximum value that can be expressed by a 5-bit binary number is constructed, and the lower 5 of the number data B is configured. Bits may be used to construct the quotient value.
Further, the above-mentioned quotient value may be configured by the number-of-times data A, and the above-mentioned remainder value may be configured by the number-of-times data B.
Even in the above case, even if various times such as the number of times of time reduction and the number of times of activation of time reduction become large values, the above number of times is subordinated while reducing the number of data to be transmitted to the sub control board 300. It can be transmitted to the control board 300.
Further, the main CPU 101 backs up information (number of times data A, number of times data B) of the number of times of time saving activation in which the first low probability time saving game state is set and the number of times of time saving in the first low probability time saving game state (number of times data A, number of times data B), etc. Even in the game stopped state where the progress of the game is impossible based on the above, the data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 300. In addition, a set value associated with the setting related to the payout is provided, and as a mode related to the set value, a set value change mode for changing the set value after the progress of the game is disabled, and a game In a pachinko machine provided with a set value confirmation mode for confirming the set value set after the progress of the game is disabled, the main CPU 101 is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state. Information on the number of times of time saving activation and the number of times of time saving in the first low probability time saving game state (number of times data A, number of times data B) is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 even in the set value change mode or the set value confirmation mode. You may try to do it.

(Other application example 7)
The external configuration of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 (configuration of the game board 11 (game area 12), installed devices and members), configuration of control means, progress of the game, various random numbers used in the game, and the like. The various tables are almost the same as the pachinko machine P according to the above-described embodiment, and only the conditions under which the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set and the configuration of the hit / miss random number determination table 110 are carried out. It is different from the pachinko machine P according to the form of.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, a big hit or a small hit is won during the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. Alternatively, the lottery result of any of the losses is determined, and in the case of winning a jackpot, one of the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 similar to the above-described embodiment is determined, and the jackpot is determined. In the case of winning, either the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 similar to the above-described embodiment is determined, and in the case of loss, the lost symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, it is stipulated that the first time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state, time-saving number of times is 50 times) is set for the lost symbol Z2, and during the normal gaming state. When the lost symbol Z2 is determined, the first time-saving game state is set and the state shifts to the first low-probability time-saving game state. If the lost symbol Z2 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state is not reset, and the first low-probability time-saving game state continues. There is. Similarly, when the lost symbol Z2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state continues. There is.
On the other hand, it is not defined for the lost symbol Z1 to set the first time-saving gaming state, and when the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state at the time of the determination is continued. That is, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues, and when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues. Then, when the lost symbol Z1 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state continues.

Further, even during the high-probability short-time game state, the lottery result of either the big hit, the small hit, or the loss is determined, but in the case of the big hit, the above-described embodiment is used. Either the same big hit symbol X1 or X4 is determined, and in the case of a small hit, either the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 similar to the above-described embodiment is determined, and in the case of a loss, the lost symbol is determined. Z1 is to be determined. That is, if a loss occurs during a high-probability time-saving game state, the loss symbol Z2 is not determined.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, the hit / fail random number determination table 110 is used as a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving). Table TL referred to when a game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16 in the game state), and the first starting winning opening 15 in the high probability gaming state (high probability time-saving gaming state). Alternatively, a table TH that is referred to when a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 is provided.
Here, the winning / failing random number determination table 110 of the other application example 7 is determined to be any of the above-mentioned lottery results (big hit winning, small winning winning, loss), and is special according to the determined lottery result. A plurality of numerical ranges in which the types of symbols are defined are set, and the above-mentioned lottery results and special symbols are set according to the numerical ranges to which the acquired random numbers (first special figure random number, second special figure random number) belong. The type of is determined. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, both the result of the winning / failing lottery and the type of the special symbol are determined by the winning / failing random number determination table 110 and the winning / failing random number. Therefore, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 is provided with a special symbol random number and a special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of the special symbol provided in the pachinko machine P according to the above-described embodiment. Not.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 82 (a), according to the table TL, when the hit / miss random number is 0 to 63570, it is determined to be lost, and the lost symbol Z1 is determined to be lost. If it is determined and the winning / failing random number is 63571 to 63963, it is determined to be lost, and if the losing symbol Z2 is determined, and if the winning / failing random number is 63964 to 63965, it is determined to be a big hit. If the jackpot symbol X1 is determined and the winning / failing random number is 63966 to 64147, it is determined that the jackpot is won, and if the jackpot symbol X2 is determined and the winning / failing random number is 64148 to 64225, the jackpot is won. If it is determined to be a winner and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined and the winning / fail random number is 64226 to 64880, it is determined that the small hit is won and the small hit symbol Y1 is determined and the winning / failing random number is 64881 to 65535. If there is, it is determined that the small hit is won, and the small hit symbol Y2 is determined.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 81 (b) and 82 (b), according to the table TH, when the hit / fail random number is 0 to 63570, it is determined to be lost, and the lost symbol Z1 is determined. If the winning / failing random number is 63571 to 64028, it is determined that the jackpot is won, and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. If the winning / failing random number is 64029 to 64225, it is determined that the jackpot is won, and the jackpot is won. When the symbol X4 is determined and the winning / failing random number is 64226 to 64880, it is determined that the small hit is won, and when the small hit symbol Y1 is determined and the winning / failing random number is 64881 to 65535, it is small. It is determined that the winning is won, and the small hit symbol Y2 is determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, the jackpot symbol is determined by the table TH referred to in the high-probability gaming state (that is, it is determined that the jackpot is won). The high-probability jackpot symbol determination numerical range) is wider than the numerical range in which the jackpot symbol is determined by the table TL referenced in the low-probability gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the low-probability jackpot symbol determination numerical range), and is a table. In the TL, the loss symbol Z2 is determined to be a loss in the range corresponding to the difference between the high-probability jackpot symbol determination numerical range and the low-probability jackpot symbol determination numerical range, and the first time-shortening gaming state is set. It is set as a numerical range to be determined.
That is, the numerical range in which the lost symbol Z2 is determined in the table TL is set to switch to the numerical range in which the jackpot symbol is determined in the table TH.
With this configuration, the first short-time gaming state can be determined by effectively using the numerical range in which the jackpot symbol is determined in the high-probability gaming state but the jackpot symbol is not determined in the low-probability gaming state. It is possible to determine the lost symbol that is set to be set, and in the high-probability game state, while preventing the jackpot winning and the transition to the time-saving game state without going through the special game, the low-probability game In the state, it is possible to reliably execute the control in which the jackpot is won and the transition to the time-saving game state without passing through the special game is performed.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, the special symbol random number and the special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of the special symbol are not provided, and only the hit / fail random number and the hit / miss random number determination table 110 are used. It was set to determine the result of the winning / failing lottery and the type of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, as in the above-described embodiment, the special symbol random number and the special symbol random number determination table 111 are provided, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is determined by the winning / failing random number and the winning / failing random number determination table 110, and then the determined winning / failing lottery result. The type of the special symbol may be determined by the special symbol random number and the special symbol random number determination table 111 with reference to. Then, even in this case, the numerical range of the hit / miss random number determination table 110 may be set in the same manner as in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7.

Specifically, in the table TL which is the hit / miss random number determination table 110 referred to in the low probability gaming state, for example, the first numerical range and the second numerical range determined to be lost are determined to be a big hit. In the table TH, which is the winning / failing random number determination table 110 referred to in the high-probability game state by providing a numerical range and a numerical range determined to be a small hit, for example, a first numerical range determined to be lost, A numerical range that is determined to be a big hit and a numerical range that is determined to be a small hit are provided. Then, in the table TL, the range corresponding to the difference between the numerical range determined to be a big hit in the table TH and the numerical range determined to be a big hit in the table TL is defined as the above-mentioned second numerical range. Set.
Further, when the special symbol random number determination table 111 is determined to be lost belonging to the first numerical range, for example, the lost symbol Z1 (first time-saving game state) regardless of the value of the acquired special symbol random number. If a lost symbol (a lost symbol) for which it is not specified to be set is determined and it is determined that the lost symbol belongs to the second numerical range, the lost symbol Z2 (the lost symbol Z2) is determined regardless of the value of the acquired special symbol random number. If it is determined that a big hit is won, one of the big hit symbols X1, X2, X3 or X4 is decided, and the small hit is won. If it is determined that, either the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is set to be determined.
When the above settings are made, the second numerical range determined to be lost in the winning / losing lottery in the low-probability gaming state is switched to the numerical range determined to be a big hit in the winning / losing lottery in the high-probability gaming state. Will be. Then, whenever it is determined that the loss belongs to the second numerical range, the loss symbol Z2 for which the first time-saving gaming state is set is determined. Therefore, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 can be obtained.

As the special symbol random number determination table 111, the type of the starting winning opening into which the game ball has entered (that is, the type of the acquired special symbol random number (first special symbol random number, first) is the same as in the above-described embodiment. (2) A separate table may be provided for each (2 special figure random numbers)) so that different types of special symbols can be determined for each table.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 or the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. The table TL is referred to in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the table TH is referred to in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the hit / miss random number determination table 110 referred to when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in the low-probability time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state, and the second start winning prize. The hit / miss random number determination table 110 referred to when the game ball enters the mouth 16, the hit / miss random number referred to when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. The judgment table 110 is separately provided with a hit / miss random number judgment table 110 that is referred to when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 in a high probability time-saving game state, and the result of the win / loss lottery is provided for each table. And a numerical range to which the type of the special symbol is associated may be set.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, the range corresponding to the difference between the high-accuracy jackpot symbol determination numerical range and the low-accuracy jackpot symbol determination numerical range is determined to be lost in the table TL, and the lost symbol Z2. Was in perfect agreement with the numerical range to be determined, but is not limited to this.
For example, the numerical range determined to be lost in the table TL and the lost symbol Z2 is determined becomes a part of the range corresponding to the difference between the high-accuracy jackpot symbol determination numerical range and the low-accuracy jackpot symbol determination numerical range. May be set to.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, the numerical range in which the lost symbol Z2 is determined in the table TL is limited to the jackpot symbol determined in the table TH. Instead, the small hit symbol may be determined.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 can be obtained.

(Other application example 8)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 has a variation of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15, and a special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16. When both are stored at the same time (holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 and holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16). It is set to process hold at the same time, so-called simultaneous rotation control).

(Outline of the structure in the game area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the general winning opening 14, the first starting winning opening 15, the second starting winning opening 16, the movable piece 16b, as in the above-described embodiment, An attacker device 17, an out port 19, a gate 20, and an effect display device 21 are provided (see FIG. 83). Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, as the second starting winning opening 16, the normal second starting winning opening 16c in which the movable piece 16b is not attached and the specific first one in which the movable piece 16b is provided are provided. Two starting winning openings 16d are provided.
The structure, installation position, and the like of some of these devices and members are different from those of the above-described embodiment.
Hereinafter, the structure of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 in the gaming region 12 will be described focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, as shown in FIG. 83, the first start winning opening 15 is provided at a position slightly lower than the center of the game area 12 (below the effect display device 21). There is. Only the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning opening 15, and the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter the ball.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, as shown in FIG. 83, the gate 20 is provided on the upper right side of the effect display device 21 (the upper part of the second gaming area 12b). Only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through the gate 20. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, almost all the gaming balls that have entered the second gaming area 12b are configured to pass through the gate 20.

As shown in FIG. 83, below the gate 20, a specific second start winning opening 16d and a flat plate-shaped movable piece 16b (ordinary electric accessory) that can be retracted with respect to the game board 11 are arranged side by side. Has been done.
The upper surface of the movable piece 16b is formed so as to be inclined downward from the right end to the left end in a state of protruding from the game board 11. The right end of the movable piece 16b is located directly below the gate 20, and the specific second starting winning opening 16d is arranged on the left side of the left end of the movable piece 16b. Further, the specific second start winning opening 16d has a cup shape that opens upward, and the game ball that has reached the opening enters the specific second starting winning opening 16d.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the game board 11, the upper surface of the movable piece 16b guides the game ball to the opening of the specified second starting winning opening 16d. By functioning as a member, it is possible to enter a gaming ball into the specified second starting winning opening 16d (see FIG. 84 (b)). On the other hand, in the state where the movable piece 16b is immersed in the game board 11, the movable piece 16b cannot guide the game ball to the opening of the specific second start winning opening 16d, and the specific second start winning prize. It is impossible for a game ball to enter the mouth 16d (see FIG. 84 (a)). Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the length from the right end of the movable piece 16b to the specific second start winning opening 16d is the width of the flow passage through which the game ball flows down in the second game area 12b. Since they are substantially the same, in a state where the movable piece 16b is projected, almost all of the gaming balls that have entered the second gaming area 12b and passed through the gate 20 can enter the specific second starting winning opening 16d.

Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the variable display of the normal symbol is started. When the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, after the variation display of the ordinary symbol is executed for a predetermined variation time, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b protrudes for a predetermined operation time. It becomes a state (see FIG. 84 (b)). On the other hand, when the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, and then the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b is a game board. It remains immersed in 11 (see FIG. 84 (a)).
It should be noted that only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the specific second start winning opening 16d, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the specific second start winning opening 16d.

As shown in FIG. 83, an attacker device 17 is provided below the specified second starting winning opening 16d and the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 are not provided in the large winning opening 18.
Only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the large winning opening 18, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the large winning opening 18.
Then, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, after the end of the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot corresponds to. The game state is set.

As shown in FIG. 83, a second start winning opening 16c is usually provided below the attacker device 17. Normally, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second starting winning opening 16c, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball. Then, a game ball that has entered the second game area 12b and has not entered the specific second start winning opening 16d and the large winning opening 18 can normally enter the second starting winning opening 16c.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, when a game ball normally enters the second start winning opening 16c, a predetermined number of game balls (three in the other application example 8) are paid out and specified. When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16d or the first starting winning opening 15, a number of game balls different from the above-mentioned predetermined number (one in another application example 8) is paid out.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 will be described focusing on points different from the above-described embodiments.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the low probability gaming state, which is a gaming state in which the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state are combined, the low probability gaming state, and the first time saving gaming state are combined. One of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as high-probability time-saving), the high-probability time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as high-probability time-saving), which is a gaming state in which the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are combined. The game state of is set.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are the frequencies of the game balls entering the second starting winning opening 16. The difficulty level of the ball, in other words, the frequency of winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16) is set to be different. The details of the specific settings will be described later.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after resetting.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the gaming ball flowing down the first gaming area 12a can enter the first starting winning opening 15, and flows down the second gaming area 12b. The pachinko ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the specific second starting winning opening 16d, enter the large winning opening 18, and normally enter the second starting winning opening 16c.
Then, in principle, the player is to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed) so that the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state. During the low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small hit game, the game ball passes through the gate 20 and the specific second start winning opening 16d or the normal second starting winning opening 16d or the normal second starting winning opening. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the ball enters the 16c and the game ball enters the large winning opening 18.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, it is possible to win a big hit in the winning / losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and the big hit. If you win, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 will be decided. Then, when the gaming state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state), the jackpot winning The probability is set to about 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above-mentioned gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state) is set to about 6/300. ..
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 70/100 (that is, 70%), and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 30/100 (that is, 30%). Further, if the result is lost by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the lost symbol Z1 is determined.
It should be noted that the upper limit number of hold of the first special figure random number (upper limit number of the first hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to four. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 (normally the second starting winning opening 16c, the specific second starting winning opening 16d), a big hit or It is possible to win a small hit, and if a big hit is won, a big hit symbol X3 is determined, and if a small hit is won, a small hit symbol Y1 is determined. Then, when the gaming state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state), the jackpot winning The probability is set to about 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above-mentioned gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state) is set to about 6/300. ..
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the determination probability of the small hit symbol Y1 is set to 100/100 (100%). Further, if the result is lost by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the lost symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 (the upper limit of the number of second hold) is set to four. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the jackpot 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or is large during the special game based on the determination. The round game that ends when any of the conditions of 10 game balls entering the winning opening 18 is satisfied is executed 5 times, and about 500 game balls can be acquired.
Then, as shown in FIG. 85A, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times during the special game based on the determination. It is possible to acquire about 1000 game balls.
Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the small hit is won and the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the large winning opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and the large winning opening 18 is opened. When 10 game balls enter while the game is open, a small hit game is executed in which the large winning opening 18 is closed. During this small hit game, as described above, the large winning opening 18 is opened for only 0.05 seconds, so that it is almost impossible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 18.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the lost symbol Z1 is determined by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number during the normal gaming state. When the first hold number at the time point is less than 2 (0 or 1), "13 seconds fluctuation (variation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to 13 seconds)" or "30 seconds fluctuation (variation of the special symbol)" A fluctuation pattern in which the time is set to 30 seconds) ”is determined. Further, when the first hold number at the above time point is 2 or more, the fluctuation of either "5-second fluctuation (variation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to 5 seconds)" or "30-second fluctuation" The pattern is determined.

In the normal game state, if the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number results in a loss and the lost symbol Z1 is determined, the variation pattern of "13-second variation" is determined.
In the normal game state, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number, and when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined by the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number, the jackpot symbol X3 When is determined, the variation pattern of "120-second variation (variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 120 seconds)" is determined.
In the normal game state, if a small hit is won by a winning / losing lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, "3 seconds variation (variation time of the special symbol is set to 3 seconds). Fluctuation pattern) ”variation pattern is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, when the loss occurs by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the loss symbol Z1 is determined, and the second When the winning / failing lottery based on the special figure random number results in a loss and the lost symbol Z2 is determined, any variation pattern of "5-second variation", "30-second variation", or "60-second variation" is determined. ..
In the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, when the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, or by the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number. When the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined.
In the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, if the small hit is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number and the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" is determined. Will be done.

(Overview of simultaneous rotation control)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the change of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 and the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16. Control to simultaneously change the special symbol based on the sphere, so-called simultaneous rotation control, is executed. Hereinafter, simultaneous rotation control in another application example 8 will be described.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the special game is not executed, and the special symbol variation display is not performed by the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31. In this case, a winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number is possible.
Further, when the variation display of the special symbol is being performed by the first special symbol display device 30 and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed by the second special symbol display device 31, the variation display of the special symbol is performed, based on the second special symbol random number. If the winning / failing lottery is possible and the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the second special symbol display device 31 and the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner by the first special symbol display device 30, the first special symbol is displayed. The winning / failing lottery is possible based on the random numbers in the figure.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 30 and the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 31 are performed at the same time. Then, when the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 30 is completed, if the first special symbol random number is stored, the variation display of the next special symbol is started by the first special symbol display device 30. If the second special symbol random number is stored when the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 31 is completed, the variation display of the next special symbol is started by the second special symbol display device 31. Will be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, when the winning / failing lottery is newly performed based on the second special symbol random number during the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 30, the variation is caused. When the special symbol being displayed is the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 (that is, when the variable display being executed is won by the jackpot lottery that triggers the variable display), a new operation is performed. If a big hit cannot be obtained as a result of the winning or losing lottery and it is determined that the big hit is won, the result of the lottery is set to be forcibly lost. That is, the result of the lottery is lost.
Similarly, when a winning / failing lottery is newly performed based on the first special symbol random number during the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 31, the special symbol being displayed in the variable is the jackpot symbol X3. In that case, it is not possible to win a big hit as a result of a new winning or losing lottery, and if it is determined that a big hit is won, the result of the lottery is set to be forcibly lost. There is. That is, the result of the lottery is a small hit or a loss.
Therefore, for example, when a jackpot is won based on the second special symbol random number and the second special symbol display device 31 is performing variable display of the special symbol (big hit symbol X3) based on the winning of the jackpot, a new one is displayed. If the winning / failing lottery is performed based on the first special figure random number, the result of the lottery will be lost. Further, when the jackpot is won based on the first special symbol random number and the special symbol (big hit symbol X1 or X2) based on the winning of the jackpot is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, a new one is displayed. If a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the second special figure random number, the result of the lottery will be a small win or a loss.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, when the big hit symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, the small hit symbol Y1 is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 31. If it is inside, the small hit symbol Y1 is forcibly changed (rewritten) to the lost symbol Z2, and then the lost symbol Z2 is forcibly stopped.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 30, if the lost symbol Z2 is being displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display device 31, the lost symbol Z2 is displayed. It is designed to be forcibly stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, when the big hit symbol X3 or the small hit symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display device 31, the lost symbol Z1 is displayed in the first special symbol display device 30. When the variable display is in progress, the lost symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped.
Further, when the small hit symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, if the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, the jackpot symbol X1 is displayed. Alternatively, X2 is forcibly changed (rewritten) to the lost symbol Z1, and then the lost symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, when the lost symbol (Z1, Z2) is stopped and displayed on either the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, the jackpot symbol (X1, X2) is displayed on the other. , X3), when the small hit symbol (Y1) or the lost symbol (Z1, Z2) is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the large hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol does not stop and continues. Fluctuating display is performed.

(Outline of Fuzu game)
Next, an outline of the normal drawing game executed by the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the non-time saving gaming state (during the normal gaming state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.2, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds. The operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state) when a hit is made by a normal symbol lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not shown in particular, the settings are similarly set during the special game and the small hit game.
In addition, in the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.2, which is the same as in the non-time-saving game state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state, and 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving game state, when the movable piece 16b is hit by a lottery of normal symbols.
Further, in the second time-saving game state (during the high-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is approximately 1/1, which is higher than in the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state. 1. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortening game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when it is hit by the lottery of the normal symbol is the same as during the first time-shortening game state. It is set to 5 seconds.

That is, during the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state), during the special game or the small hit game, there is a high probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and the movable piece. There are many opportunities for 16b to be in a protruding state. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time from the state in which the movable piece 16b is immersed to the state in which the movable piece 16b is projected (from the protruding state). The interval until the next protruding state is long), but the time for the movable piece 16b to be maintained in the protruding state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time saving game state, the special game, or the small hit game, the movable piece 16b is almost immersed, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b enters the specific second start winning opening 16d. That is almost impossible.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state), the hit is made with the same probability as during the non-time-saving game state, so that the movable piece 16b protrudes as in the non-time-saving game state. There are many opportunities to be in a state of being in a state of being. Further, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is longer than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is in a immersive state. Although the time from the protruding state to the protruding state is short (the interval from the protruding state to the next protruding state is short), the time for the movable piece 16b to be maintained in the protruding state is long. Therefore, during the first short game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in a protruding state, and almost all the game balls that have entered the second game area 12b enter the specific second start winning opening 16d. ..

In addition, during the second time-saving game state (during the high-probability time-saving game state), there is a higher probability of hitting than during the non-time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state, so that the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state. Is extremely large. Further, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortening game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortening game state, the first time-shortening game state. Similar to the inside, the time from the immersed state to the protruding state of the movable piece 16b is short (the interval from the protruding state to the next protruding state is short), but the movable piece 16b is in the protruding state. It takes a long time to be maintained. Therefore, even during the second short game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in a protruding state, and almost all the game balls that have entered the second game area 12b enter the specific second start winning opening 16d. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the probability of winning by lottery of ordinary symbols is extremely high in any of the non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, and the second time saving game state. Although it is set high, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the specific second start winning opening 16d by making the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operating time of the movable piece 16b different (that is, the specific second starting winning opening). The frequency of entering the game ball into 16d, in other words, the frequency of executing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the specific second starting winning opening 16d) is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, unlike the non-time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is maintained in a protruding state, so that the specific second start winning opening 16d is relatively reached. It is easy for game balls to enter. Therefore, during the first time-shortening game state and the second time-saving game state, it is possible to obtain the opportunity of winning / failing lottery while suppressing the decrease of the game balls with the progress of the game, as compared with the non-time-saving game state.

(Outline of the game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, a gaming state of either a normal gaming state, a low-probability time-saving gaming state, or a high-probability time-saving gaming state is set.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), when the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, and the winning / failing based on the second special figure random number. Regardless of whether the jackpot symbol X3 is determined by winning the jackpot by lottery (that is, when the jackpot is won), the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the high probability gaming state. At the same time, by setting the second time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is set. When the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the high-probability number of times and the time-saving number of times are both set to 50 times.
That is, after the end of the special game executed when the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 is determined, the game state is set to the high-probability time-saving game state, and the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the first 2 The number of fluctuations of the special symbol determined based on the 1st special figure random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the 1st special figure) and the 2nd special until the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the special figure random number is derived 50 times in total. The high-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as the second special diagram) determined based on the figure random number reaches 50 times.
Then, during the high-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number are all 50 times other than the big hit (small hit, loss), By changing the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state and changing the second time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state.

If the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined during the above-mentioned high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is set again after the special game based on the determination is completed. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, after the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, the first special drawing without winning a big hit. When the total number of fluctuations of the first special figure and the number of fluctuations of the second special figure reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations (500 times in another application example 8) (that is, in a low-probability gaming state, a winning / losing lottery based on the first special figure random number). (When the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number is all other than the big hit 500 times), the low-probability time-saving game is set by setting the first time-saving game state while keeping the low-probability game state as it is. The state is set. When the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving games is set to 450 times.
After the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the total number of changes in the first special figure and the number of changes in the second special figure reaches 450 times without winning the jackpot (that is, the first special figure). The low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the random number and the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number are derived 450 times in total).
Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number are all 450 times other than the big hit (small hit, loss), By changing the first time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state while keeping the low-probability gaming state as it is, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state.

If the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined during the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving gaming state, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the time-saving activation number counter for counting the number of time-saving activations (500 times) for which the low-probability time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set is set. It is composed of a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of the time reduction activation count counter is that the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, the special game is completed, or the low probability time reduction game state (first time reduction game state) is set. It is set to be reset when any of the reset conditions is satisfied.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), so that counting by the time-saving activation number counter starts from this point.
Further, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3 is completed, the subsequent game state is set to the high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state). Therefore, counting by the time saving activation number counter does not start from the time when the special game ends, and counting by the time saving activation number counter from the time when the high probability time saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is set. Is started.

Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the fluctuation of the first special figure (win / fail lottery based on the first special figure random number) or the change of the second special figure (win / fail lottery based on the second special figure random number) occurs. Each time it is performed, counting is performed by the time-saving activation number counter, and when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set as described above.

As described above, the counting by the time saving activation number counter is started with the setting of the normal gaming state as an opportunity. When counting by the time-saving activation count counter is started with the setting of the normal gaming state as a trigger, the time when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches 500 times of the time-saving activation count (that is, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. The gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on the winning of the big hit, until the next big hit is won, the low probability time-saving gaming state is reached. Can be set only once.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the time-saving activation number (500 times) and the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set again until the next big hit is won. I can't.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter is reset by setting the low probability time saving gaming state, the time saving activation is performed until the next big hit is won. It is set to stop counting by the count counter.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, neither the lost symbol (Z1, Z2) nor the small hit symbol (Y1) is defined to set the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the gaming state is not changed after the lost symbol is stopped, and the gaming state at the time of determining the lost symbol continues. Further, after the end of the small hit game based on the determination of the small hit symbol, the game state at the start of the small hit game continues.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the number of continuous time reduction settings and the number of continuous probability variation settings as in the above-described embodiment are not set, and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined. Is always set to a high-probability time-saving gaming state after the end of the special gaming based on the determination.

(Playability of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, as described above, a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined) and a low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and the first A gaming state that is either a time-saving gaming state (a gaming state that combines a time-saving gaming state) or a high-probability time-saving gaming state (a gaming state that combines a high-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state) is set, and the game progresses. ing.

At the time when the player starts the game, the normal game state is often set. During the normal gaming state, as described above, the launching of the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the gaming ball is launched according to this, the gaming ball is There is a possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 15, and the ball does not enter the second starting winning opening 16 (usually the second starting winning opening 16c, the specific second starting winning opening 16d). Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined (see FIG. 85 (a)). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special game in which five round games are performed is executed, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a special game in which ten round games are performed is executed. Then, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 85 (c)).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, if the left-handed machine is hit as instructed during the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the high-probability time-saving gaming state by winning the jackpot ( See FIG. 87).

During the high-probability short-time game state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than during the normal game state, and it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific second start winning opening 16d. You can win the jackpot more easily while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls as you progress.
During the high-probability short-time game state, if you hit right as instructed, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the 2nd start winning opening 16 (normally the 2nd starting winning opening 16c, the specific 2nd starting winning opening 16d). Extremely expensive. Then, during the high-probability time-saving game state, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and when a big hit is won, the big hit symbol X3 is always determined (FIG. 85). (A)). That is, whenever a big hit is won by a winning or losing lottery based on the second special figure random number, more game balls are acquired than a special game (a special game in which five round games are performed) based on the determination of the big hit symbol X1. A possible special game (a special game in which 10 round games are performed) is executed, and the game state after the end of the special game is set again to the high-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 85 (c)).
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, if the pachinko machine P is hit right as instructed during the high-probability time-saving game state, a relatively advantageous special game is executed by winning the jackpot. At the same time, it becomes possible to shift to the high-probability time-saving gaming state again (see FIG. 87).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, as described above, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special figure, second special figure) is the number of times of shortened activation without winning a big hit during the normal gaming state. When (500 times) is reached (when the number of times of derivation of the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery based on the 1st special figure random number and the 2nd special figure random number reaches the time saving activation number), the subsequent gaming state has a low probability time saving. It is set to the gaming state (see FIG. 85 (c)). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, if the left-handed hit is performed as instructed during the normal game state, the result of the 500 win / fail lottery is all other than the big hit, so that the probability is low. It will shift to the time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 87).

During the low-probability short-time game state, the winning probability of the jackpot is the same as during the normal game state, but it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific second start winning opening 16d than during the normal game state, and the normal game You can get the chance of winning or losing lottery while suppressing the decrease of the game ball with the progress of the game than in the state.
Then, even during the low-probability time-saving game state, as in the high-probability time-saving game state, if the player strikes right as instructed, there is an extremely high possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening 16. Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state, as in the high-probability time-saving game state, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16, and if a big hit is won, the winning / failing lottery is always performed. The jackpot symbol X3 is determined (see FIG. 87).
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, if the pachinko machine P is hit right as instructed during the high-probability time-saving game state, a relatively advantageous special game is executed by winning the jackpot. At the same time, it becomes possible to shift to the high-probability time-saving gaming state again (see FIG. 87).

Here, the low-probability time-saving gaming state set by the result of all the winning / failing lottery 500 times during the low-probability gaming state (during the normal gaming state) is a decrease in the number of game balls as the game progresses. While suppressing, it is possible to execute a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 up to 450 times, and the probability of winning a big hit (execution of a special game in which 10 round games are performed). Because of the high probability, it is an advantageous gaming state for the player.
As described above, if a big hit is won in a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, four round games are performed rather than a special game in which ten round games are performed. It is easy to perform special games, and there is a high possibility that only relatively few game balls can be acquired. Therefore, in the normal game state, if the count value of the time-saving activation number counter is about to reach the time-saving activation number, a big hit is won by a winning / losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15. It is more desirable for the player to set the low-probability time-saving game state by reaching the count value of the time-saving activation number counter without winning the jackpot.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, if a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15 during the normal gaming state, the player is to that effect. (See FIGS. 88 (a) to (d) and 89 (a) to (d)). As a result, when the above suggestion is made, the second gaming area 12b is in the normal gaming state, but until the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 30. It is possible to launch a game ball toward the target and allow the game ball to enter the normal second start winning opening 16c to win a small hit (decision of the small hit symbol Y1).
As described above, when the small hit symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, the big hit symbol X1 or X2 is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30. The jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is forcibly changed to the lost symbol Z1, and then the lost symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped. Therefore, if a small hit can be won and the small hit symbol Y1 can be stopped and displayed by a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 16c during the variable display of the big hit symbol X1 or X2. Since the winning jackpot is canceled and lost, it is possible to avoid winning the jackpot.

Specifically, if a jackpot is won by a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 15 in the normal gaming state, it is suggested that the jackpot is won with the start of the variable effect. A jackpot suggestion image (for example, a character image of "!!!") is displayed (see FIGS. 88 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 89 (a) to (d)).
In the variable effect during the normal gaming state, the variable display of the effect symbol 50 corresponding to the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21. In the lower right corner of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, the effect symbol 50 corresponding to the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 is displayed in a variable manner. (See FIGS. 88 (a) to (e) and FIGS. 89 (a) to (e)).

Then, when the above-mentioned jackpot suggestion image is displayed, the game ball can be launched toward the second game area 12b so that the game ball can normally enter the second start winning opening 16c.
Here, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined during the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of "120-second variation" is determined (FIG. 85 (b)). (See), the first special symbol display device 30 will execute the variable display (variable effect) of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 for 120 seconds. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the normal second start winning opening 16c (second starting winning opening 16) during the normal gaming state and the lost symbol Z2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "13 seconds fluctuation". Is determined (see FIG. 85 (b)), and the variation display (variation effect) of the lost symbol Z2 is executed for 13 seconds on the second special symbol display device 31. Then, during the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16c can be executed up to 9 times. Therefore, if a small hit is won in the above 9 times of winning / failing lottery that can be executed during the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, and the small hit symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed during the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, The determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 (winning of the jackpot in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15) will be cancelled.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30, when the small hit symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is displayed. It is changed to the lost symbol Z1, and the lost symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30. Along with this, in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, the effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed in a mode of notifying the winning of the small hit (for example, a mode in which all the effect symbols 50 are even symbols). At the same time, in the center of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, the effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed in a mode of notifying the loss (see FIGS. 88 (c) to 88 (e)). Further, the jackpot suggestion image is erased (see FIG. 88 (e)).

On the other hand, the small hit symbol Y1 is not stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of 120 seconds elapses, and the big hit symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30. In this case, when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the lost symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31. Along with this, in the center of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, the effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying the winning of the jackpot, and in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21, the effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed. The effect symbol 50 is stopped and displayed in a mode of notifying the loss (see FIGS. 89 (c) to (e)). Further, the jackpot suggestion image is deleted (see FIG. 89 (e)).
When the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, no special display is performed when the second special symbol is being stopped and displayed.

In this way, when the jackpot is won when the number of short-time activations is approaching in the normal game state, the above-mentioned game method is executed, and a winning / fail lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the normal second start winning opening 16c is executed. There is a possibility that the winning of the big hit can be canceled by aiming to win the small hit by. Then, if the winning of the jackpot can be canceled, the count value of the time saving activation number counter will not be cleared, so that it is possible to continue aiming to reach the time saving activation number.
It should be noted that it is not always necessary to execute the above-mentioned game method when a big hit is won in a normal game state. For example, if a jackpot is won in a situation shortly after the count by the time reduction activation count counter is started (a situation far from reaching the time reduction activation count), the jackpot is won without executing the above-mentioned game method. Based on the special game may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3) and the execution of the special game have higher advantages than the normal gaming state. Not only can it be transferred to the probabilistic time-saving game state, but also during the low-probability game state (during the normal game state), all 500 win / fail lottery (1st special figure random number-based win / fail lottery, 2nd) Since the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the special figure random number is other than the big hit (loss, small hit), the low-probability time-saving gaming state with a higher advantage than the normal gaming state without the big hit winning and the execution of the special game. Since it is possible to shift to, it is possible to provide a novel playability and enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, in the second time-saving gaming state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3, the time-saving number of times is less than or equal to the number of times of time-saving activation (50 times). Is set. As a result, for example, even if a gaming state that combines a low-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3, the low-probability gaming state is set. During the gaming state in which the state and the second time-saving gaming state are combined, when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, the second time-saving gaming state being set is changed to a different time-saving gaming state. It is possible to prevent such a situation.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, if a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15 in the normal gaming state, that fact is notified. To. Then, during the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, if a small hit is won in a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 16c and the small hit symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot symbol Y1 is stopped. The symbol X1 or X2 is changed to the lost symbol Z1, and the lost symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the winning of the jackpot can be cancelled. As a result, depending on the progress of the game (for example, the count value of the time reduction activation number counter is about to reach the time reduction activation number), the game ball is usually inserted into the second start winning opening 16c with the aim of winning a small hit. , It is possible to let the player choose whether or not to cancel the winning of the jackpot, and it is possible to provide a novel playability rich in strategy, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

Next, the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game will be described with reference to the flowchart, focusing on the points different from the above-described embodiment.
First, the special symbol variation start processing executed at the start of the variation of the special symbol will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90.
In step 5000, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special figure random number is stored in the storage unit of the second reserved storage area, that is, whether or not the second reserved number counter is "1" or more. .. Then, if it is determined that the second special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 5013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 5001.

In step 5001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation display of the second special figure (special symbol determined based on the second special figure random number) is being displayed. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step 5013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 5002.
In step 5002, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second hold number counter by "1" and executes the shift process of the second hold storage area. Since this shift process is the same as the process of step 804 in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 5003.

In step 5003, the main CPU 101 executes a hit / fail determination process. Since this hit / fail determination process is the same as the hit / fail determination process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5004.
In step 5004, the main CPU 101 executes a second special figure determination process for determining the type of the second special figure. Since this second special symbol determination process is the same as the special symbol determination process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5005.

In step 5005, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special figure determined in step 5004 described above is the jackpot symbol X3. Then, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol X3 is not (that is, the small hit symbol Y1 or the lost symbol Z2), the process proceeds to step 5008. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol X3, the process proceeds to the next step 5006.
In step 5006, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data stored in the first special figure temporary storage area, which will be described later, is related to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, as described above, the first special figure (the special symbol determined based on the first special figure random number) and the second special figure can be variablely displayed at the same time. It has become. Then, at the start of the variable display of the second special figure, the determined second special figure (that is, the second special figure that is stopped and displayed) is stored in the second special figure temporary storage area. Similarly, at the start of the variable display of the first special figure, the determined first special figure (that is, the first special figure that is stopped and displayed) is stored in the first special figure temporary storage area. That is, the first special symbol being variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 30 is stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area, and the second special symbol display device 31 stores the first special symbol in the second special symbol temporary storage area. The second special figure in the variable display is stored.
Therefore, in this step 5006, when the variable display of the jackpot symbol X3 determined as the second symbol is started, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 determined as the first special symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display device 30. It will be determined whether or not the display is variable.
Then, if it is determined that the above data does not relate to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 (that is, it is a lost symbol Z1), the process proceeds to step 5008. On the other hand, if it is determined that the above data relates to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, the process proceeds to the next step 5007.

In step 5007, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data related to the jackpot symbol X3 stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area to the data related to the lost symbol Z2. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in which the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined as the second special symbol. Is forcibly rewritten to the lost symbol Z2 from this jackpot symbol X3.
As described above, after the second special symbol is determined, the determined jackpot symbol X3 is not forcibly rewritten to the lost symbol Z2, but the first special symbol is displayed when the second special symbol is determined. In the device 30, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 determined as the first special symbol is variablely displayed, and when it is determined that the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is variablely displayed, the second special symbol is determined. As a figure, the lost symbol Z2 may be determined without fail.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5008.
In step 5008, the main CPU 101 stores the symbol determination command indicating the second special figure stored in the second special figure temporary storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Specifically, when the second special symbol (big hit symbol X3, small hit symbol Y1 or lost symbol Z2) determined in the above step 5004, or the forced rewriting is performed in the above step 5007, The lost symbol Z2 is stored. As a result, the information related to the second special figure is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variation effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5009.

In step 5009, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process. Since this variation pattern determination process is the same as the variation pattern determination process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5010.
In step 5010, the main CPU 101 sets the variation display data for starting the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 31 is started. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5011.

In step 5011, the main CPU 101 executes the time saving number update process. Since this time reduction number update process is the same as the time reduction number update process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5012.
In step 5012, the main CPU 101 executes the high-accuracy number-of-time update process. Since this high-accuracy number update process is the same as the high-accuracy number update process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5013.

In step 5013, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special figure random number is stored in the storage unit of the first reserved storage area, that is, whether or not the first reserved number counter is "1" or more. .. Then, when it is determined that the first special figure random number is not stored, the fluctuation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 5014.
In step 5014, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation display of the first special figure is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the variation is being displayed, the special symbol variation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 5015.

In step 5015, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first hold number counter by "1" and executes the shift process of the first hold storage area. Since this shift process is the same as the process of step 803 in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step 5016.
In step 5016, the main CPU 101 executes a hit / fail determination process. Since this hit / fail determination process is the same as the hit / fail determination process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5017.

In step 5017, the main CPU 101 executes the first special figure determination process for determining the type of the first special figure. Since this first special symbol determination process is the same as the special symbol determination process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5018.
In step 5018, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special figure determined in step 5017 described above is the jackpot symbol X1 or X2. Then, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol X1 or not X2 (that is, the lost symbol Z1), the process proceeds to step 5021. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, the process proceeds to the next step 5019.

In step 5019, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data stored in the second special figure temporary storage area is related to the jackpot symbol X3. That is, when the main CPU 101 starts the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 determined as the first symbol, the jackpot symbol X3 determined as the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special symbol display device 31. It is determined whether or not it has been done. Then, if it is determined that the above data does not relate to the big hit symbol X3 (that is, it is the small hit symbol Y1 or the lost symbol Z2), the process proceeds to step 5021. On the other hand, if it is determined that the above data relates to the jackpot symbol X3, the process proceeds to the next step 5020.
In step 5020, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data related to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area to the data related to the lost symbol Z1. That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started during the variable display of the second special symbol in which the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined as the first special symbol. Is forcibly rewritten to the lost symbol Z1 from the jackpot symbol X1 or X2.
In addition, after the first special symbol is determined, the determined jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is not forcibly rewritten to the lost symbol Z1, but when the first special symbol is determined, the second special symbol display device 31 , It is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol X3 determined as the second special symbol is variablely displayed, and if it is determined that the jackpot symbol X3 is variablely displayed, the lost symbol Z1 is always displayed as the first special symbol. It may be decided.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5021.

In step 5021, the main CPU 101 stores the symbol determination command indicating the first special figure stored in the first special figure temporary storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Specifically, the first special symbol (big hit symbol X1 or X2, or lost symbol Z1) determined in step 3017 described above, or lost when forced rewriting is performed in step 5020 described above. The symbol Z1 is stored. As a result, the information related to the first special figure is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variation effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5022.
In step 5022, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern processing. Since this variation pattern determination process is the same as the variation pattern determination process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5023.

In step 5023, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol display device 30 is started. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5024.
In step 5024, the main CPU 101 executes the time saving number update process. Since this time reduction number update process is the same as the time reduction number update process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5025.

In step 5025, the main CPU 101 executes the high-accuracy number-of-time update process. Since this high-accuracy number update process is the same as the high-accuracy number update process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Then, the special symbol change start process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91.
In step 5100, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in variable display in the first special symbol display device 30. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step 5106. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 3101.
In step 5101, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the first special figure has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the process has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step 5106. On the other hand, if it is determined that the elapse has passed, the process proceeds to the next step 5102.

In step 5102, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data for stopping and displaying the first special figure stored in the first special figure temporary storage area on the first special symbol display device 30, and sets the stop display data of the first special figure. Execute the stop display. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5103.
In step 5103, the main CPU 101 stores a first special figure stop display command indicating that the first special figure has been stopped and displayed in the transmission data storage area for effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5104.

In step 5104, the main CPU 101 determines the special figure stop display time (hereinafter, also referred to as the first special figure stop display time) for displaying the stop of the first special figure. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5105.
In step 5105, the main CPU 101 sets the first stop display time determined in step 5104 above to the first stop display time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5106.

In step 5106, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol is in the variable display in the second special symbol display device 31. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation display is not in progress, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 5107.
In step 5107, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the second special figure has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the time has not passed, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lapse has passed, the process proceeds to the next step 5108.

In step 5108, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the second special figure stored in the second special figure temporary storage area in the second special symbol display device 31, and stops the second symbol. Perform the display. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5109.
In step 5109, the main CPU 101 stores a second special figure stop display command indicating that the second special figure has been stopped and displayed in the transmission data storage area for effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5110.

In step 5110, the main CPU 101 determines the special figure stop display time (hereinafter, also referred to as the second special figure stop display time) for stopping and displaying the second special figure. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5111.
In step 5111, the main CPU 101 sets the second stop display time of the second special figure determined in step 5110 described above in the second stop display time timer counter. Then, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing executed after the end of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 5200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special figure stop display time set in the first stop display time timer counter in step 5105 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the first special figure stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step 5202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure stop display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 5201.
In step 5201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special figure stop display time set in the second stop display time timer counter in step 5011 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the second special figure stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 5202.

In step 5202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a jackpot symbol. Then, if it is determined that the symbol is not a big hit symbol (that is, it is a small hit symbol or a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 5209. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 5203.
In step 5203, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a special symbol in the variable display, that is, whether or not the other special symbol different from the stop-displayed special symbol is in the variable display. Specifically, when the first special figure stopped and displayed is the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, it is determined whether or not the second special figure is being displayed in a variable manner, and the second special figure stopped and displayed is displayed. When the figure is the jackpot symbol X3, it is determined whether or not the first special figure is being displayed in a variable manner. Then, if it is determined that there is no special symbol in the variable display, the process proceeds to step 5207. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special symbol in the variable display, the process proceeds to the next step 5204.

In step 5204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit symbol. Then, if it is determined that the symbol is not a small hit symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 5206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a small hit symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 5205.

In step 5205, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data related to the small hit symbol during the variable display (that is, the data related to the small hit symbol Y1 stored in the second special figure temporary storage area) to the data related to the lost symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5206.
In step 5206, the main CPU 101 forcibly stops and displays the special symbol in the variable display. Specifically, when the special symbol in the variable display is a lost symbol, the lost symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area or the second special symbol temporary storage area is also used in the above-mentioned step. When rewriting is performed in 5205, the lost symbol stored in the rewritten temporary storage area of the first special figure or the temporary storage area of the second special figure is corresponding to the corresponding special symbol even if the fluctuation time has not elapsed. Display the stop display on the display device. That is, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the lost symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 30 even if the variable time of the first special symbol has not elapsed. .. Further, when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the lost symbol Z2 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31 even if the variable time of the second special symbol has not elapsed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step 5207.

In step 5207, the main CPU 101 turns off the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag (first time-saving game flag, second time-saving game flag). When the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are off, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5208.
In step 5208, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and issues an opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. Remember in. Further, the number of rounds during the special game executed after the opening time has elapsed is set in the round number storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 5209, which proceeds when it is determined in step 5202 that the symbol is not a big hit symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a small hit symbol. Then, if it is determined that the symbol is not a small hit symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 5218. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a small hit symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 5210.
In step 5210, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation number count execution process for counting by the time-saving activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5211.

In step 5211, the main CPU 101 displays whether or not there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is the small hit symbol Y1, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Determine if it is inside. Then, if it is determined that there is no special symbol in the variable display, the process proceeds to step 5216. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special symbol in the variable display, the process proceeds to the next step 5212.
In step 5212, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol in the variable display is a jackpot symbol. Then, if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (that is, it is a lost symbol), the process proceeds to step 5214. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 5213.

In step 5213, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data related to the jackpot symbol during the variable display (that is, the data related to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area) to the data related to the lost symbol Z1. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5214.

In step 5214, the main CPU 101 forcibly stops and displays the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, when the special symbol in the variable display is the lost symbol Z1, the lost symbol Z1 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area is rewritten in step 5213 described above. In this case, the lost symbol Z1 stored in the rewritten temporary storage area of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 even if the fluctuation time has not elapsed. That is, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the lost symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 30 even if the variable time of the first special symbol has not elapsed. .. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5215.

In step 5215, the main CPU 101 executes the time saving activation number count execution process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5216.
In step 5216, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation number count start process for starting counting by the time-saving activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5217.

In step 5217, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time set at the start of the small hit game in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. .. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Further, in step 5218, which proceeds when it is determined in step 5209 that the symbol is not a small hit symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation number count execution process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5219.
In step 5219, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation number count start process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5220.

In step 5220, the main CPU 101 confirms the current game state and stores the game state command in the production transmission data storage area. This game state command includes on / off information of the high probability game flag, on / off information of the time saving game flag (first time saving game flag, second time saving game flag), information on the high probability number of times, and time saving number of times. Information etc. are included. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the time-saving activation number count execution process of step 5210, step 5215, and step 5218 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93.
In step 5300, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high probability game flag is off. Then, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is not off (that is, it is on), the time saving activation number count execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability game flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 5301.
In step 5301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving activation number arrival flag indicating that the count value of the time-saving activation number counter has reached the time-saving activation number is off. Then, when it is determined that the time saving activation number arrival flag is not off (that is, it is on), the time saving activation number count execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving activation count arrival flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 5302.

In step 5302, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time saving activation number counter by one. If the count value is 0, the main CPU 101 does nothing here. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5303.
In step 5303, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the count value of the time saving activation number counter has reached 0. Then, when it is determined that the time has not been reached, the time saving activation count execution process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the item has been reached, the process proceeds to the next step 5304.

In step 5304, the main CPU 101 executes the first time-saving game state setting process for setting the first time-saving game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time saving game flag and sets the time saving number of times to "450". When the number of time-saving activations is reached, the normal game state is set, and the high-probability game flag is off. This high probability game flag remains off. As a result, a low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5305.
In step 5305, the main CPU 101 resets (clears zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5306.
In step 5306, the main CPU 101 turns on the time saving activation number arrival flag. Then, the time-saving activation count execution process is terminated.

Next, the time-saving activation number count start processing of step 5216 and step 5219 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 5350, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability time-saving gaming state has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability game flag is turned from on to off in step 5012 or step 5025 described above. Then, when it is determined that it is not the time when the high-probability time-saving game state is finished, the time-saving activation number count start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high-probability time-saving gaming state has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 5351.

In step 5351, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation number counter to "500". Then, the time-saving activation count start process is terminated.

Next, the special game end process executed when the special game is completed will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 95.
In step 5400, the main CPU 101 confirms the jackpot symbol (stored in the processing area of the main RAM 103) that triggered the execution of the completed special game, and determines the game state after the end of the special game according to the above-mentioned jackpot symbol. Execute the game state setting process to be set.
Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on both the high-probability game flag and the second short-time game flag regardless of whether the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is X1, X2, or X3, and also has a high-probability number of times and a high-probability game flag. Set "50" for any of the time reduction times.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5401.

In step 5401, the main CPU 101 resets (clears zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5402.
In step 5402, the main CPU 101 turns off the time saving activation number arrival flag. Then, the special game end process is terminated.

Next, the RAM clearing process executed based on the RAM clearing (reset) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 5500, the main CPU 101 executes a normal game state setting process for setting a normal game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns off both the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag (the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5501.
In step 5501, the main CPU 101 resets (clears zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5502.

In step 5502, the main CPU 101 turns off the time saving activation number arrival flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 5503.
In step 5503, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation number counter to "500". Then, the post-processing after clearing the RAM is completed.

(Modified example of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, during the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state) set when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, the non-time-saving game It was supposed to win in the lottery of the normal symbol with the same probability as in the state, but it is not limited to this, and the normal symbol has a higher probability during the first short-time game state than during the non-short-time game state. It may be set so as to win in the lottery.
Further, in the first time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is higher than in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be shorter, and the movable piece 16b is operated. By setting at least one of the settings for increasing the time, it may be possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the specific second start winning opening 16d.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the time-saving game state (second) set as the time-saving game state through the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3) and the execution of the special game. Time-saving game state) and low-probability game state (normal game state), which is set by the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning a jackpot (first time-saving game state). However, the types of time-saving gaming states are not limited to these.
For example, a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state (for example, a lost symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state, or a small symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state). A time-saving game state or the like set based on the determination of the winning symbol or the like may be provided.
In addition, in the time-saving game state set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, and the time-saving game set by reaching the number of times of activation of the special symbol without winning the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state. The time-saving game state set based on the determination of the state and the special symbol other than the jackpot symbol and which is determined to set the time-saving game state is the entry of the game ball into the specific second start winning opening 16d. The difficulty levels may be set to be different, or the difficulty levels may be set to be the same.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, so-called simultaneous rotation control is executed, and a time-saving gaming state (low probability) is executed based on the total number of changes in the first special figure and the number of changes in the second special figure. The time-saving game state) has been set, but such a method for setting the time-saving game state may be applied to other than the pachinko machine in which the simultaneous rotation control is executed. That is, a pachinko machine that cannot change the second special figure during the change of the first special figure and cannot change the first special figure during the change of the second special figure (at the same time, the change of the first special figure). And in a pachinko machine that cannot perform both changes in the second special figure and only one of them changes), a time-saving game based on the total number of changes in the first special figure and the number of changes in the second special figure. The state may be set.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be obtained.

In addition, the timing of counting by the time reduction activation count counter is one of the time when the special symbol changes, the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time (so-called symbol confirmation time) has elapsed. May be good.
In addition, when counting by the time saving activation number counter at the start of the change of the special symbol, even if the jackpot is won by the winning or losing lottery that triggers the change, even if the counting is performed by the time saving activation number counter. good. Then, when the count value by the time saving activation number counter reaches the time saving activation number at the time of the fluctuation related to the winning of the big hit, the big hit is not set for the time saving game state (first time saving game state) based on the arrival. The game state may be set based on the winning of the special game after the end of the special game.
In addition, instead of counting by the time-saving activation count counter triggered by the change of the special symbol, the winning / failing lottery is used as an opportunity (for example, the time when the winning / failing lottery is executed, the time when the special symbol is determined according to the lottery result by the winning / failing lottery, etc.). It may be possible to count by the time saving activation number counter.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, in the high-probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3, the set high-probability number of times and the number of time-savings are the same. However, the number of times is not limited to this, and different times may be set.
For example, the number of times of high probability may be set to 50, the number of times of time saving may be 10 times, and the number of times of time saving set in the high probability time saving game state may be set to be less than the number of times of high probability.
In addition, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is determined, the high-probability time-saving game state is not set after the end of the special game based on the determination, but the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state are combined (hereinafter referred to as the game state). , Also referred to as low-probability time-saving game state X) may be set.
Then, as described above, a jackpot in a gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state X) that combines a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state set through winning a jackpot and executing a special game, and a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state. The low-probability time-saving game state set by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the number of times of time-saving activation without winning is such that the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the specific second start winning opening 16d is different. It may be set, or it may be set so that the difficulty level is the same. For example, a game state (low-probability time-saving game state X) that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state set through winning a jackpot and executing a special game as described above, and a jackpot in a low-probability game state. One of the low-probability time-saving gaming states set by the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning the game, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than the other. By setting at least one of the setting that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the setting that the operating time of the movable piece 16b is long, the game ball can be entered into the specific second starting winning opening 16d. It may be easy.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, counting by the time saving activation number counter is performed only in the normal gaming state (the gaming state in which the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state are combined). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, as a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state is set, a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state set after the end of a special game based on a predetermined jackpot symbol determination are combined in addition to the normal gaming state ( In the pachinko machine provided with the low-probability time-saving gaming state X), a winning / failing lottery is made in either the above-mentioned normal gaming state or a gaming state combining the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state X). When the result of is other than the big hit, the counting by the time saving activation number counter may be performed, or the above-mentioned normal gaming state and the gaming state combining the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state (low probability). In both of the time-saving game states X), when the result of the winning / failing lottery is other than the big hit, the counting by the time-saving activation number counter may be performed. Then, when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, a gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) in which the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state in the other application example 8 are combined is set. You may try to do it.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be obtained.

Further, the time saving activation number counter in the other application example 8 decrements the value of the time saving activation number set at the start time of the count by a predetermined value (“1” in the other application example 8) at the time of executing the count. By doing so, it was supposed to count toward the number of time-saving activations, but it is not limited to this. For example, by setting a predetermined start value (for example, "0") at the start of counting and incrementing by a predetermined value (for example, "1") at the time of executing counting, counting toward the number of time-saving activations is executed. You may try to do it.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, the jackpot suggestion image is displayed along with the fluctuation effect to notify that the jackpot is won. However, the method of notification is not limited to this.
For example, in addition to the jackpot suggestion image, a predetermined voice output or a predetermined lamp may be turned on in a predetermined lighting mode to notify that the jackpot has been won. Further, the jackpot winning may be notified in the look-ahead effect that can be executed before the start of the variation effect based on the first special figure random number in which the jackpot winning is determined.
Further, not only during the normal gaming state but also when the jackpot is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, a notification to that effect may be given.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be obtained.

(Other application example 9)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 is configured so that the special game is executed only based on the winning of the jackpot, as in the above-described embodiment.

(Outline of the structure in the game area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the general winning opening 14, the first starting winning opening 15, the second starting winning opening 16, the movable piece 16b, as in the above-described embodiment, An attacker device, an out port 19, a gate 20, and an effect display device 21 are provided (see FIG. 97).
Among these devices and members, the attacker device has a different configuration from the above-described embodiment, but the other than the attacker device has the same configuration (structure, installation position, etc.) as the above-described embodiment. There is.
Hereinafter, the structure of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 in the gaming region 12 will be described focusing on an attacker device different from the above-described embodiment.

The pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 is provided with two attacker devices, a first attacker device 170 and a second attacker device 180.
As shown in FIG. 97, the first attacker device 170 is provided in the lower left of the effect display device 21 (lower part of the first game area 12a), and the second attacker device 180 is in the lower right of the effect display device 21 (first). 2 It is provided in the lower part of the game area 12b).

The first attacker device 170 includes a first large winning opening 171 in which a game ball can enter, and a first opening / closing door 172 that opens and closes the first large winning opening 171. In the normal state, since the first opening / closing door 172 is closed and the first big winning opening 171 is closed, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening 171 but it is a big hit. When the special game based on the winning is executed, the first opening / closing door 172 is opened and the first large winning opening 171 is opened, so that the game ball can enter the first large winning opening 171. When one game ball enters the first prize opening 171 and a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in another application example 9) are paid out.
A game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first large winning opening 171 and a game ball flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter the ball.

The second attacker device 180 includes a second special winning opening 181 in which a game ball can enter, and a second opening / closing door 182 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 181. In the normal state, since the second opening / closing door 182 is closed and the second big winning opening 181 is closed, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second big winning opening 181. When the special game based on the winning is executed, the second opening / closing door 182 is opened and the second big winning opening 181 is opened, so that the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 181. When one game ball enters the second prize opening 181 the prize ball is paid out in a predetermined number (15 in another application example 9).
A game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second large winning opening 181 and a game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 are contained in the first special winning opening 171 and the second large winning opening 181. Not provided.
Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, after the end of the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the gaming state according to the type of the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot is set. It has become so.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 will be described focusing on points different from the above-described embodiments.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the low probability game state, which is a game state in which the low probability game state and the non-time-saving game state are combined, the low-probability game state, and the game state in which the first time-saving game state is combined are low. High-probability short-time game state, which is a game state that combines a high-probability time-shortening game state, high-probability game state, and second time-shortening game state, or high-probability non-time-saving game state that is a combination of high-probability game state and non-time-saving game state. One of the gaming states is set.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are the frequencies of the game balls entering the second starting winning opening 16. The difficulty level of the ball, in other words, the frequency of winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16) is set to be different. The details of the specific settings will be described later.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after resetting.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the gaming ball flowing down the first gaming area 12a can enter the first starting winning opening 15 and the first major winning opening 171. The gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the second major winning opening 181.
Then, during the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 described later, the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15, and the game ball also enters. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed) so as to enter the first large winning opening 171. Further, during the low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbols X2, X3, or X4 described later, the game ball passes through the gate 20 and the second start winning opening. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the ball enters 16 and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 181.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, it is possible to win a big hit in the winning / losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and the big hit. If you win, the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X4 will be decided. Then, when the gaming state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state), the jackpot winning The probability is set to about 1/33, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above-mentioned gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is about 1. It is set to / 15.
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 98.9%, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 1%, and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 0.1%.
It should be noted that the upper limit number of hold of the first special figure random number (upper limit number of the first hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to four. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), it is possible to win a big hit in a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X3 or X4 is determined. It is supposed to be done. Then, when the gaming state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 15 is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state), the jackpot winning The probability is set to about 1/33, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above-mentioned gaming state is a high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is about 1. It is set to / 15.
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 3%, and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 97%.
Further, if the result is lost by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the lost symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 (the upper limit of the number of second hold) is set to four. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (c), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the first big winning opening 171 is opened for 29.0 seconds during the special game based on the determination. The round game that ends when either one of the conditions is satisfied or one game ball enters the first large winning opening 171 is executed twice. In addition, during the above-mentioned one round game, the average of 1.8 is included, including the game ball in which the ball is entered immediately before the closing of the first large winning opening 171 and the entry is detected after the closing of the first large winning opening 171. Individual game balls can be entered. Therefore, during the above-mentioned special game, an average of 36 game balls can be acquired.
If a big hit is won and the big hit symbol X2 is decided, the second big winning opening 181 is opened for 29.0 seconds or one piece is made in the second big winning opening 181 during the special game based on the decision. The round game that ends when any of the conditions for entering the game ball is satisfied is executed twice. In addition, during the above-mentioned one round game, the average of 1.8 is included, including the game ball in which the ball is entered immediately before the closing of the second big winning opening 181 and the entry is detected after the closing of the second big winning opening 181. Individual game balls can be entered. Therefore, during the above-mentioned special game, an average of 36 game balls can be acquired.
When the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, the second major winning opening 181 is opened for 29.0 seconds during the special game based on the determination, or one game is entered in the second major winning opening 181. The round game that ends when any of the conditions for entering the ball is satisfied is executed 10 times, and an average of 270 game balls can be obtained.

(Outline of Fuzu game)
Next, an outline of the normal drawing game executed by the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 99, in the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state, during the high-probability non-time-saving game state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.2, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol. The time is set to 10 seconds, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is in the open state) when a hit is made by a lottery of ordinary symbols is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not shown in particular, it is set in the same manner during the special game.
In addition, in the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.2, which is the same as in the non-time-saving game state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state, and 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving game state, when the movable piece 16b is hit by a lottery of normal symbols.
Further, in the second time-saving game state (during the high-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is approximately 1/1, which is higher than in the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state. 1. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortening game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when it is hit by the lottery of the normal symbol is the same as during the first time-shortening game state. It is set to 5 seconds.

That is, both during the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state and during the high-probability non-time-saving game state) and during the special game, there is a high probability in the lottery of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20. There are many chances that the movable piece 16b will be in an open state. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 5 seconds and the operation time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time from the closed state to the open state of the movable piece 16b (from the open state). The interval until the next open state is long), but the time that the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost closed, and it is almost impossible for the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b to enter the second start winning opening 16.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state), the lottery of the normal symbol is won with the same probability as during the non-time-saving game state. There are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in an open state. Further, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is longer than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is in the closed state. Although the time from the opening to the open state is short (the interval from the open state to the next open state is short), the time for the movable piece 16b to be maintained in the open state is long. Therefore, during the first short game state, the movable piece 16b is almost open, and there is a high possibility that the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b will enter the second start winning opening 16.

In addition, during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), there is a higher probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery than during the non-time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state. Therefore, there are extremely many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in an open state. Further, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortening game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortening game state, the first time-shortening game state. Similar to the inside, the time from the closed state to the open state of the movable piece 16b is short (the interval from the open state to the next open state is short), but the movable piece 16b is in the open state. It takes a long time to be maintained. Therefore, during the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be open than during the first time-saving game state, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b can enter the second start winning opening 16. The sex is higher than during the first short game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the probability of winning by lottery of ordinary symbols is high in any of the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state. Although it is set, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 by making the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operating time of the movable piece 16b different (that is, the second starting winning opening 16). The frequency of entering the game ball, in other words, the frequency of executing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16) is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the non-time-saving game state, so that it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16, and the second time-saving game state. Since the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the first short game state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.
Therefore, during the second time-shortening game state, the decrease of the game ball with the progress of the game is suppressed more than during the non-time-saving game state and the first time-shortening game state, and during the first time-shortening game state, than during the non-time-saving game state. However, you will be able to get the chance to win or lose the lottery.

(Outline of the game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, one of a normal gaming state, a low-probability time-saving gaming state, a high-probability time-saving gaming state, and a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state is set.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and by the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number. When the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state is set. , Normal game state is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is determined. By setting the high-probability game state and setting the second time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is set. Further, the high accuracy number is set to 10000 times, and the time reduction number is set to 5 times.
That is, after the end of the special game executed when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the game state is set to the high-probability time-saving game state, and until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 5 times (number of fluctuations of the special symbol). The high-probability time-saving game state continues (until the number reaches 5 times).
Then, during this high-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is other than a big hit (loss), the high-probability game state remains the same and the second time-saving game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state. As a result, the gaming state is changed to a high-probability non-time saving gaming state.
After that, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 9995 times (until the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 9995 times). Then, during this high-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is all other than the big hit (loss) 9995 times, the non-time-saving game state remains as it is, and the high-probability game state is changed to the low-probability game state. , The gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, as described above, the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is about 1/15, so that the probability of winning the jackpot is substantially high until the jackpot is won again. The non-time saving game state will continue.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is determined. By setting the high-probability game state and setting the second time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is set. Further, the high accuracy number and the time reduction number are both set to 10,000 times.
That is, after the end of the special game executed when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state is set to the high-probability time-saving game state, and until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 10,000 times (number of fluctuations of the special symbol). The high-probability time-saving game state continues (until the number reaches 10,000 times).
Then, during this high-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is all other than the big hit (loss), the high-probability game state is changed to the low-probability game state, and the second time-saving game state is the non-time-saving game. By changing to the state, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, as described above, the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is about 1/15, so that the probability of winning the jackpot is substantially high until the jackpot is won again. The time-saving game state will continue.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, after the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, the special symbol changes without winning the jackpot. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations (that is, 100 times in the other application example 9) (that is, in the low-probability gaming state, when the result of the winning / losing lottery is all other than the jackpot), the low-probability gaming state remains as it is. By setting the first time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. When the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving games is set to 100 times.
After the low-probability time-saving game state is set, the low-probability time-saving time is reduced until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times (that is, until the result of the winning / failing lottery is derived 100 times) without winning the jackpot. The game state continues.
Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is all other than the big hit (loss), the low-probability game state remains as it is, and the first time-saving game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state. , The gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, a time-saving activation number counter for counting the number of time-saving activations (100 times) for which a low-probability time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set is set. It is composed of a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of the time reduction activation count counter is that the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, the special game is completed, or the low probability time reduction game state (first time reduction game state) is set. It is set to be reset when any of the reset conditions is satisfied.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), so that counting by the time-saving activation number counter starts from this point.
Further, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is completed, the subsequent game state is set to the normal game state, so that the counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from this point.
Further, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X4 is completed, the subsequent game state is set to the high-probability time-saving game state (high-probability game state). Therefore, the counting by the time saving activation number counter does not start from the time when the special game ends, and the counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from the time when the normal game state (low probability gaming state) is set.

Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, each time the special symbol is changed, the counting is performed by the time saving activation number counter, and the count value of the time saving activation number counter is the time saving activation number. When it reaches, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set as described above.

As described above, the counting by the time saving activation number counter is started with the setting of the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) as an opportunity. When counting by the time-saving activation count counter is started with the setting of the normal gaming state as a trigger, the time when the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches 100 times of the time-saving activation count (that is, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. The gaming state is the normal gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on the winning of the big hit, until the next big hit is won, the low probability time-saving gaming state is reached. Can be set only once.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation count counter reaches the time-saving activation number (100 times) and the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set again until the next big hit is won. I can't.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter is reset by setting the low probability time saving gaming state, the time saving activation is performed until the next big hit is won. It is set to stop counting by the count counter.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, it is not defined that the time-saving gaming state is set for the lost symbols (Z1, Z2). Therefore, the gaming state is not changed after the lost symbol is stopped, and the gaming state at the time of determining the lost symbol continues.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the number of continuous time reduction settings and the number of continuous probability variation settings as in the above-described embodiment are not set, and when the jackpot symbol X2 or X4 is determined, A high-probability time-saving game state is always set after the end of the special game based on the determination.

(Playability of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, as described above, a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined) and a low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability gaming state and the first A high-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines a time-saving game state), a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state), or a high-probability non-time-saving game state (a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state). One of the game states) in which the states are combined is set, and the game progresses.

At the time when the player starts the game, the normal game state is often set. During this normal gaming state, as described above, launching of the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed) is instructed, and as long as the gaming ball is launched in accordance with this, the gaming ball is , There is a possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning opening 16. Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X4 are determined (see FIG. 98 (a)). ..
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state, and when the jackpot symbol X2 or X4 is determined, it is based on the determination. The gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 98 (b) and FIG. 100). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, if the left-handed machine is hit as instructed during the normal gaming state, the pachinko machine P will shift to the normal gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state by winning the jackpot. (See FIG. 100).
However, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined by 1% when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined by 0.1% when the jackpot is won (FIG. 98 (a)). (Refer to), it is extremely difficult to shift to the high-probability time-saving gaming state even if the jackpot is won during the normal gaming state.

Further, as described above, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of times of shortened activation (100 times) without winning the jackpot during the normal game state (the number of times the lottery result of the winning / losing lottery is derived reaches the number of times of shortening activation). In the case), the subsequent gaming state is set to the low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 98 (b)). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, if the left-handed hit is performed as instructed during the normal gaming state, the result of the 100-time winning / failing lottery is all other than the big hit (that is, the loss). , It will shift to a low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 100). This low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning / losing lottery is derived 100 times without winning the jackpot.

During the low-probability short-time gaming state, the second start winning opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than during the normal gaming state, and the game ball is easier to enter the second starting winning opening 16, so that the game progresses. You can aim for the next big hit while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls that accompany it. Further, during the low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed) is instructed, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this, the game is played. The ball may enter the second starting winning opening 16 and does not enter the first starting winning opening 15. Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 98 (a)).
When the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state, and when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the determination is made as described above. The gaming state after the end of the special gaming based on the above is set to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 98 (b) and FIG. 100). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, if the right-handed machine is hit as instructed during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the pachinko machine P may be transferred to the normal gaming state by winning the jackpot, or the high probability. It will shift to the time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 100).
In addition, since the jackpot symbol X4 is determined in 97% of the cases where the jackpot is won (see FIG. 98 (a)), the probability is extremely high when the jackpot is won during the low probability time-saving gaming state. It is easy to shift to the short-time game state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the game ball is extremely easy to enter the second start winning opening 16, so that the game is played. You can aim for the next big hit while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls that accompanies the progress of. Further, during the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the low-probability time-saving game state, it is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed), and the game ball is launched according to this. As long as it is, the game ball may enter the second starting winning opening 16 and does not enter the first starting winning opening 15. Then, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 98 (a)).

Here, in the high-probability time-saving game state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4, the number of time-saving is set to 10,000 (see FIG. 98 (b)). As described above, since the winning probability of the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is about 1/15, during this high-probability time-saving gaming state, the winning / losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is performed. You will win the jackpot again. Then, if the jackpot is won by the winning or losing lottery, the jackpot symbol X4 is determined with an extremely high probability of determination. Therefore, once the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, unless the jackpot symbol X3 with an extremely low determination probability (3%) is determined, the special game is executed and the high probability time is shortened based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4. Since the setting of the game state is repeated, there is a high possibility that a large number of game balls can be acquired at one time.

On the other hand, in the high-probability time-saving game state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the number of time-saving is set to 5 (see FIG. 98 (b)). Then, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is lost all five times without winning the jackpot, the game shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the launch of the game ball (left-handed) toward the first game area 12a is instructed. .. Therefore, after shifting to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15, as in the normal gaming state. Then, after the high-probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 is set, the winning / failing lottery is performed up to 9 times based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 (time-saving number of times (time-saving number of times (time-saving number of times)). The winning / failing lottery for 5 times) and the winning / failing lottery for the upper limit number (4) of the second reserved number that can be stored at the end of the 5th winning / failing lottery). If the jackpot is won in this maximum of 9 win / fail lottery, it is extremely likely that the jackpot symbol X4 will be decided, and the high-probability time-saving game state will be set again. It is not always the case that you will win. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set again compared to the high-probability time-saving gaming state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4. Unlikely.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, when the high probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4, the execution of the special game and the high probability based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4 are performed. The setting of the time-saving game state is repeated with an extremely high probability. That is, the high-probability time-saving gaming state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4 is an extremely advantageous gaming state for the player.
Then, the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state or the high-probability non-time-saving game state that shifts after the end of the high-probability short-time game state, and a big hit is won by a winning or losing lottery based on the winning ball. Even so, although the jackpot symbol X4 is almost undecided, during the low-probability time-saving game state in which the count value by the time-saving activation count counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (without winning the jackpot and through the special game). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 and a big hit is won by a winning or losing lottery based on the winning ball, the big hit symbol X4 is determined with an extremely high probability.
Therefore, in order to shift from the normal gaming state to the high-probability time-saving gaming state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4, which is extremely advantageous for the player, the low-probability time-saving gaming state that can be transferred without going through the jackpot winning and special games. It is given a novel playability that it becomes a chance zone of the player, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol XX2 or X4) and the execution of the special game result in a high-probability time-saving gaming state having a higher advantage than the normal gaming state. Not only can it be transferred, but also during the low-probability gaming state (during the normal gaming state), the result of all 100 winning / failing lottery, which is the number of times of shortened activation, is other than the jackpot (missing), so that the jackpot winning and special Since it is possible to shift to a low-probability time-saving gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, without going through the execution of the game, it is possible to provide a novel game property and enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, in the second time-saving game state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the number of times of time-saving activation is set to be less than or equal to the number of times of time-saving activation (5 times). It has become like. As a result, for example, even if a gaming state that combines a low-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the low-probability gaming state and the second Prevents the situation where the second time-saving game state that is being set is changed to a different time-saving game state by reaching the count value of the time-saving activation number counter during the game state that combines the time-saving game states. It will be possible.

Since the progress of the special figure game in the other application example 9 is almost the same as the contents of the flowchart explaining the progress of the special figure game of the pachinko machine P according to the above-described embodiment and the other application example 6. , I will omit the explanation here.

(Modification example of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, during the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state) set when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, the non-time-saving game It was supposed to win in the lottery of the normal symbol with the same probability as in the state, but it is not limited to this, and the normal symbol has a higher probability during the first short-time game state than during the non-short-time game state. It may be set so as to win in the lottery.
Further, in the first time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is higher than in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be shorter, and the movable piece 16b is operated. By setting at least one of the settings for increasing the time, it may be possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the time-saving game state (second time-saving game) set through the winning of the jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X4) and the execution of the special game as the time-saving game state. A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is provided, which is set by the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the time-saving activation number without winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state (normal game state). However, the types of time-saving gaming states are not limited to these.
For example, a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state (for example, a lost symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state, or a small symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state). A time-saving game state or the like set based on the determination of the winning symbol or the like may be provided.
In addition, in the time-saving game state set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game, the time-saving game set by reaching the number of times of activation of the special symbol without winning the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state. The time-saving game state set based on the determination of the state and the special symbol other than the jackpot symbol and which is determined to set the time-saving game state is the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16. The difficulty levels may be set to be different, or the difficulty levels may be set to be the same.
Further, in the time-saving game state other than the jackpot symbol, which is set based on the determination of the special symbol for which the time-saving game state is set, as in the low-probability time-saving game state in the other application example 9, the time-saving game state is set. It may be set so that the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X4, which is extremely advantageous for the player, is extremely high.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be obtained.

In addition, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is determined, the high-probability time-saving game state is not set after the end of the special game based on the determination, but the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state are combined (hereinafter referred to as the game state). , Also referred to as low-probability time-saving game state X) may be set.
Then, as described above, a jackpot in a gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state X) that combines a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state set through winning a jackpot and executing a special game, and a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state. The low-probability time-saving game state set by the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the number of times of time-saving activation without winning is set so that the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 is different. Alternatively, the difficulty level may be set to be the same. For example, a game state (low-probability time-saving game state X) that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state set through winning a jackpot and executing a special game as described above, and a jackpot in a low-probability game state. One of the low-probability time-saving gaming states set by the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning the game, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than the other. By setting at least one of the setting that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the setting that the operating time of the movable piece 16b becomes long, it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. You may try to.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, the counting by the time saving activation number counter is performed only in the normal gaming state (the gaming state in which the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state are combined). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, as a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state is set, a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state set after the end of a special game based on a predetermined jackpot symbol determination are combined in addition to the normal gaming state ( In the pachinko machine provided with the low-probability time-saving gaming state X), a winning / failing lottery is made in either the above-mentioned normal gaming state or a gaming state combining the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state X). When the result of is other than the big hit, the counting by the time saving activation number counter may be performed, or the above-mentioned normal gaming state and the gaming state combining the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state (low probability). In both of the time-saving game states X), when the result of the winning / failing lottery is other than the big hit, the counting by the time-saving activation number counter may be performed. Then, when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, a gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) in which the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state in another application example 9 are combined is set. You may try to do it.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be obtained.

In addition, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 includes the above-described embodiment and its modifications, and various pachinko machines P and its modifications according to the other application examples 1 to 8 within a range that does not cause a contradiction. It may be configured by applying settings and controls.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be obtained.

(Other application example 10)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine like the other application example 3 and the other application example 4, and either wins a big hit or wins a small hit. The special game is configured to be executed when a predetermined number of game balls (1 in another application example 10) have entered the special area described later during the small hit game based on the winning of. be.
(Outline of the structure in the game area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the general winning opening 14, the first starting winning opening 15, the second starting winning opening 16, and the same as in the above-described embodiment and each application example, A movable piece 16b, an attacker device 17, an out port 19, a gate 20, and an effect display device 21 are provided.
It should be noted that the structure, installation position, and the like of some of these devices and members are different from the above-described embodiments and application examples.
Hereinafter, the structure of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 in the gaming region 12 will be described focusing on the above-described embodiments and differences from each application example.

The structure, installation position, function, etc. of the first starting winning opening 15 and the gate 20 of the other application example 10 are the same as those of the first starting winning opening 15 and the gate 20 of the other application example 8, so the explanation is omitted. do.

Further, below the gate 20, a second starting winning opening 16 and a flat plate-shaped movable piece 16b (ordinary electric accessory) that can be retracted with respect to the game board 11 are arranged side by side. The structure, installation position, function, etc. of the second start winning opening 16 are the same as those of the specific second starting winning opening 16d in the other application example 8, and the structure, installation position, operation mode, etc. of the movable piece 16b. Since the functions and the like are the same as those of the movable piece 16b in the other application example 8, the description thereof is omitted.
Further, since the processing when the game ball passes through the gate 20 (lottery of the normal symbol, variable display of the normal symbol, operation of the movable piece 16b, etc.) is the same as that of the other application example 8, the description thereof is omitted.

An attacker device 17 is provided below the second starting winning opening 16. The internal structure of the attacker device 17 (large winning opening 18) in the other application example 10 is the same as that of the other application examples 3 and 4, and the specific area 57 is not provided in the attacker device 17, so that the said Instead of the specific area 57, a special area having the same structure but different functions is provided. Other than this, the attacker device 17 has the same internal structure as the above-described embodiment and other application example 1.

Then, during the special game based on the winning of the big hit or during the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit, the large winning opening 18 is opened, and the game ball can enter the large winning opening 18. However, during the special game, the distribution member 59 is stopped at the first position, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 does not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. On the other hand, during the small hit game, the distribution member 59 is stopped at the second position, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 18 does not enter the general area 58, but all enters the special area. It is designed to do.
That is, the game balls can enter the special area only during the small hit game, whereby a predetermined number of game balls enter the special area during the small hit game based on the winning of the small hit, and the special area is entered. The game is to be executed.

Then, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, after the end of the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot corresponds to. The game state is set. Further, after the end of the special game executed based on the winning of the small hit, the game state is set according to the type of the small hit symbol determined at the time of winning the small hit.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, even if any of the big hit symbols and the small hit symbols is determined, the time-saving gaming state described later is set after the end of the special game.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 will be described focusing on points different from the above-described embodiments.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, a normal gaming state, a low-probability gaming state, and a first time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state), which are gaming states in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined, are combined. The second low-probability time-saving, which is a combination of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as the first low-probability time-saving), the low-probability gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state). One of the gaming states (hereinafter, also referred to as the second low probability time reduction) is set.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are the frequencies of the game balls entering the second starting winning opening 16. The difficulty level of the ball, in other words, the frequency of winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16) is set to be different. The details of the specific settings will be described later.
As in the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after resetting.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the gaming ball flowing down the first gaming area 12a can enter the first starting winning opening 15, and flows down the second gaming area 12b. The pachinko ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting winning opening 16, and enter the large winning opening 18.
Then, in principle, the player is to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed) so that the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state. During the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small hit game, the game ball passes through the gate 20 and enters the second start winning opening 16. Further, the player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the large winning opening 18.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, a big hit can be won in the winning / losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 15, and the big hit. If you win, the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 will be decided. Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 15 is always a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming). The state), and the probability of winning the jackpot is set to about 1/222.
Further, when the jackpot is won, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X1 is 2/100 (that is, 2%), the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 is 8/100 (that is, 8%), and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 is. It is set to 90/100 (ie, 90%). Further, if the result is lost by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the lost symbol Z1 is determined.
It should be noted that the upper limit number of hold of the first special figure random number (upper limit number of the first hold number) that can be stored when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 15 is set to four. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, it is possible to win a big hit or a small hit, and when the big hit is won, the big hit symbol X4 is won. When it is decided and the small hit is won, the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is decided. Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is always a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming). The state), and the probability of winning the jackpot is set to about 1/222. In addition, the probability of winning a small hit is set to about 4/222.
Further, when the jackpot is won, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 100/100 (that is, 100%). Further, in the case of winning a small hit, the determination probability of the small hit symbol Y1 is set to 60/100 (that is, 60%), and the determination probability of the small hit symbol Y2 is set to 40/100 (that is, 40%). .. Further, if the result is lost by the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery, the lost symbol Z2 is determined.
The upper limit of the number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 (the upper limit of the number of second hold) is set to four. The upper limit of the number of holdings of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the jackpot 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or is large during the special game based on the determination. The round game that ends when any of the conditions of 10 game balls entering the winning opening 18 is satisfied is executed 10 times, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.
Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed four times during the special game based on the determination. It is possible to acquire about 400 game balls.
Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed twice during the special game based on the determination, and about 200 pieces are executed. You can get a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the small hit is won and the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the large winning opening 18 is opened once for 1.8 seconds, and the large winning opening 18 is opened. If 10 game balls enter while the game is open, a small hit game is executed in which the large winning opening 18 is closed. During this small hit game, as long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball surely enters the large winning opening 18 and enters the large winning opening 18. Since all the game balls enter the special area, the special game is executed through the small hit game.
Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the small hit is won and the small hit symbol Y1 is determined, the above-mentioned round is performed during the special game executed via the small hit game based on the determination. The game is executed 10 times, and about 1000 game balls can be acquired.
Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the small hit is won and the small hit symbol Y2 is determined, the above-mentioned round is performed during the special game executed via the small hit game based on the determination. The game is executed four times, and about 400 game balls can be acquired.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the lost symbol Z1 is determined by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number in the normal gaming state, and the lost symbol Z1 is determined at that time. When the number of 1 hold is less than 2 (0 or 1), the variation pattern command "00H" in which the variation pattern of "13-second variation (variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 13 seconds)" is defined. , "30-second variation (variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 30 seconds)" variation pattern command "02H", or "60-second variation (variation time of the special symbol is 60)" Any of the fluctuation pattern commands "03H" in which the fluctuation pattern of "variation pattern set in seconds)" is determined is determined. Further, when the first hold number at the above time point is 2 or more, the fluctuation pattern command "5 seconds fluctuation (variation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to 5 seconds)" is defined. Either the fluctuation pattern command "02H" in which the fluctuation pattern of "01H" or "30-second fluctuation" is defined, or the fluctuation pattern command "03H" in which the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is defined is determined.

In the normal game state, if the loss symbol Z2 is determined by the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number, the variation pattern command "00H" in which the variation pattern of "13 seconds variation" is determined is determined. ..
In the normal game state, when the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the jackpot symbols X1, X2 or X3 are determined, and when the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number is won and the jackpot is won. When the symbol X4 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" in which the fluctuation pattern of "30-second fluctuation" is defined, or the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" in which the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is defined. Is determined.
In the normal game state, if the small hit is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number and the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command in which the fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds fluctuation" is defined. Either "B2H" or the fluctuation pattern command "B3H" in which the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is defined is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102, in the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, when the loss is obtained by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the loss symbol Z1 is determined, and 2 Fluctuations of the variation pattern commands "11H" and "30 seconds variation" in which the variation pattern of "5-second variation" is defined in each case where the loss is lost and the loss symbol Z2 is determined by the winning / fail lottery based on the special figure random number. Either the variation pattern command "12H" in which the pattern is defined or the variation pattern command "13H" in which the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is defined is determined.
In the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, when the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 is determined, and the second special figure. When a jackpot is won by a winning / failing lottery based on a random number and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "C2H" or "60 seconds fluctuation" in which the fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds fluctuation" is defined is used. One of the fluctuation pattern commands "C3H" in which the fluctuation pattern is defined is determined.
In the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, if a small hit is won by a winning / fail lottery based on the second special figure random number and the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, "30 seconds variation". Either the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" in which the fluctuation pattern of "" is defined, or the fluctuation pattern command "D3H" in which the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is defined is determined.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the pre-determination process in the above-described embodiment is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 during the normal gaming state (see FIG. 25). Is executed, and in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the pre-determination process is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. There is.

(Outline of Fuzu game)
Next, the outline of the normal drawing game executed by the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 101 (d), in the non-time-saving gaming state (during the normal gaming state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.1, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds. The operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state) when a hit is made by a normal symbol lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not shown in particular, the settings are similarly set during the special game and the small hit game.
In addition, in the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.1, which is the same as in the non-time-saving game state. The fluctuation time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a hit is made by drawing a normal symbol is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving game state. There is.
In addition, in the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by the lottery of the normal symbol is about 1 / 1.1, which is the same as in the non-time-saving game state. The fluctuation time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortened game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when it is hit by a lottery of normal symbols is set to 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-shortened game state. Has been done.

That is, during the non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state), during the special game or the small hit game, there is a high probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and the movable piece. There are many opportunities for 16b to be in a protruding state. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time from the state in which the movable piece 16b is immersed to the state in which the movable piece 16b is projected (from the protruding state). The interval until the next protruding state is long), but the time for the movable piece 16b to be maintained in the protruding state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving game state, the special game, or the small hit game, the movable piece 16b is almost immersed, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b enters the second start winning opening 16. Is almost impossible.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) and during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state), the probability is the same as during the non-time-saving game state. Since it is a hit, there are many chances that the movable piece 16b will be in a protruding state as in the non-time saving gaming state. Since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is longer than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is in a immersive state. Although the time from the protruding state to the protruding state is short (the interval from the protruding state to the next protruding state is short), the time for the movable piece 16b to be maintained in the protruding state is long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost always in a protruding state, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b enters the specific second start winning opening 16. It is designed to do.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the probability of winning by lottery of ordinary symbols is extremely high in any of the non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, and the second time saving game state. Although it is set high, there is a possibility that a gaming ball may enter the second starting winning opening 16 by making the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operating time of the movable piece 16b different (that is, to the second starting winning opening 16). The frequency of entering the game ball, in other words, the frequency of executing the winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16) is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, unlike the non-time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is maintained in a protruding state, so that the game is relatively to the second start winning opening 16. The ball is easy to enter. Therefore, during the first time-shortening game state and the second time-saving game state, it is possible to obtain the opportunity of winning / failing lottery while suppressing the decrease of the game balls with the progress of the game, as compared with the non-time-saving game state.

(Outline of the game state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, one of the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 was determined by winning the jackpot by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number during the normal gaming state (during the non-time saving gaming state). In this case, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the number of time-savings is set to 71 times.
If the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined during the normal gaming state (during the non-time saving gaming state), the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is changed. The second low probability time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving is set to 25 times.
If a jackpot is won by a winning / losing lottery based on the second special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined during the normal gaming state (during the non-time saving gaming state), the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is changed. The second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the number of time-savings is set to 71 times.
If a small hit is won by a winning / losing lottery based on the second special figure random number and the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined during the normal game state (during the non-time saving game state), the small hit game based on the determination is performed. The game state after the end of the special game to be executed is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-savings is set to 71 times.

In addition, during the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state (during the time-saving game state), a jackpot is won by a winning / losing lottery based on the first special figure random number, and the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined. If so, in any case where the jackpot is won by the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is the second low probability time-saving game. It is set to the state, and the number of time reductions is set to 71 times.
Further, in the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state (during the time-saving game state), a small hit is won by a winning / losing lottery based on the second special figure random number, and the small hit symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined. If so, the game state after the end of the special game executed via the small hit game based on the determination is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-savings is set to 71 times.

That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, both after the end of the special game based on the big hit winning and after the end of the special game executed through the small hit game based on the small hit winning. , The second low-probability time-saving game state is set. Then, the number of time reductions is set according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit or the winning of the small hit, and the type of the special symbol determined based on the winning of the big hit or the winning of the small hit.

Then, in the second low-probability time-saving game state, if a big hit is won and a special game is executed, or if a small hit is won and a special game is executed via a small hit game, the special game ends. Later, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again.
On the other hand, in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed based on the first special figure random number and the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed based on the second special figure random number are executed without executing the special game. When the total reaches the set number of time reductions (25 times or 71 times), the normal game state is set by changing the second time reduction game state to the non-time reduction game state while keeping the low probability gaming state as it is. To. That is, the special game is not executed because the result of the winning / failing lottery is lost, or the predetermined number of game balls do not pass through the special area during the small hit game even though the small hit is won by the winning / failing lottery. When the winning / failing lottery for the set number of time reductions is executed, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends, and the normal gaming state is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the special game is not executed after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. When the total number of times of execution of the winning / failing lottery based on the first special figure random number and the number of times of executing the winning / failing lottery based on the second special figure random number reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations (666 times in other application example 10) (that is, special). When the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol determined based on the first special symbol random number and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol determined based on the second special symbol random number reaches 666 without the game being executed) By setting the first time-saving gaming state while keeping the low-probability gaming state as it is, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving games is set to 171 times.

Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, when the big hit is won and the special game is executed, or when the small hit is won and the special game is executed via the small hit game, as described above, After the end of the special game, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set.
On the other hand, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed based on the first special figure random number and the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed based on the second special figure random number are executed without executing the special game. When the total reaches the set number of time reductions (171 times), the normal gaming state is set by changing the first time reduction gaming state to the non-time reduction gaming state while keeping the low probability gaming state as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the player is made to launch the gaming ball toward the second gaming area 12b. As long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16 with an extremely high probability. Since the total value of the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is 5/222 (see FIG. 101 (a)), the first 1 During the low-probability short-time game state, a big hit or a small hit is almost certainly won (about 98%) and a special game is executed.
Therefore, when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, it is rare that the normal game state is set without the special game being executed, and the first low-probability time-saving game state is almost certainly executed after the special game is executed. The game state will be set.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the number of time-saving activations for counting the number of time-saving activations (666 times) for which the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set is counted. The counter is composed of a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of the time reduction activation number counter is set to RAM clear (reset) by a predetermined operation, the end of the special game, or the first low probability time reduction game state (first time reduction game state). It is set to be reset when one of the reset conditions is satisfied.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), so that counting by the time-saving activation number counter starts from this point.
In addition, when the special game executed based on the winning of the big hit or the winning of the small hit is completed, the subsequent gaming state is set to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state), so that the time is shortened from this point. Counting by the activation count counter is started.

Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the fluctuation of the first special figure (win / fail lottery based on the first special figure random number) or the change of the second special figure (win / fail lottery based on the second special figure random number) occurs. Each time it is performed, counting is performed by the time-saving activation number counter, and when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the above-mentioned time-saving activation number, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.

As described above, the counting by the time saving activation number counter is started with the setting of the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state, and in either case, the count value of the time saving activation number counter is the time saving activation number. The gaming state at the time of reaching 666 times (that is, the time when the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set) is the normal gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on the big hit winning or the small hit winning, the next big hit winning or the small hit winning. Until the special game based on the above is started, the first low-probability time-saving game state can be set only once.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number (666 times) and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game is performed until the next special game is executed. The state cannot be set again.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter is reset by setting the first low probability time saving game state, until the next special game is executed. , The counting by the time saving activation number counter is set to be stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, it is not defined that the time-saving gaming state is set for any of the lost symbols (Z1 and Z2). Therefore, the gaming state is not changed after the lost symbol is stopped, and the gaming state at the time of determining the lost symbol continues.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the number of continuous time reduction settings as in the above-described embodiment is not set, and the second low probability time reduction game state is always set after the end of the special game. To.

(Gameability of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the normal gaming state is often set when the player starts the game, and during this normal gaming state, the gaming ball is directed toward the first gaming area 12a. Aim to execute a special game based on the winning of a big hit by launching a game ball into the first start winning opening 15. If the jackpot is won, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game based on the winning, but the number of time-saving games of 25 times is very often set, and the number of times of time-saving 71 times is 71 times. Very few are set (see FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b)).

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b, but the second start winning opening 16 is easily maintained in the open state, and the game launched into the second game area 12b. The ball almost enters the second starting winning opening 16. As a result, while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls as the game progresses, it is possible to insert the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 and aim to execute a special game based on a big hit or a small hit. .. Then, in the second low-probability time-saving game state, if a special game is executed after a big hit or a small hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16, the special game is executed. After the end of, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again, and the time-saving number of 71 times is always set (see FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b)).

As described above, if a jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 during the normal game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state with 25 time reductions is set. Although there is a high possibility, if a big hit or a small hit is won during this period and the special game is executed, then the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times of time-saving is set. Then, during the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times of time reduction, there is an opportunity of winning or losing lottery until the end of the second low-probability time-saving game state than during the second low-probability time-saving game state of 25 times of time reduction. Since the number increases, it is highly possible that the big hit or the small hit will be won again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, if a big hit or a small hit can be won during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state in which the number of time reductions that can be set from the normal gaming state is 25 times, the big hit or the small hit is obtained. It shifts to the second low-probability time-saving game state in which the expectation of winning is higher and the number of time-savings is 71. In addition, when a small hit is won based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 16, a special game in which 10 round games are performed rather than a special game in which 4 round games are performed. Is more likely to be executed (see FIG. 101 (a)).
Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times of time reduction is set, there is a high possibility that the execution of the special game and the setting of the game state are repeated, and there is a possibility that a large number of game balls can be acquired at one time. It gets higher.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, as described above, the special game is executed after the normal gaming state is set after the RAM is cleared, or after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. If the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of times of time reduction activation (666 times), the first low-probability time-saving gaming state of 171 times of time reduction is subsequently set (see FIG. 101 (b)).
During the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the second start winning opening 16 is easily maintained in the open state. Therefore, the game ball launched into the second game area 12b almost enters the second start winning opening 16. As a result, while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls as the game progresses, it is possible to insert the game ball into the second start winning opening 16 and aim to execute a special game based on a big hit or a small hit. ..
In addition, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, a special game is almost certainly won (about 98%) and a special game is executed, and after the end of the special game, the second low number of time reductions is 71 times. The probability time saving game state is set (see FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b)).
As a result, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state with 71 times of time reduction is almost certainly set, and the special game is executed and the game state is set. By repeating, there is a high possibility that a large number of game balls can be acquired at one time.

As described above, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 not only shifts to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, which has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state, through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. , During the low-probability gaming state (during the normal gaming state, during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations (666 times) without executing the special game. Since the player shifts to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, which is more advantageous than the state, it is possible to provide a novel playability and enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state with 71 times of time saving is an extremely advantageous gaming state for the player. To the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times of time reduction, either the normal game state is directly transferred via the special game, or the second low-probability time-saving game of 25 times of time reduction is performed from the normal game state via the special game. Transition through a state, or transition through the first low-probability time-saving gaming state that is set (without going through a special game) when the count value by the time-saving activation count counter reaches the time-saving activation count during the normal game state. Since it is possible to shift to the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times of time-saving by a plurality of routes, it is possible to provide more innovative game playability and enhance the interest of the player.

(Outline of transmission of various information to the sub-control board 300)
In the main control board 100 in the other application example 10, each of the above-mentioned gaming states is subdivided and managed into one state or a plurality of states (hereinafter, also referred to as a main management state), which is particularly illustrated. No, but for each main management state, the tendency of the fluctuation pattern that can be determined is different (for example, only the fluctuation pattern for which a relatively short fluctuation time is set is determined, and a relatively long fluctuation time is set. It can be controlled so that the fluctuation pattern can be easily determined, etc.).
Further, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 transmits information indicating the main management state at that time point to the sub control board 300 at various time points during the game. As a result, on the sub-control board 300, it is possible to execute an effect according to each gaming state and each main management state.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the above-mentioned main management states are the normal A state, the second low-probability time-saving first half state, the second low-probability time-saving second half state, and the second low-probability time-saving final. Eight types are provided: a state, a second low-probability time-saving hold state, a first low-probability time-saving pre-arrival state, a first low-probability time-saving state, and a normal B state.

The normal A state is the normal game state set after the RAM is cleared, or the second special figure in which the second low-probability time-saving game state ends without executing the special game and is held and stored at the end. It is a normal game state after the change of the special symbol based on the random number is completed.
The second low-probability time-saving first half state is the first to Nth times in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (N = 15 when the set time-saving number is 25 times, and when the set time-saving number is 71 times). Is a state in which the special symbol is changed up to N = 35).
The second low-probability time-saving second half state is one time before the set time-saving number from the N + 1th time in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (24th time when the set time-saving number is 25 times, the set time-saving number of times). In the case of 71 times, the special symbol has been changed up to the 70th time).
The second low-probability time-saving final state is the variation of the final special symbol reached without executing the special game in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (when the set number of time reductions is 25 times, the 25th special). It is a state in which the symbol is changed, and the 71st special symbol is changed when the set number of time reductions is 71).
The second low-probability time-saving hold state is a state in which the special symbol is changed based on the hold storage of the second special figure random number stored at the time when the second low-probability time-saving game state ends.
The first low-probability time-saving game state is the 666th time-saving activation number since the normal game state is set after the RAM is cleared or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game. This is a state in which the special symbol is changed (that is, the state immediately before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set).
The first low-probability time-saving state is a state in which the special symbol is changed from the first time to the 171st time in the first low-probability time-saving game state (that is, during the first low-probability time-saving game state).
The normal B designation information is a normal game state set after the first low-probability time-saving game state is completed without executing the special game.

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, as described above, with respect to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state set via the special game, a plurality of redifferentiated second low-probability time-saving gaming states. The main management state of (2nd low probability time saving first half state, 2nd low probability time saving second half state, 2nd low probability time saving final state, 2nd low probability time saving holding state) is provided, but without going through a special game. Regarding the first low-probability time-saving gaming state to be set, only one main management state (first low-probability time-saving state) indicating that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is in progress is provided.
In the second low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the special game, the player's expectation for the execution of the special game again is extremely high. Therefore, in order to arouse the expectation of the player, a plurality of main management states are set for the second low-probability time-saving game state, and it is possible to execute the production according to the number of changes of the special symbol after the end of the special game. ..
On the other hand, in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the number of times (666) that the fluctuation of the special symbol is relatively large after the fluctuation of the special symbol in the normal gaming state is completed and after the special game is completed. Since it is set after it is executed (that is, after a relatively long period of time has elapsed), it is possible to produce an effect according to the number of changes in the special symbol after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. If it is executed, if the special game is not executed without winning the big hit or the small hit during this first low-probability time-saving game state, there is a possibility that the player feels a great loss. Therefore, in order to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player, only the main management state of 1 is provided for the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. The production according to the number of changes of the special symbol from is not executed.

Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, when the change of the special symbol is completed and the stop display is performed, the above-mentioned gaming state is updated and the above-mentioned main management state is updated. It will be done. That is, if the change of the special symbol being executed is the last change of the predetermined main management state, the change to the next main management state is performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

For example, when the value of the time reduction activation count counter is 665 (the number of changes of the special symbol after the RAM is cleared or the second low probability game state is set is the 665th), the main management state during the change of the special symbol is It is normally in the A state, and during the next change of the special symbol (when the value of the time reduction activation number counter is 666 (after the RAM is cleared or after the second low probability game state is set, the number of changes of the special symbol is 666). The main management state during the change of the special symbol of the second time) is the state before reaching the first low probability time reduction, and the main management state during the change of the next special symbol is the first low probability time reduction state.
Then, when the change of the special symbol when the value of the time reduction activation count counter is 665 is completed and the stop display is performed, the main CPU 101 reaches the first low probability time reduction state, which was the normal A state. Change to the previous state. Further, when the change of the next special symbol (change of the special symbol when the value of the time reduction activation count counter is 666) is completed and the stop display is performed, the main CPU 101 is in the state before reaching the first low probability time reduction. The main management state that was was changed to the first low probability time saving state.

Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the main CPU 101 indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment when the change of the special symbol is completed and the stop display is displayed. A symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and when the main management state is changed as described above, a state change designation command including the changed main management state is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
When the change of the special symbol is completed and the stop display is performed, not only the above command but also the second game area 12b when the main management state is changed to the first low probability time saving state. A right-handed command for transmitting to the player that the game ball is to be launched toward the sub-control board 300 may be transmitted.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the main CPU 101 issues a stop display end command indicating that the stop display time has elapsed when the special symbol is stopped and the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed. It is transmitted to the control board 300.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, if the gaming state being set at that time is the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 may be in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. A command for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the number of remaining time reductions (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of remaining time reductions) until the end of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 to reduce the time. If the number of activations is being counted by the activation count counter (that is, during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state), the remaining time until the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. A command for the number of remaining time reduction activations indicating the number of activations (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of remaining time reduction activations) is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
Then, at that time point, after the above-mentioned stop display end command and the remaining time reduction number command or the remaining time reduction activation number command are transmitted, the main CPU 101 holds and stores the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number. If so, the above-mentioned variation pattern command for transmitting the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 to indicate that the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol is started, and the first special figure is When neither the random number nor the second special figure random number is reserved and stored, the customer waiting start command indicating to start the timing of the customer waiting time described above is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a status confirmation command indicating the main management status at that time point to the sub-control board 300 along with the transmission of the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting start command.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the main CPU 101 has a gaming state (second low probability time-saving gaming state) and a main management state (second low) set after the special game is completed. A special post-game state specification command including the probability time reduction first half state) is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

The timing of transmitting the main management state to the sub-control board 300 and the command of transmitting to the sub-control board 300 are not limited to the above-mentioned contents.
For example, when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, when the RAM is cleared, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), and the like. , The spec specification command including the model information of the pachinko machine P may be transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Then, by including the above-mentioned main management state in this spec specification command, the above-mentioned main management state may be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 together with the model information at each of the above-mentioned time points.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, when the set gaming state and the main management state are stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and a power failure occurs. Is designed to back up the stored data of the main RAM 103 including the above-mentioned gaming state and main management state. As a result, the game state and the main management state set before the power failure occurred can be acquired at the time of recovery from the power failure and transmitted to the sub control board 300. Then, when the sub CPU 301 receives the set gaming state or main management state, the sub CPU 301 stores the received gaming state or main management state in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303 in the sub control board 300.
As a result, the game state and the main management state set at each of the above-mentioned time points are transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Therefore, also in the sub-control board 300, the game state and the main set at each of the above-mentioned time points are transmitted. The management state can be grasped, and the production according to the game state and the main management state can be executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, at the time of the stop display of the special symbol in the change one time before the change in which the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the following is performed by the main CPU 101. A state change designation command indicating that the main management state in the fluctuation is the state before reaching the first low-probability time-saving game state immediately before the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
As a result, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, it is possible to prepare the data and the like of the effect to be executed at the time when the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set before the time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on hardware resources such as the sub CPU 301 and the sub RAM 301.

Next, the outline of the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game will be described with reference to the flowchart, focusing on the points different from the above-described embodiment.
First, the special symbol variation start process executed at the start of the variation of the special symbol will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 103.
Since the processes of steps 6000 to 6009 are substantially the same as the processes of steps 801 to 810 of the special symbol variation start process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here.
In step 6010, which proceeds when it is determined in step 6001 that the first special figure random number is not stored in the first reserved storage area, the main 101 is measuring the predetermined customer waiting time described later (that is, the change of the special symbol). It is determined whether or not it is (during the time when the display is not performed). Then, if it is determined that the customer waiting time is being timed, the process proceeds to step 6013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer waiting time is not being timed, the process proceeds to the next step 6011.

In step 6011, the main CPU 101 starts timing a predetermined customer waiting time (30 seconds in another application example 10). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6012.
In step 6012, the main CPU 101 stores a customer waiting start command indicating that the timing of the predetermined customer waiting time has started in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6013.

In step 6013, the main CPU 101 executes a customer waiting determination process for displaying the customer waiting on the effect display device 21. Specifically, in order to display the customer waiting screen on the effect display device 21 as if the customer waiting state has elapsed when the predetermined customer waiting time during the timekeeping has elapsed without displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. Stores the customer waiting command in the transmission data storage area for production. If the predetermined customer waiting time has not elapsed, no processing is performed here. Then, the special symbol change start process is terminated.
If the variation display of the special symbol is started during the timekeeping of the predetermined customer waiting time, the timekeeping is ended.

Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104.
Since the processes of steps 6100 to 6101 are almost the same as the processes of steps 1001 to 1002 of the special symbol fluctuation stop process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here, and the process proceeds to the next step 6102.
In step 6102, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed (confirmed) in the effect transmission data storage area. Further, when the main management state is changed, the main CPU 101 stores a state change designation command including the changed main management state in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6103.
Since the process of step 6103 is almost the same as the process of step 1004 of the special symbol fluctuation stop process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here. Then, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing executed after the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105.
Since the processing of steps 6200 to 6201 is almost the same as the processing of steps 1101 to 1102 of the post-stop processing in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here, and the process proceeds to the next step 6202.
In step 6202, the main CPU 101 executes the time saving number update process. Since the time reduction number update process is almost the same as the time reduction number update process (step 1103) of the post-stop processing in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here. Further, the main CPU 101 is in the first low-probability time-saving game state (that is, when the first time-saving game flag is on) or in the second low-probability time-saving game state (that is, when the second time-saving game flag is on). In the case of), the remaining time reduction command indicating the remaining time reduction number, which is the remaining time reduction number, is stored in the production transmission data storage area. When the remaining time reduction command indicating that the remaining time reduction number is 0 is stored in the transmission data storage area for production, the first low probability time reduction game state or the second low probability time reduction game state that was being set is changed. Since it is finished (the first time-saving game flag is turned off or the second time-saving game flag is turned off), after that, the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is reached again. The remaining time reduction command is not stored in the effect transmission data storage area until is set (that is, the remaining time reduction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 300). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6203.

Since the processing of steps 6203 to 6207 is almost the same as the processing of steps 1105 to 1109 of the post-stop processing in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here.
In step 6208, which proceeds when it is determined that the special symbol stopped and displayed in step 6203 is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation number count execution process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6209.

Since the process of step 6209 is almost the same as the process of step 1111 of the post-stop process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here.
In step 6210, which proceeds when it is determined that the special symbol stopped and displayed in step 6209 is a small hit symbol, the main CPU 101 determines the game state at the time of winning the small hit and the type of the stopped displayed small hit symbol (small hit). A small hit winning command for transmitting the symbols Y1 and Y2) to the sub-control board 300 is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6211.
The process of step 6211 is substantially the same as the process of step 1112 of the post-stop process in the above-described embodiment, and the process of step 6212 is substantially the same as the process of step 1116 of the post-stop process in the above-described embodiment. Since it is the same, the explanation is omitted here. Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the time-saving activation number count execution process in step 6208 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 106.
Since the processes of steps 6250 to 6251 are almost the same as the processes of steps 5301 to 5302 of the time-saving activation number count execution process in the other application example 8 described above, the description thereof is omitted here and the next step 6252 is performed. move on.
In step 6252, the main CPU 101 stores the remaining time reduction activation number command indicating the remaining time reduction activation number, which is the remaining time reduction activation number, in the production transmission data storage area. When the remaining time reduction activation number command indicating that the remaining time reduction activation number is 0 is stored in the transmission data storage area for production, the counting of the remaining time reduction activation number ends and the first low probability time reduction game state is set. Therefore, after that, the remaining time reduction activation number command is not stored in the production transmission data storage area until the counting of the time reduction activation number is started again (that is, the remaining time reduction activation number is transmitted to the sub-control board 300). Not done). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6253.

Since the processes of steps 6253 to 6256 are almost the same as the processes of steps 5303 to 5306 of the time-saving activation number count execution process in the other application example 8 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. Then, the time-saving activation count execution process is terminated.

Next, the small hit game control process executed during the small hit game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107.
Since the processes of steps 6300 to 6306 are substantially the same as the processes of steps 1251 to 1257 of the small hit game control process in the above-described embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here, and the process proceeds to the next step 6307.
In step 6307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined number (1) of game balls have passed through the special area during the small hit game. Then, if it is determined that the passage has passed, the process proceeds to step 6309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has not been passed, the process proceeds to the next step 6308.

In step 6308, the main CPU 101 confirms the set game state, and stores the game state command indicating the game state in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the small hit game control process is terminated.
Further, in step 6309, which proceeds when it is determined in step 6307 that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the special area during the small hit game, the main CPU 101 resets the current game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6310.

In step 6310, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and issues an opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the transmission data storage area for effect. Remember in. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6311.
In step 6311, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "10" as the number of rounds if the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed is Y1, and sets the number of rounds as the number of rounds if the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed is Y2. Set "4". Then, the post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the special game end process executed after the special game is completed will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 108.
In step 6400, the main CPU 101 executes a second low-probability time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the second low-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, the second time-saving game flag is turned on, and the game state set at the time of winning the big hit and the determined big hit symbol, or the game state set at the time of winning the small hit are set for the number of times of time reduction. And the value (25 times or 71 times) according to the determined small hit symbol is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6401.
Since the processes of steps 6401 to 6402 are almost the same as the processes of steps 5401 to 5402 of the special game end process in the other application example 8 described above, the description thereof is omitted here and the process proceeds to the next step 6403.
In step 6403, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving activation number counter to the time-saving activation number counter "666". Then, the special game end process is terminated.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the same RAM clearing process as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 described above is executed, but the description thereof is omitted here.

(Overview of the display of the background image and the display regarding the remaining number of time reductions)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, a normal background image, a time-saving background image, and a special background image are provided as background images displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 (FIGS. 109 and 110). (See), the background image corresponding to each gaming state or the main management state is displayed on the display unit 21a.

Specifically, a normal background image is displayed during the normal game state. During the second low-probability time-saving game state of 25 times of time reduction, and during the change of the special symbol based on the second special figure random number that was held and stored at the end of the second low-probability time-saving game state, the special background The image is displayed. During the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times of time reduction, and during the change of the special symbol based on the second special figure random number that was held and stored at the end of the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the first. During the low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving background image is displayed.
Then, when the gaming state or the main management state is switched, the displayed background image is also switched at the same time (see FIGS. 109 and 110).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, during the period described later in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state and during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, a predetermined position of the display unit 21a (in the other application example 10). , Upper right corner), every time the special symbol changes (variation effect), the countdown display of the remaining number of time reductions is performed, and the remaining number of time reductions is a predetermined specific value (other application examples). In 10, when the value is 100 or less and the ones digit is 0, and the value is 10 or less), the size is larger than the display at the above-mentioned predetermined position by being superimposed on the effect symbol 50 at the center of the display unit 21a. The remaining number of times to display the remaining number of time reductions is displayed (see FIGS. 109 and 110).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, at the start of the special game based on the big hit winning, at the start of the small hit game based on the small hit winning, and at the time of setting the first low probability time saving game state. , Right-handed display indicating that the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b (in another application example 10, the display "→→→ right-handed →→→" (see FIG. 110 (b)). ) Is performed.
During the special game executed via the small hit game, the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b following the small hit game, but the above-mentioned right-handed display is displayed at the start of the small hit game. Since it is performed, the above-mentioned right-handed display is omitted (not executed) at the start of the above-mentioned special game. Similarly, during the second low-probability time-saving game state set after the end of the special game, the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b following the special game, but at the start of the special game or at the start of the special game, or Since the above-mentioned right-handed display is performed at the start of the small hit game that triggers the execution of the special game, the above-mentioned right-handed display is omitted when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set.
Further, although not particularly shown, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 is provided with a right-handed display lamp connected to the main control board 100 on the upper right side of the effect display device 21, and is provided with the main CPU 101. Always lights and displays the right-handed display lamp during the special game, the small hit game, the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the second low-probability time-saving game state.

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned various indications will be described more specifically.
(1) After the end of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot in the normal game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state of 25 times of time reduction is set, and the special game is executed during this second low-probability time-saving game state. Case Although not particularly shown, at the start of the special game based on the winning of the jackpot during the normal game state, the above-mentioned right-handed display is performed and the above-mentioned right-handed display lamp lighting display is started. Further, at the end of the special game, the display unit 21a displays a special game ending image indicating that the special game being executed ends (see FIG. 109 (a)).

Then, with the setting of the second low probability time-saving game state of 25 times of time reduction based on the end of the above-mentioned special game, the display unit 21a displays the special background image and the second low of 25 times of time reduction. A display indicating that the probability time reduction game state has been set (in another application example 10, a display of "RUSH rush challenge!") Is performed (see FIG. 109 (b)).

Although not shown in particular, during the second low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of time-savings is 25, it is possible to execute a winning / failing lottery and a variation effect based on a maximum of 25 times of the second special figure random number, and the second low-probability time-saving is performed. If the second special figure random number is reserved and stored at the end of the game state, it is possible to execute a winning / fail lottery and a variable effect based on the second special figure random number up to four times. That is, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the winning / fail lottery and the variation effect based on the second special figure random number up to 29 times are executed, but in each variation effect, the characters confront each other. The image of is displayed, and the result of the winning / losing lottery (big hit, small hit or loss) is notified by the result of this confrontation. Then, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit or a small hit, a display indicating that fact (displayed as "WIN!" In another application example 10) is performed (see FIG. 109 (c)). If a big hit is won, a special game is executed, if a small hit is won, a small hit game is executed, and a special game is executed through the small hit game. Further, even at the end of the special game, the above-mentioned special game ending image is displayed on the display unit 21a (see FIG. 109 (d)).

After the end of this special game, as described above, the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times of time-saving is set. Along with this setting, the display unit 21a displays a time-saving background image and displays indicating that the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times of time-saving is set (in another application example 10, it is called "RUSH start!". (Display) is performed, and at the upper right corner of the display unit 21a, the initial value of the remaining number of time reductions for which the countdown display is performed is displayed (in another application example 10, the display of “remaining 71”) is performed (FIG. 109). See (e).

After that, every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the variable pattern command or the customer waiting start command transmitted from the main control board 100 is sub-controlled when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed. Based on the reception by the board 300, the countdown display of the remaining number of time reductions is performed (see FIG. 109 (f)), and when the remaining number of time reductions is the above-mentioned specific value, in the center of the display unit 21a. The above-mentioned remaining number of times is displayed (see FIG. 109 (f)).
For example, when the number of remaining time reductions is "50", which is a specific value, a display indicating that the number of remaining time reductions is "50" in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a (in another application example 10, it is referred to as "remaining 50"). (Display) is performed, and at the center of the display unit 21a, the remaining number of times is displayed (in another application example 10, the display of “remaining 50 times”) is performed (see FIG. 109 (f)).
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, all the values of 10 times or less are set as specific values, so that the remaining time reduction number is displayed every time from 10 times to 0 times. Each time, the remaining number of times is displayed.

Then, when the special symbol is changed 71 times without executing the special game, the remaining number of time reductions is displayed as "0" (displayed as "remaining 0") and the remaining number of times. A fanning display (display of "0 times remaining") is performed (see FIG. 109 (g)).

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, when the 71st special symbol change is completed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game is performed at the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The gaming state that was in the state is changed to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, the main management state, which was the second low-probability time-saving final state, is changed to the second low-probability time-saving hold state when the second special figure random number is reserved and stored.
Further, at the time of the stop display of the above-mentioned special symbol, a state change designation command indicating that the main management state after the change is the second low-probability time-saving hold state is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. As a result, at the time of the stop display of the above-mentioned special symbol, it is grasped that the main management state after the change is the second low probability time saving hold state (the game state being set is the normal game state) in the sub control board 300. You can do it.
Then, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the gaming state being set is the normal gaming state, but when the main management state is the second low probability time saving hold state, the second low probability time saving state is concerned. Until the hold state is changed to the normal A state, the displayed time-saving background image is continuously displayed (see FIG. 109 (h)).
Further, when the main management state is changed to the second low probability time saving hold state, the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the stop display time elapses, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 100 is issued. Based on the reception by the sub-control board 300, a display indicating that the main management state is the second low-probability time-saving hold state (in another application example 10, a display of "final chance !!") is performed. , The display of the remaining time reduction number is cleared (see FIG. 109 (h)).
The right-handed display lamp that has been lit is turned off by the main CPU 101 when the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and the stop display time has elapsed.

After that, when the change of the special symbol based on all the second special symbol random numbers stored in the hold is completed, the game state being set remains the normal game state at the time of the stop display of the special symbol, and the second low probability time is shortened. The main management state, which was in the hold state, is usually changed to the A state. Further, at the time of the stop display of the special symbol, a state change designation command indicating that the main management state after the change is the normal A state is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. As a result, at the time of the stop display of the above-mentioned special symbol, it is possible to grasp that the main management state after the change is the normal A state (the game state being set is the normal game state) on the sub control board 300. It has become.
Then, when the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, the sub-control board 300 receives the variation pattern command or the customer waiting start command transmitted from the main control board 100, and is displaying the display. Switching of the time-saving background image to the normal background image, display indicating that the second low-probability time-saving game state has ended (in another application example 10, the display "RUSH end"), and the game toward the first game area 12a. A left-handed display (in another application example 10, “←←← left-handed ←←←”), which is a display indicating that the ball is to be launched, is performed (see FIGS. 109 (i) to 109 (j)).

(2) When the count value of the time reduction activation number counter reaches the time reduction activation number (666 times) during the normal game state and the first low probability time reduction game state is set After the normal game state is set after the RAM is cleared. Or, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game, if the special symbol is changed 666 times without executing the special game (that is, the count value of the time-saving activation count counter is changed). (When the number of time reduction activations is reached), the first low probability time reduction game state is set at the time of the stop display of the special symbol, and the main management state that was the state before the first low probability time reduction arrival is the first low probability time reduction. It is changed to the state.
Further, at the time of the stop display of the above-mentioned special symbol, a state change designation command indicating that the changed main management state is the first low probability time saving state is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. As a result, at the time of the stop display of the above-mentioned special symbol, the main management state after the change is the first low-probability time-saving state (the game state being set is the first low-probability time-saving game state) in the sub-control board 300. It is possible to grasp.

Then, when the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, the display unit 21a is based on the fact that the sub-control board 300 receives the variation pattern command or the customer waiting start command transmitted from the main control board 100. In the display indicating that the normal background image being displayed is switched to the time-saving background image and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (in another application example 10, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set). The display "RUSH start!" Is performed in the same manner as the display indicating that effect, and the above-mentioned right-handed display is performed (see FIGS. 110 (a) to 110 (b)).
However, unlike the time when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, at this point, the initial value "171" of the remaining time-saving number of times for which the countdown display is performed is not displayed (see FIG. 110 (b)).

After that, when the change of the special symbol is executed and the remaining time reduction number reaches 100 times, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the stop display time elapses, the fluctuation pattern command or the customer wait sent from the main control board 100. Based on the reception of the start command by the sub-control board 300, the remaining time reduction number of times is displayed (display of "remaining 100 times"), and the above-mentioned remaining number of times is displayed (display of "remaining 100 times"). (See FIG. 110 (c)).

After that, every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the variable pattern command or the customer waiting start command transmitted from the main control board 100 is sub-controlled when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed. Based on the reception by the board 300, the countdown display of the remaining number of time reductions is performed (see FIG. 110 (d)), and when the remaining number of time reductions is the above-mentioned specific value, in the center of the display unit 21a. The above-mentioned remaining number of times is displayed (see FIG. 110 (d)).

Then, when the special symbol is changed 171 times without executing the special game, a display indicating that the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (display of "remaining 0") is displayed and the remaining number of times is displayed. A fanning display (display of "0 times remaining") is performed (see FIG. 110 (e)).

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, when the change of the 171st special symbol is completed during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game is performed at the time when the stop display of the special symbol is completed. The gaming state that was in the state is changed to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, the main management state, which was the first low-probability time-saving state, is usually changed to the B state regardless of the presence or absence of the reserved storage of the second special figure random number.
Further, at the time of the stop display of the above-mentioned special symbol, a state change designation command indicating that the main management state after the change is the normal B state is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. As a result, at the time of the stop display of the above-mentioned special symbol, it is possible to grasp on the sub-control board 300 that the changed main management state is the normal B state (the game state being set is the normal game state). It has become.
Then, when the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, the sub-control board 300 receives the variation pattern command or the customer waiting start command transmitted from the main control board 100, and is displaying the display. Switching the time-saving background image to the normal background image, and displaying that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state has ended (in another application example 10, the same as the display indicating that the second low-probability time-saving gaming state has ended). The display "RUSH end") is performed, and the above-mentioned left-handed display is performed (see FIGS. 110 (f) to (g)).
The right-handed display lamp that has been lit is turned off by the main CPU 101 when the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and the stop display time has elapsed.

(Background image correction process)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, when the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time elapses, the sub CPU 301 receives the variation pattern command or the customer waiting start command transmitted from the main control board 100. Based on this, after referring to the status confirmation command attached to the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting start command, it is determined whether the background image corresponding to the main management status indicated by the status confirmation command is displayed. Then, when it is determined that the background image corresponding to the main management state is not displayed, the sub CPU 301 corrects the background image by switching the displayed background image to the background image corresponding to the above-mentioned main management state. It is designed to perform processing.
As a result, even if the background image is erroneously displayed due to noise or the like, it corresponds to the main management state being set when the next special symbol variation display is started. Appropriate background images are displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, in the second low-probability time-saving game state set through the execution of the special game, the initial number of remaining time-saving times is set at the start of setting the game state. The value is displayed, and while the countdown display of the remaining time reduction number is performed from this point, the number of variation display of the special symbol reaches the time reduction activation number without executing the special game (that is, it is set. In the first low-probability time-saving game state (which is set without executing a special game), the initial value of the remaining time-saving number of times is not displayed and the countdown display is not performed at the start of setting the game state, and the remaining time-saving games are displayed. When the number of time reductions reaches a predetermined number of display start times (100 times in another application example 10), the initial value of the remaining number of time reductions is displayed and the countdown display is started. ..
That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state set through the execution of the special game and the first low-probability time-saving game state set without the execution of the special game, the mode of displaying the suggestion regarding the number of time reductions. Is different.
As a result, by confirming the difference in the display of the suggestion regarding the number of time reductions, it is possible to infer whether the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Can enhance the interest of.

Further, although the number of time reductions set in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 171 times, for example, a big hit or a small hit is won and a special game is executed as soon as the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. If so, after the end of the special game, the second low-probability time-saving game state of 71 times, which is significantly less than the time-saving number of times in the first low-probability time-saving game state, is set. Therefore, if the remaining time reduction number of 171 times is displayed at the time of setting the first low probability time reduction game state and the countdown display is started, there is a possibility that the player may feel a loss in the above case. be.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the countdown display is started when the remaining number of time reductions reaches the above-mentioned predetermined display start number (100 times), so that the countdown display is started before the countdown display is started. When a big hit or a small hit is won, the player cannot accurately grasp the remaining number of time reductions at the time of the winning. This makes it possible to reduce the feeling of loss as described above.

Further, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, after the remaining number of time reductions is equal to or less than the maximum number of time reductions (71 times) that can be set in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is concerned. Since the suggestion regarding the number of time reductions is displayed in the same manner as in the above, it is possible to give the player the same gaming feeling as in the second low probability time reduction gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, when the main management state (game state) is changed, the state change designation transmitted from the main control board 100 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the sub-control board 300 receives the command, the sub-control board 300 grasps the changed main management state (game state). After that, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, the sub-control board 300 receives the variation pattern command or the customer waiting start command transmitted from the main control board 100, whereby the sub-control board 300 receives the stop display. A predetermined effect (for example, execution of right-handed display, switching of background image) is executed according to the mode according to the changed main management state (game state).
As a result, it is possible to prepare the data and the like of the effect according to the changed main management state (game state) at a time before actually executing the effect, so that the sub CPU 301 and the sub CPU 301 and the sub CPU 301 can be prepared. It is possible to reduce the processing load on hardware resources such as RAM 303.

Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, the sub-control board 300 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting start command transmitted from the main control board 100, so that the main management state is changed. It is possible to execute the above-mentioned background image correction process, which is the same process as the background image switching executed at that time.
That is, since the same processing is executed at the same timing, the processing program used to execute these processing can be shared, and the processing load on the hardware resources such as the sub CPU 301 and the sub RAM 303 can be shared. Can be mitigated.

(Outline of execution of look-ahead effect)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the first special figure random number is held and stored in the normal gaming state, or the second special figure in the first low probability time saving game state or the second low probability time saving gaming state. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect targeting the hold storage of random numbers.
This look-ahead effect can be executed when a predetermined variation pattern command (in another application example 10, the variation pattern command in which the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is defined) is determined for the stored hold. , A variation effect based on a hold (hereinafter, also referred to as a target change effect) based on this hold (hereinafter, also referred to as a target hold) is being executed, or a change effect based on a hold stored prior to the target hold (hereinafter, a pre-target change). The effect display device 21 displays a specific suggestion image suggesting that the expectation of winning a big hit or a small hit is high, straddling a plurality of variable effects from the effect) to the target variable effect. ..

In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the execution mode of the look-ahead effect (displayed specific suggestion image) is performed in the normal gaming state and in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. (Types, etc.) are different.

Further, although not particularly shown, the sub ROM 302 of the sub control board 300 stores a look-ahead effect determination table for determining whether or not the above-mentioned look-ahead effect can be executed.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number acquired at the time of entering the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16. , A pre-determination process is executed in which a variation pattern command (variation pattern) determined as a result of the winning / failing lottery is determined, and a pre-determination command including the determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. When the sub CPU 301 receives the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 100, the sub CPU 301 determines the determination result (variation pattern command (variation pattern) determined as a result of the winning / failing lottery) included in the pre-determination command in the sub RAM 303. Store in the storage area of.
Further, the sub CPU 301 receives the pre-determination command (when the first special figure random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 15 is acquired, the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 16). Whether or not a predetermined variation pattern command is stored in the above-mentioned predetermined storage area at the time of acquiring the second special symbol random number based on the above (when acquiring the second special symbol random number) and when receiving the symbol confirmation command (when displaying the stop display of the special symbol). judge. Then, when the fluctuation pattern command is stored, the above-mentioned look-ahead effect determination table is referred to for the hold related to the fluctuation pattern command, and the result of the winning / failing lottery (big hit, small hit, loss) or the like is obtained. Based on this, it is decided whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. When it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the above-mentioned hold, the look-ahead effect for which the above-mentioned hold is the target hold is executed from the time of the decision.

Although not shown in particular, the above-mentioned look-ahead effect determination table is set so that the determination ratio for executing the look-ahead effect differs depending on the result of the winning / failing lottery (big hit, small hit, loss). .. As a result, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit or a small hit differs depending on whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed.

For example, if it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the target hold during the normal gaming state, the look-ahead is placed in the center of the display unit 21a at the time of the determination (for example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed). After the pre-reading execution image (in another application example 10, the image "Red ZONE") indicating that the effect is executed is displayed (see FIG. 111 (c)), the above-mentioned above is displayed on the right side of the display unit 21a. A specific suggestion image corresponding to the look-ahead effect (in another application example 10, a band image with the characters "Red ZONE") is displayed (see FIG. 111 (d)). Then, after that, the above-mentioned specific suggestion image continues to be displayed until a predetermined end point in the target variation effect (for example, a time point when the reach display is performed) (see FIGS. 111 (d) to (f)).

Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the target hold during the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, at the time of the determination (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed). In the center of the display unit 21a, a look-ahead execution image showing that the look-ahead effect is executed in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (in another application example 10, an image called "mode UP"). ) Is displayed (see FIG. 112 (c)), and a specific suggestion image corresponding to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect (in another application example 10, the word “mode UP” is added to the lower part of the display unit 21a). Band image) is displayed (see FIG. 112 (d)). Then, after that, the above-mentioned specific suggestion image continues to be displayed until a predetermined end point (time point when the reach display is performed) in the target variation effect (see FIGS. 112 (d) to 112 (f)).
In FIGS. 111 and 112, the solid circles indicate the reserved images indicating that the hold storage has been performed, and the black circles represent the hold images of the target hold.

(Control of prohibition of look-ahead production)
For example, if the first special symbol random number is newly held and stored during the change of the special symbol immediately before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set (the first hold number is 2), the hold is set as the target hold. The execution of the look-ahead effect may be decided. Here, when the fluctuation of the above-mentioned special symbol ends, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the displayed normal background image is switched to the time-saving background image, but the look-ahead effect determined as described above is the first. 1 Even after the low-probability time-saving game state is set and the time-saving background image is displayed, it is continuously executed. Then, the look-ahead effect of the mode corresponding to the normal game state is executed during the display of the time-saving background image, which causes a contradiction in the effect.
Further, at the end of the normal game state, after the normal game state has ended and the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set, and before the game ball enters the second start winning opening 16. The execution of the look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect in a mode corresponding to the normal game state) may be determined with the stored first special figure random number hold as the target hold. Further, a look-ahead effect (1st low-probability time-saving game state or 2nd low) is set for the hold of the 2nd special figure random number immediately before or after the end of the 1st low-probability time-saving game state or the 2nd low-probability time-saving game state. In some cases, it may be decided to execute the look-ahead effect) in a mode according to the probability time saving game state. In these cases as well, a contradiction in production will occur as described above.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, before and after the normal gaming state ends and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, in order to prevent the above-mentioned contradiction in the production from occurring, And, before and after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state are completed and the normal gaming state is set, the control for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect (decision to execute the look-ahead effect) (in other words, rephrase). For example, control that limits the execution of the look-ahead effect) is performed.

Hereinafter, the control of prohibiting the look-ahead effect will be described in detail.
(1) Before and after the normal gaming state (main management state is the normal A state) set after the RAM is cleared or after the end of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is terminated and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the RAM is cleared. During the normal gaming state set after or after the end of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 301 has the remaining amount transmitted from the main control board 100 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed. Remaining until the normal game state ends and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the predetermined remaining time-saving activation number counter (configured by the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303) based on the reception of the time-saving activation number command. Memorize the number of time-saving activations. When the value of the remaining time reduction activation count counter reaches a predetermined prohibition start value (“8” in another application example 10), a predetermined look-ahead effect prohibition fluctuation count counter (composed of a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303). Is set to the number of fluctuations in the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited (“8” in another application example 10) before the setting of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. After that, each time the sub CPU 301 receives the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 100 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 301 decrements the value of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter by one. Further, when the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter becomes "0", the sub CPU 301 changes the number of changes in the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited after the setting of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (in another application example 10). “6”) is set, and the value of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter is decremented by 1 each time the symbol confirmation command is received in the same manner as described above.
Then, the sub CPU 301 prohibits the determination of execution of the look-ahead effect when the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter is 1 or more.
As a result, after the change of the special symbol eight times before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set (variation effect) is started, the change of the special symbol six times after the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state (variation effect) During the period from the end of the variation effect) to the stop display (that is, during the execution of 14 special symbol changes before and after the setting of the first low-probability time-saving game state), the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited. Become.

(2) Before and after the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the sub CPU 301 is displayed when the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time elapses. Based on the reception of the remaining time reduction number command transmitted from the main control board 100, the second low probability time reduction game state ends in the predetermined remaining time reduction counter (consisting of the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303), and the normal game Memorize the number of remaining time reduction activations until the state is set. When the value of the remaining time reduction activation count counter reaches a predetermined prohibition start value (“6” in another application example 10), the pre-reading effect prohibition frequency counter described above is set to the pre-reading effect before the normal gaming state is set. The number of fluctuations in the period during which the execution of is prohibited (“6” in another application example 10) is set. After that, each time the sub CPU 301 receives the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 100 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 301 decrements the value of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter by one. Further, when the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition change number counter becomes "0", the sub CPU 301 has a change number of times during the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited after the normal gaming state is set ("4" in another application example 10). Is set, and in the same manner as described above, the value of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect prohibition fluctuation count counter is decremented by 1 each time the symbol confirmation command is received.
Then, the sub CPU 301 prohibits the determination of execution of the look-ahead effect when the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter is 1 or more.
As a result, after the change of the special symbol 6 times before the normal game state is set (variation effect) is started, the change of the special symbol 4 times after the setting of the normal game state is finished and the stop display is displayed. During the period until it is set (that is, during the execution of the change of the special symbol 10 times before and after the setting of the normal game state), the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited.

As described above, after the second low-probability time-saving game state ends, the time-saving background image is displayed until the second low-probability time-saving hold state set as the main management state ends, and the main management state is normal. When the state is changed to the A state, the displayed time-saving background image is switched to the normal background image. The maximum number of second special figure random numbers that may be stored at the end of the second low-probability time-saving game state is four, and the maximum number of special symbols is four after the second low-probability time-saving game state ends. Since the time-saving background image is displayed until the fluctuation of is completed, the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited while the time-saving background image is displayed.

(3) Before and after the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set During the first low-probability time-saving game state, the sub CPU 301 is displayed when the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time elapses. , Based on the reception of the remaining time reduction number command transmitted from the main control board 100, the remaining time reduction activation number until the first low probability time reduction game state ends and the normal game state is set is stored in the remaining time reduction number counter. do. When the value of the remaining time reduction activation count counter reaches a predetermined prohibition start value (“6” in another application example 10), the pre-reading effect prohibition frequency counter described above is set to the pre-reading effect before the normal gaming state is set. The number of fluctuations in the period during which the execution of is prohibited (“6” in another application example 10) is set. After that, each time the sub CPU 301 receives the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 100 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 301 decrements the value of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter by one. Further, when the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition change number counter becomes "0", the sub CPU 301 has a change number of times during the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited after the normal gaming state is set ("4" in another application example 10). Is set, and in the same manner as described above, the value of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect prohibition fluctuation count counter is decremented by 1 each time the symbol confirmation command is received.
Then, the sub CPU 301 prohibits the determination of execution of the look-ahead effect when the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter is 1 or more.
As a result, after the change of the special symbol 6 times before the normal game state is set (variation effect) is started, the change of the special symbol 4 times after the setting of the normal game state is finished and the stop display is displayed. During the period until it is set (that is, during the execution of the change of the special symbol 10 times before and after the setting of the normal game state), the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited.

As described above, when the first low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set (when the main management state is changed from the first low-probability time-saving state to the normal B state), it is displayed. The time-saving background image is switched to the normal background image. That is, unlike the end of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the background image is switched to the normal background image at the end of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, but after that, until the four special symbol changes are completed. Is prohibited from executing the look-ahead effect as in (2) above.

(4) During the normal gaming state (main management state is the normal B state) set after the end of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the number of time-saving activations is performed. After the count value of the counter reaches the number of times of time reduction activation and the first low probability time reduction game state is set, the first low probability time reduction game state cannot be set again until the next special game is executed. That is, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, after the change of 171 special symbols, which is the number of time-saving times, is completed without the special game being executed and the normal game state is set (the main management state is normal B). After switching to the state), the first low-probability time-saving game state is not set even if the above-mentioned change in the special symbol of the time-saving activation number is executed again without executing the special game. Then, it is not necessary to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect during the normal gaming state (while the main management state is the normal B state) set after the end of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state.
Then, as described above, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is completed and the normal game state is set, the time-saving activation number counter does not count, so the value of the remaining time-saving activation number remains 0. Will be. Further, since it is not necessary to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect, the above-mentioned prohibition start value and the number of fluctuations in the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited are not defined, and the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter is also 0. Will remain.
Therefore, after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is completed and the normal gaming state is set, the sub CPU 301 determines that the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition change count counter is not 1 or more, and therefore determines the execution of the look-ahead effect. Not prohibited.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, before and after the end of the normal gaming state set after the RAM is cleared or after the end of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the end of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. Since the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited before and after, and before and after the end of the second low-probability time-saving game state, it is possible to prevent the situation where the above-mentioned contradiction of the effect occurs.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, before and after the end of the normal gaming state set after the RAM is cleared or after the end of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, before and after the end of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the first 2 The prohibition of execution of the look-ahead effect is controlled by almost the same control method (processing) before and after the end of the low-probability time-saving gaming state. As a result, the processing program for controlling the prohibition of execution of the look-ahead effect can be standardized, and the processing load on the hardware resources such as the sub CPU 301 and the sub RAM 303 can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, in the normal gaming state set after the RAM is cleared or after the end of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, a predetermined number of times (the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set). Control is performed so that the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited (restricted) during the change (during the change effect) of the special symbol (from 8 times before the game is performed to just before the second low-probability time-saving game state is set). However, in the normal gaming state set after the end of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited (restricted) during the change of the above-mentioned predetermined number of special symbols (during the change effect). It is designed so that it is not controlled.
As a result, even in the same gaming state, the execution opportunity of the look-ahead effect can be different, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

Before and after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and before and after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set, the look-ahead effect is executed. The period during which the prohibited (restricted) control is performed is different, but this period is not particularly limited and can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine P. For example, before and after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and before and after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set, the look-ahead effect is executed. The period during which the prohibited (restricted) control is performed may be the same.

Next, among the various processes on the sub-control board 300, the processes for executing the above-mentioned background image switching, right-handed display, left-handed display, and pre-reading effect control will be described with reference to the flowchart.

First, the pre-determination command reception process executed when the pre-determination command is received from the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 113.
In step 6500, the sub CPU 301 stores the result of the pre-determination (result of the winning / failing lottery, the variation pattern command) included in the received pre-determination command in the corresponding storage unit in the reserved storage area.
Here, the reserved storage area is provided in the sub RAM 303, and the first reserved storage area in which the result of the preliminary determination for the first special figure random number is stored and the result of the preliminary determination for the second special figure random number are stored. It is composed of a second reserved storage area to be stored. The first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area each include a total of four storage units, that is, a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit. When a pre-determination command is received, the result of the pre-determination is stored in the first storage unit. It is designed to be memorized in order from the part. Further, although not particularly shown, when the sub CPU 301 receives the variation pattern command, the sub CPU 301 performs a shift process of each storage unit of the corresponding reserved storage area. Specifically, the result of the pre-determination stored in the first storage unit is shifted to a predetermined processing storage unit provided in the sub RAM 303, and the pre-determination is stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit. The result of the determination is shifted to the storage unit having a smaller number.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6501.

In step 6501, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect control process related to the execution of the look-ahead effect. Then, the pre-determination command reception process is terminated.

Next, the state change designation command reception process executed when the state change designation command is received from the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 114.
In step 6600, the sub CPU 301 stores the main management state included in the received state change designation command in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6601.
In step 6601, when the sub CPU 301 needs to switch the background image and execute the right-handed display or the left-handed display when the above-mentioned main management state is set, the sub CPU 301 turns on the switching flag indicating that fact. .. This switching flag is off in the initial state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6602.

In step 6602, the sub CPU 301 acquires the effect data (switching background image, right-handed display, left-handed display image, etc.) according to the above-mentioned main management state from the sub ROM 302. Then, the state change specification command reception process is terminated.

Next, the command reception process after the lapse of the stop display time, which is executed when the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting start command is received from the main control board 100 after the lapse of the stop display time, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115. ..
In step 6700, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the switching flag is on. Then, if it is determined that the switching flag is not on (that is, it is off), the process proceeds to step 6703. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switching flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 6701.
In step 6701, the sub CPU 301 executes a predetermined effect (switching of the background image, right-handed display or left-handed display) based on the effect data acquired in step 6602 described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6702.

In step 6702, the sub CPU 301 turns off the switching flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6703.
In step 6703, the sub CPU 301 stores the main management state included in the status confirmation command received accompanying the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting start command in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6704.

In step 6704, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the background image corresponding to the main management state stored in step 6703 is displayed. Then, when it is determined that the background image corresponding to the main management state is displayed, the command reception process is terminated after the stop display time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the background image corresponding to the main management state is not displayed, the process proceeds to the next step 6705.
In step 6705, the sub CPU 301 executes switching of the background image (that is, background image correction processing) corresponding to the main management state stored in the above-mentioned step 6703. Then, after the stop display time has elapsed, the command reception process is terminated.

Next, the remaining time reduction activation number command reception process executed when the remaining time reduction activation number command is received from the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 116.
In step 6800, the sub CPU 301 stores the number of remaining time reduction activations included in the received remaining time reduction activation number command in the remaining time reduction activation number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6801.
In step 6801, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the remaining time reduction activation number counter is a predetermined prohibition start value. Then, when it is determined that the value is not the prohibited start value, the command reception process for the number of remaining short-time activations is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prohibition start value is set, the process proceeds to the next step 6802.

In step 6802, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of fluctuations in the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited before the gaming state is changed to the read-ahead effect prohibition change number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6803.
In step 6803, the sub CPU 301 turns on the pre-change count set flag indicating that the above-mentioned fluctuation count has been set in the look-ahead effect prohibition fluctuation count counter. In the initial state, this pre-change count set flag is off. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6804.

In step 6804, the sub CPU 301 turns on the look-ahead prohibition flag indicating that the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited. In the initial state, this look-ahead prohibition flag is off. Then, the command reception process for the number of times the remaining time is shortened is terminated.

Next, the remaining time reduction command reception process executed when the remaining time reduction command is received from the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117.
In step 6900, the sub CPU 301 stores the remaining time reduction number included in the received remaining time reduction number command in the remaining time reduction counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6901.
In step 6901, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the remaining time reduction counter is a predetermined prohibited start value. Then, when it is determined that the value is not the prohibited start value, the command reception process for the remaining time reduction is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prohibition start value is set, the process proceeds to the next step 6902.

In step 6902, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of fluctuations in the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited before the gaming state is changed to the read-ahead effect prohibition change number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6903.
In step 6903, the sub CPU 301 turns on the pre-change count set flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 6904.

In step 6904, the sub CPU 301 turns on the read-ahead prohibition flag. Then, the remaining time reduction command reception process is terminated.

Next, the symbol confirmation command reception process executed when the symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118.
In step 7000, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition fluctuation count counter is 1 or more. If it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, it is 0), the process proceeds to step 7007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is 1 or more, the process proceeds to the next step 7001.
In step 7001, the sub CPU 301 decrements the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition fluctuation count counter by one. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7002.

In step 7002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead effect prohibition fluctuation count counter is 0. Then, if it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more), the process proceeds to step 7007. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0, the process proceeds to the next step 7003.
In step 7003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pre-change count set flag is on. Then, if it is determined that the pre-change count set flag is not on (that is, off), the process proceeds to step 7006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-change count set flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 7004.

In step 7004, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of fluctuations in the period during which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited after the gaming state is changed to the read-ahead effect prohibition change number counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7005.
In step 7005, the sub CPU 301 turns off the pre-change count set flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 7007.

Further, in step 7006, which proceeds when it is determined in step 7003 above that the pre-change count set flag is not on, the sub CPU 301 turns off the look-ahead prohibition flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7007.
In step 7007, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect control process. Then, the symbol confirmation command reception process is terminated.

Next, the look-ahead effect control process of step 6501 and step 7007 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 119.
In step 7100, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the read-ahead prohibition flag is on. Then, when it is determined that the look-ahead prohibition flag is on, the look-ahead effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read-ahead prohibition flag is not on (that is, it is off), the process proceeds to the next step 7101.
In step 7101, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed, provided that other prohibition conditions such as the execution of the look-ahead effect being executed and the execution of the look-ahead effect have already been determined are not satisfied. decide. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 7102.
In step 7102, when the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined in step 7101 described above, the sub CPU 301 sets the read-ahead effect execution command for executing the determined look-ahead effect in the transmission buffer. The look-ahead effect execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards, and these control boards control to execute the look-ahead effect based on the received look-ahead effect execution command. Then, the look-ahead effect control process is terminated.

(Modification example of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10)
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the remaining number of time reductions in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is directly displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the number of times. However, the mode of the suggestion is not limited to such a direct display, but is indirectly due to a figure or character that changes as the number of remaining time reductions decreases. The display may indicate the remaining number of time reductions.
Specifically, as a display suggesting the initial value of the remaining time reductions, images of multiple lit candles are displayed, and as the remaining time reductions decrease (the special symbol changes). By displaying that the candles are gradually burning (every time) and that all the candles are burned out when the remaining number of time reductions becomes 0, until the remaining number of time reductions becomes 0 from the initial value. It may indirectly suggest that the count is being counted down. Then, even when the remaining time reduction number is suggested by such an indirect display, the display of the candle image described above does not start at the time of setting the first low probability time reduction game state, and the remaining time reduction game state is set. It may be started from the time when the number of time reductions reaches a predetermined number.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, when the remaining number of time reductions in the first low-probability time reduction gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), the display of the remaining number of time reductions is started. However, the starting point of the display is not limited to this.
For example, when the remaining number of time reductions in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state becomes the remaining number of time reductions (71 times, 25 times) at the time when the above display is started in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned The display may be started.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be obtained, and the feeling of loss given to the player can be further reduced.

Further, even in the second low-probability time-saving game state, as in the first low-probability time-saving game state, when the remaining time-saving number reaches a predetermined number, the display of the remaining time-saving number is started. good.
In this case, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss given to the player even during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) and the low-probability game state (normally) set through the execution of the special game are set as the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) set by the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the time-saving activation number without executing the special game in the game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) is Although it has been provided, the types of time-saving gaming states are not limited to these.
For example, a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state (for example, a lost symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state, or a small symbol that is specified to set the time-saving game state). A time-saving game state, etc. that is set based on the determination of a special symbol (time-saving symbol, etc.) that is defined to set the time-saving game state other than the winning symbol, the lost symbol, and the small hit symbol may be provided. ..
Then, in the time-saving gaming state set based on the above determination, a display suggesting the remaining time-saving number of times is displayed in a mode different from the first low-probability time-saving gaming state and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state. May be good.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a state change designation command including the changed main management state (game state) is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and then. , When the special symbol is stopped and the stop display time has elapsed, a fluctuation pattern command or a customer waiting start command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and based on the reception of this command, the changed main management state (game state). A predetermined effect (execution of right-handed display or left-handed display, switching of background image) has been performed according to the mode according to the above, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, a command indicating the main management state (game state) being set is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and then a command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. A predetermined effect may be performed as described above based on the reception of the pattern command or the customer waiting start command.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the look-ahead is performed during the change of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times in the normal game state set after the end of the second low-probability time-saving game state (during the change effect). Although the control for prohibiting (restricting) the execution of the effect is performed, during the change of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times during the normal game state set after the end of the first low-probability time-saving game state (during the variable effect). , The control for prohibiting (restricting) the execution of the look-ahead effect is not performed, but the target for which such control is performed is not limited to this.
For example, during the change of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times during the predetermined time-saving game state (during the change effect), the control for prohibiting (restricting) the execution of the look-ahead effect is performed, but the predetermined time-saving game state is different. During the change of the special symbol of the number of times (during the change effect), the control for prohibiting (restricting) the execution of the look-ahead effect may not be performed.
Further, regardless of the normal gaming state, the control for prohibiting (restricting) the execution of the look-ahead effect may be performed during the change of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (during the change effect). However, the control for prohibiting (restricting) the execution of the look-ahead effect may not be performed.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be obtained.
Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10, the sub-control board 300 is set to prevent (restrict) the determination of the execution of the look-ahead effect so that the look-ahead effect is not executed during the predetermined period. However, it may be set so that the pre-reading effect is not executed during the predetermined period by performing a control that prohibits (restricts) the execution of the pre-determination process on the main control board 100 during the predetermined period.
Even in this case, the same action and effect as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be obtained.

Further, during the control of prohibiting (restricting) the execution of the look-ahead effect, the execution of all the look-ahead effects may be prohibited (restricted), or the execution of a part of the look-ahead effects may be prohibited. You may. Further, instead of not performing the look-ahead effect entirely, the execution mode of the look-ahead effect may be restricted by narrowing the area where the look-ahead effect is executed on the display unit 21a.

Further, the external configuration of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 may be as follows. Hereinafter, configurations different from the above-described embodiments and other application examples 1 to 9 will be mainly described, and similar configurations will be briefly described as necessary.
Specifically, a machine frame 1 which is a substantially rectangular frame, a main body frame 2 which can be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not shown in particular) to the machine frame 1, and a hinge to the main body frame 2. A mechanism (not particularly shown) is provided with a door frame 3a (see FIGS. 123 and 124) that can be freely opened and closed. Similar to the machine frame 1, the main body frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame body provided with a hollow portion, and the game board 11 for forming the game region 12 is housed in the hollow portion. Further, the door frame 3a is a frame body having an opening in the center of the front surface, and includes two transparent plates 4a and 4b that cover the opening of the door frame 3a and are arranged in the front-rear direction (FIG. 125). (See), the front door 3 is configured by the door frame 3a and the transparent plates 4a and 4b.
Further, the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 open and close the machine frame 1 in a state where the door frame 3a is closed and both are integrated (that is, the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 are integrated so that the machine frame 1 is integrated. A frame portion that can be opened and closed is configured, and this frame portion can open and close the machine frame 1).

The length from the upper edge to the lower edge of the main body frame 2 (height (vertical width) of the main body frame 2) is the length from the upper edge to the lower edge of the door frame 3a (height of the door frame 3a (height of the door frame 3a). The length from the left edge to the right edge of the main body frame 2 (horizontal width of the main body frame 2) is the length from the left edge to the right edge of the door frame 3a (horizontal width of the door frame 3a). ) Is slightly longer. Therefore, when the door frame 3a is closed, the lower edge of the main body frame 2 is located slightly lower than the lower edge of the door frame 3a, and the right edge of the main body frame 2 is located slightly lower than the right edge of the door frame 3a. It will be located slightly to the right (see FIGS. 123 and 124).
The vertical width and the horizontal width of the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 are the same, and when the door frame 3a is closed, the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2 match, and the right side of the door frame 3a. It may be configured so that the edge and the right edge of the main body frame 2 coincide with each other.
Further, the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 do not have to be configured as a frame body that can be opened and closed separately as described above. For example, an outer frame (not shown) that can accommodate the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 and is a frame body that can be opened and closed freely is provided, and the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 are accommodated. The outer frame in the closed state may be configured to open and close the machine frame 1.

Further, the front door 3 is provided with the same components (upper plate 6, saucer 7, operation handle 5, speaker, etc.) as in the above-described embodiment, and the upper part of the door frame 3a (front door 3). A decorative portion 610 that constitutes a design having a predetermined shape, such as a three-dimensional object that imitates a title logo or a motif of the pachinko machine P, is provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine P (see FIG. 125).

Next, the operation handle 5 will be described in detail.
As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the operation handle 5 is roughly divided into a base 510 fixed to the door frame 3a and a rotation-operably supported base 510, which is at a predetermined angle from an initial position located in a normal state. It includes an operation frame 550 that rotates within the range, and a frame cover 570 that covers the front surface of the operation frame 550.

Although not particularly shown, the base 510 is a substantially cylindrical member that opens toward the front when fixed to the door frame 3a, and a hole for mounting various components is provided in the base 510. And protrusions are formed, and a storage space for accommodating various components is provided.

The operation frame 550 is supported by the base 510 so as to be relatively rotatable, and includes an annular ring body 551 facing the opening of the base 510, a flat plate portion 552 provided in the ring body 551, and a flat plate portion 552. (See FIG. 121). Three finger hooking protrusions 551a, 551b, and 551c protruding outward are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551, and the player can easily hook a finger on the finger hooking protrusions 551a, 551b, and 551c. The operation frame 550 can be rotated.

The flat plate portion 552 is provided with a pair of elongated guide holes 553 that penetrate the operation frame 550 in the rotation axis direction and are curved along the circumferential direction of the operation frame 550. A guide shaft 518 protruding from the base 510 can be inserted into the guide hole 553, and the guide hole 553 is guided by the guide shaft 518 with the operation frame 550 supported by the base 510 to guide the operation frame 550. Is rotatable.
Further, on the front side (frame cover 570 side) of the flat plate portion 552, a protrusion 554 standing in the front direction at the center position of the operation frame 550 is provided, and in the vicinity of the protrusion 554, the protrusion 554 projects in the front direction. A spring holding piece 555 is provided.

The frame cover 570 is a substantially hemispherical member that opens toward the back surface when the front surface of the operation frame 550 is covered. The frame cover 570 is screwed to the guide shaft 518 of the base 510 inserted through the guide hole 553 on the back side thereof, whereby the frame cover 570 is fixed to the base 510. Become. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 570, a back hole (not particularly shown) into which the protrusion 554 of the operation frame 550 can be inserted so as to be relatively rotatable is provided, and the frame cover 570 is the operation frame 550. When the front surface is covered, the protrusion 554 of the operation frame 550 is inserted into the back surface hole.
By being screwed as described above, the operation frame 550 is rotatably sandwiched between the frame cover 570 and the base 510.

When the operation handle 5 is assembled, the guide shaft 518 of the base 510 is inserted into the guide hole 553 of the operation frame 550, and when the guide shaft 518 comes into contact with the circumferential end of the guide hole 553, the guide shaft 518 is inserted into the guide hole 553. Further rotation of the operation frame 550 is restricted. That is, the guide shaft 518 and the guide hole 553 guide the rotation of the operation frame 550 and function as a stopper that regulates the rotation angle within a certain range.

Further, as shown in FIG. 121, a coil spring 581 is wound around the outer periphery of the protrusion 554 of the operation frame 550.
One end of the coil spring 581 is wound around the outer peripheral surface of the guide shaft 518 of the base 510 inserted through the guide hole 553, and the other end is hooked to the spring holding piece 555 via the guide shaft 518. The operation frame 550 is constantly urged to rotate counterclockwise. That is, a counterclockwise rotational force is constantly applied to the operation frame 550 around the rotation axis of the operation frame 550. As a result, the operation frame 550 is normally positioned at the initial position where the guide shaft 518 abuts on the end portion of the guide hole 553 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction due to the elastic force of the coil spring 581. (See FIG. 121).

Further, when a clockwise rotational force is applied to the operation frame 550 in a state where the operation frame 550 is located at the initial position, the operation frame 550 rotates clockwise against the elastic force of the coil spring 581. Rotate. Then, when the clockwise rotational force with respect to the operation frame 550 is released, the operation frame 550 rotates counterclockwise due to the elastic force of the coil spring 581 and returns to the initial position.

Further, in the operation handle 5, the counterclockwise rotational force (urging force) constantly acting on the operation frame 550 is adjusted by adjusting the winding amount, the rotation amount, and the like of the coil spring 581. , The operating torque required to rotate the operating frame 550 in the clockwise direction is set as follows.

Specifically, the operating torque required for the rotation of the operating handle 5 from the initial position (hereinafter, also referred to as the first operating torque) and the operating torque required for the rotation of the operating handle 5 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position (hereinafter, also referred to as the first operating torque). The second operation torque is the second operation torque (hereinafter, also referred to as the second operation torque) and the operation torque required for the rotation of the operation handle 5 from the left-handed reference position to the maximum rotation position (hereinafter, also referred to as the third operation torque). It is set so that it is larger than one operation torque and about twice or less of the first operation torque, and the third operation torque is larger than the second operation torque and about twice or less of the second operation torque. ing.
For example, in the above-mentioned operation handle 5, the first operation torque is about 6.8 N ・ mm (N ・ mm is a unit indicating the operation torque, Newton millimeters; the same applies hereinafter), and the second operation torque is about 13. The third operation torque can be 6 N · mm and the third operation torque can be about 23.8 N · mm. The first operating torque of about 6.8 N · mm is the operation frame when the clockwise rotational force with respect to the operation frame 550 is released from the state where the operation handle 5 is slightly rotated clockwise from the initial position. 550 is the minimum value that can be returned to the initial position.

Here, the left-handed reference position means that, in the game area 12, the launched game ball is easier to enter the first game area 12a than the second game area 12b, and the game ball is the first start winning opening 15. This is the position of the operation handle 5 having a firing strength that allows the game ball to be driven into a predetermined area (so-called bump) that is likely to be entered into the ball. Further, the maximum rotation position is the position of the operation handle 5 where the clockwise rotation of the operation frame 550 is restricted (that is, the guide shaft 518 is the end portion of the operation frame 550 in the guide hole 553 in the rotation direction. (Position to contact with).

Further, in the above-mentioned operation handle 5, the operation angle (rotation angle, hereinafter also referred to as the first operation angle) of the operation handle 5 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position is the operation handle from the initial position to the maximum rotation position. It is set to be about half or less of the operation angle of 5 (hereinafter, also referred to as a second operation angle). The first operation angle is preferably in the range of approximately 45 to 60 degrees, and the second operation angle is preferably in the range of approximately 100 to 120 degrees. For example, in the above-mentioned operation handle 5, the first operation angle can be about 45 degrees and the second operation angle can be about 100 degrees.

As described above, by setting the second operating torque to be larger than the first operating torque and less than twice the first operating torque, the operating torque between the initial position and the left-handed reference position. Does not increase sharply, and the operational burden on the player can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the impression that the operation load suddenly increases from the initial position to the left-handed reference position, and it is possible to make the player less likely to feel tired from operating the operation handle 5.
Further, by setting the third operation torque to be larger than the second operation torque and about twice or less of the second operation torque, the operation torque between the left-handed reference position and the maximum rotation position is abrupt. There is a large difference in the operation load when the operation handle 5 is rotated from the initial position to the left-handed reference position and the operation load when the operation handle 5 is rotated from the left-handed reference position to the maximum rotation position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player. Further, from the initial position to the maximum rotation position, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the impression that the operation load suddenly increases as the distance approaches the maximum rotation position, and the player is tired of operating the operation handle 5. Can be made difficult to feel.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the above-mentioned operation handle 5 will be described in comparison with a comparative example.
As described above, the operation handle 5 in the embodiment has a first operation torque of about 6.8 N ・ mm, a second operation torque of about 13.6 N ・ mm, and a third operation torque of about 23.8 N ・ mm. Was set. That is, the operation handle 5 in the embodiment satisfies the condition that the second operation torque is larger than the first operation torque and is about twice or less of the first operation torque (hereinafter, also referred to as the first condition). The condition that the third operation torque is larger than the second operation torque and is about twice or less of the second operation torque (hereinafter, also referred to as the second condition) is satisfied.
On the other hand, the operation handle 5 in the comparative example is set so that the first operation torque is about 31 N ・ mm, the second operation torque is about 69 N ・ mm, and the third operation torque is about 152 N ・ mm. That is, the operation handle 5 in the comparative example does not satisfy either the first condition and the second condition described above.

Then, using the operation handle 5 in the above-described embodiment and the operation handle 5 in the comparative example, fatigue when the operation handle 5 is rotated a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) from the initial position to the left-handed reference position. Feeling (hereinafter, also referred to as first half fatigue feeling) and fatigue feeling when the operation handle 5 is rotated a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) from the left-handed reference position to the maximum rotation position (hereinafter, also referred to as second half fatigue feeling). ) Was evaluated by a sensory test in which the subject actually operated the operation handle 5 by rotation.
As shown in FIG. 122, in the operation handle 5 in the embodiment, both the first half fatigue feeling and the second half fatigue feeling were small, but in the operation handle 5 in the comparative example, both the first half fatigue feeling and the second half fatigue feeling were large. The operation handle 5 in the examples is superior to the operation handle 5 in the comparative example in terms of any feeling of fatigue.
Therefore, as is clear from the above results, the second operating torque is larger than the first operating torque and is about twice or less the first operating torque, and the third operating torque is larger than the second operating torque. It can be said that a range that is large and about twice or less of the second operation torque is appropriate from the viewpoint of the above-mentioned fatigue feeling.

Further, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 is provided on the door frame 3a so as to have the following positional relationship with the door frame 3a (main body frame 2). In the following, among the three finger hook protrusions arranged side by side along the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551 of the operation frame 550, the finger hook protrusion 551a located on the left side when the operation handle 5 is in the initial position is referred to. The first finger hook protrusion 551a, the finger hook protrusion 551b located in the center is referred to as the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the finger hook protrusion 551c located on the right side is also referred to as the third finger hook protrusion 551c.

Specifically, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 has a distance DA1 from the center position C of the frame cover 570 (the position most protruding toward the front side when attached to the door frame 3a) to the lower edge of the door frame 3a. The distance DA2 from the center position C to the lower edge of the main body frame 2 is about 45.0 mm, and the distance DA3 from the center position C to the right edge of the door frame 3a is about 49.1 mm. , The distance DA4 from the center position C to the right edge of the main body frame 2 is about 51.1 mm (see FIG. 123).

Here, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 has a distance DB of about 34.6 mm from the center position C to the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551, and the protruding end (first finger hooking protrusion) of the first finger hooking protrusion 551a from the center position C. The distance DC1 from the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551 to the most protruding position in 551a is about 53.4 mm, and the protruding end of the second finger hooking protrusion 551b from the center position C (ring in the second finger hooking protrusion 551b). The distance DC2 from the outer peripheral surface of the body 551 to the most protruding position is about 45.6 mm, and the protruding end of the third finger hooking protrusion 551c from the center position C (ring body 551 in the third finger hooking protrusion 551c). The distance DC3 from the outer peripheral surface of the above to the most protruding position) is configured to be about 39.3 mm (see FIG. 123).
Further, when the above-mentioned operation handle 5 is in the initial position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a is located slightly above the left side of the center position C, and the second finger hook protrusion 551b is located substantially directly above the center position C. The third finger hook protrusion 551c is located slightly above the center position C to the right (see FIG. 123).

That is, when the operation handle 5 is in the initial position, the first finger hooking protrusion 551a, the second finger hooking protrusion 551b, and the third finger hooking protrusion 551c are all located above the center position C, so that the first None of the finger hook protrusions 551a, the second finger hook protrusions 551b, and the third finger hook protrusions 551c project below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 123). ).
Further, as described above, the distance DC3 from the center position C to the protruding end of the third finger hook protrusion 551c is about 39.3 mm, and the distance DA3 from the center position C to the right edge of the door frame 3a is about 49.1 mm. Moreover, since the distance DA4 from the center position C to the right edge of the main body frame 2 is about 51.1 mm, when the operation handle 5 is in the initial position, the first finger hooking protrusion 551a, the second finger hooking protrusion 551b and Neither of the third finger hook protrusions 551c projects to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 123).

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned operation handle 5 is rotated by the second operation angle (about 100 degrees) from the initial position and is in the maximum rotation position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a is located slightly to the right above the center position C and is the second finger. The hanging protrusion 551b is located slightly below the center position C to the right, and the third finger hanging protrusion 551c is located slightly below the center position C (see FIG. 124). Further, the protruding end of the third finger hook protrusion 551c is located above the lower edge of the door frame 3a (main body frame 2) and on the left side of the right edge of the door frame 3a (main body frame 2). (See FIG. 124).

That is, when the operation handle 5 is in the maximum rotation position, the first finger hooking protrusion 551a, the second finger hooking protrusion 551b, and the third finger hooking protrusion 551c are all above the lower end of the door frame 3a (main body frame 2). The first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the third finger hook protrusion 551c do not protrude below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2 because they are located at. (See FIG. 124).
Further, as described above, the distance DC2 from the center position C to the protruding end of the second finger hook protrusion 551b is about 45.6 mm, and the distance DA3 from the center position C to the right edge of the door frame 3a is about 49.1 mm. Moreover, since the distance DA4 from the center position C to the right edge of the main body frame 2 is about 51.1 mm, when the operation handle 5 is in the initial position, the first finger hooking protrusion 551a, the second finger hooking protrusion 551b and Neither of the third finger hook protrusions 551c projects to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

Further, as described above, regardless of whether the operation handle 5 is in the initial position or the maximum rotation position, the first finger hooking protrusion 551a, the second finger hooking protrusion 551b, and the third finger hooking protrusion 551c Does not protrude below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and does not protrude to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2. ing.
As a result, although not particularly shown, the first finger hooking protrusion 551a, the second finger hooking protrusion 551b, and the operation handle 5 regardless of the rotation position from the initial position to the maximum rotation position. Neither of the third finger hook protrusions 551c protrudes below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and is to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2. It is designed so that it does not protrude into the door.

Further, as described above, the distance DC1 from the center position C to the protruding end of the first finger hooking protrusion 551a is about 53.4 mm, and the distance DC2 from the center position C to the protruding end of the second finger hooking protrusion 551b is. The distance DC3 from the center position C to the protruding end of the third finger hooking protrusion 551c is about 45.6 mm, which is about 39.3 mm, and is the farthest from the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551 (the outer circumference of the ring body 551). The most protruding from the surface) is the protruding end of the first finger hook protrusion 551a.
Further, as described above, when the operation handle 5 is in the initial position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a is located slightly above the left side of the center position C, and when the operation handle 5 is in the maximum rotation position, the first finger is located. Since the hanging protrusion 551a is located slightly to the right of the center position C, the height position of the first finger hanging protrusion 551a at the above-mentioned maximum rotation position is the height of the first finger hanging protrusion 551a at the above-mentioned initial position. It is higher than the position.
That is, the protruding end of the first finger hook protrusion 551 when the operating handle 5 is in the maximum rotation position is the lowest portion of the rotation trajectory through which the protruding end passes when the operating handle 5 rotates from the initial position to the maximum rotation position. It is designed not to be located at a point.

As described above, in the above-mentioned operation handle 5, when the operation handle 5 is in the initial position, all of the first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the third finger hook protrusion 551c are doors. The operation handle 5 does not protrude downward from the lower edge of the frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and does not protrude to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2, and the operation handle 5 rotates at maximum. When in the position, all of the first finger hooking protrusion 551a, the second finger hooking protrusion 551b, and the third finger hooking protrusion 551c project below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2. It is provided so as not to protrude to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2.
As a result, for example, when the pachinko machine P is installed on an island, even if the pachinko machine P is temporarily placed on the floor of a hall or leaned against a wall, the pachinko machine P may be temporarily placed on the floor or the like. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the finger hook protrusions 551a, 551b, and 551c come into contact with the floor or the wall and the operation handle 5 is damaged.

Further, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 has the first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the operation handle 5 regardless of the rotation position from the initial position to the maximum rotation position. Neither of the third finger hook protrusions 551c protrudes below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and is to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2. It is designed so that it does not protrude into the door.
As a result, as described above, when the pachinko machine P is placed on the floor of the hall or leaned against the wall, the finger hook protrusions 551a, 551b, 551c are arranged regardless of the rotation position of the operation handle 5. It is possible to prevent the operation handle 5 from being damaged due to contact with the floor or the wall.

Further, the protruding end of the first finger hooking protrusion 551a having the protruding end farthest from the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551 is initially set to the operating handle 5 when the operating handle 5 is in the maximum rotation position. When rotating from the position to the maximum rotation position, it is not located at the lowest point of the rotation trajectory through which the protrusion end passes.
As a result, when the operation handle 5 is in the maximum rotation position, the finger hook protrusions 551a, 551b, and 551c are surely prevented from protruding below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2. Can be done.

The number of finger hook protrusions provided on the above-mentioned operation handle 5 is not limited to three, and if the operation handle 5 and the door frame 3a (main body frame 2) have the above-mentioned relationship. The number may be two or less, or four or more.

Further, the distance from the center position C of the operation handle 5 to each finger hook protrusion, the position of each finger hook protrusion at the initial position and the maximum rotation position, the distance from the center position C to the door frame 3a (main body frame 2), etc. The value is not limited to the above value, and can be any value as long as the operation handle 5 and the door frame 3a (main body frame 2) have the above-mentioned relationship.

Further, in the above-mentioned operation handle 5, the finger hook protrusions 551a, 551b, and 551c do not protrude downward from both the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the door frame 3a It was designed so as not to protrude to the right of both the right edges of the main body frame 2, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, at least the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2 may not protrude below the lower edge located on the lower side. Similarly, at least the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2 may not protrude to the right of the right edge located on the right side.
Even in such a case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 may be provided not in the door frame 3a but in any part of the pachinko machine P such as the machine frame 1 and the main body frame 2. When the operation handle 5 is provided on the machine frame 1 or the main body frame 2, the operation handle 5 and the machine frame 1 or the main body frame 2 can be set so as to have the above-mentioned relationship.

Further, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 does not have a protruding end in which the first finger hooking protrusion 551a is farthest from the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551, but another finger hooking protrusion (second finger hooking protrusion 551b or a second finger hooking protrusion 551b). The three-finger hook protrusion 551c) may be provided with a protruding end farthest from the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551. Further, also in this case, when the operation handle 5 is in the maximum rotation position, the protrusion end of the rotation trajectory through which the protrusion end passes when the operation handle 5 rotates from the initial position to the maximum rotation position. It can be set so that it is not located at the lowest point.

Next, the decorative portion 610 will be described in detail.
The decorative portion 610 is an eave-shaped member having a substantially trapezoidal cross-sectional view protruding from the upper part of the door frame to the front side, and is roughly classified into a front plate 611 constituting the front surface of the decorative portion 610 and an upper surface of the decorative portion 610. It is composed of a top plate 612 and a bottom plate 613 constituting the lower surface of the decorative portion 610 (see FIG. 125).
Further, the bottom plate 613 has a curved surface 613a which is located on the backmost side and is curved so as to be convex downward in the vicinity of the end portion on the front side, and an erection which stands downward from the end portion on the front side of the curved surface 613a. It is composed of a surface 613b, an inclined surface 613c that is inclined so as to gradually decrease from the lower end of the vertical surface 613b toward the front, and a horizontal plane 613d that is connected to the front plate 611 at the front end of the inclined surface 613c. (See FIG. 125). The bottom plate 613 is formed so that the height position is gradually lowered toward the front in the order of the curved surface 613a, the upright surface 613b, the inclined surface 613c, and the horizontal plane 613d (see FIG. 125).

The game board 11 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular front view (see FIGS. 126 and 129), and as described above, a pair of rails 13a and 13b are provided on the board surface of the game board 11. The area partitioned by the rails 13a and 13b into a substantially circular shape becomes the game area 12.
In the following, of the rails 13a and 13b, the rail 13a located on the outer side (the rail closer to the outer periphery of the game board 11) is also referred to as the outer rail 13a, and the rail 13b located on the inner side (the outer periphery of the game board 11). The rail farther from the rail) is also referred to as the inner rail 13b.

The outer rail 13a is a long metal thin plate-like member having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is attached (supported) along the base surface 621 of the rail base 620 installed on the board surface of the game board 11. (See FIG. 126).
Here, the rail base 620 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially C-shape in front view, and when it is installed on the board surface of the game board 11, it opens toward the lower right and the game area 12 (game board 11). It is cut out so as to have an arc shape centered on a substantially central portion of the above (that is, an arc shape that is convex toward the left). Then, the notch surface formed by this notch becomes the base surface 621 (see FIG. 126).
Further, when the rail base 620 is installed on the board surface of the game board 11, the above-mentioned base surface 621 is located at the lower left of the game area 12 (lower left of the first game area 12a) and is separated from the out port 19 to the left. From the start position P1, through the left end P2 and the upper end P3 of the game board 11, it reaches the end position P4 located in the upper right part of the game area 12 (upper right part of the second game area 12b) (FIG. 126, see FIG. 129).

Further, although not particularly shown, a position substantially in the center in the lateral direction near the terminal position P4 of the base surface 621 (when the rail base 620 is installed on the board surface of the game board 11, the game board 11 side on the base surface 621). Approximately half the length from the arc-shaped long side L1 located in (hereinafter, also referred to as the rear long side L1) to the arc-shaped long side L2 (hereinafter, also referred to as the front long side L2) located on the front side (hereinafter, also referred to as the front long side L2). , Also referred to as a central position)) is provided with a horizontally long rectangular slit-shaped end guide fitting hole 622.

Further, a plurality of guide protrusions 623 protruding from the base surface 621 are provided along the rear long side L1 between the start position position P1 and the end position P4 on the base surface 621 (see FIG. 126).
Further, although not particularly shown, the number of guide protrusions 623 provided on the above-mentioned base surface 621 is in the range H1 from the start position position P1 to the left end portion P2 (hereinafter, also referred to as the first range H1). , The range H2 from the left end portion P2 to the upper end portion P3 (hereinafter, also referred to as the second range H2) or more, and the range H3 from the upper end portion P3 to the end position P4 (hereinafter, also referred to as the third range H3). ) That's all. Specifically, the first range H1 is provided with, for example, three guide protrusions 623, the second range H2 is provided with, for example, two guide protrusions 623, and the third range H3 is provided with, for example, three guide protrusions. One guide protrusion 623 can be provided.
Further, although not particularly shown, the guide protrusions 623 are not provided on the left end portion P2 and the upper end portion P3 of the above-mentioned base surface 621, and the arrangement intervals of the guide protrusions 623 provided on the base surface 621 are different. It is uneven.

The outer rail 13a attached to the above-mentioned base surface 621 has substantially the same size as the base surface 621. Specifically, the length of the outer rail 13a in the longitudinal direction is almost the same as the length from the start position P1 to the end position P4 of the base surface 621, and the length of the outer rail 13a in the lateral direction (outside). The width of the rail 13a) is substantially the same as the length from the front long side L2 of the base surface 621 to the rear long side L1 (the width of the base surface 621 in the depth direction) (see FIG. 126). Therefore, when the outer rail 13a is attached to the base surface 621, the outer rail 13a also reaches the end position P4 from the start end position P1 via the left end portion P2 and the upper end portion P3 (see FIGS. 126 and 129). ..

Further, when the outer rail 13a is attached to the outer rail 13a along the base surface 621, the end that can be fitted to the end guide fitting hole 622 is at a position corresponding to the above-mentioned end guide fitting hole 622. A guide protrusion 632 is provided, and a guide fitting hole 633 into which the guide protrusion 623 can be fitted is provided at a position corresponding to the guide protrusion 623 described above (see FIGS. 126 and 127).
That is, the number of guide fitting holes 633 provided in the outer rail 13a is equal to or greater than the second range H2 in the first range H1 and is the third. The range is H3 or higher.
Further, similarly to the above-mentioned guide protrusion 623, the guide fitting hole 633 is not provided in the left end portion P2 and the upper end portion P3 of the outer rail 13a, and each guide fitting hole 633 provided in the outer rail 13a. The arrangement intervals of are uneven.

Then, the outer rail 13a is attached to the base surface 621 by fitting the end guide protrusion 632 into the end guide fitting hole 622 and fitting each guide protrusion 623 into the corresponding guide fitting hole 633 (see FIG. 128). be able to. That is, the terminal guide fitting hole 622 and the guide protrusion 623 provided on the base surface 621, and the terminal guide protrusion 632 and the guide fitting hole 633 provided on the outer rail 13a attach the outer rail 13a to the base surface 621. The purpose is to guide the mounting position, and these configurations allow the outer rail 13a to be easily mounted at an appropriate position on the base surface 621.

The inner rail 13b is a long synthetic resin thin plate-like member having almost the same width as the outer rail 13a, and the outer rail 13a and the game board 11 face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is erected on the board (see FIG. 129), and is the upper left portion of the game area 12 (upper left portion of the first game area 12a) from the position slightly to the left of the out port 19 (right side of the start position position P1) and the upper end portion. It is arranged in an arc shape that is convex to the left toward the position on the lower left side of P3 (see FIG. 129).

Then, the front surface of the space portion sandwiched between the outer rail 13a and the inner rail 13b faces the back surface of the transparent plate 4b, so that a left guide passage 640 through which the game ball launched by the launcher can pass is formed. (See Fig. 129).
The left guidance passage 640 includes a passage entrance 641 located at the lower part of the game area 12 and a passage exit 642 located at the upper part of the game area 12, and the game ball launched by the launcher is a passage entrance. It is possible to reach the game area 12 via 641, the inside of the left guide passage 640, and the passage exit 642.
Further, as described above, since the outer rail 13a and the inner rail 13b forming the left guide passage 640 have an arc shape that is convex toward the left, the game ball is caused by the centrifugal force generated by itself. It is easy to move in the left guide passage 640 in a state of being in contact with the surface 643 (the surface facing the inner rail 13b) of the outer rail 13a (see FIG. 128). In particular, the game ball launched with a firing intensity that can reach at least the game area 12 moves in the left guide passage 640 while maintaining a state of being in contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a.

Here, when the game ball passes through the left guidance passage 640, the game ball comes into contact with the outer rail 13a in the range from the contact point of the game ball to the end side R1 facing the rear long side L1 of the base surface 621. There is no. All of the above-mentioned guide fitting holes 633 are provided along the rear long side L1 within this range (see FIG. 128). That is, the above-mentioned guide fitting hole 633 is provided in a range where the game balls on the outer rail 13a do not come into contact with each other.

Further, although not particularly shown, the outer rail 13a is tilted so that the game ball passing through the left guide passage 640 is difficult to move to the front side (transparent plate 4a, 4b side) (the game ball is the game board 11). It is adjusted to an inclination that makes it easier to move to the side). That is, the outer rail 13a is configured so that the game ball can easily move in the left guidance passage 640 in a state where the game ball is in contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a and the board surface of the game board 11.

Further, on the upper part of the game area 12, a decorative member 650 having a top surface 651 facing the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a and a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball is erected from the board surface of the game board 11. (See Fig. 129). Then, the front surface of the space portion sandwiched between the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a and the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650 faces the back surface of the transparent plate 4b, whereby an upper guide passage 660 through which the game ball can pass is formed. (See Fig. 129).
The upper guide passage 660 includes a passage entrance 661 located at the upper part of the first gaming area 12a and a passage exit 662 located at the upper part of the second gaming area 12b, and is fired at a predetermined firing intensity or higher. The game ball can reach the second game area 12b via the left guide passage 640, the passage entrance 661, the upper guide passage 660, and the passage exit 662. That is, the upper guide passage 660 guides the game ball launched with a firing intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined value to the second game area 12b.
Further, the game ball is easy to move in the upper guide passage 660 in a state of being in contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. In particular, the game ball launched with a firing intensity that can reach at least the second gaming region 12b moves in the upper guide passage 660 while maintaining the state of being in contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a.

Here, the positional relationship between the decorative portion 610 and the upper guide passage 660 (the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a and the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650) is set as follows.

Specifically, the virtual line that passes through the uppermost end of the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a constituting the upper guide passage 660 and is orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 11 is set as the first reference line SL1 and the first reference line SL1. The position where any of the virtual vertical lines IL orthogonal to and extending in the vertical direction intersects the rearmost end on the bottom plate 613 (lower surface) of the decorative portion 610 is set as the first reference position SP1, and any of the above-mentioned virtual vertical lines IL is The position intersecting the lowermost end of the bottom plate 613 (lower surface) of the decorative portion 610 is defined as the second reference position SP2.
The first reference position SP1 is located below the first reference line SL1, and the distance D1 from the first reference line SL1 to the first reference position SP1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, and the second reference position SP2. Is located below the first reference line SL1 and is set so that the distance D2 from the first reference line SL1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 125).
Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, for example, the distance D1 from the first reference line SL1 to the first reference position SP1 can be 4 mm, and the distance from the first reference line SL1 to the second reference position SP2. D2 can be 40 mm. It should be noted that these distances D1 and D2 are not limited to the above-mentioned values, and can be arbitrarily set as long as the above-mentioned relationship is satisfied.

Further, the virtual line on the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650 that passes directly below the uppermost end of the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a and is orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 11 is set as the second reference line SL2. The position where any of the virtual vertical lines orthogonal to the second reference line SL2 and extending in the vertical direction intersects the rearmost end of the bottom plate 613 (lower surface) of the decorative portion 610 is set as the third reference position SP3, and the above-mentioned virtual vertical line is set. The position where any of the above intersects the lowermost end of the bottom plate 613 (lower surface) of the decorative portion 610 is set as the fourth reference position SP4. Here, the above-mentioned first reference position SP1 and the third reference position SP3 are at the same position, and the above-mentioned second reference position SP2 and the above-mentioned fourth reference position SP4 are at the same position.
The third reference position SP3 (first reference position SP1) is located above the second reference line SL2, and the distance D3 from the second reference line SL2 to the third reference position SP3 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball. The fourth reference position SP4 (second reference position SP2) is located below the second reference line SL2, and the distance D4 from the second reference line SL2 to the fourth reference position SP4 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is set to be (see FIG. 125).
Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, for example, the distance D3 from the second reference line SL2 to the third reference position SP3 (first reference position SP1) can be 14 mm, and the distance D3 from the second reference line SL2 to the second reference line SL2 can be set. 4 The distance D4 to the reference position SP4 (second reference position SP2) can be 22 mm. The distances D3 and D4 are not limited to the above values, and can be arbitrarily set as long as the above relationships are satisfied.

As described above, the second reference position SP2 is below the first reference line SL1, and the distance D2 from the first reference line SL1 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, so that the decorative portion provided on the front door 3 is provided. The size of the 610 can be increased. Further, the first reference position SP1 is below the first reference line SL1, and the distance D1 from the first reference line SL1 is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, so that the decorative portion 610 is enlarged as described above. However, when the game ball moves in the upper guide passage 660 along the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a, for example, when the game ball is launched with the maximum firing intensity, the visibility of the moving game ball is ensured. can do.
Further, the fourth reference position SP4 (second reference position SP2) is lower than the second reference line SL2, and the distance D4 from the second reference line SL2 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, so that the front door 3 The decorative portion 610 provided in the above can be increased in size. Further, the third reference position SP3 (first reference position SP1) is above the second reference line SL2, and the distance D3 from the second reference line SL2 is set to be equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball, as described above. When the game ball moves in the upper guide passage 660 along the top surface 651 of the decoration member 650, for example, when the game ball is launched with a strength weaker than the maximum firing strength while increasing the size of the decoration portion 610. In addition, the visibility of the moving game ball can be ensured.
In particular, as described above, the time-saving game state is determined by reaching the time-saving activation number of the time-saving activation number counter and determining the special symbol (missing symbol, small hit symbol, time-saving symbol, etc.) for setting the time-saving gaming state. Since the pachinko machine is set to shift to, the pachinko machine, which has more opportunities to shift to the shorter game state than before, has more chances to launch the game ball toward the second gaming area 12b. As a result, there are many opportunities for the game ball to pass through the upper guide passage 660, so that the configuration as described above is extremely effective.

The positional relationship with the first reference line SL1 described above and the positional relationship with the second reference line SL described above may be set to satisfy both, or only one of them may be set to be satisfied. You may.
Further, of the inner surface of the upper guide passage 660, the inner surface located on the lower side (inside) was composed of the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inner surface stands from the game board 11. It may be configured by the top surface of the partition member to be installed.

Further, as described above, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is equal to or greater than the second range H2 in the first range H1. By setting the third range to H3 or higher, the base surface 621 of the rail base 620 is located on the starting position P1 side of the outer rail 13a where the impact received from the launched game ball is large (that is, close to the launching device). Because the outer rail 13a deviates from the mounting position, vibrates, etc., the game ball cannot be guided to the position according to the firing strength, and the ball cannot be ejected according to the design value. Can be prevented.
In particular, in a pachinko machine as described above, which has more opportunities to shift to a shorter game state than in the past, there are many opportunities to launch a game ball toward the second game area 12b. As a result, the period for launching the game ball with the firing strength that the game ball can reach the second game area 12b (for example, the strongest firing strength, etc.) becomes longer, and the influence of the impact received from the game ball on the above-mentioned starting position P1 side. Is also large, so it is extremely effective to configure it as described above.
Further, among the outer rails 13a, the number of guide fitting holes 633 is relatively small on the terminal position P4 side where the impact received from the launched game ball is small (that is, far from the launching device), so that the rail base. The attachment of the 620 to the base surface 621 and the processing of the outer rail 13a become easy.
Further, at the left end portion P2 of the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), the impact force to the left based on the launched game ball is the largest, and at the upper end portion P3 of the outer rail 13a (base surface 621). Since the upward impact force based on the launched game ball is the largest, the guide fitting hole 633 (guide protrusion 623) is not provided at these positions. Therefore, the above-mentioned outer rail 13a It is possible to prevent rail deviation and vibration more efficiently.
Further, in the pachinko machine as described above, in which the pachinko machine is provided with more opportunities to shift to the shorter game state than in the past, the pachinko machine inevitably operates for a long time, and the outer rail 13a is defective or deteriorated. It will be easier and the chances of repairing or replacing the outer rail 13a will increase, but with the above configuration, the work such as repairing or replacing the outer rail 13a depends on the proficiency of the operator. Therefore, it becomes easy to attach an appropriate outer rail 13a so as not to affect the guidance of the game ball.

The above-mentioned guide fitting hole 633 (guide protrusion 623) is provided over a range from the start position P1 to the end position P4 of the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), and the game launched on the outer rail 13a. Since the range in which the ball is easily impacted and the load is easily applied differs depending on the game specifications, the guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) are evenly arranged from the start position P1 to the end position P4. Is not desirable, and it is desirable to arrange it for each game specification. Therefore, the number and arrangement of the guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) may be various as described below.
For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is not limited to the above contents.
For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is larger in the first range H1 than in the second range H2, and is in the second range. H2 may be larger than the third range H3.
Further, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is equal to or greater than the second range H2 in the first range H1 and is equal to or greater than the second range H2. In, the third range H3 or more may be set.
Further, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is equal to or greater than the third range H3 in the first range H1 and is equal to or greater than the third range H2. In, the third range H3 or more may be set.
Further, the guide fitting hole 633 (guide protrusion 623) may not be provided in the third range H3. That is, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the third range H3 may be 0.

Further, in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), the range from the start end position P1 to the left end portion P2 is defined as the fourth range H4, and the range from the left end position P2 to the end position P4 is defined as the fifth range H5. The number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in 13a (base surface 621) may be larger in the fourth range H4 than in the fifth range H5. For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the fourth range H4 may be three, and the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the fifth range H4 may be two.

Further, in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), the range from the start position P1 to the upper end P3 is defined as the sixth range H6, and the range from the upper end P3 to the end position P4 is defined as the seventh range H7. The number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in 13a (base surface 621) may be larger in the sixth range H6 than in the seventh range H7. For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the sixth range H6 may be five, and the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the fifth range H4 may be zero.

Further, on the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), the intermediate position from the start position P1 to the end position P4 is set as the intermediate position PC, and the range from the start position P1 to the intermediate position PC is set as the eighth range H8. The range from the intermediate position PC to the terminal position P4 is defined as the ninth range H9, and the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided on the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is the eighth range H8. May be greater than the ninth range H9. For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the eighth range H8 may be four, and the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the ninth range H9 may be one.
Even in the case of the above, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the guide fitting hole 633 is provided in the outer rail 13a, and the guide protrusion 623 is provided in the base surface 621 of the rail base 620, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide protrusion 623 is provided in the outer rail 13a. The guide fitting hole 633 may be provided on the base surface 621 of the rail base 620. Similarly, the outer rail 13a may be provided with the termination guide fitting hole 622, and the base surface 621 of the rail base 620 may be provided with the termination guide protrusion 632.

Further, the configuration for guiding and mounting the outer rail 13a to the base surface 621 of the rail base 620 is not limited to the guide projection 623 and the guide fitting hole 633, and the mounting pin and the mounting pin can be inserted. It may be an insertion hole, or it may be a guide protrusion and a notch that can lock the guide protrusion.

Further, the rail base 620 was a separate body from the game board 11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rail base 620 may be integrally molded with the game board 11 so as to be erected from the board surface of the game board 11. good.

In addition, various settings and controls of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and other application examples may be configured in combination with each other within a range that does not cause a contradiction.
Further, the outer rail 13a in the modified example of the other application example 10 corresponds to the rail of the present invention. Further, the guide fitting hole 633 in the modified example of the other application example 10 corresponds to the guide portion of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the pass / fail determination process in the other application example 10 corresponds to the determination means of the present invention. Further, the special symbol in the other application example 10 corresponds to the symbol of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step 6009 in the other application example 10 corresponds to the symbol display means of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the processes such as step 6254 and step 6400 in the other application example 10 corresponds to the setting means of the present invention. Further, the normal gaming state in the other application example 10 corresponds to the non-time saving gaming state of the present invention. Further, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state in the other application example 10 correspond to the time-saving gaming state of the present invention. In addition, reaching the number of time-saving activations in the other application example 10 corresponds to the first condition of the present invention. Further, the execution of the special game in the other application example 10 corresponds to the second condition of the present invention. Further, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 corresponds to the gaming machine of the present invention. Further, the starting end position P1 in the modified example of the other application example 10 corresponds to the starting end of the present invention. Further, the terminal position P4 in the modified example of the other application example 10 corresponds to the terminal of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
300 Sub control board 301 Sub CPU
302 sub ROM
303 sub RAM

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area where the game ball flows down,
A rail attached to the game board and capable of guiding the game ball to the game area,
A guide unit provided on the rail and capable of guiding the mounting position of the rail to the game board, and
A decidable means that can determine whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player,
A symbol display means capable of executing variable display of the symbol associated with the result of the determination, and
Either a non-time-saving game state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter the approach area provided in the game area, or a plurality of game states including a time-saving game state in which the game ball is relatively easy to enter the approach area. With a setting means that can be set,
The setting means is a gaming machine capable of setting the time-saving gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition that the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times or the second condition different from the first condition.
The number of guides is
In the first range from the start end of the rail to the left end located at the leftmost end of the rail from the start end to the end, the rail is located at the uppermost end of the rail from the start end to the end. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is larger than the second range up to the upper end portion and is larger than the third range from the upper end portion to the end portion in the second range.

Images